FRIEND AT COURT 2010 - USTA.com

FRIEND AT COURT 2010

Q. What is a tennis official?
A FRIEND AT COURT
A. A person who helps ensure that any given tennis match is
conducted under the fairest possible conditions. So, ideally,
the official is “a friend at court,” helpful to the players and the
spectators.
Q. Why should I be a tennis official?
A. Because you: 1) love the game; 2) therefore have a keen interest
in seeing that it is played under the best conditions; 3)
enjoy having first-hand contact with it whereby you can make
a useful contribution to the game, beyond what you may do
or have done as a player.
NOTE: If you are now, or have any idea you would like
to be, a tennis official, and your first three reasons do
not include at least two of the above—forget it!
—Jack Stahr

FRIEND AT COURT
THE USTA HANDBOOK
of TENNIS RULES and
REGULATIONS
2010 EDITION

We welcome your comments and suggestions and especially solicit your
help in identifying errors in the index. Please feel free to write us c/o USTA
Officials Department, 70 West Red Oak Lane, White Plains, NY
10604-3602.
Senior Editors: Steve Gerdes and Rich Kaufman.
Editors: Bill Barber, Jim Cummings, Bobbie Farley, Staciellen Stevenson
Mischel, Lois Huggins, Mac MacDougal, Andrea Norman, Eric Perkins,
and Roy Van Brunt.
United States Tennis Association
70 West Red Oak Lane
White Plains, NY 10604-3602
USTA.com
© 2010 by the United States Tennis Association Inc. All rights reserved. No part of
this book may be reproduced in any form or by any means without the written
permission of the United States Tennis Association.
Printed in the United States of America
Produced for the USTA by H.O. ZIMMAN, Inc.
Front cover, clockwise from top left: Robert Durell; Getty Images; Getty Images; Delese Dellios; Robert Durell; Fred
Leonard; Robert Durell.

Foreword
The most significant changes in this year’s Friend at Court involve the
reorganization of the USTA Regulations. Regulations that affect only Junior
national tournaments and rankings have been combined into Regulation IX;
regulations that affect only Adult/Senior and Family national tournaments and
rankings have been combined into Regulation X; and regulations that affect only
Wheelchair national tournaments and rankings have been combined into
Regulation XIII.
Where substantive changes or changes that the editors want to call to your
attention have been made since the last publication of Friend at Court, there is a
vertical line in the margin.
For amendments that become effective after press time, please refer to the USTA
website, USTA.com.
Friend at Court (FAC) is not a training manual. The gray highlighted areas are a
blend of commonly accepted answers to questions about the rules, officiating
techniques, and officiating procedures derived from several sources, including
the ATP, ITA, ITF, and WTA Tour. If you wish to learn more about accepted
procedures, you should attend a USTA-approved training school.
iii

iv
Summary of Important Changes for 2010 Edition of
Friend at Court
ITF Rules of Tennis
[p. 19] USTA Comment 26.3 was revised to clarify when a ringing or vibrating cell
phone is deemed a deliberate hindrance versus an unintentional hindrance.
[p. 22] New USTA Comment 27.10 was added to explain what to do when players
mistakenly use regular scoring when they should be playing no-ad scoring.
[pp. 22-23] New USTA Comment 27.11 was added to explain what to do when
players mistakenly play a conventional tiebreak set when they should be playing a
short set.
[p. 23] New USTA Comment 27.12 was added to explain how to correct the error
when players mistakenly follow the conventional tiebreak procedure when they
should be following the Coman Tiebreak Procedure.
[pp. 27-28] Table 1 and a new Table include revised metric ITF tennis ball
specifications.
[p.34] New Section 6 under Appendix V - Electronic Review Procedures
designates the maximum number of unsuccessful appeals allowed during a match.
[p. 35] Appendix VI - Official 10 and Under Competition – was revised to include
updated recommendations for ball types to use on different court sizes for players
in the 10s divisions.
The Code
[p. 48] Code Section 24 further clarifies when a player may call a foot fault on the
server.

USTA Regulations
There was a substantial reorganization of various USTA Regulations as well as the
adoption of several new USTA Regulations increasing the number of USTA
Regulations from 16 to 19. Regulations I.-V. were not changed. The chart shows
the titles of the Regulations that were moved:
Regulation 2009 FAC 2010 FAC
VI Officiating Regulations QuickStart Tennis Formats
VII National Championships and
National Tournament Regulations Officiating Regulations
VIII Collegiate and Scholastic
Tournaments General Ranking Regulations
IX Sanctioning Regulations Junior National Tournaments
and National Ranking
X USTA League Adult/Senior and Family
National Tournaments and
Rankings
XI USTA Jr. Team Tennis Professional Rankings
XII Regulations Governing Amateur Collegiate and Scholastic
and Professional Status Tournaments and Collegiate
Rankings
XIII General Ranking Regulations Wheelchair National
Tournaments and Rankings
XIV National Ranking Regulations Medals and Prizes
XV Regulations for Certification
of Officials
USTA League
XVI Amendments and Requests
for Waivers
USTA Jr. Team Tennis
XVII — Sanctioning Regulations
XVIII — Regulations Governing
Amateur and Professional
Status
XIX — Amendments and Requests
for Waivers
v

The increasing use and popularity of the QuickStart Tennis format has resulted in
a variety of changes to USTA Regulations, including:
• USTA Regulation VI outlines the QuickStart Tennis format for the Boys’ and
Girls’ 8 divisions, including scoring and draw formats, equipment, and court
dimensions. FAC Comments provide recommendations for using the QuickStart
Tennis format for Boys’ and Girls’ 10 divisions.
• USTA Regulations I.B and I.C clarify that a Tournament Director may serve as
Referee of a tournament using the QuickStart Tennis format and that the
individual does not have to be a USTA certified Referee.
• Table 9 includes a provision for minimum rest between matches in tournaments
using the QuickStart Tennis format.
• USTA Regulation IV.D.1 clarifies that the Point Penalty System does not apply
in tournaments using the QuickStart Tennis format.
[p. 64] New paragraph under Table 5 – Criteria for Entering Wheelchair Divisions
clarifies gender and certain eligibility requirements for Quad players.
[pp. 77-78] New USTA Regulation II.B.4.D.iv and FAC Comment II.B-2 explain
alternate methods of placing byes in a draw.
[p. 120] USTA Regulation IV.D.6.c clarifies that Roving Umpires may impose
penalties under the Point Penalty System, but only based on their observations.
vi

Contents
Foreword........................................................................................................................iii
Summary of Important Changes for 2010 Edition of Friend at Court....................iv
PART 1 ITF RULES OF TENNIS
ITF Rules of Tennis ...........................................................................................................................2
Table of Contents .......................................................................................................................2
Rules of Wheelchair Tennis ....................................................................................................26
Amendment to the Rules of Tennis........................................................................................27
Appendices to the ITF Rules of Tennis ..................................................................................27
Plan of the Court......................................................................................................................41
Suggestions on How to Mark Out a Court ............................................................................42
PART 2 THECODE Preface..........................................................................................................................................45
Principles
1. Courtesy ..........................................................................................................................45
2. Counting points played in good faith ...........................................................................45
The Warm-Up
3. Warm-up is not practice .................................................................................................46
4. Warm-up serves and returns..........................................................................................46
Making Calls
5. Player makes calls on own side of the net ....................................................................46
6. Opponent gets benefit of doubt.....................................................................................46
7. Ball touching any part of line is good ...........................................................................46
8. Ball that cannot be called out is good ...........................................................................46
9. Calls when looking across a line or when far away ....................................................46
10. Treat all points the same regardless of their importance .............................................46
11. Requesting opponent’s help ..........................................................................................47
12. Out calls corrected..........................................................................................................47
13. Player calls own shots out .............................................................................................47
14. Partners’ disagreement on calls .....................................................................................47
15. Audible or visible calls..................................................................................................47
16. Opponent’s calls questioned .........................................................................................47
17. Spectators never to make calls.......................................................................................47
18. Prompt calls eliminate two chance option....................................................................47
19. Lets called when balls roll on the court........................................................................47
20. Touches, hitting ball before it crosses net, invasion of opponent’s
court, double hits, and double bounces........................................................................47
21. Balls hit through the net or into the ground.................................................................48
22. Calling balls on clay courts ...........................................................................................48
Serving
23. Server’s request for third ball ........................................................................................48
24. Foot faults .......................................................................................................................48
25. Service calls in doubles..................................................................................................48
26. Service calls by serving team.........................................................................................48
27. Service let calls ...............................................................................................................48
28. Obvious faults ................................................................................................................48
29. Receiver readiness..........................................................................................................48
30. Delays during service.....................................................................................................49
Scoring
31. Server announces score..................................................................................................49
32. Disputes ..........................................................................................................................49
Hindrance Issues
33. Talking during a point ...................................................................................................49
34. Feinting with the body ..................................................................................................49
35. Lets due to hindrance.....................................................................................................49
36. Grunting..........................................................................................................................49
37. Injury caused by a player...............................................................................................49
CONTENTS vii

When to Contact an Official
38. Withdrawing from a match or tournament...................................................................50
39. Stalling............................................................................................................................50
40. Requesting an official ....................................................................................................50
Ball Issues
41. Retrieving stray balls .....................................................................................................50
42. Catching a ball................................................................................................................50
43. New balls for a third set.................................................................................................51
Miscellaneous
44. Clothing and equipment malfunction ..........................................................................51
45. Placement of towels .......................................................................................................51
PART 3 USTA REGULATIONS (INCLUDING FAC COMMENTS)
I. Pre-Tournament Regulations................................................................................................52
A. Applicability of USTA Regulations...............................................................................52
B. Application for Sanction and Appointment of Tournament Committee ...................53
C. Tournament Committee..................................................................................................53
D. Tournament Appeals Committee...................................................................................57
E. Match Formats and Scoring...........................................................................................57
F. Balls and Ball Change Pattern .......................................................................................59
G. Player Eligibility.............................................................................................................60
H. Entry Process...................................................................................................................67
II. Draw Regulations....................................................................................................................71
A. Seeding............................................................................................................................71
B. Making the Draw............................................................................................................73
C. Changes in the Draw......................................................................................................90
D. Scheduling Matches .......................................................................................................97
III. Conducting the Tournament...............................................................................................102
A. Tournament Committee Responsibilities Once Tournament Starts.........................102
B. Referee Responsibilities After Draw Has Been Made...............................................102
C. Rest Periods...................................................................................................................107
D. Suspension of Play .......................................................................................................107
E. Medical Timeout, Bleeding Timeout...........................................................................110
F. Toilet/Change of Attire Break......................................................................................115
G Shortening Tournaments..............................................................................................115
H Ball Change Errors, Ball Replacement, and Practice Balls........................................116
IV. Player Responsibilities and Conduct.................................................................................117
A. Checking in at the Tournament ...................................................................................117
B. Player Responsibilities under The Code .......................................................................117
C. Standards of Conduct...................................................................................................117
D. Point Penalty System....................................................................................................121
E. Defaults and Disqualifications ....................................................................................130
V. Post-Tournament Regulations............................................................................................132
A. Responsibilities of Tournament Committee and Referee
After Completion of Tournament ................................................................................132
B. Grievances .....................................................................................................................132
C. Suspensions by Sectional Associations ......................................................................132
VI. QuickStart Tennis Formats..................................................................................................134
A. Purpose..........................................................................................................................134
B. Boys’ and Girls’ 8 Divisions ........................................................................................134
VII. Officiating Regulations.........................................................................................................138
A. Referee...........................................................................................................................138
B. Chief Umpire.................................................................................................................139
C. Chair Umpire.................................................................................................................139
D. Roving Umpire..............................................................................................................151
viii CONTENTS

E. Net Umpire....................................................................................................................152
F. Line Umpire ..................................................................................................................153
G. Considerations for All Officials...................................................................................156
H. Officials Council ...........................................................................................................157
I. USTA Officials Committee...........................................................................................157
J. Sectional and District Officials Committees...............................................................157
K. Definitions for Certification.........................................................................................157
L. Certification...................................................................................................................158
M. General Certification Requirements ...........................................................................158
N. Specific Certification Requirements............................................................................159
O. Denial of Certification and Decertification.................................................................162
P. Appeal Procedure .........................................................................................................162
Q. Honorary Officials ........................................................................................................162
R. Records on Officials......................................................................................................163
S. Notification to Members of Officials Council ............................................................163
VIII. General Ranking Regulations............................................................................................164
A. Definition of Ranking Period ......................................................................................164
B. USTA Membership Required ......................................................................................164
C. Ranking Systems ..........................................................................................................164
D. Results Considered for Rankings................................................................................164
E. Ranking Considerations ..............................................................................................165
IX. Junior National Tournaments and National Ranking...................................................166
A. Junior National Tournament Regulations ..................................................................166
B. Junior National Suspension System...........................................................................182
C. Junior National Rankings....................................................................................................185
D. Junior National Ranking Committees ........................................................................187
E. Junior National Ranking Review Board ....................................................................188
F. Confidentiality of Ranking Information.....................................................................188
X. Adult, Senior and Family National Tournaments and Rankings.................................189
A. Adult, Senior, and Damily National Tournament Regulations.................................189
B. Divisions and Categories Ranked ...............................................................................192
C. Eligibility for National Ranking.........................................................................................192
D. Adult National Open Rankings...................................................................................193
E. Professional/Adult National Open Rankings ............................................................193
F. Adult, Senior, and Family National Rankings...........................................................195
G. Matches That Count In More Than One Ranking Division Or Category................198
H. National Adult/Senior and Family Ranking Committees ........................................198
I. Adult/Senior and Family National Ranking Review Board.....................................199
J. Confidentiality of Ranking Information.....................................................................199
XI. Professional Rankings ..........................................................................................................200
A. Men’s Division..............................................................................................................200
B. Women’s Division.........................................................................................................200
C. Eligibility for National Ranking .................................................................................200
D. Review...........................................................................................................................200
XII. Collegiate and Scholastic Tournaments and Collegiate Rankings..............................201
A. A Method for Making the Draw .................................................................................201
B. Scoring...........................................................................................................................201
C. Eligibility for National Ranking .................................................................................201
D. Collegiate Rankings .....................................................................................................202
XIII. Wheelchair National Tournaments and Ranking ..........................................................203
A. Wheelchair National Tournament Regulations..........................................................203
B. Wheelchair National Rankings....................................................................................206
C. Wheelchair National Ranking Committees................................................................209
XIV. Medals and Prizes.................................................................................................................210
A. Gold, Silver, and Bronze Balls.....................................................................................210
CONTENTS ix

B. Gold Davis Cup Insignia .............................................................................................210
C. Gold Fed Cup Charm ...................................................................................................210
D. Restrictions on Trophy and Award Presentations......................................................210
XV. USTA League ..........................................................................................................................211
A. Description ....................................................................................................................211
B. Rating System ...............................................................................................................211
C. Eligibility ......................................................................................................................211
D. Authority for Committee to Adopt USTA League Regulations ................................211
XVI. USTA Jr. Team Tennis .........................................................................................................212
A. Description ....................................................................................................................212
B. Eligibility ......................................................................................................................212
C. Authority for Committee to Adopt USTA Jr. Team Tennis Regulations ..................212
XVII. Sanctioning ..........................................................................................................................213
A. General Information .....................................................................................................213
B. USTA League and USTA Jr. Team Tennis Approved Without
Necessity of Sanction....................................................................................................215
C. Sectional and District Tournaments and Leagues other than
USTA League and USTA Jr. Team Tennis...................................................................215
D. USTA National Championships, USTA Junior National Championships,
USTA Regional Tournaments, and USTA International Tournaments ....................216
E. ITF Junior Tournaments...............................................................................................218
F. US Open and Other Tournament Sanctions Awarded by USTA Board...................218
XVIII. Amateur and Professional Status..................................................................................220
A. Definitions.....................................................................................................................220
B. Warning .........................................................................................................................220
C. Acts That Will Cause the Loss of Amateur Status......................................................220
D. Acts That Amateur May Engage in Without Losing Amateur Status ......................220
E. Expenses That May Be Reimbursed Without Causing Player to Lose
Amateur Status .............................................................................................................221
F. Reimbursement of These Expenses Will Cause Player to Lose
Amateur Status .............................................................................................................222
G. Organization Member’s Role in Reimbursement of an Amateur’s Expenses .........223
H. Amateur Prizes..............................................................................................................223
I. Enforcement Procedure over Amateur Status ............................................................224
J. Reinstatement to Amateur Status................................................................................225
XIX. Amendments and Requests for Waivers.........................................................................227
A. Amendment by the Members......................................................................................227
B. Amendment by the Executive Committee .................................................................227
C. Process for Submitting an Amendment......................................................................227
D. Amendment by the Board............................................................................................227
E. Amendments Passed by Executive Committee and Board Are
Subject to Amendment at Next Meeting of the Members.........................................228
F. Secretary-Treasurer of USTA Shall Provide Certain USTA Officials
with Copy of Amendment Within Sixty Days of Its Adoption ................................228
G. Effective Date of Amendments....................................................................................228
H. Amendments to The Code, USTA Comments to ITF Rules of Tennis,
and Comments to USTA Regulations .........................................................................228
I. Request for Waiver .......................................................................................................228
PART 4 USTA EMERGENCY CARE GUIDELINES....................................................230
PART 5 UMPIREASSIGNMENT, SELECTION, CERTIFICATION,
AND TRAINING .....................................................................................................235
I. USTA Policy..........................................................................................................................235
A. Diversity and Inclusion: A Key Element of the USTA’s Core Values....................235
B. Assignment & Selection of Chair Umpires for Tournaments ................................235
C. Certification and Training of Chair Umpires..........................................................237
x CONTENTS

II. Discrimination Complaint and Resolution Process .....................................................238
A. Umpire Equal Opportunity Policy..........................................................................238
B. Umpire Complaint and Investigation Procedure ...................................................238
PART 6 UMPIRE AWARDS ................................................................................................239
PART 7 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION
(ITA) REGULATIONS.........................................................................................242
PART 8 GLOSSARY...............................................................................................................269
PART 9 INDEX TO THE ITF RULES OF TENNIS, THE CODE,
& USTA REGULATIONS...................................................................................280
THE OFFICIALS’ CODE OF CONDUCT ......................................................INSIDE BACK COVER
CONTENTS OF THE FIGURES
Figures
1 Plan of the Court...........................................................................................................41
2 Suggestions on How to Mark Out a Court.................................................................42
3 Example of an Entry Form...........................................................................................68
4 Positioning Seeds and Byes in Draw of 32 with 22 Players .....................................80
5 Positioning Players in Feed-In Championship Draw..............................................82
6 Modified Curtis Feed-In Championship Draw .........................................................85
7 Compass Draw Sheet ...................................................................................................88
8 Players Omitted from Draw.........................................................................................93
9 36-Foot Court..............................................................................................................135
10 60-Foot Court..............................................................................................................136
11-13 Example of Scorecard Marking.................................................................................146
14 Entry into USTA National Championship................................................................171
CONTENTS OF THE TABLES
Tables
1 Tennis Ball Specification..............................................................................................27
2 Responsibilities of the Tournament Committee.........................................................53
3 Responsibilities of Referee ..........................................................................................55
4 Junior Eligibility..........................................................................................................62
5 Criteria for Entering Wheelchair Divisions................................................................64
6 Scheduling Guidelines for Junior Divisions..............................................................98
7 Scheduling Guidelines for Adults, Senior, and Wheelchair Divisions ....................99
8 Draw Sheet Terminology and Procedures ................................................................104
9 Minimum Rest Between Matches.............................................................................108
10 Time Allowed Between Sets .....................................................................................109
11 Medical Timeouts, Bleeding Timeouts and Toilet/
Change of Attire Breaks.............................................................................................113
12 Point Penalty System .................................................................................................123
13 Time Violations...........................................................................................................124
14 Penalties for Lateness.................................................................................................124
15 Guidelines for Assessing Penalties ...........................................................................126
16 Seeding Criteria for USTA National Championships, (Juniors Only),
USTA National Opens, USTA Regional Tournaments and
USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic Championships (East/West).................169
17 Match Formats for Tournaments on the National Junior
Tournament Schedule ................................................................................................178
18 USTA International Tournaments .............................................................................179
19 Suspension Points ......................................................................................................183
20 Adult National Open and Professional/Adult National Open
Minimum Tournament Participation Requirements for National Ranking...........194
21 Relative Ranking Weights of Other National Ranking Tournaments ....................196
22 Adult, Senior, and Family Minimum Tournament
Participation Requirements for National Ranking .................................................198
23 Minimum Participation Requirements for Wheelchair National Ranking............207
24 Relative Ranking Weights for Wheelchair Tournaments ........................................208
CONTENTS xi

PART 1—ITF RULES OF TENNIS
CONTENTS OF THE ITF RULES OF TENNIS
1 The Court ......................................................................................................................................3
2 Permanent Fixtures ......................................................................................................................4
3 The Ball .........................................................................................................................................4
4 The Racket ....................................................................................................................................5
5 Score in a Game............................................................................................................................6
6 Score in a Set ................................................................................................................................8
7 Score in a Match...........................................................................................................................8
8 Server & Receiver.........................................................................................................................8
9 Choice of Ends & Service ............................................................................................................8
10 Change of Ends ............................................................................................................................9
11 Ball in Play....................................................................................................................................9
12 Ball Touches a Line ......................................................................................................................9
13 Ball Touches a Permanent Fixture ..............................................................................................9
14 Order of Service..........................................................................................................................10
15 Order of Receiving in Doubles .................................................................................................10
16 The Service..................................................................................................................................11
17 Serving ........................................................................................................................................11
18 Foot Fault....................................................................................................................................11
19 Service Fault ...............................................................................................................................13
20 Second Service............................................................................................................................13
21 When to Serve & Receive ..........................................................................................................13
22 The Let During a Serve ..............................................................................................................14
23 The Let.........................................................................................................................................14
24 Player Loses Point ......................................................................................................................15
25 A Good Return ...........................................................................................................................17
26 Hindrance....................................................................................................................................18
27 Correcting Errors........................................................................................................................19
28 Role of Court Officials ...............................................................................................................23
29 Continuous Play.........................................................................................................................23
30 Coaching .....................................................................................................................................25
RULES OF WHEELCHAIR TENNIS.............................................................................................26
Amendment to the Rules of Tennis..................................................................................................27
Appendix I—The Ball .......................................................................................................................27
Classification of Court Pace .......................................................................................28
Appendix II—The Racket .................................................................................................................29
Appendix III—Advertising...............................................................................................................29
Appendix IV—Alternative Procedures and Scoring Methods.......................................................30
Appendix V—Role of Court Officials ..............................................................................................32
Ball Mark Inspection Procedures.............................................................................34
Electronic Review Procedures..................................................................................34
Appendix VI—Official 10 and Under Tennis Competition............................................................35
Appendix VII—Procedures for Review and Hearings on the Rules of Tennis.............................36
Plan of the Court................................................................................................................................41
Suggestions on How to Mark Out a Court......................................................................................42
References to the International Tennis Federation or ITF shall hereinafter mean ITF Limited.
2 RULES OF TENNIS

FOREWORD
The International Tennis Federation (ITF) is the governing body of the
game of tennis and its duties and responsibilities include determination of the
Rules of Tennis.
To assist the ITF in carrying out this responsibility, the ITF has appointed
a Rules of Tennis Committee which continually monitors the game and its
rules, and when considered necessary makes recommendations for changes
to the Board of Directors of the ITF who in turn make recommendations to
the Annual General Meeting of the ITF which is the ultimate authority for
making any changes to the Rules of Tennis.
Appendix IV lists all known and approved alternative procedures and
scoring methods. In addition, on its own behalf or on application by
interested parties, certain variations to the rules may be approved by the ITF
for trial purposes only at a limited number of tournaments or events and/or
for a limited time period. Such variations are not included in the published
rules and require a report to the ITF on the conclusion of the approved trial.
Note: Except where otherwise stated, every reference in these Rules of
Tennis to the masculine includes the feminine gender.
1. THE COURT
The court shall be a rectangle, 78 feet (23.77 m) long and, for singles matches,
27 feet (8.23 m) wide. For doubles matches, the court shall be 36 feet (10.97 m) wide.
The court shall be divided across the middle by a net suspended by a cord or metal
cable which shall pass over or be attached to two net posts at a height of 31 ⁄2 feet
(1.07 m). The net shall be fully extended so that it completely fills the space between
the two net posts and it must be of sufficiently small mesh to ensure that a ball cannot
pass through it. The height of the net shall be 3 feet (0.914 m) at the centre, where it
shall be held down tightly by a strap. A band shall cover the cord or metal cable and
the top of the net. The strap and band shall be completely white.
• The maximum diameter of the cord or metal cable shall be 1 ⁄3 inch (0.8 cm).
• The maximum width of the strap shall be 2 inches (5 cm).
• The band shall be between 2 inches (5 cm) and 21 ⁄2 inches (6.35 cm) deep on
each side.
For doubles matches, the centres of the net posts shall be 3 feet (0.914 m) outside
the doubles court on each side.
For singles matches, if a singles net is used, the centres of the net posts shall be
3 feet (0.914 m) outside the singles court on each side. If a doubles net is used, then
the net shall be supported, at a height of 31 ⁄2 feet (1.07 m), by two singles sticks, the
centres of which shall be 3 feet (0.914 m) outside the singles court on each side.
• The net posts shall not be more than 6 inches (15 cm) square or 6 inches
(15 cm) in diameter.
• The singles sticks shall not be more than 3 inches (7.5 cm) square or 3 inches
(7.5 cm) in diameter.
• The net posts and singles sticks shall not be more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) above
the top of the net cord.
The lines at the ends of the court are called baselines and the lines at the sides of
the court are called sidelines.
RULES OF TENNIS 3

Two lines shall be drawn between the singles sidelines, 21 feet (6.40 m) from
each side of the net, parallel with the net. These lines are called the servicelines. On
each side of the net, the area between the serviceline and the net shall be divided
into two equal parts, the service courts, by the centre serviceline. The centre
serviceline shall be drawn parallel with the singles sidelines and half way between
them.
Each baseline shall be divided in half by a centre mark, 4 inches (10 cm) in length,
which shall be drawn inside the court and parallel with the singles sidelines.
• The centre service line and centre mark shall be 2 inches (5 cm) wide.
• The other lines of the court shall be between 1 inch (2.5 cm) and 2 inches
(5 cm) wide, except that the baselines may be up to 4 inches (10 cm) wide.
All court measurements shall be made to the outside of the lines and all lines of the
court shall be of the same colour clearly contrasting with the colour of the surface.
No advertising is allowed on the court, net, strap, band, net posts or singles sticks
except as provided in Appendix III.
USTA Comment 1.1: How do you tighten the net to the proper tension?
First, loosen the center strap. Next, tighten the net cord until the center of the
net is approximately 40 inches above the ground. Finally, tighten the center
strap until the center of the net is 36 inches above the ground. These
measurements should always be made before the day’s first match and when
possible before each match.
USTA Comment 1.2: What happens if a singles stick falls to the court
during a point? The point stops immediately and is replayed.
2. PERMANENT FIXTURES
The permanent fixtures of the court include the backstops and sidestops, the
spectators, the stands and seats for spectators, all other fixtures around and above the
court, the Chair Umpire, Line Umpires, Net Umpire and ball persons when in their
recognised positions.
In a singles match played with a doubles net and singles sticks, the net posts and
the part of the net outside the singles sticks are permanent fixtures and are not
considered as net posts or part of the net.
3. THE BALL
Balls, which are approved for play under the Rules of Tennis, must comply with
the specifications in Appendix I.
The International Tennis Federation shall rule on the question of whether any
ball or prototype complies with Appendix I or is otherwise approved, or not
approved, for play. Such ruling may be taken on its own initiative, or upon
application by any party with a bona fide interest therein, including any player,
equipment manufacturer or National Association or members thereof. Such rulings
and applications shall be made in accordance with the applicable Review and
Hearing Procedures of the International Tennis Federation (see Appendix VII).
The event organisers must announce in advance of the event:
a. The number of balls for play (2, 3, 4 or 6).
b. The ball change policy, if any.
Ball changes, if any, can be made either:
4 RULES OF TENNIS

i. After an agreed odd number of games, in which case, the first ball
change in the match shall take place two games earlier than for the
rest of the match, to make allowance for the warm-up. A tie-break
game counts as one game for the ball change. A ball change shall not
take place at the beginning of a tie-break game. In this case, the ball
change shall be delayed until the beginning of the second game of the
next set; or
ii. At the beginning of a set
If a ball gets broken during play, the point shall be replayed.
Case 1: If a ball is soft at the end of a point, should the point be replayed?
Decision: If the ball is soft, not broken, the point shall not be replayed.
Note: Any ball to be used in a tournament which is played under the Rules of
Tennis, must be named on the official ITF list of approved balls issued by the
International Tennis Federation.
USTA Comment 3.1: What is the difference between a broken ball and a
soft ball? A broken ball has no compression; a soft ball has some compression.
Both broken and soft balls should be removed from play.
USTA Comment 3.2: May a player cause a ball to become wet by using
the ball to wipe perspiration from the player’s body? No. A player may not take
any action that materially changes the condition of the ball; therefore, a player
may not use a ball to wipe off perspiration.
USTA Comment 3.3: A current list of USTA approved balls is available on
the USTA web site, www.usta. com.
4. THE RACKET
Rackets, which are approved for play under the Rules of Tennis, must comply
with the specifications in Appendix II.
The International Tennis Federation shall rule on the question of whether any racket
or prototype complies with Appendix II or is otherwise approved, or not approved, for
play. Such ruling may be undertaken on its own initiative, or upon application by any party
with a bona fide interest therein, including any player, equipment manufacturer or
National Association or members thereof. Such rulings and applications shall be
made in accordance with the applicable Review and Hearing Procedures of the
International Tennis Federation (see Appendix VII).
Case 1: Is more than one set of strings allowed on the hitting surface of a racket?
Decision: No. The rule mentions a pattern (not patterns) of crossed strings. (See
Appendix II)
Case 2: Is the stringing pattern of a racket considered to be generally uniform and
flat if the strings are on more than one plane?
Decision: No.
Case 3: Can vibration damping devices be placed on the strings of a racket? If so,
where can they be placed?
Decision: Yes, but these devices may only be placed outside the pattern of the
crossed strings.
Case 4: During a point, a player accidentally breaks the strings. Can the player
continue to play another point with this racket?
RULES OF TENNIS 5

Decision: Yes, except where specifically prohibited by event organisers.
Case 5: Is a player allowed to use more than one racket at any time during play?
Decision: No.
Case 6: Can a battery that affects playing characteristics be incorporated into a
racket?
Decision: No. A battery is prohibited because it is an energy source, as are solar
cells and other similar devices.
USTA Comment 4.1: What happens if it is discovered after play has
begun that a player has been using an illegal racket or an illegally strung
racket? All points played stand. The player must find another racket before
continuing play. A player is subject to code violations for delay under the
Point Penalty System. If the discovery occurs after the match is over, the
match still counts.
USTA Comment 4.2: May a player who breaks a racket or a string in a
racket leave the court to get a replacement? A player who leaves the court to
get a replacement is subject to code violations for delays under the Point
Penalty System. Rule 29b permits a player “reasonable extra time” to leave
the court only in those cases where “clothing, footwear, or necessary
equipment (excluding racket) is broken or needs to be replaced.”
5. SCORE IN A GAME
a. Standard game
A standard game is scored as follows with the server’s score being called first:
No point - “Love”
First point - “15”
Second point - “30”
Third point - “40”
Fourth point - “Game”
except that if each player/team has won three points, the score is “Deuce”.
After “Deuce”, the score is “Advantage” for the player/team who wins the
next point. If that same player/team also wins the next point, that player/team
wins the “Game”; if the opposing player/team wins the next point, the score
is again “Deuce”. A player/ team needs to win two consecutive points
immediately after “Deuce” to win the “Game”.
b. Tie-break game
During a tie-break game, points are scored “Zero”,“1”, “2”, “3”, etc. The first
player/team to win seven points wins the “Game” and “Set”, provided there
is a margin of two points over the opponent(s). If necessary, the tie-break
game shall continue until this margin is achieved.
The player whose turn it is to serve shall serve the first point of the tiebreak
game. The following two points shall be served by the opponent(s) (in
doubles, the player of the opposing team due to serve next). After this, each
player/team shall serve alternately for two consecutive points until the end of
the tie-break game (in doubles, the rotation of service within each team shall
continue in the same order as during that set).
The player/team whose turn it was to serve first in the tie-break game shall
be the receiver in the first game of the following set.
6 RULES OF TENNIS

Additional approved alternative scoring methods can be found in Appendix IV.
USTA Comment 5.1: Numeric scoring, which consists of “zero,” “one,”
“two,” and “three,” may be substituted for “Love,” “15,” “30,” and “40” as
long as the principle of winning four points by a margin of two is preserved.
This is particularly appropriate for matches between new or young players
or in which one player does not understand English. Hand signals may be
used to show the score. This is a common practice with players who are
hearing impaired. Numeric scoring may also be used when No-Ad scoring
is authorized.
USTA Comment 5.2: The tiebreak game should not be confused with
the 10-Point Match Tiebreak, which under certain circumstances may be
played in lieu of the deciding final set. The 10-Point Match Tiebreak is
described in Appendix IV.
USTA Comment 5.3: Is the server required to call the score at the
beginning of each game and the point scores as the games go on in
matches without officials? Yes. This is required by The Code § 31. After an
official has cautioned a player to call out the score, the official may in a
particularly egregious case treat subsequent violations as code violations
for unsportsmanlike conduct.
USTA Comment 5.4: The server states that the score is 40-15; the
receiver states that the score is 30-30. The players agree on who won every
point except for the second point. What should they do? They should replay
the second point from the advantage court. If the server wins the point, the
score becomes 40-15; if the receiver wins the point, the score becomes 30-30.
The next point is played from the deuce court.
USTA Comment 5.5: What happens in the same situation as USTA
Comment 5.4 except that the disputed point is the third point? Everything
is done the same except that the disputed point is played from the deuce
court.
USTA Comment 5.6: The players agree that they have played six points
in the game but disagree over the score because they do not agree on who
won the second point. The receiver acknowledges that the server called the
score after each point and that the receiver did not express disagreement
with the score until now. What should happen? The score as announced by
the server should prevail because the receiver did not object. Note, however,
if the receiver denied hearing the score, then an official would have to be
called to go through the normal 3-step process to settle the dispute.
USTA Comment 5.7: When do the players change ends? Players change
ends after every six points and at the end of the tiebreak. See Rule 10. They
must change sides during the tiebreak without any break or delay.
RULES OF TENNIS 7

6. SCORE IN A SET
There are different methods of scoring in a set. The two main methods are the
“advantage set” and the “tie-break set”. Either method may be used provided that
the one to be used is announced in advance of the event. If the “tie-break set”
method is to be used, it must also be announced whether the final set will be played
as a “tie-break set” or an “advantage set”.
USTA Comment 6.1: USTA Regulation I.E.1.a. prohibits the playing of
“advantage sets.”
a. “Advantage Set”
The first player/team to win six games wins that “set”, provided there is a
margin of two games over the opponent(s). If necessary, the set shall
continue until this margin is achieved.
b. “Tie-break Set”
The first player/team to win six games wins that “set”, provided there is a
margin of two games over the opponent(s). If the score reaches six games
all, a tie-break game shall be played.
Additional approved alternative scoring methods can be found in Appendix IV.
7. SCORE IN A MATCH
A match can be played to the best of 3 sets (a player/team needs to win 2 sets to
win the match) or to the best of 5 sets (a player/team needs to win 3 sets to win the
match).
Additional approved alternative scoring methods can be found in Appendix IV.
8. SERVER & RECEIVER
The players/teams shall stand on opposite sides of the net. The server is the player
who puts the ball into play for the first point. The receiver is the player who is ready
to return the ball served by the server.
Case 1: Is the receiver allowed to stand outside the lines of the court?
Decision: Yes. The receiver may take any position inside or outside the lines on the
receiver’s side of the net.
9. CHOICE OF ENDS & SERVICE
The choice of ends and the choice to be server or receiver in the first game shall
be decided by toss before the warm-up starts. The player/team who wins the toss
may choose:
a. To be server or receiver in the first game of the match, in which case the
opponent(s) shall choose the end of the court for the first game of the match;
or
b. The end of the court for the first game of the match, in which case the
opponent(s) shall choose to be server or receiver for the first game of the
match; or
c. To require the opponent(s) to make one of the above choices.
Case 1: Do both players/teams have the right to new choices if the warm-up is
stopped and the players leave the court?
Decision: Yes. The result of the original toss stands, but new choices may be made
by both players/teams.
8 RULES OF TENNIS

USTA Comment 9.1: When should the toss be made? The toss should be
made before the warm-up so that the players can warm-up on the same end
from which they play their first game.
10. CHANGE OF ENDS
The players shall change ends at the end of the first, third and every subsequent
odd game of each set. The players shall also change ends at the end of each set unless
the total number of games in that set is even, in which case the players change ends
at the end of the first game of the next set.
During a tie-break game, players shall change ends after every six points.
Additional approved alternative procedures can be found in Appendix IV.
USTA Comment 10.1: Do the players change ends after a 7-Point Tiebreak
is played to decide a set? Yes.
USTA Comment 10.2: When do the players change ends during a
tiebreak that uses the Coman Tiebreak Procedure? The Coman Tiebreak
Procedure is identical to the regular procedure except that the players
change ends after the first point, then after every four points, and at the
conclusion of the tiebreak.
11. BALL IN PLAY
Unless a fault or a let is called, the ball is in play from the moment the server hits
the ball, and remains in play until the point is decided.
USTA Comment 11.1: Is a point decided when a good shot has clearly
passed a player, or when an apparently bad shot passes over the baseline
or sideline? No. A ball is in play until it bounces twice or lands outside the court,
hits a permanent fixture, or hits a player. A ball that becomes embedded in the
net is out of play.
USTA Comment 11.2: Must an out call on a player’s shot to the
opponent’s court be made before the opponent’s return has either gone out
of play or been hit by the first player? Yes.
12. BALL TOUCHES A LINE
If a ball touches a line, it is regarded as touching the court bounded by that line.
USTA Comment 12.1: If a player cannot call a ball out with certainty,
should the player regard the ball as good? Yes. The Code §§ 6 & 8 require
a player to give the opponent the benefit of any doubt.
13. BALL TOUCHES A PERMANENT FIXTURE
If the ball in play touches a permanent fixture after it has hit the correct court,
the player who hit the ball wins the point. If the ball in play touches a permanent
fixture before it hits the ground, the player who hit the ball loses the point.
RULES OF TENNIS 9

USTA Comment 13.1: What happens if a ball hits the top of the net
outside the singles stick and then lands in the court? The player who hit the
ball loses the point because the ball hit a permanent fixture. In singles the area
outside the singles stick is a permanent fixture.
USTA Comment 13.2: Who wins the point if a player hits a ball that hits
an object attached to the net or post (such as the scoring device) and then
lands in the proper court? The player who hit the ball loses the point
because it hit a permanent fixture before landing in the court.
USTA Comment 13.3: During a rally in a singles match played on a
doubles court without singles sticks, a player hits a shot that was going out
until it hits the doubles post and careens into the proper court. Who wins
the point? Every effort should be made to provide singles sticks for a match
that is played on a doubles court so that this situation does not occur. If it
does occur, the player who hit the shot wins the point because the entire
doubles net and doubles posts are respectively the net and the net posts for
this match.
14. ORDER OF SERVICE
At the end of each standard game, the receiver shall become the server and the
server shall become the receiver for the next game.
In doubles, the team due to serve in the first game of each set shall decide which
player shall serve for that game. Similarly, before the second game starts, their
opponents shall decide which player shall serve for that game. The partner of the
player who served in the first game shall serve in the third game and the partner of
the player who served in the second game shall serve in the fourth game. This rotation
shall continue until the end of the set.
USTA Comment 14.1: May a doubles team switch its serving order at
the beginning of any set or the 10-Point Match Tiebreak? Yes. There is no
requirement that any doubles team retain the same serving order for a new
set or 10-Point Match Tiebreak.
15. ORDER OF RECEIVING IN DOUBLES
The team which is due to receive in the first game of a set shall decide which
player shall receive the first point in the game. Similarly, before the second game
starts, their opponents shall decide which player shall receive the first point of that
game. The player who was the receiver’s partner for the first point of the game shall
receive the second point and this rotation shall continue until the end of the game and
the set.
After the receiver has returned the ball, either player in a team can hit the ball.
Case 1: Is one member of a doubles team allowed to play alone against the
opponents?
Decision: No.
10 RULES OF TENNIS

USTA Comment 15.1: Do the partners have to alternate making shots
during a rally? No. In the course of making a shot, only one partner may
hit the ball. If both of them hit the ball, either simultaneously or
consecutively, it is an illegal return. Mere clashing of rackets does not make
a return illegal unless it is clear that more than one racket touched the ball.
USTA Comment 15.2: May a doubles team switch its receiving order at
the beginning of any set or match tiebreak? Yes. There is no requirement
that any doubles team retain the same receiving order for a new set or match
tiebreak.
16. THE SERVICE
Immediately before starting the service motion, the server shall stand at rest with
both feet behind (i.e. further from the net than) the baseline and within the imaginary
extensions of the centre mark and the sideline.
The server shall then release the ball by hand in any direction and hit the ball with
the racket before the ball hits the ground. The service motion is completed at the
moment that the player’s racket hits or misses the ball. A player who is able to use only
one arm may use the racket for the release of the ball.
USTA Comment 16.1: May a player serve underhanded? Yes. There is
no restriction in the rules on the kind of service motion that a server may
use.
17. SERVING
When serving in a standard game, the server shall stand behind alternate halves
of the court, starting from the right half of the court in every game.
In a tie-break game, the service shall be served from behind alternate halves of the
court, with the first served from the right half of the court.
The service shall pass over the net and hit the service court diagonally
opposite, before the receiver returns it.
USTA Comment 17.1: What happens if the receiver volleys the serve? The
server wins the point unless the serve hit the net, in which case it is a let.
18. FOOT FAULT
During the service motion, the server shall not:
a. Change position by walking or running, although slight movements of the feet
are permitted; or
b. Touch the baseline or the court with either foot; or
c. Touch the area outside the imaginary extension of the sideline with either
foot; or
d. Touch the imaginary extension of the centre mark with either foot.
If the server breaks this rule it is a “Foot Fault”.
Case 1: In a singles match, is the server allowed to serve standing behind the part
of the baseline between the singles sideline and the doubles sideline?
Decision: No.
RULES OF TENNIS 11

Case 2: Is the server allowed to have one or both feet off the ground?
Decision: Yes.
USTA Comment 18.1: Where may the server stand? In singles, the server
may stand anywhere behind the baseline between the imaginary extensions of
the inside edge of the center mark and the outside edge of the singles sideline.
In doubles, the server may stand anywhere behind the baseline between the
imaginary extensions of the inside edge of the center mark and the outside
edge of the doubles sideline.
USTA Comment 18.2: What does the rule mean when it says that the
server may “not change position by walking or running”? One key to
understanding this rule is to realize that the server’s feet must be at rest
immediately before beginning to serve. The delivery of the service then begins
with any arm or racket motion and ends when the racket contacts the ball (or
misses the ball in attempt to strike it).
To define walking or running with precision is difficult. This rule is
intended to prevent the server from taking advantage of the receiver by serving
while “on the move” and requiring the receiver to guess the position from
which the serve will be launched, and the rule should be enforced with that
intent in mind.
• A server who takes more than one step with either foot after the
“feet at rest” position described above is at risk for being called for
a foot fault. The serve becomes a foot fault when, in the judgment
of an experienced official, the server has materially changed
position before or during any racket or arm motion.
• A server whose footwork changes significantly from one serve to
the next is at risk for being called for a foot fault.
• Serves that look like the running volleyball serve violate the
rule. Serves in which the server runs or walks from a point
well behind the baseline to the baseline are also illegal, as are serves
in which the server walks or runs along the baseline before choosing
a spot from which to deliver the serve.
USTA Comment 18.3: When does a foot fault occur? A player commits
a foot fault if after the player’s feet are at rest but before the player strikes the
ball, either foot touches:
• the court, including the baseline;
• any part of the imaginary extension of the center mark; or
• beyond the imaginary extension of the outside of the singles sideline
in singles or the doubles sideline in doubles.
USTA Comment 18.4: Is it a foot fault if the server’s foot touches the
baseline and then the server catches the tossed ball instead of attempting
to strike it? This is not a foot fault as long as the server makes no attempt to
strike the ball.
USTA Comment 18.5: May a player ask an official how he foot faulted?
Yes. The official should then give a brief answer.
12 RULES OF TENNIS

USTA Comment 18.6: When may the receiver or the receiver’s partner call
foot faults? In a non-officiated match, the receiver or the receiver’s partner may
call foot faults only after all efforts such as warning the server and attempting
to locate an official have failed and the foot faulting is so flagrant as to be clearly
perceptible from the receiver’s side.
19. SERVICE FAULT
The service is a fault if:
a. The server breaks rules 16, 17, or 18; or
b. The server misses the ball when trying to hit it; or
c. The ball served touches a permanent fixture, singles stick or net post before
it hits the ground; or
d. The ball served touches the server or server’s partner, or anything the server
or server’s partner is wearing or carrying.
Case 1: After tossing a ball to serve, the server decides not to hit it and catches it
instead. Is this a fault?
Decision: No. A player, who tosses the ball and then decides not to hit it, is allowed
to catch the ball with the hand or the racket, or to let the ball bounce.
Case 2: During a singles match played on a court with net posts and singles
sticks, the ball served hits a singles stick and then hits the correct service court. Is
this a fault?
Decision: Yes.
20. SECOND SERVICE
If the first service is a fault, the server shall serve again without delay from behind
the same half of the court from which that fault was served, unless the service was
from the wrong half.
USTA Comment 20.1: Before returning the second serve, may the
receiver clear a ball from a first service fault that has rebounded onto the
playing area? Yes.
21. WHEN TO SERVE & RECEIVE
The server shall not serve until the receiver is ready. However, the receiver shall
play to the reasonable pace of the server and shall be ready to receive within a
reasonable time of the server being ready.
A receiver who attempts to return the service shall be considered as being ready.
If it is demonstrated that the receiver is not ready, the service cannot be called a fault.
USTA Comment 21.1: Does this rule apply to the first and second serve?
Yes. This rule applies separately to both the first and second serve.
USTA Comment 21.2: Once ready, can the receiver become unready? The
receiver cannot become unready unless outside interference occurs.
USTA Comment 21.3: May the server hit the serve just as the receiver
looks up after getting into the ready position? No. The receiver is not ready
RULES OF TENNIS 13

until the receiver is in the ready position and has a second or two to make
eye contact with the server.
USTA Comment 21.4: How much time may elapse from the moment
the ball goes out of play at the end of the point until the serve is struck to
start the next point? When practical this time should not exceed 20
seconds. This limit does not apply if a player has to chase a stray ball.
USTA Comment 21.5: Does the 20-second provision of Rule 29 apply
to the second serve? No. The server must strike the second serve without
delay.
USTA Comment 21.6: May the server suddenly increase the pace? No. The
server may speed up the pace only so long as the new pace is reasonable and only
so long as the change does not occur suddenly.
USTA Comment 21.7: What happens when the server observes that the
receiver appears to be ready and hits the second serve in, but the receiver makes
no attempt to return it? The server wins the point if the receiver had no reason
for not being ready; if the receiver was not ready because of something within
the receiver’s control (broken string or contact lens problem), then the server
gets two serves; and if the receiver was not ready because of some reasonable
factor such as clearing the errant first serve or a ball from an adjacent court, then
the server gets one serve. If the time to clear the ball from the adjacent court is
so prolonged as to constitute an interruption, good sportsmanship requires the
receiver to offer the server two serves.
22. THE LET DURING A SERVE
The service is a let if:
a. The ball served touches the net, strap or band, and is otherwise good; or,
after touching the net, strap or band, touches the receiver or the receiver’s
partner or anything they wear or carry before hitting the ground; or
b. The ball is served when the receiver is not ready.
In the case of a service let, that particular service shall not count, and the server
shall serve again, but a service let does not cancel a previous fault.
Additional approved alternative procedures can be found in Appendix IV.
USTA Comment 22.1: May the receiver claim a let if the server loses
control and grip of the racket and it lands during the service in the server’s
court? No. Such an occurrence is not sufficiently unusual to justify a let.
23. THE LET
In all cases when a let is called, except when a service let is called on a second
service, the whole point shall be replayed.
Case 1: When the ball is in play, another ball rolls onto court. A let is called. The
server had previously served a fault. Is the server now entitled to a first service or
second service?
Decision: First service. The whole point must be replayed.
14 RULES OF TENNIS

USTA Comment 23.1: What happens when the server is interrupted
during delivery of the second service? The server is entitled to two serves.
USTA Comment 23.2: What happens when there is a delay between the
first and second serves? If the delay is caused by the receiver (such as a
broken string or contact lens problem), an official, or outside interference, the
whole point is replayed. If the server caused the delay, such as when the
server breaks a string, the server gets one serve. Note that a spectator’s call
(“out,” “fault,” or other), a spectator’s ringing cell phone, or grunting on an
adjacent court is not basis for replaying the point. Action should be taken to
prevent further spectator interference.
USTA Comment 23.3: What happens when a ball from an adjacent court
rolls on the court between the first and second serves? The time it takes to
clear an intruding ball between the first and second serves is not considered
sufficient time to warrant the server receiving two serves unless this time is
so prolonged as to constitute an interruption. The receiver is the judge of
whether the delay is sufficiently prolonged to justify giving the server two
serves.
USTA Comment 23.4: Who may call a let? Only an official or player may
call a let. A player may call a let only on the player’s court.
24. PLAYER LOSES POINT
The point is lost if:
a. The player serves two consecutive faults; or
b. The player does not return the ball in play before it bounces twice
consecutively; or
c. The player returns the ball in play so that it hits the ground, or before it
bounces, an object, outside the correct court; or
d. The player returns the ball in play so that, before it bounces, it hits a permanent
fixture; or
e. The receiver returns the service before it bounces; or
f. The player deliberately carries or catches the ball in play on the racket or
deliberately touches it with the racket more than once; or
g. The player or the racket, whether in the player’s hand or not, or anything
which the player is wearing or carrying touches the net, net posts/singles
sticks, cord or metal cable, strap or band, or the opponent’s court at any time
while the ball is in play; or
h. The player hits the ball before it has passed the net; or
i. The ball in play touches the player or anything that the player is wearing or
carrying, except the racket; or
j. The ball in play touches the racket when the player is not holding it; or
k. The player deliberately and materially changes the shape of the racket when
the ball is in play; or
l. In doubles, both players touch the ball when returning it.
Case 1: After the server has served a first service, the racket falls out of the server’s
RULES OF TENNIS 15

hand and touches the net before the ball has bounced. Is this a service fault, or does
the server lose the point?
Decision: The server loses the point because the racket touches the net while the
ball is in play.
Case 2: After the server has served a first service, the racket falls out of the server’s
hand and touches the net after the ball has bounced outside the correct service court.
Is this a service fault, or does the server lose the point?
Decision. This is a service fault because when the racket touched the net the ball
was no longer in play.
Case 3. In a doubles match, the receiver’s partner touches the net before the ball
that has been served touches the ground outside the correct service court. What is the
correct decision?
Decision. The receiving team loses the point because the receiver’s partner
touched the net while the ball was in play.
Case 4: Does a player lose the point if an imaginary line in the extension of the net
is crossed before or after hitting the ball?
Decision: The player does not lose the point in either case provided the player
does not touch the opponent’s court.
Case 5. Is a player allowed to jump over the net into the opponent’s court while
the ball is in play?
Decision. No. The player loses the point.
Case 6. A player throws the racket at the ball in play. Both the racket and the ball
land in the court on the opponent’s side of the net and the opponent(s) is unable to
reach the ball. Which player wins the point?
Decision. The player who threw the racket at the ball loses the point.
Case 7. A ball that has just been served hits the receiver or in doubles the receiver’s
partner before it touches the ground. Which player wins the point?
Decision. The server wins the point, unless it is a service let.
Case 8. A player standing outside the court hits the ball or catches it before it
bounces and claims the point because the ball was definitely going out of the correct
court.
Decision. The player loses the point, unless it is a good return, in which case the
point continues.
USTA Comment 24.1: Does a player lose the point if the player’s hat hits
the net? Yes. A player loses the point when any part of the player’s body,
equipment, or apparel touches the net.
USTA Comment 24.2: What happens if the ball hits a player’s hat that
landed on the court earlier in the point? The ball remains in
play because the opponent did not ask for a let. When play continued after
the hat landed on the court, the hat became a part of the court. Therefore
when a ball hits the hat, it is treated in the same manner as if the ball had hit
the court.
USTA Comment 24.3: If a player’s hat falls off during a point, may the
opponent stop play and claim a let? Yes. The opponent’s immediate request
should be granted. A let should not be granted after the point nor should a
request from the player who lost the hat.
16 RULES OF TENNIS

USTA Comment 24.4: What happens if a player’s damping
device comes out and hits the net or the opponent’s court? The player loses
the point unless the ball went out of play before the device hit the net or
court. If the device is not discovered until after the point is over, the point
stands as played.
USTA Comment 24.5: Does a player lose a point if the ball hits his
racket twice during one swing? No. Only when there is a definite and
deliberate “second push” by the player does the shot become illegal.
“Deliberately” is the key word in this rule. Two hits occurring during a single
continuous swing are not deemed a double hit.
USTA Comment 24.6: Does the clashing of rackets make the return
illegal? No. Unless it is clear that more than one racket touched the ball.
USTA Comment 24.7: Does a player who touches a pipe support that runs
across the court at the bottom of the net lose the point? Yes. The pipe support
is considered a part of the net except when a ball hits it, in which case the
pipe support is considered part of the court.
USTA Comment 24.8: What happens if a player stretches to hit a ball,
the racket falls to the ground, and the ball then goes into the court for a
winner? The player wins the point unless the racket was not in the player’s
hand at the instant the ball was struck.
25. A GOOD RETURN
It is a good return if:
a. The ball touches the net, net posts/singles sticks, cord or metal cable, strap
or band, provided that it passes over any of them and hits the ground within
the correct court; except as provided in Rule 2 and 24 (d); or
b. After the ball in play has hit the ground within the correct court and has spun
or been blown back over the net, the player reaches over the net and plays the
ball into the correct court, provided that the player does not break Rule 24; or
c. The ball is returned outside the net posts, either above or below the level
of the top of the net, even though it touches the net posts, provided that it
hits the ground in the correct court; except as provided in Rules 2 and 24
(d); or
d. The ball passes under the net cord between the singles stick and the adjacent
net post without touching either net, net cord or net post and hits the ground
in the correct court; or
e. The player’s racket passes over the net after hitting the ball on the player’s
own side of the net and the ball hits the ground in the correct court; or
f. The player hits the ball in play, which hits another ball lying in the correct
court.
Case 1: A player returns a ball which then hits a singles stick and hits the ground
in the correct court. Is this is a good return?
Decision: Yes. However, if the ball is served and hits the singles stick, it is a service
fault.
RULES OF TENNIS 17

Case 2: A ball in play hits another ball which is lying in the correct court. What is
the correct decision?
Decision: Play continues. However, if it is not clear that the actual ball in play has
been returned, a let should be called.
USTA Comment 25.1: What happens if the ball in play strikes a ball that
came from another court after the start of the point? Replay the point.
USTA Comment 25.2: Must a request to remove a ball that is lying in the
opponent’s court be honored? Yes, but not while the ball is in play.
Additionally, a request to remove a ball that is outside the court but reasonably
close to the lines also must be honored.
USTA Comment 25.3: In doubles is it a good return if a ball passes
under the net cord and inside the post without touching either in a doubles
match? No. This is a “through.”
USTA Comment 25.4: Does a player lose the point if the opponent’s ball
touches a pipe support that runs across the court at the bottom of the net?
No. The pipe support is considered a part of the court except that it is considered
part of the net when a player, or anything the player wears or carries, touches
the pipe support.
26. HINDRANCE
If a player is hindered in playing the point by a deliberate act of the opponent(s),
the player shall win the point.
However, the point shall be replayed if a player is hindered in playing the point by
either an unintentional act of the opponent(s), or something outside the player’s own
control (not including a permanent fixture).
Case 1: Is an unintentional double hit a hindrance?
Decision: No. See also Rule 24 (f).
Case 2: A player claims to have stopped play because the player thought that the
opponent(s) was being hindered. Is this a hindrance?
Decision: No, the player loses the point.
Case 3: A ball in play hits a bird flying over the court. Is this a hindrance?
Decision: Yes, the point shall be replayed.
Case 4: During a point, a ball or other object that was lying on the player’s side of
the net when the point started hinders the player. Is this a hindrance?
Decision: No.
Case 5: In doubles, where are the server’s partner and receiver’s partner allowed
to stand?
Decision: The server’s partner and the receiver’s partner may take any position on
their own side of the net, inside or outside the court. However, if a player is creating a
hindrance to the opponent(s), the hindrance rule should be used.
USTA Comment 26.1: What is the difference between a deliberate and an
unintentional act? Deliberate means a player did what the player intended to
do, even if the result was unintended. An example is a player who hits a short
18 RULES OF TENNIS

lob in doubles and loudly shouts “back” just before an opponent hits the
overhead. See The Code § 33. Unintentional refers to an act over which a
player has no control, such as a hat blowing off or a scream after a wasp sting.
USTA Comment 26.2: Can a player’s own action be the basis for that
player claiming a let or a hindrance? No. Nothing a player does entitles that
player to call a let. For example, a player is not entitled to a let because the player
breaks a string, the player’s hat falls off, or a ball in the player’s pocket falls out.
USTA Comment 26.3: What happens if a player’s cell phone
rings or vibrates while the ball is in play? Unless the Referee specifically
authorized the player to wear a cell phone in vibrate mode, the player caused
a disturbance by bringing the phone to the court and not turning it off. This
amounts to a deliberate hindrance. The opponent may stop play and claim
the point on the grounds of a deliberate hindrance. If the Referee specifically
authorized the player to wear the cell phone in vibrate mode, the opponent
may claim a let on the grounds of unintentional hindrance.
USTA Comment 26.4: Can the server’s discarding of a second ball
constitute a hindrance? Yes. If the receiver or an official asks the server to
stop discarding the ball, then the server shall stop. Any continued
discarding of the ball constitutes a deliberate hindrance, and the server
loses the point.
USTA Comment 26.5: Is an out call or other noise from a spectator a
hindrance that allows a point to be replayed? No. The actions of a spectator
in an area designated for spectators is not the basis for replaying a point.
27. CORRECTING ERRORS
As a principle, when an error in respect of the Rules of Tennis is discovered,
all points previously played shall stand. Errors so discovered shall be corrected as
follows:
a. During a standard game or a tie-break game, if a player serves from the wrong
half of the court, this should be corrected as soon as the error is discovered
and the server shall serve from the correct half of the court according to the
score. A fault that was served before the error was discovered shall stand.
b. During a standard game or a tie-break game, if the players are at the wrong
ends of the court, the error should be corrected as soon as it is discovered and
the server shall serve from the correct end of the court according to the score.
c. If a player serves out of turn during a standard game, the player who was
originally due to serve shall serve as soon as the error is discovered. However,
if a game is completed before the error is discovered the order of service shall
remain as altered. In this case, any ball change to be made after an agreed
number of games should be made one game later than originally scheduled.
A fault that was served by the opponents(s) before the error was discovered
shall not stand.
In doubles, if the partners of one team serve out of turn, a fault that was
served before the error was discovered shall stand.
RULES OF TENNIS 19

d. If a player serves out of turn during a tie-break game and the error is discovered
after an even number of points have been played, the error is corrected
immediately. If the error is discovered after an odd number of points have been
played, the order of service shall remain as altered.
A fault that was served by the opponent(s) before the error was
discovered shall not stand.
In doubles, if the partners of one team serve out of turn, a fault that was
served before the error was discovered shall stand.
e. During a standard game or a tie-break game in doubles, if there is an error in
the order of receiving, this shall remain as altered until the end of the game in
which the error is discovered. For the next game in which they are the receivers
in that set, the partners shall then resume the original order of receiving.
f. If in error a tie-break game is started at 6 games all, when it was previously
agreed that the set would be an “advantage set”, the error shall be corrected
immediately if only one point has been played. If the error is discovered
after the second point is in play, the set will continue as a “tie-break set”.
g. If in error a standard game is started at 6 games all, when it was previously
agreed that the set would be a “tie-break set”, the error shall be corrected
immediately if only one point has been played. If the error is discovered after
the second point is in play, the set will continue as an “advantage set” until
the score reaches 8 games all (or a higher even number), when a tie-break
game shall be played.
h. If in error an “advantage set” or “tie-break set” is started, when it was
previously agreed that the final set would be a match tie-break, the error
shall be corrected immediately if only one point has been played. If the error
is discovered after the second point is in play, the set will continue either
until a player or team wins three games (and therefore the set) or until the
score reaches 2 games all, when a match tie-break shall be played. However,
if the error is discovered after the second point of the fifth game has started,
the set will continue as a “tie-break set”. (See Appendix IV.)
i. If the balls are not changed in the correct sequence, the error shall be
corrected when the player/team who should have served with new balls is
next due to serve a new game. Thereafter the balls shall be changed so that
the number of games between ball changes shall be that originally agreed.
Balls should not be changed during a game.
USTA Comments on Correcting Errors
USTA Comment 27.1: Errors as to Ends, Sides, Rotation, and Service
Order, Etc. The general guiding philosophy regarding any mistakes made by
players in failing to change ends, serving from wrong ends, serving to the
wrong court, receiving from the wrong court, etc., is this: Any such error
shall be rectified as soon as discovered but not while the ball is in play, and
any points completed under the erroneous condition shall be counted.
There are only three exceptions to the “rectify immediately” requirement.
One is in the case of a doubles match where the players of one team happened
to reverse their left court/right court receiving lineup in the middle of a set,
and the switch is discovered in the middle of a game. In this case the players
20 RULES OF TENNIS

finish that game in the “new” positions, but resume their original lineup in
all receiving games thereafter in that set.
The second is where a ball change has not taken place in proper
sequence. Rule 27i now says that this mistake shall be corrected when the
player, or pair in case of doubles, who should have served with the new
balls is next due to serve. Do not change in mid-game.
The third occurs in a tiebreak, either singles or doubles, in various
situations.
USTA Comment 27.2: The tournament announced on its entry form that
a 10-Point Match Tiebreak would be used in lieu of the third set. The players
inadvertently play a regular set until they realize the mistake at 3-0. What
should happen? Since the mistake was discovered before the start of the
fifth game, pursuant to Rule 27h the player who is ahead 3-0 has won the
set and the final set score should be shown as 3-0.
USTA Comment 27.3: The tournament announced on its entry form that
a 10-Point Match Tiebreak would be used in lieu of the third set. The players
inadvertently play a regular set until they realize the mistake at 2-1 and
30-all. What should happen? Since the mistake was discovered before the
start of the fifth game, the players must continue playing until the score
reaches 3-1 or 2-2. If the score reaches 3-1, the player who is ahead wins
the set and the final set score is recorded as 3-1. If the score reaches 2-2,
a 10-Point Match Tiebreak is played. The score is recorded as 3-2(x) with
the score in the 10-Point Match Tiebreak placed inside the parentheses.
USTA Comment 27.4: The tournament announced on its entry form that
a 10-Point Match Tiebreak would be used in lieu of the third set. The players
inadvertently play a regular set until they realize the mistake after the server
has served a first service fault at the beginning of the second point of the
fifth game of the final set. What should happen? Regardless of whether
the score is 2-2, 3-1, or 4-0, the players must continue playing a full set
because they have started the second point of the fifth game. If the score
reaches 6-all the players would play a 7-Point Set Tiebreak. The score is
recorded the same as any other tiebreak set.
USTA Comment 27.5: Player A should have served the first point of the
second set tiebreak, but instead Player B served the first point. Pursuant to
Rule 27d, the order of service remained as altered. Who serves the first game
of the final set? Player B serves the first game. Rule 5b states that the player
whose turn it was to serve first in the set tiebreak shall be the receiver in the
first game of the following set.
USTA Comment 27.6: Same situation as in USTA Comment 27.5 except
that a 10-Point Match Tiebreak is to be played in lieu of the third set. Who
serves first in the 10-Point Match Tiebreak that is to be played in lieu of the
final set? Player B.
RULES OF TENNIS 21

USTA Comment 27.7: The tournament announced that a 10-Point Match
Tiebreak would be played in lieu of the third set. The players split
sets. With Player A ahead 7-5, Player A comes to the net to shake hands with
Player B. Player B refuses to shake hands because Player B contends that
the match tiebreak is not over. What should happen? The players should
keep on playing because the 10-Point Match Tiebreak is not yet over.
USTA Comment 27.8: Same situation as in USTA Comment 27.7 except
that Player B shakes hands. The players report to the Referee that Player A
won the match tiebreak 7-5. Does Player A win the match? Yes. By shaking
hands the players have acknowledged that they agreed the match was over.
Even though the USTA mandates the use of the 10-Point Match Tiebreak,
the 7-Point Tiebreak was played in good faith, so Player A wins the match,
and the final set score should be recorded 1-0(5). See The Code § 2.
USTA Comment 27.9. Matches in a tournament are supposed to be the
best of three tiebreak sets. The players mistakenly start playing a 10-Point
Match Tiebreak in lieu of the final set. The error is discovered after Player A
has served a first service fault at the beginning of the second point of the
10-Point Match Tiebreak. Should the players continue playing a match
tiebreak? Yes. Since the players have started the second point, they must
finish the 10-Point Match Tiebreak.
USTA Comment 27.10. What happens if a match is supposed to be played
with no-ad scoring but the players mistakenly use conventional scoring? All
games played count. All points count. If the score is deuce when the mistake
is discovered, immediately convert to no-ad scoring. Otherwise continue using
conventional scoring until a player wins the game or the score reaches deuce.
If the score reaches deuce, the winner of the next point wins the game. (The
receiver has the choice of sides except in mixed doubles.)
USTA Comment 27.11. What happens if a match is supposed to be played
with short sets but the players mistakenly play a conventional tiebreak set?
(First note that a mistake has not occurred unless one player has won five
games or unless the score is four-all and the players have started to play the
second point of the ninth game.) What should happen depends on the score.
• If the error is discovered when one player leads by two games or
more, stop play and the player in the lead wins the set.
• If the error is discovered when one player leads by one game, play
one more game or complete the game in progress. If the player now
leads by two games, then that player wins the set. If, on the other
hand, the set is now tied, play a 7-Point Set Tiebreak to determine the
winner of the set.
• If the error is discovered when the game score is tied and at least one
point has been played in the next game, complete the game in
progress and one additional game. If one player wins both games,
then that player wins the set. If, on the other hand, the score is now
tied, play a 7-Point Set Tiebreak to determine the winner of the set.
22 RULES OF TENNIS

• If the error is discovered when the score is tied, play a 7-Point Set
Tiebreak to determine the winner of the set.
USTA Comment 27.12. The tournament announced on its entry form that
the Coman Tiebreak Procedure would be used. The players inadvertently use
the conventional procedure. The mistake is discovered at 1-all in the tiebreak.
What should happen? Because the mistake was discovered after the players
had started playing the second point of the tiebreak, the players finish the set
using the conventional tiebreak procedure.
28. ROLE OF COURT OFFICIALS
For matches where officials are appointed, their roles and responsibilities can be
found in Appendix V.
29. CONTINUOUS PLAY
As a principle, play should be continuous, from the time the match starts (when
the first service of the match is put in play) until the match finishes.
a. Between points, a maximum of twenty (20) seconds is allowed. When the
players change ends at the end of a game, a maximum of ninety (90)
seconds are allowed. However, after the first game of each set and during a
tie-break game, play shall be continuous and the players shall change ends
without a rest.
USTA Comment 29.1: The 20-second time limit does not apply if a player
has to chase a stray ball. See Rule 21 and USTA Comments 21.1-7 for more
information about when the server and receiver must be ready.
At the end of each set there shall be a set break of a maximum of one
hundred and twenty (120) seconds.
The maximum time starts from the moment that one point finishes until
the first service is struck for the next point.
Event organisers may apply for ITF approval to extend the ninety (90)
seconds allowed when the players change ends at the end of a game and
the one hundred and twenty (120) seconds allowed at a set break.
b. If, for reasons outside the player’s control, clothing, footwear or necessary
equipment (excluding the racket) is broken or needs to be replaced, the player
may be allowed reasonable extra time to rectify the problem.
USTA Comment 29.2: Reasonable extra time is determined by the official
based on a number of variables such as fairness to the opponent and the
distance between the court and a source for replacement clothing, footwear,
or equipment. Rarely would 15 minutes ever be considered reasonable.
c. No extra time shall be given to allow a player to recover condition. However, a
player suffering from a treatable medical condition may be allowed one
medical timeout of three minutes for the treatment of that medical condition.
A limited number of toilet/change of attire breaks may also be allowed, if this
is announced in advance of the event.
RULES OF TENNIS 23

USTA Comment 29.3: Table 11 in USTA Regulation III.E. allows one or
more “genuine” toilet or change of attire breaks. When possible these breaks
should be taken during a set break. If this is not possible, then the break
should be taken at an odd game changeover. Breaks taken at other times
should be limited to true emergencies. Table 11 does not allow a tournament
to limit the number of breaks. Gastrointestinal problems are medical
conditions that are governed by medical timeout provisions and not by the
toilet break provision.
d. Event organisers may allow a rest period of a maximum of ten (10) minutes
if this is announced in advance of the event. This rest period can be taken
after the 3rd set in a best of 5 sets match, or after the 2nd set in a best of 3
sets match.
USTA Comment 29.4: Table 10 in USTA Regulation III.C. sets forth
provisions for rest between sets in different divisions.
e. The warm-up time shall be a maximum of five (5) minutes, unless
otherwise decided by the event organisers.
USTA Comment 29.5: If there are no ball persons, may the warm-up be
extended beyond five minutes? Yes. The warm-up may be extended to ten
minutes.
USTA Comment 29.6: May play be suspended to replace a lost contact
lens? Yes. Whenever possible the player should replace the lens on the court.
If the weather, court surface, or other conditions make it impossible to insert the
lens on the court, the player should insert the lens in the area closest to the
court where this task is possible.
USTA Comment 29.7: When the weather is misty, may play be suspended
to allow a player who wears glasses to insert contact lenses? No. The player
may change into contacts only on the court and only during a changeover.
This case is different from a lost contact lens because the player chose to
begin playing the match with glasses.
USTA Comment 29.8: See USTA Comment 4.2 for what happens when
a player asks to leave the court to get a replacement racket.
USTA Comment 29.9: When are the players entitled to another warmup
after their match has been suspended? The players are entitled to a
re-warm-up of the same duration as the original warm-up if a match has
been suspended for more than 15 minutes. They are not entitled to a
re-warm-up after an authorized intermission. When possible, used balls
other than the match balls should be used for the re-warm-up, and the
match balls should be used only once play resumes. If match balls are used
for the re-warm-up and balls are being changed after a designated number
of games, the next ball change occurs two games sooner.
24 RULES OF TENNIS

USTA Comment 29.10: A best-of-five sets match with an authorized rest
period after the third set is suspended because of darkness at one set all.
The match is resumed the next day. When Player A wins a long set, Player
B claims entitlement to a rest period. Is Player B entitled to a rest period?
No. Although this was the third set of the match, it was only the first set on
that day. If there is a prolonged interruption, such as one caused by rain, and
play is resumed on the same day, the players should be informed as to the
point at which, if any, a rest period might later be taken.
30. COACHING
Coaching is considered to be communication, advice or instruction of any kind,
audible or visible, to a player.
In team events where there is a team captain sitting on-court, the team captain may
coach the player(s) during a set break and when the players change ends at the end
of a game, but not when the players change ends after the first game of each set and
not during a tie-break game.
In all other matches, coaching is not allowed.
Case 1: Is a player allowed to be coached, if the coaching is given by signals in
a discreet way?
Decision: No.
Case 2: Is a player allowed to receive coaching when play is suspended?
Decision: Yes.
USTA Comment 30.1: A player may bring to the court written notes
that were prepared before the start of the match and may read these notes
during the match. A player may not use electronic devices such as cell
phones, digital messaging systems, radios, mp3 players, cd and dvd
players, cassette players, and any device capable of receiving
communication. Hearing aids and watches not capable of receiving
messages are permitted. A player desiring to use any other electronic
device should first ask the Referee whether the device may be used.
USTA Comment 30.2: Is coaching permitted during authorized rest
periods? Yes. However, an authorized rest period does not include a toilet
break, a 2-minute set break, medical timeout, bleeding timeout, when play
is suspended but the players remain on the court, when a player leaves the
court seeking the assistance of the Referee, or when equipment or clothing
is being adjusted.
USTA Comment 30.3: Is coaching permitted in the USTA League
programs? No. Even though the USTA League programs are team
competitions for adults and seniors, coaching is not permitted under league
rules, except during authorized rest periods or as otherwise permitted.
RULES OF TENNIS 25

RULES OF WHEELCHAIR TENNIS
The game of wheelchair tennis follows the ITF Rules of Tennis with the following
exceptions.
a. The Two Bounce Rule
The wheelchair tennis player is allowed two bounces of the ball. The player
must return the ball before it hits the ground a third time. The second bounce
can be either in or out of the court boundaries.
b. The Wheelchair
The wheelchair is considered part of the body and all applicable rules, which
apply to a player’s body, shall apply to the wheelchair.
c. The Service
i. The service shall be delivered in the following manner. Immediately before
commencing the service, the server shall be in a stationary position. The
server shall then be allowed one push before striking the ball.
ii. The server shall throughout the delivery of the service not touch with any
wheel, any area other than that behind the baseline within the imaginary
extension of the centre mark and sideline.
iii. If conventional methods for the service are physically impossible for a
quadriplegic player, then the player or an individual may drop the ball for
such a player. However, the same method of serving must be used each time.
d. Player Loses Point
A player loses a point if:
i. The player fails to return the ball before it has touched the ground three
times; or
ii. Subject to rule e) below the player uses any part of his feet or lower
extremities as brakes or as stabilisers while delivering service, stroking a
ball, turning or stopping against the ground or against any wheel while the
ball is in play; or
iii. The player fails to keep one buttock in contact with his wheelchair seat
when contacting the ball.
e. Propelling the Chair with the Foot
i. If due to lack of capacity a player is unable to propel the wheelchair via the
wheel then he may propel the wheelchair using one foot.
ii. Even if in accordance with rule e) i. above a player is permitted to propel
the chair using one foot, no part of the player’s foot may be in contact
with the ground:
a) during the forward motion of the swing, including when the racket
strikes the ball;
b) from the initiation of the service motion until the racket strikes the
ball.
iii. A player in breach of this rule shall lose the point.
f. Wheelchair/Able-bodied Tennis
Where a wheelchair tennis player is playing with or against an able-bodied
person in singles or doubles, the Rules of Wheelchair Tennis shall apply for
the wheelchair player while the Rules of Tennis for able-bodied tennis shall
apply for the able-bodied player. In this instance, the wheelchair player is
allowed two bounces while the able-bodied player is allowed only one bounce.
Note: The definition of lower extremities is: -the lower limb, including the buttocks,
hip, thigh, leg, ankle and foot.
26 RULES OF TENNIS

AMENDMENT TO THE RULES OF TENNIS
The official and decisive text to the Rules of Tennis shall be for ever in the English
language and no alteration or interpretation of such Rules shall be made except at an
Annual General Meeting of the Council, nor unless notice of the resolution embodying
such alteration shall have been received by the Federation in accordance with Article
17 of the Constitution of ITF Ltd (Notice of Resolutions) and such resolution or one
having the like effect shall be carried by a majority of two-thirds of the votes recorded
in respect of the same.
Any alteration so made shall take effect as from the first day of January
following unless the Meeting shall by the like majority decide otherwise.
The Board of Directors shall have power, however, to settle all urgent questions
of interpretation subject to confirmation at the General Meeting next following.
This Rule shall not be altered at any time without the unanimous consent of a
General Meeting of the Council.
USTA Comment: The ITF, not the USTA, is responsible for the Rules of
Tennis. Amendments to the Rules of Tennis are made through the
procedures of the ITF. Rule 69 of the ITF controls the manner in which
amendments may be made to the Rules of Tennis. Amendments to USTA
Comments are made by the process described in USTA Regulation XIX.H.
APPENDIX I
THE BALL
For all measurements in Appendix I, SI units shall take precedence.
a. The ball shall have a uniform outer surface consisting of a fabric cover and
shall be white or yellow in colour. If there are any seams they shall be
stitchless.
b. More than one type of ball is specified. The ball shall conform to the
requirements shown in Table 1.
TABLE 1. TENNIS BALL SPECIFICATION
TYPE 1 (FAST) TYPE 2 (MEDIUM) 1 TYPE 3 (SLOW) 2 HIGH ALTITUDE 3
MASS 56.0-59.4 g. 56.0-59.4 g. 56.0-59.4 g. 56.0-59.4 g.
(WEIGHT) (1.975-2.095 oz.) (1.975-2.095 oz.) (1.975-2.095 oz.) (1.975-2.095 oz.)
SIZE 6.54-6.86 cm 6.54-6.86 cm 7.00-7.30 cm 6.54-6.86 cm
(2.57-2.70 in.) (2.57-2.70 in.) (2.76-2.87 in.) (2.57-2.70 in.)
REBOUND 135-147 cm 135-147 cm 135-147 cm 122-135 cm
(53-58 in.) (53-58 in.) (53-58 in.) (48-53 in.)
FORWARD 0.50-0.60 cm 0.56-0.74 cm 0.56-0.74 cm 0.56-0.74 cm
DEFORMATION 4 (0.197-0.236 in.) (0.220-0.291 in.) (0.220-0.291 in.) (0.220-0.291 in.)
RETURN 0.67-0.91 cm 0.80-1.08 cm 0.80-1.08 cm 0.80-1.08 cm
DEFORMATION 4 (0.264-0.358 in.) (0.315-0.425 in.) (0.315-0.425 in.) (0.315-0.425 in.)
RULES OF TENNIS 27

Notes:
1 This ball may be pressurised or pressureless. The pressureless ball shall have an
internal pressure that is no greater than 7 kPa (1 psi) and may be used for high
altitude play above 1,219 m (4,000 feet) above sea level and shall have been
acclimatised for 60 days or more at the altitude of the specific tournament.
2 This ball is also recommended for high altitude play on any court surface type above
1,219 m (4,000 feet) above sea level.
3 This ball is pressurised and is an additional ball specified for high altitude play above
1,219 m (4,000 feet) above sea level only.
4 The deformation shall be the average of a single reading along each of three
perpendicular axes. No two individual readings shall differ by more than .08 cm (.031
inches).
c. In addition the ball shall conform to the requirements for durability as shown
in the following table.
Notes:
1 The largest permissible change in the specified properties resulting from the
durability test described in the current edition of ITF Approved Tennis Balls &
Classified Court Surfaces. The durability test uses laboratory equipment to simulate
the effects of nine games of play.
d. All tests for rebound, mass, size, deformation and durability shall be made in
accordance with the Regulations described in the current edition of ITF
Approved Tennis Balls & Classified Court Surfaces.
CLASSIFICATION OF COURT PACE
The ITF test method used for determining the pace of a court surface is ITF CS
01/02 (ITF Court Pace Rating) as described in the ITF publication entitled “ITF guide
to test methods for tennis court surfaces”.
Court surfaces which have an ITF Court Pace Rating of 0 to 29 shall be classified
as being Category 1 (slow pace). Examples of court surface types which conform to
this classification will include most clay courts and other types of unbound mineral
surface.
Court surfaces which have an ITF Court Pace Rating of 30 to 34 shall be classified
as being Category 2 (medium-slow pace), while court surfaces with an ITF Court Pace
Rating of 35 to 39 shall be classified as being Category 3 (medium pace). Examples
of court surface types which conform to this classification will include most acrylic
coated surfaces plus some carpet surfaces.
Court surfaces with an ITF Court Pace Rating of 40 to 44 shall be classified as
being Category 4 (medium-fast pace), while court surfaces which have an ITF Court
Pace Rating of 45 or more shall be classified as being Category 5 (fast pace). Examples
28 RULES OF TENNIS
FORWARD RETURN
MASS (WEIGHT) REBOUND DEFORMATION DEFORMATION
MAXIMUM 0.4 grams 4.0 cm 0.08 cm 0.10 cm
CHANGE 1 (0.014 oz.) (1.6 inches) (0.031 inches) (0.039 inches)

of court surface types which conform to this classification will include most natural
grass, artificial grass and some carpet surfaces.
Case 1: Which ball type should be used on which court surface?
Decision: 3 different types of balls are approved for play under the Rules of Tennis,
however:
a. Ball Type 1 (fast speed) is intended for play on slow pace court surfaces.
b. Ball Type 2 (medium speed) is intended for play on medium-slow, medium,
and medium-fast pace court surfaces.
c. Ball Type 3 (slow speed) is intended for play on fast pace court surfaces.
APPENDIX II
THE RACKET
For all measurements in Appendix II, SI units shall take precedence.
a. The hitting surface, defined as the main area of the stringing pattern bordered
by the points of entry of the strings into the frame or points of contact of the
strings with the frame, whichever is the smaller, shall be flat and consist of a
pattern of crossed strings connected to a frame and alternately interlaced or
bonded where they cross. The stringing pattern must be generally uniform
and, in particular, not less dense in the centre than in any other area.
The racket shall be designed and strung such that the playing characteristics
are identical on both faces. The racket shall be free of attached objects,
protrusions and devices other than those utilised solely and specifically to
limit or prevent wear and tear or vibration or, for the frame only, to distribute
weight. These objects, protrusions and devices must be reasonable in size
and placement for such purposes.
b. The frame of the racket shall not exceed 73.7 cm (29.0 inches) in overall length,
including the handle. The frame of the racket shall not exceed 31.7 cm (12.5
inches) in overall width. The hitting surface shall not exceed 39.4 cm (15.5
inches) in overall length, and 29.2 cm (11.5 inches) in overall width.
c. The frame, including the handle, and the strings, shall be free of any device
which makes it possible to change materially the shape of the racket, or to
change materially the weight distribution in the direction of the longitudinal
axis of the racket which would alter the swing moment of inertia, or to change
deliberately any physical property which may affect the performance of the
racket during the playing of a point. No energy source that in any way changes
or affects the playing characteristics of a racket may be built into or attached
to a racket.
d. The racket must be free of any device that may provide communication, advice
or instruction of any kind, audible or visible, to a player during a match.
APPENDIX III
ADVERTISING
1. Advertising is permitted on the net as long as it is placed on the part of the
net that is within 3 feet (0.914 m) from the centre of the net posts and is
produced in such a way that it does not interfere with the vision of the players
or the playing conditions.
RULES OF TENNIS 29

2. Advertising and other marks or material placed at the back and sides of the
court shall be permitted unless it interferes with the vision of the players or the
playing conditions.
3. Advertising and other marks or material placed on the court surface outside
the lines is permitted unless it interferes with the vision of the players or the
playing conditions.
4. Notwithstanding paragraphs (1), (2) and (3) above, any advertising, marks or
material placed on the net or placed at the back and sides of the court, or on
the court surface outside the lines may not contain white or yellow or other
light colours that may interfere with the vision of the players or the playing
conditions.
5. Advertising and other marks or material are not permitted on the court surface
inside the lines of the court.
APPENDIX IV
ALTERNATIVE PROCEDURES AND SCORING METHODS
SCORE IN A GAME (Rule 5):
“No-Ad” SCORING METHOD
This alternative scoring method may be used.
A no-ad game is scored as follows with the server’s score being called first:
No point - “Love”
First point - “15”
Second point - “30”
Third point - “40”
Fourth point - “Game”
If both players/teams have won three points each, the score is “deuce” and a
deciding point shall be played. The receiver(s) shall choose whether to receive the
service from the right half or the left half of the court. In doubles, the players of the
receiving team cannot change positions to receive this deciding point. The player/team
who wins the deciding point wins the “game”.
In mixed doubles, the player of the same gender as the server shall receive the
deciding point. The players of the receiving team cannot change positions to receive
the deciding point.
USTA Comment IV.1: USTA Regulation III.G.1. authorizes the Referee
to switch to no-ad scoring before the start of any round without prior notice
in all tournaments other than national junior tournaments after inclement
weather or other factors cause the tournament to fall behind its published
schedule.
USTA Comment IV.2: Traditional scoring or numeric scoring may be used
with the no-ad scoring method.
30 RULES OF TENNIS

SCORE IN A SET (Rules 6 and 7):
1. “SHORT” SETS
The first player/team who wins four games wins that set, provided there is a
margin of two games over the opponent(s). If the score reaches four games all, a tiebreak
game shall be played.
2. MATCH TIE-BREAK (7 POINTS)
When the score in a match is one set all, or two sets all in best of five sets
matches, one tie-break game shall be played to decide the match. This tie-break
game replaces the deciding final set.
The player/team who first wins seven points shall win this match tie-break and the
match provided there is a margin of two points over the opponent(s).
USTA Comment IV.3: USTA Regulation I.E.1.b. prohibits the playing of a
7-Point Tiebreak as the match tiebreak.
3. MATCH TIE-BREAK (10 POINTS)
When the score in a match is one set all, or two sets all in best of five sets
matches, one tie-break game shall be played to decide the match. This tie-break
game replaces the deciding final set.
The player/team who first wins ten points shall win this match tie-break and the
match provided there is a margin of two points over the opponent(s).
Note: When using the match tie-break to replace the final set:
• the original order of service continues. (Rules 5 and 14)
• in doubles, the order of serving and receiving within the team may be
altered, as in the beginning of each set. (Rules 14 and 15)
• before the start of the match tie-break there shall be a 120 seconds set
break.
• balls should not be changed before the start of the match tie-break even
if a ball change is due.
CHANGE OF ENDS (Rule 10) (Coman Tie-Break):
This alternative to the change of ends sequence in a tie-break game may be used.
During a tie-break game, players shall change ends after the first point and
thereafter after every four points.
THE LET DURING A SERVICE (Rule 22):
This alternative is play without the service let in Rule 22a.
It means that a serve that touches the net, strap or band, is in play.
(This alternative is commonly known as the “no let rule.”)
USTA Comment IV.4: If the previous set did not go to a tiebreak, under
Rule 14 the order of service continues. If the previous set went to a
tiebreak, under Rule 5 the player or team that was scheduled to serve first
in the tiebreak receives first in the 10-Point Match Tiebreak.
RULES OF TENNIS 31

USTA Comment IV.5: USTA Regulation I.E.1.b. authorizes the
10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of a deciding final set. USTA Regulation
III.G.2. explains when the Referee may switch the match format to a
10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of a deciding final set.
Table 18 lists the USTA Junior National Championships in which the
10-Point Match Tiebreak is played in lieu of a deciding final set. If there is
inclement weather, health concerns, or safety concerns, the Director of Junior
Competition or the Director’s Designee may authorize the Referee to play a
10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of a deciding final set at USTA Junior National
Championships and USTA Regional Tournaments. See USTA Regulation
IX.A.7.
USTA Regulation XI.A.2.h. explains when 10-Point Match Tiebreaks may
be played in lieu of a deciding final set at USTA Adult and Senior National
Championships. USTA Regulation XIII.A.3.h. explains when 10-Point Match
Tiebreaks may be played in lieu of a deciding final set at USTA Wheelchair
National Championships.
32 RULES OF TENNIS
APPENDIX V
ROLE OF COURT OFFICIALS
The Referee is the final authority on all questions of tennis law and the Referee’s
decision is final.
In matches where a Chair Umpire is assigned, the Chair Umpire is the final
authority on all questions of fact during the match.
The players have the right to call the Referee to court if they disagree with a Chair
Umpire’s interpretation of tennis law.
In matches where Line Umpires and Net Umpires are assigned, they make all calls
(including foot-fault calls) relating to that line or net. The Chair Umpire has the right
to overrule a Line Umpire or a Net Umpire if the Chair Umpire is sure that a clear
mistake has been made. The Chair Umpire is responsible for calling any line (including
foot-faults) or net where no Line Umpire or Net Umpire is assigned.
A Line Umpire who cannot make a call shall signal this immediately to the Chair
Umpire who shall make a decision. If the Line Umpire can not make a call, or if there
is no Line Umpire, and the Chair Umpire can not make a decision on a question of fact,
the point shall be replayed.
In team events where the Referee is sitting on-court, the Referee is also the final
authority on questions of fact.
Play may be stopped or suspended at any time the Chair Umpire decides it is
necessary or appropriate.
The Referee may also stop or suspend play in the case of darkness, weather or
adverse court conditions. When play is suspended for darkness, this should be
done at the end of a set, or after an even number of games have been played in the
set in progress. After a suspension in play, the score and position of players oncourt
in the match shall stand when the match resumes.
The Chair Umpire or Referee shall make decisions regarding continuous play and

coaching in respect of any Code of Conduct that is approved and in operation.
Case 1: The Chair Umpire awards the server a first service after an overrule, but
the receiver argues that it should be a second service, since the server had already
served a fault. Should the Referee be called to court to give a decision?
Decision: Yes. The Chair Umpire makes the first decision about questions of tennis
law (issues relating to the application of specific facts). However, if a player appeals
the Chair Umpire’s decision, then the Referee shall be called to make the final decision.
Case 2: A ball is called out, but a player claims that the ball was good. May the
Referee be called to court to make a decision?
Decision: No. The Chair Umpire makes the final decision on questions of fact
(issues relating to what actually happened during a specific incident).
Case 3: Is a Chair Umpire allowed to overrule a Line Umpire at the end of a point
if, in the Chair Umpire’s opinion, a clear mistake was made earlier in the point?
Decision: No. A Chair Umpire may only overrule a Line Umpire immediately after
the clear mistake has been made.
Case 4: A Line Umpire calls a ball “Out” and then the player argues that the ball
was good. Is the Chair Umpire allowed to overrule the Line Umpire?
Decision: No. A Chair Umpire must never overrule as the result of the protest or
appeal by a player.
Case 5: A Line Umpire calls a ball “Out”. The Chair Umpire was unable to see
clearly, but thought the ball was in. May the Chair Umpire overrule the Line Umpire?
Decision: No. The Chair Umpire may only overrule when sure that the Line Umpire
made a clear mistake.
Case 6: Is a Line Umpire allowed to change the call after the Chair Umpire has
announced the score?
Decision: Yes. If a Line Umpire realises a mistake, a correction should be made as
soon as possible provided it is not as the result of a protest or appeal of a player.
Case 7: If a Chair Umpire or Line Umpire calls “out” and then corrects the call to
good, what is the correct decision?
Decision: The Chair Umpire must decide if the original “out” call was a
hindrance to either player. If it was a hindrance, the point shall be replayed. If it was
not a hindrance, the player who hit the ball wins the point.
Case 8: A ball is blown back over the net and the player correctly reaches over the
net to try to play the ball. The opponent(s) hinders the player from doing this. What
is the correct decision?
Decision: The Chair Umpire must decide if the hindrance was deliberate or
unintentional and either awards the point to the hindered player or order the point to
be replayed.
USTA Comment V.1: What is the difference between a “question of
fact” and a “question of law”? “Questions of fact” involve whether a specific
event happened. Examples include whether a ball is in, whether a ball
touched a player, whether a ball bounced twice, and whether a server’s foot
touched the baseline before the serve was struck. “Questions of law”
involve the application of the rules or regulations to facts that have already
been determined. Examples include determining whether an act was a
hindrance; whether a player should have been assessed a code violation for
misconduct; and the procedure for correcting errors in serving order,
serving and receiving position, and ends.
RULES OF TENNIS 33

BALL MARK INSPECTION PROCEDURES
1. Ball mark inspections can only be made on clay courts.
2. A ball mark inspection requested by a player (team) shall be allowed only if the
Chair Umpire cannot determine the call with certainty from his/her chair on
either a point-ending shot or when a player (team) stops playing the point
during a rally (returns are permitted but then the player must immediately stop).
3. When the Chair Umpire has decided to make a ball mark inspection, he/she
should go down from the chair and make the inspection himself. If he/she
does not know where the mark is, he/she can ask the Line Umpire for help
in locating the mark, but then the Chair Umpire shall inspect it.
4. The original call or overrule will always stand if the Line Umpire and Chair
Umpire cannot determine the location of the mark or if the mark is unreadable.
5. Once the Chair Umpire has identified and ruled on a ball mark, this decision
is final and not appealable.
6. In clay court tennis the Chair Umpire should not be too quick to announce
the score unless absolutely certain of the call. If in doubt, wait before calling
the score to determine whether a ball mark inspection is necessary.
7. In doubles the appealing player must make his/her appeal in such a way
that either play stops or the Chair Umpire stops play. If an appeal is made
to the Chair Umpire then he/she must first determine that the correct appeal
procedure was followed. If it was not correct or if it was late, then the Chair
Umpire may determine that the opposing team was deliberately hindered.
8. If a player erases the ball mark before the Chair Umpire has made a final
decision, he/she concedes the call.
9. A player may not cross the net to check a ball mark without being subject
to the Unsportsmanlike provision of the Code of Conduct.
USTA Comment: See FAC Comment VII.C-6 for additional procedures.
ELECTRONIC REVIEW PROCEDURES
At tournaments where an Electronic Review System is used, the following
procedures should be followed for matches on courts where it is used.
1. A request for an Electronic Review of a line call or overrule by a player (team)
shall be allowed only on either a point-ending shot or when a player (team)
stops playing the point during a rally (returns are permitted but then the
player must immediately stop).
2. The Chair Umpire should decide to use the Electronic Review when there is
doubt about the accuracy of the line call or overrule. However, the Chair
Umpire may refuse the Electronic Review if he/she believes that the player is
making an unreasonable request or that it was not made in a timely manner.
3. In doubles the appealing player must make his/her appeal in such a way that
either play stops or the Chair Umpire stops play. If an appeal is made to the
Chair Umpire then he/she must first determine that the correct appeal
procedure was followed. If it was not correct or if it was late, then the Chair
Umpire may determine that the opposing team was deliberately hindered, in
which case the appealing team loses the point.
4. The original call or overrule will always stand if the Electronic Review is
unable, for whatever reason, to make a decision on that line call or overrule.
34 RULES OF TENNIS

5. The Chair Umpire’s final decision will be the outcome of the Electronic Review
and is not appealable. If a manual choice is required for the system to review
a particular ball impact, a review official approved by the Referee shall decide
which ball impact is reviewed.
6. Each player (team) is allowed three (3) unsuccessful appeals per set, plus
one (1) additional appeal in the tie-break. For matches with advantage sets,
players (teams) will start again with a maximum of 3 unsuccessful appeals
at 6 games all and every 12 games thereafter. For matches with match tiebreak,
the match tie-break counts as a new set and each player (team) starts
with three (3) appeals. Players (teams) will have an unlimited number of
successful appeals.
APPENDIX VI
OFFICIAL 10 AND UNDER TENNIS COMPETITION
COURTS
In addition to a full sized court, the following court dimensions may be used for
official competitive play involving players aged 10 and under:
• A court, designated “red” for the purpose of 10 and under competition, shall
be a rectangle, between 36 feet (10.97 m) and 42 feet (12.80 m) long, and
between 16 feet (4.88 m) and 19 feet (5.79 m) wide. The net shall be 31.5
inches (0.80 m) high at the centre.
• A court, designated “orange”, shall be a rectangle, 60 feet (18.29 m) long,
and between 21 feet (6.40 m) and 27 feet (8.23 m) wide. The net shall be
between 31.5 inches (0.80 m) and 36.0 inches (0.914 m) high at the centre.
BALLS
The following ball types are recommended for players aged 10 and under:
• A stage 3 (red) ball is recommended for play on a “red” court.
• A stage 2 (orange) ball is recommended for play on an “orange” court.
• A stage 1 (green) ball is recommended for play on a full sized court.
The properties of stage 3, stage 2 and stage 1 balls are described in the ITF
publication entitled “ITF approved tennis balls & classified court surfaces”.
SCORING METHODS
For competition involving players aged 10 and under using stage 3 (red), stage 2
(orange) or stage 1 (green) balls, scoring methods specified in the Rules of Tennis
(including the Appendix) can be utilised, in addition to short duration scoring methods
involving matches of one match tie-break, best of 3 tie-breaks/match tie-breaks or
one set.
RULES OF TENNIS 35

APPENDIX VII
PROCEDURES FOR REVIEW AND HEARINGS ON THE RULES OF TENNIS
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 These procedures were approved by the Board of Directors of the
International Tennis Federation (“Board of Directors”) on 17 May 1998.
1.2 The Board of Directors may from time to time supplement, amend, or vary
these procedures.
2. OBJECTIVES
2.1 The International Tennis Federation is the custodian of the Rules of Tennis
and is committed to:
a. Preserving the traditional character and integrity of the game of tennis.
b. Actively preserving the skills traditionally required to play the game.
c. Encouraging improvements, which maintain the challenge of the game.
d. Ensuring fair competition.
2.2 To ensure fair, consistent and expeditious review and hearings in relation to
the Rules of Tennis the procedures set out below shall apply.
3. SCOPE
3.1 These Procedures shall apply to Rulings under:
a. Rule 1—The Court.
b. Rule 3—The Ball.
c. Rule 4—The Racket.
d. Appendix I and II of the Rules of Tennis.
e. Any other Rules of Tennis which the International Tennis Federation may
decide.
4. STRUCTURE
4.1 Under these procedures Rulings shall be issued by a Ruling Board.
4.2 Such Rulings shall be final save, for an entitlement to appeal to an Appeal
Tribunal pursuant to these procedures.
5. APPLICATION
5.1 Rulings shall be taken either:
a. Following a motion of the Board of Directors; or
b. Upon the receipt of an application in accordance with the procedures set
out below.
6. APPOINTMENT AND COMPOSITION OF RULING BOARDS
6.1 Ruling Boards shall be appointed by the President of the International Tennis
Federation (“President”) or his designee and shall comprise of such a number, as the
President or his designee shall determine.
6.2 If more than one person is appointed to the Ruling Board the Ruling
Board shall nominate one person from amongst themselves to act as Chairperson.
36 RULES OF TENNIS

6.3 The Chairperson shall be entitled to regulate the procedures prior to and at
any review and/or hearing of a Ruling Board.
7. PROPOSED RULINGS BY THE RULING BOARD
7.1 The details of any proposed Ruling issued upon the motion of the Board of
Directors may be provided to any bona fide person or any players, equipment
manufacturer or national association or members thereof with an interest in the
proposed Ruling.
7.2 Any person so notified shall be given a reasonable period within which to
forward comments, objections, or requests for information to the President or his
designee in connection with the proposed Ruling.
8. APPLICATION FOR RULINGS
8.1 An application for a Ruling may be made by any party with a bona fide
interest in the Ruling including any player, equipment manufacturer or national
association or member thereof.
8.2 Any application for a Ruling must be submitted in writing to the President.
8.3 To be valid an application for a Ruling must include the following minimum
information:
a. The full name and address of the Applicant.
b. The date of the application.
c. A statement clearly identifying the interest of the Applicant in the
question upon which a Ruling is requested.
d. All relevant documentary evidence upon which the Applicant intends to
rely at any hearing.
e. If, in the opinion of the Applicant, expert evidence is necessary he shall
include a request for such expert evidence to be heard. Such request
must identify the name of any expert proposed and their relevant
expertise.
f. When an application for a Ruling on a racket or other piece of equipment
is made, a prototype or, exact, copy of the equipment in question must
be submitted with the application for a Ruling.
g. If, in the opinion of the Applicant, there are extraordinary or unusual
circumstances, which require a Ruling to be made within a specified time
or before a specified date he shall include a statement describing the
extraordinary or unusual circumstances.
8.4 If an application for a Ruling does not contain the information and/or
equipment referred to at Clause 8.3 (a)-(g) above the President or his designee
shall notify the Applicant giving the Applicant a specified reasonable time within which
to remedy the defect. If the Applicant fails to remedy the defect within the specified
time the application shall be dismissed.
9. CONVENING THE RULING BOARD
9.1 On receipt of a valid application or on the motion of the Board of Directors
the President or his designee may convene a Ruling Board to deal with the application
or motion.
RULES OF TENNIS 37

9.2 The Ruling Board need not hold a hearing to deal with an application or
motion where the application or motion, in the opinion of the Chairperson can be
resolved in a fair manner without a hearing.
10. PROCEDURE OF THE RULING BOARD
10.1 The Chairperson of a Ruling Board shall determine the appropriate form,
procedure and date of any review and/or hearing.
10.2 The Chairperson shall provide written notice of those matters set out at 10.1
above to any Applicant or any person or association who has expressed an interest
in the proposed Ruling.
10.3 The Chairperson shall determine all matters relating to evidence and shall not
be bound by judicial rules governing procedure and admissibility of evidence provided
that the review and/or hearing is conducted in a fair manner with a reasonable
opportunity for the relevant parties to present their case.
10.4 Under these procedures any review and/or hearings:
a. Shall take place in private.
b. May be adjourned and/or postponed by the Ruling Board.
10.5 The Chairperson shall have the discretion to co-opt from time to time
additional members onto the Ruling Board with special skill or experience to deal with
specific issues, which require such special skill or experience.
10.6 The Ruling Board shall take its decision by a simple majority. No member
of the Ruling Board may abstain.
10.7 The Chairperson shall have the complete discretion to make such order
against the Applicant [and/or other individuals or organisations commenting
objecting or requesting information at any review and/or hearing] in relation to the
costs of the application and/or the reasonable expenses incurred by the Ruling
Board in holding tests or obtaining reports relating to equipment subject to a Ruling
as he shall deem appropriate.
11. NOTIFICATION
11.1 Once a Ruling Board has reached a decision it shall provide written notice
to the Applicant, or, any person or association who has expressed an interest in the
proposed Ruling as soon as reasonably practicable.
11.2 Such written notice shall include a summary of the reasoning behind the
decision of the Ruling Board.
11.3 Upon notification to the Applicant or upon such other date specified by the
Ruling Board the Ruling of the Ruling Board shall be immediately binding under the
Rules of Tennis.
12. APPLICATION OF CURRENT RULES OF TENNIS
12.1 Subject to the power of the Ruling Board to issue interim Rulings the
current Rules of Tennis shall continue to apply until any review and/or hearing of
the Ruling Board is concluded and a Ruling issued by the Ruling Board.
12.2 Prior to and during any review and/or hearing the Chairperson of the Ruling
Board may issue such directions as are deemed reasonably necessary in the
implementation of the Rules of Tennis and of these procedures including the issue of
interim Rulings.
38 RULES OF TENNIS

12.3 Such interim Rulings may include restraining orders on the use of any
equipment under the Rules of Tennis pending a Ruling by the Ruling Board as to
whether or not the equipment meets the specification of the Rules of Tennis.
13. APPOINTMENT AND COMPOSITION OF APPEAL TRIBUNALS
13.1 Appeal Tribunals shall be appointed by the President or his designee from
[members of the Board of Directors/Technical Commission].
13.2 No member of the Ruling Board who made the original Ruling shall be a
member of the Appeal Tribunal.
13.3 The Appeal Tribunal shall comprise of such number as the President or his
designee shall determine but shall be no less than three.
13.4 The Appeal Tribunal shall nominate one person from amongst themselves
to act as Chairperson.
13.5 The Chairperson shall be entitled to regulate the procedures prior to and at
any appeal hearing.
14. APPLICATION TO APPEAL
14.1 An Applicant [or a person or association who has expressed an interest and
forwarded any comments, objections, or requests to a proposed Ruling] may appeal
any Ruling of the Ruling Board.
14.2 To be valid an application for an appeal must be:
a. Made in writing to the Chairperson of the Ruling Board who made
the Ruling appealed not later than [45] days following notification of the Ruling;
b. Must set out details of the Ruling appealed against; and
c. Must contain the full grounds of the appeal.
14.3 Upon receipt of a valid application to appeal the Chairperson of the Ruling
Board making the original Ruling may require a reasonable appeal fee to be paid
by the Appellant as a condition of appeal. Such appeal fee shall be repaid to the
Appellant if the appeal is successful.
15. CONVENING THE APPEAL TRIBUNAL
15.1 The President or his designee shall convene the Appeal Tribunal following
payment by the Appellant of any appeal fee.
16. PROCEDURES OF APPEAL TRIBUNAL
16.1 The Appeal Tribunal and their Chairperson shall conduct procedures and
hearings in accordance with those matters set out in sections 10, 11 and 12 above.
16.2 Upon notification to the Appellant or upon such other date specified by the
Appeal Tribunal the Ruling of the Appeal Tribunal shall be immediately binding and final
under the Rules of Tennis.
17. GENERAL
17.1 If a Ruling Board consists of only one member that single member shall
be responsible for regulating the hearing as Chairperson and shall determine the
procedures to be followed prior to and during any review and/or hearing.
17.2 All review and/or hearings shall be conducted in English. In any hearing
where an Applicant, and/or other individuals or organisations commenting,
RULES OF TENNIS 39

objecting or requesting information do not speak English an interpreter must be
present. Wherever practicable the interpreter shall be independent.
17.3 The Ruling Board or Appeal Tribunal may publish extracts from its own
Rulings.
17.4 All notifications to be made pursuant to these procedures shall be in writing.
17.5 Any notifications made pursuant to these procedures shall be deemed
notified upon the date that they were communicated, sent or transmitted to the
Applicant or other relevant party.
17.6 A Ruling Board shall have the discretion to dismiss an application if in its
reasonable opinion the application is substantially similar to an application or motion
upon which a Ruling Board has made a decision and/or Ruling within the 36 months
prior to the date of the application.
40 RULES OF TENNIS

78'0" 23.77m)
PLAN OF THE COURT
Note: All court measurements shall be made to the outside of the lines.
Fig. 1
Baseline
36'0'' (10.97m)
Serviceline
3'0" (.914m) Net
Net
3'0"(.914m)
➤
➤
• •
• •
➤
Net post
Doubles sideline
Singles stick
Singles sideline
➤
➤
Centre mark
21'0" (6.40m)
Centre serviceline
Serviceline
27'0" (8.23m)
Centre Mark
➤
Singles sideline
Singles stick
4'6" (1.37m) Baseline
4'6" (1.37m)
➤
➤
Doubles sideline
Net post
RULES OF TENNIS 41

36'0" (10.97m)
Note: All court measurements shall be made to the outside of the lines.
The following procedure is for the usual combined doubles and singles court.
(See note at foot for a court for one purpose only.)
First select the position of the net; a straight line 42 feet (12.80 m) long. Mark the
centre (X on the diagram above) and, measuring from there in each direction, mark:
at 13'6" (4.11 m) the points a, b, where the net crosses the inner sidelines,
at 16'6" (5.03 m) the positions of the singles sticks (n, n),
at 18'0" (5.48 m) the points A, B, where the net crosses the outer sidelines,
at 21'0" (6.40 m) the positions of the net posts (N, N), being the ends of the
original 42'0" (12.80 m) line.
Insert pegs at A and B and attach to them the respective ends of two measuring
tapes. On one, which will measure the diagonal of the half-court,take a length 53'1"
(16.18 m) and on the other (to measure the sideline) a length of 39'0" (11.89 m). Pull
both taut so that at these distances they meet at a point C, which is one corner of the
court. Reverse the measurements to find the other corner D. As a check on this
operation it is advisable at this stage to verify the length of the line CD which, being
the baseline, should be found to be 36'0" (10.97m); and at the same time its centre J
can be marked, and also the ends of the inner sidelines (c, d), 4'6" (1.37 m) from C
and D.
The centreline and serviceline are now marked by means of the points F, H, G,
which are measured 21'0" (6.40 m) from the net down the lines bc, XJ, ad, respectively.
Identical procedure the other side of the net completes the court.
If a singles court only is required, no lines are necessary outside the points a, b,
42 RULES OF TENNIS
SUGGESTIONS ON HOW TO MARK OUT A COURT
N•
A D
n
a G 4'6" (1.37m) ➔
d
Net
21'0" (6.40m)
X H J
Centre Serviceline
b
n
B
N
•
Serviceline
Singles sideline
F
Doubles sideline
39'0" (11.885m)
Fig. 2
53'1" (16.18m)
Baseline
c
C

c, d, but the court can be measured out as above. Alternatively, the corners of the
baseline (c, d) can be found if preferred by pegging the two tapes at a and b instead
of at A and B, and by then using lengths of 47'5" (14.46 m) and 39'0" (11.89 m). The
net posts will be at n, n, and a 33'0" (10 m) singles net should be used.
When a combined doubles and singles court with a doubles net is used for
singles, the net must be supported at the points n, n, to a height of 3 feet 6 inches
(1.07 m) by means of two singles sticks, which shall be not more than 3 inches
(7.5 cm) square or 3 inches (7.5 cm) in diameter. The centres of the singles sticks
shall be 3 feet (.914 m) outside the singles court on each side.
To assist in the placing of these singles sticks it is desirable that the points n, n,
should each be shown with a white dot when the court is marked.
Note: As a guide for international competitions, the recommended minimum
distance between the baselines and the backstops should be 21 feet (6.40 m) and
between the sidelines and the sidestops the recommended minimum distance
should be 12 feet (3.66 m).
As a guide for recreational and Club play, the recommended minimum distance
between the baselines and the backstops should be 18 feet (5.48 m) and between
the sidelines and the sidestops the recommended minimum distance should be
10 feet (3.05 m).
As a guide, the recommended minimum top height to the ceiling should be 30 feet
(9.14 m).
RULES OF TENNIS 43

If you have a rules problem, send full details, enclosing a stamped selfaddressed
envelope, to USTA Tennis Rules and Regulations Committee, c/o
Officials Department, 70 West Red Oak Lane, White Plains, NY 10604-3602.
44 RULES OF TENNIS
USTA Comment L.1: Tennis Court Layout
All courts should be laid out for singles and doubles play. The same
lines—except for the sideline extensions for doubles play—are required
for each.
Courts in the northern two-thirds of the United States should generally
be laid out with the long axis north and south; it is advantageous, however,
to orient the courts in the southern one-third of the country 15°-25° west
of true (not magnetic) north in order to minimize the adverse effects of the
afternoon winter sun.
Figure 1 indicates the exact dimensions of the lines as well as
recommended side and back spacing. Note that the dimensions shown in
the diagram are measurements to the outside edge of the lines. For
regulation play, the space behind the baseline (between the baseline and
fence) should not be less than 21 feet, for an overall dimension of 60' x
120'. For stadium courts, this perimeter spacing should be increased to
allow space for Line Umpires without impeding the players. Net posts
should be located with their centers three feet outside the doubles sideline.
Most courts are laid out with lines two inches (2") wide. Lines may be one
inch (1") to two inches (2") wide excepting the center service line which must
be two inches (2") wide and the baselines which may be up to four inches
(4") wide.
For more detailed information on the subject, Tennis Courts, a book
containing United States Tennis Association and American Sports Builders
Association recommendations for the construction, maintenance, and
equipment needs of a tennis court installation, can be obtained by calling
866-501-ASBA.

PART 2—THE CODE
THE PLAYERS’ GUIDE FOR MATCHES WHEN OFFICIALS
ARE NOT PRESENT
PREFACE
When your serve hits your partner stationed at the net, is it a let, fault, or loss of
point? Likewise, what is the ruling when your serve, before touching the ground,
hits an opponent who is standing back of the baseline. The answers to these
questions are obvious to anyone who knows the fundamentals of tennis, but it is
surprising the number of players who don’t know these fundamentals. All players
have a responsibility to be familiar with the basic rules and customs of tennis.
Further, it can be distressing when a player makes a decision in accordance with a
rule and the opponent protests with the remark: “Well, I never heard of that rule
before!” Ignorance of the rules constitutes a delinquency on the part of a player and
often spoils an otherwise good match.
What is written here constitutes the essentials of The Code, a summary of
procedures and unwritten rules that custom and tradition dictate all players should
follow. No system of rules will cover every specific problem or situation that may
arise. If players of good will follow the principles of The Code, they should always
be able to reach an agreement, while at the same time making tennis more fun and
a better game for all. The principles set forth in The Code shall apply in cases not
specifically covered by the ITF Rules of Tennis and USTA Regulations.
Before reading this you might well ask yourself: Since we have a book that
contains all the rules of tennis, why do we need a code? Isn’t it sufficient to know
and understand all the rules? There are a number of things not specifically set forth
in the rules that are covered by custom and tradition only. For example, if you have
a doubt on a line call, your opponent gets the benefit of the doubt. Can you find that
in the rules? Further, custom dictates the standard procedures that players will use
in reaching decisions. These are the reasons we need a code.
—Col. Nick Powel
Note: The Code is not part of the official ITF Rules of Tennis. Players shall follow The
Code in all unofficiated matches. Many of the principles also apply when officials
are present. This edition of The Code is an adaptation of the original, which was
written by Colonel Nicolas E. Powel.
PRINCIPLES
1. Courtesy. Tennis is a game that requires cooperation and Courtesy from all
participants. Make tennis a fun game by praising your opponents’ good shots and
by not:
• Conducting loud postmortems after points;
• Complaining about shots like lobs and drop shots;
• Embarrassing a weak opponent by being overly gracious or
condescending;
• Losing your temper, using vile language, throwing your racket, or
slamming a ball in anger; or
• Sulking when you are losing.
2. Counting points played in good faith. All points played in good faith stand.
THE CODE 45

For example, if after losing a point, a player discovers that the net was four inches
too high, the point stands. If a point is played from the wrong court, there is no
replay. If during a point, a player realizes that a mistake was made at the beginning
(for example, service from the wrong court), the player shall continue playing the
point. Corrective action may be taken only after a point has been completed.
Shaking hands at end of the match is an acknowledgment by the players that
the match is over.
THE WARM-UP
3. Warm-up is not practice. A player should provide the opponent a
5-minute warm-up (ten minutes if there are no ballpersons). If a player refuses to warm
up the opponent, the player forfeits the right to a warm-up. Some players confuse
warm-up and practice. Each player should make a special effort to hit shots directly
to the opponent. (If partners want to warm each other up while their opponents are
warming up, they may do so.)
4. Warm-up serves and returns. A player should take all warm-up serves before
the first serve of the match. A player who returns serves should return them at a
moderate pace in a manner that does not disrupt the Server.
MAKING CALLS
5. Player makes calls on own side of the net. A player calls all shots landing
on, or aimed at, the player’s side of the net.
6. Opponent gets benefit of doubt. When a match is played without officials, the
players are responsible for making decisions, particularly for line calls. There is a
subtle difference between player decisions and those of an on-court official. An
official impartially resolves a problem involving a call, whereas a player is guided by
the unwritten law that any doubt must be resolved in favor of the opponent. A player
in attempting to be scrupulously honest on line calls frequently will find himself
keeping a ball in play that might have been out or that the player discovers too late
was out. Even so, the game is much better played this way.
7. Ball touching any part of line is good. If any part of the ball touches the line,
the ball is good. A ball 99% out is still 100% good.
8. Ball that cannot be called out is good. Any ball that cannot be called out is
considered to have been good. A player may not claim a let on the basis of not seeing
a ball. One of tennis’ most infuriating moments occurs after a long hard rally when a
player makes a clean placement and the opponent says: “I’m not sure if it was good or
out. Let’s play a let.” Remember, it is each player’s responsibility to call all balls landing
on, or aimed at, the player’s side of the net. If a ball can’t be called out with certainty, it
is good. When you say your opponent’s shot was really out but you offer to replay the
point to give your opponent a break, you are deluding yourself because you must have
had some doubt.
9. Calls when looking across a line or when far away. The call of a player looking
down a line is much more likely to be accurate than that of a player looking across a
line. When you are looking across a line, don’t call a ball out unless you can clearly
see part of the court between where the ball hit and the line. It is difficult for a player
who stands on one baseline to question a call on a ball that landed near the other
baseline.
10. Treat all points the same regardless of their importance. All points in a match
should be treated the same. There is no justification for considering a match point
differently than the first point.
46 THE CODE

11. Requesting opponent’s help. When an opponent’s opinion is requested and
the opponent gives a positive opinion, it must be accepted. If neither player has an
opinion, the ball is considered good. Aid from an opponent is available only on a call
that ends a point.
12. Out calls corrected. If a player mistakenly calls a ball “out” and then realizes
it was good, the point shall be replayed if the player returned the ball within the
proper court. Nonetheless, if the player’s return of the ball results in a “weak sitter,”
the player should give the opponent the point. If the player failed to make the return,
the opponent wins the point. If the mistake was made on the second serve, the
Server is entitled to two serves.
13. Player calls own shots out. With the exception of the first serve, a player
should call against himself or herself any ball the player clearly sees out regardless
of whether requested to do so by the opponent. The prime objective in making calls
is accuracy. All players should cooperate to attain this objective.
14. Partners’ disagreement on calls. If one partner calls the ball out and the
other partner sees the ball good, they shall call it good. It is more important to give
your opponents the benefit of the doubt than to avoid possibly hurting your
partner’s feelings. The tactful way to achieve the desired result is to tell your partner
quietly of the mistake and then let your partner concede the point. If a call is changed
from out to good, the principles of Code §12 apply.
15. Audible or visible calls. No matter how obvious it is to a player that the
opponent’s ball is out, the opponent is entitled to a prompt audible or visible out
call.
16. Opponent’s calls questioned. When a player genuinely doubts an opponent’s
call, the player may ask: “Are you sure of your call?” If the opponent reaffirms that
the ball was out, the call shall be accepted. If the opponent acknowledges uncertainty,
the opponent loses the point. There shall be no further delay or discussion.
17. Spectators never to make calls. A player shall not enlist the aid of a spectator
in making a call. No spectator has a part in the match.
18. Prompt calls eliminate two chance option. A player shall make all calls
promptly after the ball has hit the court. A call shall be made either before the player’s
return shot has gone out of play or before the opponent has had the opportunity to
play the return shot.
Prompt calls will quickly eliminate the “two chances to win the point” option
that some players practice. To illustrate, a player is advancing to the net for an easy
put away and sees a ball from an adjoining court rolling toward the court. The player
continues to advance and hits the shot, only to have the supposed easy put away
fly over the baseline. The player then claims a let. The claim is not valid because the
player forfeited the right to call a let by choosing instead to play the ball. The player
took a chance to win or lose and is not entitled to a second chance.
19. Lets called when balls roll on the court. When a ball from an adjacent court
enters the playing area, any player on the court affected may call a let as soon as the
player becomes aware of the ball. The player loses the right to call a let if the player
unreasonably delays in making the call.
20. Touches, hitting ball before it crosses net, invasion of opponent’s court, double
hits, and double bounces. A player shall promptly acknowledge when:
• A ball in play touches the player;
• The player touches the net or opponent’s court while the ball is in play;
• The player hits a ball before it crosses the net;
THE CODE 47

• The player deliberately carries or double hits the ball; or
• The ball bounces more than once in the player’s court.
The opponent is not entitled to make these calls.
21. Balls hit through the net or into the ground. A player makes the ruling on a
ball that the player’s opponent hits:
• Through the net; or
• Into the ground before it goes over the net.
22. Calling balls on clay courts. If any part of the ball mark touches the line on a
clay court, the ball shall be called good. If you can see only part of the mark on the
court, this means that the missing part is on the line or tape. A player should take a
careful second look at any point-ending placement that is close to a line on a clay
court. Occasionally a ball will strike the tape, jump, and then leave a full mark behind
the line. This does not mean that a player is required to show the opponent the mark.
The opponent shall not cross the net to inspect a mark. See USTA Regulation IV.C.8.
If the player hears the sound of the ball striking the tape and sees a clean spot on the
tape near the mark, the player should give the point to the opponent.
SERVING
23. Server’s request for third ball. When a Server requests three balls, the
Receiver shall comply when the third ball is readily available. Distant balls shall be
retrieved at the end of a game.
24. Foot Faults. The Receiver or Receiver’s partner may call foot faults only
after the Server has been warned at least once and the request for an official has
failed. This call should be made only when the Receiver or Receiver’s partner is
absolutely certain and the foot faulting is so flagrant as to be clearly perceptible
from the Receiver’s side. The plea that a Server should not be penalized because
the Server only just touched the line and did not rush the net is not acceptable.
Habitual foot faulting, whether intentional or careless, is just as surely cheating as
is making a deliberate bad line call.
25. Service calls in doubles. In doubles the Receiver’s partner should call the
service line, and the Receiver should call the sideline and the center service line.
Nonetheless, either partner may call a ball that either clearly sees.
26. Service calls by serving team. Neither the Server nor Server’s partner shall
make a fault call on the first service even if they think it is out because the Receiver
may be giving the Server the benefit of the doubt. There is one exception. If the
Receiver plays a first service that is a fault and does not put the return in play, the
Server or Server’s partner may make the fault call. The Server and the Server’s
partner shall call out any second serve that either clearly sees out.
27. Service let calls. Any player may call a service let. The call shall be made before
the return of serve goes out of play or is hit by the Server or the Server’s partner. If the
serve is an apparent or near ace, any let shall be called promptly.
28. Obvious faults. A player shall not put into play or hit over the net an obvious
fault. To do so constitutes rudeness and may even be a form of gamesmanship. On
the other hand, if a player does not call a serve a fault and gives the opponent the
benefit of a close call, the Server is not entitled to replay the point.
29. Receiver readiness. The Receiver shall play to the reasonable pace of the
Server. The Receiver should make no effort to return a serve when the Receiver is
not ready. If a player attempts to return a serve (even if it is a “quick” serve), then
the Receiver (or Receiving team) is presumed to be ready.
48 THE CODE

30. Delays during service. When the Server’s second service motion is
interrupted by a ball coming onto the court, the Server is entitled to two serves.
When there is a delay between the first and second serves:
• The Server gets one serve if the Server was the cause of the delay;
• The Server gets two serves if the delay was caused by the Receiver
or if there was outside interference.
The time it takes to clear a ball that comes onto the court between the first and
second serves is not considered sufficient time to warrant the Server receiving two
serves unless this time is so prolonged as to constitute an interruption. The
Receiver is the judge of whether the delay is sufficiently prolonged to justify giving
the Server two serves.
SCORING
31. Server announces score. The Server shall announce the game score before
the first point of the game and the point score before each subsequent point of the
game.
32. Disputes. Disputes over the score shall be resolved by using one of the
following methods, which are listed in the order of preference:
• Count all points and games agreed upon by the players and replay only
the disputed points or games;
• Play from a score mutually agreeable to all players;
• Spin a racket or toss a coin.
HINDRANCE ISSUES
33. Talking during a point. A player shall not talk while the ball is moving toward
the opponent’s side of the court. If the player’s talking interferes with an opponent’s
ability to play the ball, the player loses the point. Consider the situation where a
player hits a weak lob and loudly yells at his or her partner to get back. If the shout
is loud enough to distract an opponent, then the opponent may claim the point
based on a deliberate hindrance. If the opponent chooses to hit the lob and misses
it, the opponent loses the point because the opponent did not make a timely claim
of hindrance.
34. Body movement. A player may feint with the body while the ball is in play.
A player may change position at any time, including while the Server is tossing the
ball. Any other movement or any sound that is made solely to distract an opponent,
including, but not limited to, waving the arms or racket or stamping the feet, is not
allowed.
35. Lets due to hindrance. A let is not automatically granted because of
hindrance. A let is authorized only if the player could have made the shot had the
player not been hindered. A let is also not authorized for a hindrance caused by
something within a player’s control. For example, a request for a let because the
player tripped over the player’s own hat should be denied.
36. Grunting. A player should avoid grunting and making other loud noises.
Grunting and other loud noises may bother not only opponents but also players on
adjacent courts. In an extreme case, an opponent or a player on an adjacent court
may seek the assistance of the Referee or a Roving Umpire. The Referee or official
may treat grunting and the making of loud noises as a hindrance. Depending upon
the circumstance, this could result in a let or loss of point.
37. Injury caused by a player. When a player accidentally injures an opponent,
THE CODE 49

the opponent suffers the consequences. Consider the situation where the Server’s
racket accidentally strikes the Receiver and incapacitates the Receiver. The Receiver
is unable to resume play within the time limit. Even though the Server caused the
injury, the Server wins the match by retirement.
On the other hand, when a player deliberately injures an opponent and affects the
opponent’s ability to play, then the opponent wins the match by default. Hitting a ball
or throwing a racket in anger is considered a deliberate act.
WHEN TO CONTACT AN OFFICIAL
38. Withdrawing from a match or tournament. A player shall not enter a
tournament and then withdraw when the player discovers that tough opponents
have also entered. A player may withdraw from a match or tournament only because
of injury, illness, or personal emergency. A player who cannot play a match shall
notify the Referee at once so that the opponent may be saved a trip. A player who
withdraws from a tournament is not entitled to the return of the entry fee unless the
player withdrew more than six days before the start of the tournament.
39. Stalling. The following actions constitute stalling :
• Warming up longer than the allotted time;
• Playing at about one-third a player’s normal pace;
• Taking more than 90 seconds on the odd-game changeover; or more than
120 seconds on the set break.
• Taking longer than the authorized 10 minutes during a rest period;
• Starting a discussion or argument in order for a player to catch his or her
breath;
• Clearing a missed first service that doesn’t need to be cleared; and
• Excessive bouncing of the ball before any serve.
A player who encounters a problem with stalling should contact an official.
Stalling is subject to penalty under the Point Penalty System.
40. Requesting an official. While normally a player may not leave the playing
area, the player may contact the Referee or a Roving Umpire to request assistance.
Some reasons for visiting the Referee include:
• Stalling;
• Flagrant foot faults;
• A medical timeout;
• A scoring dispute; and
• A pattern of bad calls.
A player may refuse to play until an official responds.
BALL ISSUES
41. Retrieving stray balls. Each player is responsible for removing stray balls
and other objects from the player’s end of the court. A player’s request to remove a
ball from the opponent’s court must be honored. A player shall not go behind an
adjacent court to retrieve a ball, nor ask a player for return of a ball from players on
an adjacent court until their point is over. When a player returns a ball that comes
from an adjacent court, the player shall wait until their point is over and then return
it directly to one of the players, preferably the Server.
42. Catching a ball. If a player catches a ball before it bounces, the player loses
the point regardless of where the player is standing.
50 THE CODE

43. New balls for a third set. When a tournament specifies new balls for a third
set, new balls shall be used unless all players agree otherwise.
MISCELLANEOUS
44. Clothing and equipment malfunction. If clothing or equipment, other than
a racket, becomes unusable through circumstances outside the control of the player,
play may be suspended for a reasonable period. The player may leave the court after
the point is over to correct the problem. If a racket or string is broken, the player may
leave the court to get a replacement, but the player is subject to code violations
under the Point Penalty System.
45. Placement of towels. Place towels on the ground outside the net post or at
the back fence. Clothing and towels should never be placed on the net.
THE CODE 51

PART 3 — USTA REGULATIONS
All clubs and organizations affiliated with the USTA shall be governed by the USTA
Regulations.
FAC Comment
These regulations often use the term “player.” Where appropriate this term
also refers to a doubles team.
The word “shall” is mandatory. The word “should” is permissive and generally
implies a guideline to be followed whenever possible.
I. PRE-TOURNAMENT REGULATIONS
A. Applicability of USTA Regulations
1. Use in USTA sanctioned tournaments. The USTA Regulations and the ITF
Rules of Tennis shall be observed throughout all sanctioned tournaments
and sanctioned matches.
2. Definition of tournaments. Tournaments refer to all forms of competition
including, but not limited to, tournaments, championships, team
championships, matches, exhibitions, events, intersectionals, international
competitions, and zonals. Tournaments are classified as amateur,
professional, or open.
3. Regulations for USTA tournaments that are part of WTA, ATP, or ITF
circuits. In any USTA sanctioned tournament in which a division is a part
of the WTA or the ATP or is sanctioned by the ITF, that division shall use
the WTA, ATP, or ITF tournament regulations.
FAC Comment I.A-1: Officials may be administering tournaments under the
auspices of ATP, WTA , or ITF organizations whose regulations may be at variance
with USTA Regulations in some respects. In such situations, officials should
reach a clear understanding of these differences before the tournament begins.
Each division must be played entirely under USTA Regulations or entirely under
the WTA, ATP, or ITF tournament regulations. In tournaments played under ITF
tournament regulations, all USTA Regulations not inconsistent with the ITF
tournament regulations apply.
4. Regulations for professional circuits. Organized circuits of professional
tournaments may adopt special tournament regulations to be uniformly
applied throughout each tournament in the circuit, provided that notice thereof
is published with the information for the circuit.
5. Regulations for amateur circuits. Organized circuits of amateur
tournaments may adopt special tournament regulations to be uniformly
applied throughout each tournament in the circuit, provided that the
regulations are not inconsistent with USTA Regulations and that notice
thereof is published with the information for the circuit.
FAC Comment I.A-2: USTA Regulation I.A.5. authorizes Sectional and District
Associations to adopt tournament regulations for circuits used to qualify or
endorse players for Sectional and National Championships.
52 USTA REGULATIONS I.A. (Applicability of USTA Tournament Regulations)

FAC Comment I.A-3: The term “District Associations” applies equally to other
subdivisions of Sectional Associations.
B. Application for Sanction and Appointment of Tournament Committee
Before the start of a tournament, the Organization Member conducting the
tournament shall apply for a sanction (see USTA Regulation XVII) and shall
appoint a Tournament Committee of at least three persons. The Tournament
Chairperson, the Tournament Director, and the Referee shall be members of the
Committee. Neither the Tournament Chairperson nor the Tournament Director
may serve as or assume the responsibilities of the Referee or Deputy Referee,
except that the Tournament Director may serve as the Referee of a tournament
that uses a QuickStart Tennis format.
C. Tournament Committee
1. Tournament Committee duties. The Tournament Committee supervises all
administrative details of the tournament including the extent to which
officials will be used. It has broad discretionary powers in carrying out its
functions in all cases not covered by the ITF Rules of Tennis or USTA
Regulations. The responsibilities of the Tournament Committee include
the responsibilities listed in Table 2.
USTA
Reg.
I.B.,I.C.2.&
XVII.A.3.
II.D.13. &
III.A.4.
I.H.1.
I.H.2.
I.H.2.
I.H.3-4.
I.H.8.
I.H.3.
I.H.4.
I.C.1.
I.H.2.
I.C.4.
I.D.
II.B.1.
TABLE 2
Responsibilities of Tournament Committee
A. Pre-Tournament (USTA Regulation I.C.)
Obtains any required USTA sanction
Arranges for enough courts so that the tournament can be completed on
time and so the Referee can schedule matches in each division on the
same surface type
Determines the means of entering the tournament
Makes decisions about the basic format and structure of the tournament
so that the information that USTA Regulation I.H.2. requires to be on the
written entry form and website can be published
When possible publishes any tournament requirement for verification of
injury or illness or providing a description of personal emergency
Accepts the entries
Refunds entry fees when USTA Regulation I.H.8. requires it
Provides the Referee with a complete list of entrants
Provides the Referee with a list of alternates in priority order
Determines the extent to which officials will be used
Determines type of ball to be used. See USTA Regulation I.F.1-2.
Appoints Deputy Referee (shared responsibility with Referee)
Appoints a Tournament Appeals Committee to hear appeals
B. Making the Draw (USTA Regulation II.)
Determines the time and public place where the draw will be made
USTA REGULATIONS I.C. (Tournament Committee) 53

USTA
Reg.
II.B.2.
II.A.1.
IV.A.1.
III.A.1.
III.A.3.
III.A.2.
III.A.4.
III.A.4.
IV.C.15.
V.A.1.
V.A.2.
TABLE 2 (Cont’d)
Assigns at least one Tournament Committee member to assist the Referee
or Deputy Referee in making the draw
Determines the seedings except in certain national junior events in which
the Director of Junior Competition or the Director’s designee determines the
seedings after consulting with the Tournament Committee. See USTA
Regulation VII.A.4.
C. Conducting the Tournament (USTA Regulation III.A.)
Assures that all American players are USTA members
Keeps order on the grounds
Provides the tennis balls
Provides supplies including singles sticks
Authorizes play in a division on more than one surface type, but only when
specifically authorized by USTA Regulation III.A.4.
If there is no practicable way to finish an event, makes arrangements
mutually agreeable to the players to finish at a later date or declares the
tournament unfinished. See USTA Regulation III.A.4.
When authorized and appropriate, waives the requirement for verification
of injury or illness or providing a description of personal emergency
D. After the Tournament (USTA Regulation V.A.)
Submits draw sheets to the governing body that issued the sanction within
seven days
Reports on players whose prize money was withheld
FAC Comment I.C-1: The Tournament Committee should familiarize itself with
the USTA Emergency Care Guidelines. See Part 4.
2. Tournament Chairperson. The Tournament Chairperson is the head of the
Tournament Committee. This person is the official representative of the
Organization Member’s Tournament Committee to the USTA, Sectional
Associations, and District Associations. Normally the Organization Member
submits its sanction application or tournament bid through its Tournament
Chairperson. The Tournament Chairperson may not serve as or assume the
responsibilities of the Referee or Deputy Referee, except that the Tournament
Chairperson may serve as the Referee of a tournament that uses a
QuickStart format.
3. Tournament Director. The Tournament Director serves as the chief executive
officer for the Tournament Committee and is directly responsible for the
administrative details of the tournament. In many, but not all, tournaments
the Tournament Chairperson also serves as the Tournament Director. The
Tournament Director may not serve as or assume the responsibilities of the
Referee or Deputy Referee, except that the Tournament Director may serve
as the Referee of a tournament that uses a QuickStart Tennis format.
4. Referee and Deputy Referee. The Referee is a member of the Tournament
Committee. The Referee is the official who is responsible for assuring that the
54 USTA REGULATIONS I.C. (Tournament Committee)

USTA
Reg.
I.C.4.
I.H.3.
I.H.4.
IV.C.
15-16.
II.B.1. &
II.B.2.
II.A.3.
II.B.2.
II.C.3.
II.C.1.
II.C.2.
II.D.
II.D.6.
II.D.7.
II.D.7.
I.D.
FACom
I.G-1.
IV.A.2.
I.F.3. &
III.B.9.
IV.A.1.
IV.A.2.,
IV.D.19.-
20., &
FACom
IV.D-1.
competition is fair and played under the ITF Rules of Tennis and USTA
Regulations. A Deputy Referee is an official appointed by the Referee or
Tournament Committee to assist in the performance of the Referee’s duties
or to assume these duties when the Referee is absent. A Deputy Referee who
makes the draw should also be a member of the Tournament Committee.
The Referee’s responsibilities include the responsibilities listed in Table 3.
TABLE 3
Responsibilities of Referee
A. Pre-Tournament (USTA Regulation I.)
Appoints, as necessary, Deputy Referee(s) to assist and assume the
Referee’s duties when the Referee is not present
Obtains a complete list of entrants from the Tournament Committee
Obtains a list of alternates in priority order
Receives any required written verification of injury or illness or required
written description of personal emergency from players who withdrew from
the draw and documents the reasons for withdrawals
B. Making the Draw (USTA Regulation II.)
Makes the draw publicly at a time and place set by the Tournament
Committee
Lists the seeded players in numerical order
If the draw will be made by a Deputy, establishes when control of the draw
is returned to the Referee
Handles late entries and substitutions
Replaces a seeded player who withdraws before play starts
Enters into the draw a player omitted from the draw because of
tournament administrative error, whenever possible
Schedules matches
Tells a player who asks the time of the player’s first match
Posts the schedule on the official draw sheet
Changes the schedule only for a compelling reason and promptly notifies
the affected players
C. Conducting the Tournament (USTA Regulations II & III)
May not serve as a member of the Tournament Appeals Committee
May play in the tournament if a Deputy assumes the Referee’s duties while
the Referee is playing
Designates the place where players check in for play
Determines the ball change pattern, if any
When directed to do so by the Tournament Committee, checks that all
players are USTA members
Assesses penalties for lateness. See Tables 14 & 15
USTA REGULATIONS I.C. (Tournament Committee) 55

USTA
Reg.
III.B.3.
I.C.4.
& VII.A.
III.B.4.
III.B.11.
FACom
VII.A-1.
III.B.10.
& VII.C.5.
III.B.5.
IV.E.3.
III.B.6. &
IV.E.4.
IV.E.6.
IV.E.7.
III.B.7.
III.B.8. &
III.D.1.
III.E.
III.G.
III.H.6.
II.B.6.
II.D.10.
II.D.11.
V.A.3.
TABLE 3 (Cont’d)
Disqualifies any ineligible player and decides whether to reinstate the loser
of the last match won by the disqualified player
Supervises all aspects of play including, but not limited to, the conduct
and actions of players, coaches, parents, spectators, officials,
groundskeepers, and administrative crew
Determines who may enter the playing area
Decides all questions of law
Settles scoring disputes in matches without officials
Assigns Umpires and replaces them only as necessary or as requested by
a Chair Umpire
Defaults players for cause
After unilaterally defaulting a player, remains available for up to 15 minutes
to receive any player appeal
Rules on the appeal of a player who has been defaulted by a Chair Umpire
or Roving Umpire
Prevents a player defaulted for misconduct from participating in other
events at the tournament
Immediately defaults a player who bets on any match in the tournament
Handles infractions observed in non-officiated matches
Suspends and postpones play
Handles player requests directed to the Referee for a medical timeout or
bleeding timeout
When inclement weather, health concerns, or safety concerns force the
tournament to be shortened, follows established procedures
Determines whether a player may practice on the match court during an
intermission with balls other than the match balls
Resolves ties in round robin tournaments
Offers players the minimum rest between matches set out in USTA
Regulation III.C.1.
Assures that the proper rest periods between sets are followed
D. Post-Tournament (USTA Regulation V.A.)
Within three days of the tournament’s completion, reports violations of
USTA Regulations and any penalties imposed to the:
• Sectional Association in which the tournament is held;
• Sectional Association where the involved player is domiciled; and
• USTA Junior and Collegiate Competition Department if the
tournament was listed on the National Junior Tournament Schedule.
56 USTA REGULATIONS I.C. (Tournament Committee)

a. Presence of Referee or Deputy Referee. The Referee (or in the Referee’s
absence, a Deputy Referee) shall be present during play.
FAC Comment I.C-2: The Referee should be on site during most of the
tournament. The Deputy Referee steps in only during those short periods when
the Referee is off site or is playing a match in the tournament.
b. Referee’s discretion. The Referee and each Deputy Referee shall use
judgment in all situations not specifically covered by the ITF Rules of
Tennis or USTA Regulations.
c. Certification required for Referees of USTA National Championships. The
Referee of each USTA National Championship shall be a Referee certified
by the USTA; each Deputy Referee shall be an official certified by the USTA.
d. Certification of Referees of other tournaments. The USTA recommends the
use of Referees certified by the USTA in all other USTA sanctioned
tournaments. This recommendation does not apply to touranments that
use a QuickStart Tennis format.
D. Tournament Appeals Committee
The Tournament Committee shall appoint a Tournament Appeals Committee to
decide player appeals of the Referee’s disqualification or unilateral default of a
player. The Tournament Appeals Committee shall be comprised of at least two
members. Time is of the essence in deciding appeals. Upon being notified by
a player that the player wishes to appeal the Referee’s decision, the Referee
shall immediately attempt to contact at least two members of the Tournament
Appeals Committee. Once two members have convened to decide an appeal,
they need not wait for other members to appear before reaching a decision.
There are no formal notice requirements for assembling the Tournament Appeals
Committee, and two members of the Committee shall constitute a quorum. The
Tournament Appeals Committee may meet in person, by conference telephone
call, or by other means that will facilitate a prompt decision.
The Tournament Committee may serve as the Tournament Appeals
Committee except that the Referee shall not serve as a member of the
Tournament Appeals Committee. The decision of the Tournament Appeals
Committee shall be final.
E. Match Formats and Scoring
Most matches use the scoring system specifically described in Rules 5, 6, and
7 of the ITF Rules of Tennis, and are the best of three sets. In interscholastic,
state, Sectional, and National championships in the Boys’ 18 and Girls’ 18
Divisions, the final round may be the best of five sets. In the Men’s Open, 25,
and 30 Divisions, matches in any round may be the best of five sets. Other match
formats may be used. Results of matches using other formats shall be used for
rankings unless prohibited by applicable National, Sectional, or District ranking
regulations. Commonly used formats include no-ad scoring, matches consisting
of the best of three sets with a 10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of the third set,
pro sets, matches consisting of one set only, QuickStart Tennis formats, and
short sets. The tournament entry form shall specify the format being used.
1. Tiebreaks
a. 7-Point Set Tiebreak (first to 7 by a margin of 2). The 7-Point Set
Tiebreak (first to 7 by a margin of 2) is the tiebreak game described
USTA REGULATIONS I.E. (Match Formats and Scoring) 57

in Rule 5(b) of the ITF Rules of Tennis and determines the winner
of any set in which it is used. Use of the 7-Point Set Tiebreak is
mandatory in all sets of any sanctioned tournament except pro sets
(See USTA Regulation I.E.4.)
b. 10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of deciding final set. The 10-Point
Match Tiebreak (first to 10 by a margin of 2) is described in Appendix
IV of the ITF Rules of Tennis and determines the winner of any match
in which it is used. The match tiebreak used in USTA sanctioned
tournaments shall be the 10-Point Match Tiebreak.
Any tournament electing to use the 10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu
of a deciding final set shall announce the election on the entry form.
See Table 17 for when the 10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of the
deciding final set may be used in USTA Junior National
Championships and USTA Regional Tournaments; USTA Regulation
X.A.2.d. and USTA Regulation X.F.5. for when the 10-Point Match
Tiebreak in lieu of the deciding final set may be used in Category I
USTA, Adult, Senior, and Family National Championships; and USTA
Regulation XIII.A.3.d. for when the 10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu
of the deciding final set may be used in Category I USTA Wheelchair
National Championships.
c. Coman Tiebreak Procedure. The Coman Tiebreak Procedure is the
same as the procedure described above except that ends are changed
after the first point, then after every four points, and at the conclusion
of the tiebreak. See Appendix IV to the ITF Rules of Tennis. A Sectional
Association may authorize any tournament below the National
Championship level to use the Coman Tiebreak Procedure. The
appropriate USTA Competition Committee may authorize the use of the
Coman Tiebreak Procedure for any other tournament. Any tournament
electing to use the Coman Tiebreak Procedure must announce the
election before the start of tournament play. The Coman Tiebreak
Procedure may be used with any tiebreak.
d. Recording the tiebreak score. When a 7-Point Set Tiebreak is
played, the score of the set shall be written 7-6(x) or 6-7(x), with
(x) being the number of points won by the loser of the tiebreak. For
example, 7-6(4) means the tiebreak score was 7-4, and 6-7(14)
means the tiebreak score was 14-16. If a 10-Point Match Tiebreak
is played in lieu of the deciding final set, the score is recorded
1-0(x) with x being the number of points won by the loser.
e. Ball changes. If a ball change is due at the start of a tiebreak, it shall
be deferred until the start of the second game of the next set. A
tiebreak counts as one game in determining ball changes. If a ball
change is due at the start of a tiebreak that is being played in lieu of
the deciding final set, there shall be no ball change.
2. No-Ad scoring. The no-ad scoring system is described in Appendix IV of the
ITF Rules of Tennis. A tournament electing to use no-ad scoring must
announce the election before the start of tournament play except as set forth
in USTA Regulation III.G.1. See also USTA Regulation IX.A.6., which
prohibits no-ad scoring in USTA Junior National Championships and USTA
Regional Tournaments.
58 USTA REGULATIONS I.E. (Match Formats and Scoring)

3. Short Sets. A tournament electing to use “short” sets must announce the
election on the entry form. See Appendix IV of the ITF Rules of Tennis.
4. Pro Sets. A match may consist of a pro set. Unless otherwise specified,
a pro set is one set in which a player or team must win eight games by a
margin of two games to win the match. If the score reaches 8-all, a
7-Point Tiebreak (first to 7 by a margin of 2) is played, with the winner
of the tiebreak winning the match by a score of 9-8(x) where x is the
number of points won by the player or team who lost. The Tournament
Committee may instead use a 10-Point Tiebreak (first to 10 by a margin
of 2) to decide the winner of a pro set if the Committee includes this
information on the entry form and website. Any tournament electing to
use the pro set shall announce its use on the entry form and website. If
a pro set other than the 8-game pro set is used, the Tournament
Committee shall specify the format on the entry form and website.
5. QuickStart Tennis formats. See USTA Regulation VI.
FAC Comment I.E-1: Service order. The player or team whose turn it was to
serve first if a full set were played starts serving a 10-Point Match Tiebreak
that is played in lieu of a deciding final set. Each doubles team decides who
serves first for its team.
FAC Comment I.E-2: Receiving positions. A doubles team may change receiving
positions at the start of a 10-Point Match Tiebreak.
FAC Comment I.E-3: Change of ends. Players change ends at the start of a 10-Point
Match Tiebreak only if an odd-game changeover is due. During the 10-Point Match
Tiebreak, players change ends after every six points.
FAC Comment I.E-4: Mistakes. See USTA Comments 27.2-8. for how to handle
mistakes during tiebreaks.
F. Balls and Ball Change Pattern
1. The type of ball. At the Sectional Championship level and above, the type of ball
shall be consistent throughout a tournament event unless the playing surface
or conditions are changed. For example, both heavy duty felt balls and regular
felt balls normally shall not be used in the same tournament event. Compliance
is recommended for tournaments below the Sectional Championship level.
2. Approved balls. In all USTA tournaments and leagues, the ball used must be
on the list of balls approved by the USTA or must be otherwise authorized
by the USTA. The USTA shall rule on whether any ball or prototype complies
with the specifications adopted by the ITF pursuant to the ITF Rules of
Tennis or is otherwise authorized for play. Rulings may be taken on the
USTA’s own initiative or upon application by any party with a bona-fide
interest, including any player, equipment manufacturer, ITF, Sectional
Association, District Association, or Organization Member. Rulings shall be
made in accordance with the then current testing procedures adopted by the
USTA. A list of balls approved by the USTA shall be published.
FAC Comment I.F-1: A current list of the USTA approved balls is available at
www.usta.com.
USTA REGULATIONS I.F. (Balls and Ball Change Pattern) 59

3. Referee determines ball change pattern. The Referee shall determine the
ball change pattern subject to the right of the Chair Umpire to order a ball
change at other than the normal time when the Chair Umpire determines that
abnormal conditions warrant so doing.
4. Number of balls. New balls shall be used to start a match commencing with
the warm-up. At least three balls shall be used for matches at tournaments
above the Sectional Championship level and are recommended for matches
at the Sectional Championship level.
When a tournament specifies new balls for a third set, new balls shall be
used unless all players agree otherwise.
5. Warm-ups. Warm-ups in which the match balls are used are treated as the
equivalent of two games of match play.
G. Player Eligibility
1. USTA membership generally required to play in sanctioned tournaments.
All players, including non-citizens resident in the United States, Puerto Rico,
U.S. Virgin Islands, Province of British Columbia, Guam, or American Samoa,
desiring to play in sanctioned tournaments of the USTA are required to be
members of the USTA except for sanctioned matches or tournaments that
are interscholastic, intercollegiate, or that are limited to students and
conducted by scholastic or collegiate officials.
For the purpose of this provision all foreign players shall be presumed
to be residents of the United States, Puerto Rico, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Province of British Columbia, Guam, or American Samoa, and thereby
required to enroll unless they have a certification from their national
association or from the USTA stating that they are in fact nonresidents of
the United States as above defined. If a foreign, nonresident player
requests that the USTA issue a certification that the player is a nonresident,
then the USTA shall issue the certification upon finding that the player is
a nonresident.
2. Eligibility for tournaments: There are three general categories of tournaments:
• Junior;
• Adult, Senior, and Family; and
• Wheelchair.
Many tournament divisions have minimum or maximum age restrictions. Some
divisions are restricted by the players’ NTRP ratings.
a. Junior tournaments (18, 16, 14, 12, 10, 8). Junior tournaments, with
the exception of the USTA National Championships, are limited to
amateurs. A player, if otherwise eligible, may enter any junior division
if the player has not exceeded the maximum age by the last day of the
month during which the division is scheduled to start (see Table 4);
provided that, annually the Junior Competition Committee may
designate one tournament in each of the Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Divisions
that shall be limited to players who have not turned 19 on or before
December 31. These designated tournaments may be, but are not
required to be, USTA National Championships.
b. Adult, Senior, and Family tournaments. A player, if otherwise eligible,
may enter any:
i. Men’s or Women’s Division that is not restricted by age or NTRP
rating;
60 USTA REGULATIONS I.G. (Player Eligibility)

ii. NTRP Division if the player’s NTRP rating is less than or equal
to the NTRP rating for the division;
iii. Adult, Senior, or Family Division with minimum age restriction
if the player will reach the minimum age by December 31 of the
year during which the division is scheduled to start;
iv. Parent-Child Division if the parent and child are related by virtue
of blood, legal adoption, or current step relationship. (Death
does not destroy any step relationship, but divorce does.) A
child may play with different parents in different tournaments or
different divisions in a tournament.
v. Parent-Child Division with minimum age restriction for parent.
If the parent and child are related as defined in USTA Regulation
I.G.2.b.iv. and the parent will reach the minimum age by
December 31 of the year during which the division is scheduled
to start; or
vi. Grandparent-Grandchild Division if the grandparent and
grandchild are related by virtue of blood, legal adoption(s), or
current step relationship(s). Adoptive and step relationship(s)
may be created at the parent or the grandparent levels. (Death
does not destroy any step relationship, but divorce does.) A
child may play with different grandparents in different
tournaments.
c. Wheelchair tournaments. A player, if otherwise eligible, may enter any:
i. Men’s Open or Women’s Open Division if the player meets the
eligibility requirements of USTA Regulations I.G.3. a. and f.
ii. Men’s A, Men’s B, Men’s C, Women’s A, or Women’s B Division
if the player meets the eligibility requirements of USTA
Regulations I.G.3.a., c., and f.
iii. Quad Open Division if the player meets the eligibility
requirements of USTA Regulations I.G.3.a., b., e., and f.
iv. Quad A Division if the player meets the eligibility requirements
of USTA Regulations I.G.3.a., c., e., and f.
v. Junior Open/A (18 & Under) Division if the player meets the
eligibility requirements of USTA Regulations I.G.3.a. and f. and
the age eligibility requirement of USTA Regulation I.G.2.a.
vi. Senior Open/A (40 & Over) Doubles or Senior B/C (40 & Over)
Doubles Division if the player meets the eligibility requirements
of USTA Regulations I.G.3.a., d., and f. and the player will
reach the minimum age by December 31 of the year during
which the division is scheduled to start.
d. Amateur tournaments if the player meets any age or NTRP
requirement and is an amateur as defined in USTA Regulation IX.A.1.
Junior tournaments, with the exception of USTA National
Championships, are limited to amateurs. All other tournaments are
open to amateurs and professionals unless the tournament entry form
or website restricts the tournament to amateurs.
e. Mixed doubles tournaments if one player is female and the other
player is male. Players must also meet any age or NTRP requirements
of the division.
USTA REGULATIONS I.G. (Player Eligibility) 61

TABLE 4
Junior Eligibility
Generally, juniors are eligible to play in USTA sanctioned junior divisions
if they are amateurs who are USTA members born on or after the dates
listed in this table.
Tournaments starting in 1/10:
18s born Feb. 1, 1991, or later;
16s born Feb. 1, 1993, or later;
14s born Feb. 1, 1995, or later;
12s born Feb. 1, 1997, or later;
10s born Feb. 1, 1999, or later;
8s born Feb. 1, 2001, or later.
Tournaments starting in 2/10:
18s born March 1, 1991, or later;
16s born March 1, 1993, or later;
14s born March 1, 1995, or later;
12s born March 1, 1997, or later;
10s born March 1, 1999, or later;
8s born March 1, 2001, or later.
Tournaments starting in 3/10:
18s born April 1, 1991, or later;
16s born April 1, 1993, or later;
14s born April 1, 1995, or later;
12s born April 1, 1997, or later;
10s born April 1, 1999, or later;
8s born April 1, 2001, or later.
Tournaments starting in 4/10:
18s born May 1, 1991, or later;
16s born May 1, 1993, or later;
14s born May 1, 1995, or later;
12s born May 1, 1997, or later;
10s born May 1, 1999, or later;
8s born May 1, 2001, or later.
Tournaments starting in 5/10:
18s born June 1, 1991, or later;
16s born June 1, 1993, or later;
14s born June 1, 1995, or later;
12s born June 1, 1997, or later;
10s born June 1, 1999, or later;
8s born June 1, 2001, or later.
62 USTA REGULATIONS I.G. (Player Eligibility)
Tournaments starting in 6/10:
18s born July 1, 1991, or later;
16s born July 1, 1993, or later;
14s born July 1, 1995, or later;
12s born July 1, 1997, or later;
10s born July 1, 1999, or later;
8s born July 1, 2001, or later.
Tournaments starting in 7/10:
18s born Aug. 1, 1991, or later;
16s born Aug. 1, 1993, or later;
14s born Aug. 1, 1995, or later;
12s born Aug. 1, 1997, or later;
10s born Aug. 1, 1999, or later;
8s born Aug. 1, 2001, or later.
Tournaments starting in 8/10:
18s born Sept. 1, 1991, or later;
16s born Sept. 1, 1993, or later;
14s born Sept. 1, 1995, or later;
12s born Sept. 1, 1997, or later;
10s born Sept. 1, 1999, or later;
8s born Sept. 1, 2001, or later.
Tournaments starting in 9/10:
18s born Oct. 1, 1991, or later;
16s born Oct. 1, 1993, or later;
14s born Oct. 1, 1995, or later;
12s born Oct. 1, 1997, or later;
10s born Oct. 1, 1999, or later;
8s born Oct. 1, 2001, or later.
Tournaments starting in 10/10:
18s born Nov. 1, 1991, or later;
16s born Nov. 1, 1993, or later;
14s born Nov. 1, 1995, or later;
12s born Nov. 1, 1997, or later;
10s born Nov. 1, 1999, or later;
8s born Nov. 1, 2001, or later.

Tournaments starting in 11/10:
18s born Dec. 1, 1991, or later;
16s born Dec. 1, 1993, or later;
14s born Dec. 1, 1995, or later;
12s born Dec. 1, 1997, or later;
10s born Dec. 1, 1999, or later;
8s born Dec. 1, 2001, or later.
Tournaments starting in 12/10:
18s born Jan. 1, 1992, or later;
16s born Jan. 1, 1994, or later;
14s born Jan. 1, 1996, or later;
12s born Jan. 1, 1998, or later;
10s born Jan. 1, 2000, or later;
8s born Jan. 1, 2002, or later.
Tournaments starting in 1/11:
18s born Feb. 1, 1992, or later;
16s born Feb. 1, 1994, or later;
14s born Feb. 1, 1996, or later;
12s born Feb. 1, 1998, or later;
10s born Feb. 1, 2000, or later;
8s born Feb 1, 2002, or later.
TABLE 4 (continued)
Tournaments starting in 2/11:
18s born March 1, 1992, or later;
16s born March 1, 1994, or later;
14s born March 1, 1996, or later;
12s born March 1, 1998, or later;
10s born March 1, 2000, or later;
8s born March 1, 2002, or later.
Tournaments starting in 3/11:
18s born April 1, 1992, or later;
16s born April 1, 1994, or later;
14s born April 1, 1996, or later;
12s born April 1, 1998, or later;
10s born April 1, 2000, or later;
8s born April 1, 2002, or later.
Tournaments starting in 4/11:
18s born May 1, 1992, or later;
16s born May 1, 1994, or later;
14s born May 1, 1996, or later;
12s born May 1, 1998, or later;
10s born May 1, 2000, or later;
8s born May 1, 2000, or later.
FAC Comment I.G-1: Members of the Tournament Committee (including the
Referee) may enter a tournament. If the Referee enters a tournament, a Deputy
Referee should serve as the Referee during the Referee’s matches.
3. Additional eligibility requirements for competing in USTA sanctioned
Wheelchair tournaments.
a. Minimum eligibility requirements. A player, if otherwise eligible, may
enter a USTA sanctioned Wheelchair tournament if the player has a
medically diagnosed permanent mobility-related physical disability.
This permanent physical disability must result in a substantial loss of
function in one or both lower extremities. A player must meet one of
the following minimum eligibility requirements:
i. neurological deficit at the SI level or rostral associated with
loss of motor function; or
ii. ankylosis and/or severe arthrosis and/or joint replacement of
the hip, knee, or upper ankle joints; or
iii. amputation of any lower extremity joint rostral to the
metatarsophalangeal joint; or
iv. functional disabilities in one or both lower extremities
equivalent to i., ii., or iii. above.
b. Criteria for specific divisions. The Wheelchair Tennis Committee, in
USTA REGULATIONS I.G. (Player Eligibility) 63

TABLE 5
Criteria for Entering Wheelchair Divisions
A. Men’s, Women’s, and Quad Open Divisions
All players with ITF rankings as set forth below must play in the Open divison:
Division ITF Ranking
Men’s Open ............................................Top 100
Women’s Open.......................................Top 75
Quad Open .............................................Top 50
B. Men’s and Women’s A & B, Men’s C, Quad A, Senior Open/A (40 &
Over) Doubles, and Senior B/C (40 & Over) Doubles Wheelchair
Divisions
Process. Twice yearly the Wheelchair Tennis Committee and the USTA
Competitive Play Department shall review the most recent year-end
National Ranking List or the most recently published National Seeding List
in the Men’s and Women’s A and B, Men’s C, Senior Open/A (40 & Over)
Doubles, and Senior B/C (40 & Over) Doubles Divisions (collectively,
“Letter Divisions”) to determine which Letter Division a player or team may
enter. Singles National Ranking Lists or National Seeding Lists shall be
reviewed for the Men’s and Women’s A and B Divisions and Men’s C
Divisions. Doubles National Ranking Lists or National Seeding Lists shall
be reviewed for the Senior Open/A (40 & Over) Doubles and Senior B/C
(40 & Over) Doubles Divisions.
Letter Division Strength. In the Men’s and Women’s Divisions, the A
Division is the strongest Letter Division; B is the next strongest, and C is
the weakest. There is only one Quad Letter Division – Quad A. In the Senior
Open/A (40 & Over) Doubles and Senior B/C (40 & Over) Doubles
Divisions, the Open/A Division is the stronger Letter Division.
Gender and Eligibility. A Quad player has the option of choosing the
lettered division of a tournament appropriate to the player’s gender.
• A Quad Open player ranked in the top 15 in the world must compete in
the A or Open Division appropriate for the player’s gender.
• A Quad Open player ranked below 15 in the world can compete in the
B Division or above appropriate for the player’s gender.
• A Quad A player can compete in the C Division or higher appropriate
for the player’s gender.
A Women’s Open player may compete in the Men’s lettered divisions if a
Women’s Open draw of five or more is unavailable.
• A Women’s Open player ranked top 30 in the world or above may
compete in the Men’s A or Open Division.
• A Women’s Open player ranked below 30 in the world may compete in
the Men’s B Division or above.
64 USTA REGULATIONS I.G. (Player Eligibility)

January 1 Criteria and Procedure. The Wheelchair Tennis Committee and
the USTA Competitive Play Department shall review the most recent year-end
National Ranking Lists in all Letter Divisions to determine which players, if any,
must play in a higher Letter Division or may play in a lower Letter Division as
follows:
• Players ranked in the top 5% of a division must move up to the nexthigher
Letter Division for the period of one year, except that, players
meeting this criteria in the Men’s, Women’s, and Quad A Divisions are
not required to move up to the Open Division.
• Players ranked in the bottom third of a division may enter a lower division.
• Players competing in multiple Letter Divisions shall be reviewed in each
Letter Division. This may result in a player being restricted from entering
multiple divisions.
• Players affected by the review will be notified as set forth below. A
requirement to move up a Letter Division shall be effective on February 1.
July 1 Criteria and Procedure. The Wheelchair Tennis Committee, in
consultation with the USTA Competitive Play Department, shall review the
National Seeding Lists in all Letter Divisions to determine which players,
if any, must play in a higher Letter Division or may play in a lower Letter
Division as follows:
• No player will be required to move up a Letter Division higher than the
Letter Division in which the player is participating.
• Players appearing in the top 50% of a National Seeding List of a Letter
Division must play in that Letter Division or higher for the remainder
of the calendar year.
• Players appearing in the bottom 50% of a National Seeding List Letter
Division may enter a lower Letter Division.
• Players affected by the review will be notified as set forth below. A
requirement to participate in a Letter Division shall be effective on August 1.
Notification. No later than 15 days after the date of the review, the USTA
Competitive Play Department shall send notice to each player required to
play in a specific Letter Division and to each player who may play a lower
Letter Division. Notice shall be sent by first class certified mail (return
receipt requested).
Appeals. A player may appeal a requirement to play in a specific Letter
Division by submitting a written petition to the Tournament Subcommittee of
the Wheelchair Tennis Committee by first class certified mail (return receipt
requested) to the following address: USTA Competitive Play Department, 70
West Red Oak Lane, White Plains, NY 10604. The appeal must include a
statement as to why the player is appealing the decision. Absent good cause
shown, any appeal shall be barred unless it is made in writing within 14 days
of the mailing of the notice. The Tournament Subcommittee shall rule on the
appeal within 21 days of the receipt of the appeal. Until the decision is ruled
upon, the player must continue to play in the Letter Division specified by the
notice. Appeal decisions are final.
USTA REGULATIONS I.G. (Player Eligibility) 65

consultation with the USTA Competitive Play Department, shall
determine eligiblity criteria for requiring players to enter the Open, Quad
Open, Men’s and Women’s A and B Divisions, Men’s C Division, Quad
A Division, Senior Open/A (40 & Over) Doubles, and Senior B/C (40 &
Over) Doubles Divisions. The criteria shall be published. See Table 5.
c. Quad players. A quad player must meet all of the following eligibility
requirements:
i. A quad player must meet the criteria for permanent physical
disability as defined in USTA Regulation I.G.3.a.
ii. A quad player must have a permanent physical disability that
results in a substantial loss of function in one or both upper
extremities.
iii. A quad player must meet one of the following minimum
eligibility requirements:
• a neurological deficit at the C8 level or rostral with
associated loss of motor function; or
• upper extremity amputation; or
• upper extremity phocomelia; or
• upper extremity myopathy or muscular dystrophy; or
• functional disabilities in one or both upper extremities
equivalent to one of the four disabilities listed above in this
subparagraph iii.
iv. A quad player must have at least one of the four following
functional disabilities related to upper extremity use,
irrespective of trunk balance:
• lack of capacity to perform a smooth and continuous
overhead service; or
• lack of capacity to perform a smooth and continuous
forehand and backhand; or
• lack of capacity during play to maneuver a manual
wheelchair using full wheel control; or
• lack of capacity during play to grip the racket for all
strokes without taping or an assistive device.
d. Power wheelchairs. A player who has severe limitations on mobility
that prevent the player from pushing a manual chair and therefore
uses a power wheelchair for every day mobility may use a power
wheelchair to play wheelchair tennis; however, once a player has
elected to play tennis in a power wheelchair, the player must
continue to do so in all USTA sanctioned tournaments.
FAC Comment I.G-2: Wheelchair players are referred to the current ITF
Wheelchair Tennis Handbook for the eligibility requirements to participate in ITF
sanctioned wheelchair tournaments.
4. Professionals may not play in tournaments limited to amateurs. While
professional players are free to play in sanctioned and unsanctioned
tournaments, they may not participate in tournaments expressly limited
to amateurs.
66 USTA REGULATIONS I.G. (Player Eligibility)

H. Entry Process
1. Means of entry. The Tournament Committee shall determine the means of
entering the tournament, which may be by its own entry form, by a standard
entry form, or by electronic means.
2. Entry form. The Tournament Committee shall specify in the title if a
tournament is limited to amateurs, except that that is not required for
junior tournaments. If only some events in the tournament are limited to
amateurs, then the entry form shall indicate which events are limited to
amateurs and which events are open to professionals and amateurs. As
soon as the Tournament Committee is prepared to receive entries, it shall
place the following information on its written entry form and its website
(if any):
• The specific events and the eligibility requirements;
• Any limit on the size of the draws;
• The locations and dates of play (including rain dates, if any);
• The sanctioning bodies;
• The entry fee;
• The draw format and whether any consolation is mandatory;
• The time and place of the draw;
• The match format for the main draw, consolation, and doubles;
• When applicable, a statement specifying whether the tournament will
use the All Factors Method of seeding or a Computerized List Method
of seeding. If a Computerized List Method is used, then the
Tournament Committee shall reference (for example, National,
Sectional, or District criteria) or publish the applicable seeding
criteria;
• When applicable, a statement that the tournament will use the 10-
Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of the deciding final set;
• The entry deadline (the date by which entries must be received by the
Tournament Committee);
• The mailing or electronic address where the entry form should be
sent;
• Any clothing or shoe restrictions;
• The time and place of any player meeting and how to notify the
tournament if a player is unable to attend;
• The ball type (brand name not required) that will be used;
• The number of balls for play and the ball change policy;
• The type of court surface; and
• When applicable, a statement that the tournament will use a QuickStart
Tennis format (including the specific court dimensions and racket size
allowed).
It is recommended that the Tournament Committee include additional
information, such as how first match information may be obtained, the
names of the Referee and other members of the Tournament Committee,
and the requirement for a player to deliver written verification or description
of the reasons for a withdrawal.
USTA REGULATIONS I.H. (Entry Process) 67

Example of an Entry Form
Nebraska Junior Closed Tennis Tournament
Sponsored by the Omaha Tennis Association
August 6-8, 2010
Koch Family Tennis Center
12400 W. Maple Rd., Omaha, NE 68164, (555) 444-7332
Entry Fees: Singles: $16. Doubles: $22/team. One singles and doubles only.
No phone entries.
Deadline: Paid entry must be received by Friday, July 30.
Seeding & Draw: Will be held on Monday & Tuesday (August 2 & 3) at Koch using
the All Factors Method.
Format & Rules: Single Elimination draw with mandatory first match consolation
in singles. Matches are best of three tiebreak sets. For 10s and
12s only, the tournament will be a round robin with matches
being the best of three tiebreak sets with no-ad scoring and a 10-
Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of the third set.
Age Guide: 10s born Sept. 1, 1999, or later.
12s born Sept. 1, 1997, or later.
14s born Sept. 1, 1995, or later.
16s born Sept. 1, 1993, or later.
18s born Sept. 1, 1991, or later.
Schedule: Draws posted at Koch and at
www.usta.com (TennisLink) after 5 p.m. on Wednesday, August 4.
Players may call (555) 444-4980 after 5 p.m. on Wednesday. Play
may begin as early as 1:00 p.m. on Friday, August 6.
Player Meeting: Friday, August 6 at 12:30 p.m. at Koch. Call (555) 444-4980 if
unable to attend.
Sanctioned: USTA/Missouri Valley and Nebraska Tennis Association. All players
must provide proof of USTA membership or purchase a membership
at the tournament.
Surface: Sixteen hard courts
Ball Policy: 3 Wilson Heavy Duty balls (medium speed); new balls for 3rd set.
Referee/Chairman: Steve Gerdes/Larry Newton
Host Hotel: Holiday Inn (Central) 72nd & Grover (555) 393-3950
Other Information: No tennis shoes with black soles. Any player who withdraws
must notify the Referee immediately. Written verification of the
reason must be delivered by August 8.
Nebraska Junior Closed 2010
Name Phone: ( ) Date of Birth
Address: City State Zip
Girls’ Singles $16
18 16 14 12 10
Girls’ Doubles $22/team
18 16 14 12 10
68 USTA REGULATIONS I.H. (Entry Process)
Boys’ Singles $16
18 16 14 12 10 $ ——
Boys’ Doubles $22/team
18 16 14 12 10 $ ——
$ ——
Doubles Partner:______________________ Total Fees Enclosed
Please attach a copy of your USTA card and all relevant seeding information
Mail Entries payable to: OTA
P.O. Box 8313
Omaha, NE 68108-0313
Fig. 3

FAC Comment I.H-1: Tournaments post the information required by USTA
Regulation I.H.2. on the TennisLink Tournament Home Page. If the following
information was provided in the Online Sanction Form, it will automatically
appear on the Tournament Home Page:
• Entry fees;
• Tournament dates;
• Entry deadline;
• Events and draw format (in an abbreviated format);
• Primary tournament site address and telephone numbers, but only if it is
the address of the Organization Member;
• Tournament Director and contact information;
• Tournament Referee and contact information; and
• Surface type.
Tournaments should post the additional information required by USTA
Regulation I.H.2 using the notes function of either TDM or the Online Sanction
Form. Many tournaments also post additional information such as:
• Non-abbreviated form of events and draw format;
• Information on doubles entries such as whether entries are accepted after
the online deadline and whether the tournament will pair players with
partners;
• Directions to all sites;
• Hotel information;
• Private housing information; and
• Practice court information.
3. Acceptance of entries in tournaments with unlimited size draws. The
Tournament Committee is responsible for accepting the entries. It shall
furnish the Referee with a complete list of entrants. The Committee may
accept late entries.
4. Acceptance of entries in tournaments with limited size draws. If the number
of entrants exceeds the draw limit, the Tournament Committee shall accept
players and alternates into the draw based on their records. It may also
accept players of established ability who do not have current records, or
whose records are affected by illness, injury, or lack of recent play. If the
Tournament Committee is unable to determine the record of some players
with timely entries, then it shall accept these players into the draw and onto
the alternate list by lot and never by the date of receipt of entries.
The Tournament Committee may accept late entries, provided that late
entries shall be placed on the alternate list after the timely entries in an
order determined by lot.
The Tournament Committee shall furnish the Referee with a list of
alternates listed in priority order.
5. No discrimination in acceptance of entries. Entries may not be refused on the
basis of race, creed, sexual orientation, color, or national origin.
6. Voluntary submission of seeding information. A player who wants to be
seeded should submit a player record and ranking.
7. Electronic service fee. Players who enter tournaments may be charged a
non-refundable fee for the receipt of electronic entries.
USTA REGULATIONS I.H. (Entry Process) 69

8. Withdrawal from tournament and refund of entry fee. The Tournament
Committee shall refund a player’s entire entry fee if the entry is not
accepted. In all tournaments except USTA Junior National Championships
and USTA Regional Tournaments, the Tournament Committee shall
refund a player’s entire entry fee if the player withdraws no later than
seven days before the start date of the tournament; no refund is required
beginning six days before the start date of the tournament. See USTA
Regulation IX.A.8. for entry fee refunds in the USTA Junior National
Championships and USTA Regional Tournaments.
The Tournament Committee shall not charge any fee (such as a
processing, service, or handling fee) for refunding the entry fee.
A player shall not withdraw from a tournament except for illness, injury,
personal emergency, or previously authorized entry into another tournament
(see USTA Regulation IV.C.16.).
9. Request for special scheduling. A player may submit a request for special
scheduling with the player’s entry. See USTA Regulation II.D.4. for how
the Referee handles these requests.
FAC Comment I.H-2: The inclusion of the word amateur in the title for a
tournament indicates that only amateurs may play in the tournament. All USTA
sanctioned junior tournaments other than the USTA National Championships
and those tournaments authorized by the ITF are limited to amateurs. If the word
amateur does not appear in the title of an adult, senior, or family tournament,
then the tournament is open to amateurs and professionals.
FAC Comment I.H-3: The inclusion of the word Invitational in the title means that
the entry in the tournament is by invitation only. The Tournament Committee
may accept players into the draw using whatever criteria it chooses so long as
it does not discriminate on the basis of race, creed, sexual orientation, color, or
national origin.
FAC Comment I.H-4: The inclusion of the word Closed in the title means that the
tournament is limited to residents of a particular geographic area. The inclusion
of the word Open in the title means that the tournament is open to all players
regardless of where they live. Nonetheless, many Sectional Championships and
Sectional Qualifying Circuits are open to residents of that Section only. In addition,
special regulations limit participation in USTA Junior National Championships to
United States citizens and a few special groups. See USTA Regulation IX.A.2.
70 USTA REGULATIONS I.H. (Entry Process)

II. DRAW REGULATIONS
A. Seeding
While there is no requirement that every tournament have seedings, most
tournaments of the elimination and compass draw types, as distinguished from
round robins, use seedings to ensure that players of recognized outstanding
ability do not confront each other in the early rounds.
1. Responsibility for seeding. The Tournament Committee shall determine
the seedings, except that pursuant to USTA Regulation IX.A.4. the
Director of USTA Junior Competition or the Director’s designee shall seed
the USTA National Championships, USTA National Opens, USTA Boys’
and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic Championships (East/West), and USTA
Regional Tournaments after consulting with the Tournament Committee.
2. Number of seeds. The number of players seeded shall equal a power of two
(for example, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32). The maximum ratio of players seeded shall
be one in three, except that any draw may have two seeds.
FAC Comment II.A-1: The decision on whether to round up or down to a power
of two depends in large part on the availability of adequate seeding information.
The Tournament Committee should round up to the next power of two when
adequate information is available. Examples: A draw of 24 could have either four
or eight seeds depending on the information available, but a draw of 23 could
have no more than four seeds. Similarly, a draw of 96 could have either 16 or
32 seeds, but a draw of 95 could have no more than 16 seeds. A draw of 3 or 4
could have two seeds.
FAC Comment II.A-2: ITF tournament regulations permit no more than 16 seeds
in tournaments that are part of an ITF circuit. Category I USTA Adult, Senior, and
Family National Championships in the Men’s 35-85 and Women’s 35-80 Divisions
follow the ITF tournament regulations.
3. Listing seeds. The Referee shall list the seeded players in the draw in
numerical order to the extent that the Referee has information available
to do so, and then the Referee shall list all other seeded players in groups.
For example, if the first 5 seeds are numerically seeded, seeds 6 through
8 could be grouped.
4. Seeding methods
a. All Factors Method. The All Factors Method of seeding is based on
the players’ chances of winning the tournament as determined by
the Tournament Committee. The Tournament Committee shall
consider all reasonably available information, including ranking lists,
standing lists, recent records, types of surface, and particularly
head-to-head encounters.
FAC Comment II.A-3: When using the All Factors Method of seeding, it is common
to start with a recent ranking or standing list and use other information to enhance
the accuracy of the list. The Tournament Committee shall not rely on just the
current rankings or standings. The Tournament Committee shall consider all
reasonably available information including results from unsanctioned matches. It
should take care to assure itself that all results are correct. The task of seeding
USTA REGULATIONS II.A. (Seeding) 71

players is difficult when players do not provide complete information with their
entries. The Tournament Committee should make every effort to obtain additional
information from all available sources.
FAC Comment II.A-4: Some common errors in seeding: “He’s ranked No. 1, so he
must be seeded No. 1”; She won the tournament last year, so she must be seeded
No. 1 this year”; “Since this is his first year as a senior and he has no record in
senior play, he cannot be seeded or he cannot be seeded any higher than five.”
FAC Comment II.A-5: Two outstanding doubles players playing together for the
first time shall be considered for a seed.
b. Computerized List Method. A Computerized List Method of seeding
is based on a computerized system of rankings or standings.
5. Seeding in National tournaments.
a. Juniors. USTA National Championships, USTA National Opens,
USTA Regional Tournaments, and USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18
Interscholastic Championships (East/West) shall use a Computerized
List Method and shall follow the seeding criteria in Table 16.
b. Adult, Senior, and Family. Seeding for Category I USTA Adult, Senior,
and Family National Championships shall use the All Factors Method
of seeding.
c. Wheelchair. The tournament committees of Category I USTA
Wheelchair National Championships may choose to use either the All
Factors Method of seeding or a Computerized List Method of
seeding. The Wheelchair Committee shall establish and publish the
seeding criteria to be followed when using a Computerized List
Method of seeding. See USTA Regulation XIII.A.3.c
6. Seeding in tournaments other than National tournaments. Sectional
Associations may require all or some of their tournaments to use the All
Factors Method of seeding or a Computerized List Method of seeding. If a
Sectional Association requires the use of a Computerized List Method of
seeding, it shall publish its seeding criteria. The Sectional Associations may
also allow their District Associations or subdivisions to make this decision.
In this case, the District or subdivision shall publish its seeding criteria.
FAC Comment II.A-6: Sectional or District Associations may require some
tournaments to use a Computerized List Method of seeding and other
tournaments to use the All Factors Method of seeding. The Sectional or District
Associations may also leave the choice to the Tournament Committee.
7. Publication of method of seeding and seeding criteria. All tournaments shall
publish the method of seeding and the seeding criteria.
8. Seeding Groups. Seeding groups refer to 1, 2, 3-4, 5-8, 9-16, and 17-32. A
seeding group is treated separately in that players within that group are
drawn to lines in the draw that are specifically designated for that group.
The concept of seeding groups is important when the draw needs to be
changed. Changes may be required if a:
72 USTA REGULATIONS II.A. (Seeding)

• Player in the draw was not seeded but should have been seeded
(See USTA Regulation II.C.4);
• Player who should have been seeded was omitted from the draw
(See USTA Regulation II.C.2.b.); or
• Seeded player withdraws (See USTA Regulation II.C.1.a.).
9. Placing is prohibited. Placing occurs, for example, when the Committee in
a 16-draw tournament seeds four and “places” four. The practice of placing
is an attempt to hide the fact that in reality eight players have been seeded
instead of the permissible maximum of four. The rule of “one in three” was
established to provide some matches between strong players in the first
round, to increase the variety of a player’s opponents, and to get away from
the “strong-weak-strong-weak” pattern in the draw, thereby giving players
who are usually first-round losers an occasional opportunity to meet each
other and advance to the second or third round.
10. Block seeding. Block seeding refers to the practice of advancing the
seeded player several rounds into the tournament. The unseeded players
play matches to reach the round where the seeded players have already
been stationed. The purpose of this practice is to allow the unseeded
players to play several matches before playing a seeded player. Block
seeding is authorized in tournaments at the level of sectional
championships and below.
B. Making the Draw
1. Public draw. The draw, computer or manual, shall be made in public at the
time and place specified by the Tournament Committee.
2. Draw made by Referee or Deputy Referee. The Referee or a Deputy
Referee, assisted by at least one Tournament Committee member and
preferably by two members, shall make the draw. The Referee and the
Deputy Referee shall be jointly responsible for the draw’s compliance
with applicable USTA Regulations. If the Referee has a Deputy Referee
make the draw, the Referee shall determine when the Deputy Referee
shall return the draw to the Referee, at which time the authority of the
Deputy Referee over the draw ceases.
FAC Comment II.B-1: When a District or Sectional office or the National office
has a person who assists the Referee in making the draw, the process is for this
person to be appointed as a Deputy Referee and to serve as a member of the
Tournament Committee as long as the person’s authority as a Deputy Referee
remains in place. These Deputy Referees should be certified as Referees by
the USTA or should have undergone current USTA Referee training.
3. Draw formats. USTA Regulations describe the procedures that Referees
shall follow when they run single elimination draws, First Match Losers
Consolations, Feed-In Championships, round robins, and compass
draws. Tournaments may use other draw formats. When a tournament
uses other formats, the Referee shall post at the tournament the
procedures defining the format before the start of play. Referees shall
follow USTA Regulations except for those USTA Regulations changed by
the posted procedures.
USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making the Draw) 73

4. Main draw. When the number of players is 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or any
higher power of two, they shall meet in even pairs in progressive elimination
in accordance with the following pattern:
a. Balancing the seeds. The principle of drawing to position the seeds
shall be applied so that the same number of seeds will fall in each
half of the draw, in each quarter of the draw, etc.
A
B
B
C
D
D
D
E
F
F
D
G
H
H
H
b. Positioning seeds. The first seed shall be positioned on the top line of the
draw, and the second seed shall be positioned on the bottom line of the
draw. The position of the remaining seeds shall be determined by lot
using the procedure described below, with each seeded player in the
top half of the draw being positioned on the top line of the bracket for
which that seed is drawn, and each seeded player in the bottom half of
the draw being positioned on the bottom line of the bracket for which
that seed is drawn. Examples of the procedure for different size draws
with the maximum number of seeds allowed are as follows:
• 12-16 draw with 4 seeds.
Seed 1 Line 1
Seed 2 Line 16
Seeds 3 & 4 Drawn at random for line 5 or 12
• 24-32 draw with 8 seeds.
Seed 1 Line 1
Seed 2 Line 32
Seeds 3 & 4 Drawn at random for line 9 or 24
Seeds 5-8 Drawn at random for line 5, 13, 20, or 28
• 48-64 draw with 16 seeds.
Seed 1 Line 1
Seed 2 Line 64
Seeds 3 & 4 Drawn at random for line 17 or 48
Seeds 5-8 Drawn at random for line 9, 25, 40, or 56
Seeds 9-16 Drawn at random for line 5, 13, 21, 29, 36, 44,
52, or 60
• 96-128 draw with 32 seeds.
Seed 1 Line 1
Seed 2 Line 128
Seeds 3 & 4 Drawn at random for line 33 or 96
Seeds 5-8 Drawn at random for line 17, 49, 80 or 112
Seeds 9-16 Drawn at random for line 9, 25, 41, 57, 72, 88,
104, or 120
Seeds 17-32 Drawn at random for line 5, 13, 21, 29, 37, 45,
53, 61, 68, 76, 84, 92, 100, 108, 116, or 124
74 USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw)

c. Using byes to fill out draw. When there are not enough players to
put one player on each line in the draw, byes are added. This serves
to bring to the second round a player on each line so that there can
be an orderly progression down to two finalists. For example, with
27 players, five of the lines on a 32-draw sheet would be marked
bye, and the five players drawn opposite those lines would move
into the second round without playing a match, to be joined there by
the 11 winners of first round matches to make up an even 16.
d. Placing byes.
i. Standard method.
(A) To seeded players in descending order.
• The byes shall go to seeded players in descending
order.
• Remaining byes shall be distributed so that the
total number of byes are evenly distributed by
quarters and halves. No further attempt to balance
the byes by eighths or sixteenths shall be made.
• Byes drawn to the top half of the draw shall be
positioned on even-numbered lines; byes drawn
to the bottom half of the draw shall be
positioned on odd-numbered lines.
If group seeding is used and there are fewer
byes available than there are players in the group,
then a drawing is used to determine which seeds
within the group get the available byes. (For
example, there is a draw of 27 in which seeds 1
through 3 are seeded numerically and the next
five seeded players are seeded as a group. The
first three byes go to the first three seeds. A
drawing determines which group seed is
assigned to the #4 seed line. This player receives
a bye. The four remaining group seeds are drawn
randomly to the lines for the 5th through 8th
seeds. A drawing determines which of the three
remaining group seeds receives the final bye.)
(B) To lines opposite seeds if one in every four players had been
seeded. If there are more byes than seeded players, then the
byes shall be positioned on the lines opposite the lines
where additional seeds would have been positioned had the
draw been full and had the tournament seeded one in four
players. (For example, in a draw of 25 with 4 seeds and 7
byes, the first four byes would go on lines opposite seeds
1 through 4 and the next three byes would go on lines
opposite the lines where seeds 5 through 7 would have
gone. This would put these three byes randomly on three
of the following lines 6, 14, 19, or 27.)
(C) Remaining byes. If the number of byes remaining to be
distributed is not divisible by four, then the quarter or
quarters that receive one more bye than the other quarter
USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw) 75

or quarters shall be determined by lot. The Referee should
note the order in which the remaining byes are placed in
the draw in the event that this information is needed later
for placing an omitted player in the draw.
(D) Examples.
After all seeds have received byes, or in the absence of
seeding, the byes are drawn as follows:
Draw of 16. The 1st and 2nd byes are drawn for lines 2
and 15, the 3rd and 4th byes are drawn for lines 6 and
11, and byes 5-7 are drawn among lines 4, 8, 9, and 13
(balanced by half);
Draw of 32. The 1st and 2nd byes are drawn for lines 2 and
31, the 3rd and 4th byes are drawn for lines 10 and 23, byes
5-8 are drawn among lines 6, 14, 19, and 27 (balanced by
half); and byes 9-15 are drawn among lines 4, 8, 12, 16, 17,
21, 25, and 29 (balanced by quarter and half);
Draw of 64. The 1st and 2nd byes are drawn for lines 2
and 63, and 3rd and 4th byes are drawn for lines 18 and
47, byes 5-8 are drawn among lines 10, 26, 39, and 55
(balanced by half), byes 9-16 are drawn among lines 6,
14, 22, 30, 35, 43, 51, and 59 (balanced by quarter and
half) and byes 17-31 are drawn among lines 4, 8, 12, 16,
20, 24, 28, 32, 33, 37, 41, 45, 49, 53, 57, and 61
(balanced by quarter and half);
Draw of 128. The 1st and 2nd byes are drawn for lines 2
and 127, the 3rd and 4th byes are drawn for lines 34 and
95, byes 5-8 are drawn among lines 18, 50, 79, and 111
(balanced by half), byes 9-16 are drawn among lines 10,
26, 42, 58, 71, 87, 103, and 119 (balanced by quarter and
half), byes 17-32 are drawn among lines 6, 14, 22, 30, 38,
46, 54, 62, 67, 75, 83, 91, 99, 107, 115, and 123 (balanced
by quarter and half) and byes 33-63 are drawn among lines
4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
65, 69, 73, 77, 81, 85, 89, 93, 97, 101, 105, 109, 113, 117,
121, and 125 (balanced by quarter and half).
ii. Alternate method for distributing byes when there is a Feed-
In Championship and the first two rounds of the main draw in
a division are scheduled on the same day. The following
method is an option for tournaments with a Feed-In
Championship in which the first two rounds of the main draw
of a division are scheduled on the same day.
• First, distribute byes to all the seeds.
• Second, distribute byes so that the seeded players who
receive byes will be playing other players who have also
received byes. If there are not enough byes so that
every seeded player is playing another player who has
received a bye, then position these byes adjacent to the
seeded players starting with the lowest seeded player.
• Third, distribute a pair of byes in the fourth quarter of the
76 USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw)

draw starting from the bottom up; distribute a pair of byes
in the first quarter of the draw starting from the top
down; distribute a pair of byes in the third quarter of the
draw starting from the bottom up; distribute a pair of
byes in the second quarter of the draw starting from the
top down; and repeat the cycle (fourth quarter, first
quarter, third quarter, and second quarter) until all the
byes have been distributed.
iii. Second alternative method of placing byes.
• Byes go to seeded players in descending order.
• Remaining byes are placed starting at the extremes of the
first quarter and fourth quarter. The first bye goes on the
first available even-numbered line below the top line of
the first quarter. The second bye goes on the first available
odd-numbered line above the bottom line of the fourth
quarter. The third bye goes on the next available evennumbered
line below the top line of the first quarter. The
fourth bye goes on the next available odd-numbered line
above the bottom line of the fourth quarter, etc. If the first
and fourth quarters are filled, byes are added by
alternating between the second and fourth quarters using
the same procedure.
iv. Third alternate method of placing byes.
• Byes go to seeded players in descending order.
• Remaining byes are placed starting at the extremes of the
first quarter and third quarter. The first bye goes on the
first available even-numbered line below the top line of
the first quarter. The second bye goes on the first available
odd-numbered line above the bottom line of the third
quarter. The third bye goes on the next available evennumbered
line below the top line of the first quarter. The
fourth bye goes on the next available odd-numbered line
above the bottom line of the third quarter, etc. If the first
and third quarters are filled, byes are added by alternating
between the second and fourth quarters using the same
procedure.
FAC Comment II.B-2: The standard method, described in USTA Regulation
II.B.4.d.i., should be used for most tournaments including those that use a
Curtis Consolation or Modified Curtis Consolation. The Referee generally
should choose an alternate method only when there is a distinct scheduling
advantage to doing so.
• The first alternate method, described in USTA Regulation II.B.4.d.ii.,
works well when there is a Feed-In Championship in which the first two
rounds of FIC are scheduled on the same day.
• The second alternate method, described in USTA Regulation
II.B.4.d.iii., increases the number of second round matches in which
both players have first round byes. This may facilitate scheduling
because players with byes are not waiting for their opponents to finish
USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw) 77

first round matches. If there is a First Match Loser Consolation, a player
with a bye who loses in the second round will often receive a bye in the
consolation and face another player who also lost after receiving a first
round bye. This method should not be used in a tournament with a
Feed-In Championship.
• The third alternate method, described in USTA Regulation II.B.4.d.iv.,
will shorten by one day a tournament that plays only one singles match
a day and that has a Feed-In Championship with a draw only slightly
larger than a power of two. (For example, the system works for a draw
of 16 with up to 10 players, a draw of 32 with up to 20 players, a draw
of 64 with up to 40 players, and a draw of 128 with up to 80 players.)
v. Method of placing byes in tournaments with consolation
draw. In addition to any method for distributing byes in
tournaments with consolation draws set forth in USTA
Regulation II.B., the byes may be distributed as follows:
• Byes go to seeded players in descending order.
• Remaining byes are placed starting at the extremes
of the first quarter and third quarter. The
first bye goes on the first available even-numbered
line below the top line of the first quarter.
The second bye goes on the first available oddnumbered
line above the bottom line of the third
quarter. The third bye goes on the next available
even-numbered line below the top line of the
first quarter. The fourth bye goes on the next
available odd-numbered line above the bottom
line of the third quarter, etc. If the first and third
quarters are filled, byes are added by alternating
between the second and fourth quarters using
the same procedure.
e. Byes not moved when player withdraws. Once the byes are inserted
in the draw, their positions shall not be changed even if a player
withdraws. But see USTA Regulation II.C.1.b.iv. when a withdrawal
creates a double bye.
f. Filling in unseeded players by lot. Once the seeded players and the byes
have been written in, the rest of the draw shall be filled in by drawing
the names of the remaining players and putting them on the
unoccupied lines in the order in which they are drawn, starting at the
top and moving downward in sequence.
g. Discretionary procedure for separating opponents. When the drawing
procedure operates to bring together for their first match opponents
from the same area, city, state, family, school, foreign country, club,
doubles team, Sectional Association, or District Association, the
Referee has the discretion to place the second name drawn on the
corresponding line of the next quarter of the draw. If this happens in
the fourth quarter of the draw, the second name may be exchanged
with the name on the corresponding line in one of the three preceding
78 USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw)

quarters, the specific one of these quarters being determined by
drawing. If this system places the second-drawn player into a seed or
bye slot, the name shall be moved to successive quarters until it can
be put on a vacant line or exchanged with that of an unseeded player.
FAC Comment II.B-3: USTA Regulation II.B.4.g. allows the Referee great
discretion in determining whether players are from the the same area.
Depending on the draw, the Referee may decide to separate players from the
same District, zone, state, region of the state, or city. The TDM program is not
always able to separate all players who need to be separated. The Referee
should check the draw to determine whether improvement can be made. For
example, a National Open may have so many players from the host Section
that first round matches between some of these players are unavoidable. In
these situations, the Referee should separate players within the host Section
by Districts, cities, states, or other division that will separate players from the
same general geographic area.
FAC Example of Positioning Seeds and Byes in a Draw of 22 with 4 Seeds and
10 Byes. See Figure 4.
Bill Merritt is seeded first; Gary Olson is seeded second; Jim Harper is seeded
third; and Tom Jones is seeded fourth. There are 22 players.
1. Positioning the seeds (USTA Regulation II.B.4.b.). First seed Bill
Merritt is placed on line 1; Second seed Gary Olson is placed on line 32.
A draw determines whether the third seed Jim Harper goes to the top
or bottom half. In this example Harper is drawn to the bottom half so
his name goes on line 24, and Tom Jones goes on line 9.
2. Placement of the byes.
a. To seeded players in descending order (USTA Regulation
II.B.4.d.i.). The first four byes go opposite the names of the seeds.
This puts byes on lines 2,10, 23, and 31.
b. To lines opposite seeds if one in every four players had been
seeded (USTA Regulation II.B.4.d.i.(C)). If there had been a full
draw of 32 and one in four players had been seeded, there would
have been eight seeds. Since Seeds 5 through 8 would have gone
on lines 5, 13, 20, and 28, byes go on lines 6, 14, 19, and 27.
c. Remaining byes (USTA Regulation II.B.4.d.i.(B)). Two byes still
need to be placed and need to be balanced by halves and by
quarters. One bye should go in each half. A drawing determines
which quarter in each half gets an additional bye. In this example
the drawing determined that the first and fourth quarters get the
additional byes. These byes could go on lines 4 or 8 and on lines
25 or 29. A drawing determined that the additional byes go on
lines 8 and 29.
3. Filling in unseeded players by lot (USTA Regulation II.B.4.f.). The 18
unseeded players are drawn randomly to the 18 remaining empty lines.
5. Consolation draw. Except where otherwise provided a First Match Losers
Consolation (FMLC) draw or a Feed-In Championship (FIC) draw may be
used. Consolation matches should be conducted under the same
USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw) 79

Positioning Seeds and Byes in Draw of 32 with 22 Players
Fig. 4
80 USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw)

conditions as main-draw matches, including the use of new tennis balls,
so that results will be valid for ranking purposes.
a. Instructions for a First Match Losers Consolation (FMLC).
The loser’s name is placed on the same line on the consolation draw
as the player would have occupied on the main draw had the player
won there.
This type of consolation normally does not require a new drawing.
An advantage to this consolation is that times may be scheduled in
advance and, if so desired, the consolation may be scheduled so as
to keep pace with main-draw play.
A player who wins in the first round by default and then loses in the
second round moves into the consolation draw just as though the player
had a first round bye followed by a second round main-draw loss.
A player who loses the player’s first-played match in the third
round of the main draw may request that the Referee include the
player in the consolation. The Referee shall decide based on available
openings and scheduling considerations.
b. Instructions for Feed-In Championship through quarterfinals for draw
of 128.
i. Assigning numbers to each player. Each player retains the
player’s number from the regular draw sheet, 1 through 128.
ii. Placing first-round losers in FIC draw. First-round losers from
the regular tournament are entered on the FIC draw sheet, loser
1 or 2 versus loser 3 or 4, etc.
iii. Feeding in main-draw second-round losers. The winners of these
first-round FIC matches play the losers from the second round
of the regular tournament in the second round of the FIC.
iv. Feeding in other main-draw round losers. The winners of the FIC
second-round play third-round qualifying matches to determine
who will meet the third-round losers from the regular tournament.
This sequence is carried through the quarterfinal round.
v. Where to feed in main-draw losers. Each loser shall be fed in to
the FIC space corresponding to the number opposite the
player’s name in the regular tournament.
For example, the second-round loser 1, 2, 3, or 4 is placed at
the bottom of the FIC draw sheet and will play the winner of the
125 or 126 versus 127 or 128.
The second-round loser who is fed in is one of four numbers,
and the quarterfinalist is one of eight numbers.
FAC Example of Positioning Seeds and Byes in draw of 11 with 2 Seeds and 5
Byes and Example of Resulting Feed-In Championship draw. See Figure 5.
Joe Green is seeded first; Robert Red is seeded second. There are 11 players.
1. Positioning seeds (USTA Regulation II.B.4.b.). First seed Joe Green is
placed on line 1; second seed Robert Red is placed on line 16.
2. Placing byes.
a. To seeded players in descending order (USTA Regulation
II.B.4.d.ii.). The first two byes go opposite the names of the seeds.
This puts byes on lines 2 and 15.
USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw) 81

Main Draw
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Positioning Players in Feed-In Championship Draw
First Round Second Round Quarterfinals Semifinals Final
Joe Green Seeded Players
Green 1. Joe Green
Bye 2. Robert Red
Green
Steve Black 6-1, 6-0
Black
Ed Orange Def.
Green
George Blue 7-5, 6-1
Blue
Bye
Violet
Al Gray 6-2, 6-2
Violet
Norm Violet 3-6, 6-4, 7-6(2)
Green
Roger White 6-7(6), 6-3, 6-4
White
Henry Yellow 6-2, 7-5
Pink
Bye 1-6, 7-6(4), 6-3
Pink
Paul Pink
Red
Bye 2-6, 6-4, 6-4
Purple
Jim Purple
Red
Bye 6-2, 6-3
Red
Robert Red
Feed-In Championship
Purple (L13-16)
Bye (L1-2) Purple
7-5, 6-4
Orange
Orange (L3-4) Gray
7-5, 2-6, 6-4
White (L9-12)
Bye (L5-6) Gray
6-2, 6-4
Gray
Gray (L7-8)
Yellow (L9-10)
Yellow
Blue
Bye (L11-12) 6-3, 6-2
Blue (L5-8)
Bye (L13-14) Black
Bye 6-2, 6-1
Black
Bye (L15-16)
Black (L1-4)
* Ed Orange was defaulted since he was late. Because his car broke down, the Referee decided
to let him play in the Feed-In Championship draw.
Fig. 5
82 USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw)
Gray
6-3, 6-3

. To lines opposite seeds if four players had been seeded (USTA
Regulation II.B.4.d.i.(B)). If there had been a full draw of 16 and
four players had been seeded, the third and fourth seeds would have
gone on lines 5 and 12. Byes should go on lines 6 and 11.
c. Remaining byes (USTA Regulation II.B.4.d.i.(C)). Four byes have
been placed; one bye still needs to be placed. A drawing is held to
determine the quarter in which the bye is placed. In this example
the drawing determined that the bye goes in the fourth quarter. This
means that it goes on line 13.
3. Filling in unseeded players by lot (USTA Regulation II.B.4.f.). The 9
unseeded players are drawn randomly to the 9 remaining empty lines.
FAC Comment II.B-4: Curtis Consolation. See Figure 6. When there is a
shortage of courts or when a Feed-In Championship needs to be played in a limited
amount of time, some tournaments use a special Feed-In Championship
format. One of the most widely known is the Modified Curtis Consolation (CC).
This format works when there is a:
• Draw of 256 with up to 192 entrants;
• Draw of 128 with up to 96 entrants;
• Draw of 64 with up to 48 entrants; or
• Draw of 32 with up to 24 entrants.
1. Modified Curtis Consolation (CC) for draw of 64 with up to 48 entrants.
a. Byes. The top half of the first and second quarters and the bottom
half of the third and fourth quarters of the CC draw will
automatically be filled with byes. (In the main draw, the byes are first
placed opposite the seeds and after that are placed opposite those
lines where seeds would have been placed if the tournament had
chosen to seed 16 players. The byes that automatically end up in the
top half of the first and second quarters and the bottom half of the
third and fourth quarters of the CC come from those lines.) Any
additional byes are placed in the CC draw on the designated line just
as if “bye” were the loser of a first-round match.
b. First-round losers. The first-round losers from the main draw are fed
into the bottom half of the first and second quarters and the top half
of the third and fourth quarters of the CC draw on the designated lines.
c. Second-round losers. The second-round losers from the main
draw are fed into the second-round throughout the CC draw on
the designated lines.
d. Round of 16 and quarterfinal losers. Round of 16 and quarterfinal
losers are not fed into the CC draw. Instead a standard Feed-in
Championship involving only these players is held, or separate
single elimination competitions are held for each of these groups.
e. Third-place playoff. The losing semifinalists in the main draw play
off for third place.
f. Not all consolation finals held. The tournament should
decide in advance which events will be played through the finals.
It is common to play the two or three consolations through the
semifinals only.
USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw) 83

g. Example of scheduling with separate single elimination
consolations for round-of-16 losers and quarterfinals losers.
First day First two rounds of main draw (16+16 matches)
First round of CC (8 matches)
Second day Round-of-16 and quarterfinals of main draw (8+4
matches)
Second round of CC (8 matches)
Quarterfinal qualifying of CC (8 matches)
Quarterfinals of round-of-16 consolation
(4 matches)
Third day Semifinals and finals of main draw
(2+1 matches)
Quarterfinals and semifinals of CC
(4+2 matches)
Semifinals and finals of round-of-16 consolation (2+1
matches)
Semifinals and finals of quarterfinal consolation (2+1
matches)
Third-place playoff (1 match)
Note in this schedule, the CC is the only consolation not
completed.
2. Full Curtis Consolation for draw of 64 with up to 48 entrants. The Curtis
format also may be used when playing a full Feed-In Championship.
The special Curtis format is followed for feeding in the first-round
losers. The second-round losers, round-of-16 losers, and quarterfinal
losers from the main draw are fed into the Full Curtis Consolation draw
in the same manner that they would be fed into a regular Feed-In
Championship draw. The Full Curtis Consolation draw, which consists
of eight rounds instead of the six rounds of the Modified Curtis
Consolation draw, may be completed in five days.
3. Draw of 128 with up to 96 entrants. Follow the same pattern as in the
draw of 64. In addition to first- and second-round losers, feed in the
third-round losers. The byes will automatically show up in the top half of
the first and second quarters and the bottom half of the third and fourth
quarters. Playoffs for the round-of-16 and quarterfinal losers are held.
The CC draw of 128 with associated consolations can be completed in
four days.
vi. Determining first through fifth places. FIC semifinal and final
rounds are played to determine the winner of the FIC. The FIC
winner is the fifth-place finisher in the tournament. The loser of
the FIC final is the sixth-place finisher. Third and fourth places
are determined by a play-off between the semifinal losers in the
main draw. The loser of the final in the main draw is the secondplace
finisher.
vii. Determining additional places. Additional places may be
obtained by having the semifinal losers in the FIC play-off for
seventh and eighth places.
84 USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw)

Modified Curtis Feed-In Championship Draw
Draw of 64 with 48 players
Quarterfinal
First Round
Bye 2
Second Round
Bye
Qualifying Quarterfinals Semifinals Final
Bye 6
61-64
Bye 10
61-64
Bye
Bye 14
3-4
7-8
11-12
57-60
53-56
57-60
15-16
Bye 18
49-52
Bye
Bye 22
Bye 26
45-48
45-48
Bye
Bye 30
41-44
19-20
23-24
41-44
27-28
31-32
37-40
33-34
37-38
33-36
41-42
45-46
29-32
Bye 35
25-28
Bye
Bye 39
21-24
21-24
Bye 43
Bye
Bye 47
17-20
49-50
53-54
17-20
57-58
61-62
13-16
Bye 51
9-12
Bye 55
Bye
5-8
Bye 59
5-8
Bye 63
Bye
1-4
1-4
Fig. 6
USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw) 85

viii. Placing byes. Any byes are fed into the FIC draw just as though
they were players. If 2 is a bye in the regular tournament, the word
“bye” will be written in the space 1 or 2 under the FIC first
round.
ix. Scheduling considerations. FIC first-, second-, third-, fourth-, or
quarterfinal-round matches should not be scheduled on the same
day as the first-, second-, third-, fourth-, or quarterfinal-round
matches in the main draw. Instead, these matches should be
scheduled the following morning early and the qualifying matches
that afternoon.
c. Participation of player in consolation or place playoffs. A player who is
defaulted from the player’s first match for a reason other than
misconduct or withdraws from the first match because of injury,
illness, or personal emergency may play in the consolation unless an
on-site alternate takes the player’s place in the draw. A player who is
defaulted from a subsequent match for a reason other than
misconduct, decides not to play a subsequent match because of injury,
illness, or personal emergency, or retires from a match may play in the
consolation and place playoffs. See also USTA Regulation IV.E.6.
6. Round robin.
a. When authorized. Round robin draws may be used in any tournament
for which the entry form states that the tournament shall be played
using a round robin format. Additionally, a Round Robin draw may be
used in any division in any tournament in which there are eight or
fewer players or teams entered.
b. Procedure. Each player in the round robin shall play every other player
in the round robin.
c. Determining order of finish. The player who wins the most matches
is the winner. If two players are tied, then the winner of their headto-head
match is the winner.
If three or more players are tied, the Referee shall use the
following steps in the order listed to break all ties. The Referee shall
break as many ties as possible using a given step before using the
next step. These steps are:
• The head-to-head win-loss record in matches involving just the
tied players;
• The player with the highest percentage of sets won of all sets
completed;
• The head-to-head win-loss record in matches involving the players
who remain tied;
• The player with the highest percentage of games won of all games
completed;
• The head-to-head win-loss record in matches involving the players
who remain tied;
• The player with the highest percentage of sets won of sets completed
among players in the group under consideration;
• The head-to-head win-loss record in matches involving the players
who remain tied;
86 USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw)

• The player with the highest percentage of games won of games
completed among the players under consideration; and
• The head-to-head win-loss record in matches involving the players
who remain tied.
If the Referee has applied all the steps and a tie still cannot be broken, the
Referee shall use a random drawing among the remaining tied players to
determine their order of finish.
FAC Comment II.B-5: A 10-Point Match Tiebreak played in lieu of a deciding final
set counts as both one set and one game for the purpose of determining the order
of finish. If the players inadvertently play out the third set or any portion thereof, it
will still count as only one set and one game.
For the next three comments, assume that Adams, Baker, and Charles have
identical 4-1 records. Adams has a win over Baker; Baker has a win over Charles;
and Charles has a win over Adams.
FAC Comment II.B-6: Adams has the highest percentage of all sets won, and
Charles has the second highest percentage of sets won. What is the order of
finish? Adams is first; Charles is second; and Baker is third because application
of the percentage of all sets won procedure breaks all of the ties.
FAC Comment II.B-7: Adams and Baker have won the same percentage
of all sets. Charles has won a lower percentage of all sets than Adams and
Baker. What is the order of finish? Charles finishes third because Charles has
the lowest percentage of sets won. This is the only tie that can be broken by the
percentage of all sets won procedure. The Referee next turns to the head-tohead
record between Adams and Baker. Adams finishes first because of the
head-to-head win over Baker.
FAC Comment II.B-8: Adams has the best percentage of all sets won. Baker
and Charles have the same percentage of all sets won. What is the order of
finish? Adams finishes first because Adams has the best percentage of all sets
won. This is the only tie that can be broken by percentage of all sets won
procedure. The Referee next turns to head-to-head record between Baker and
Charles. Baker finishes second because of the head-to-head win over Charles.
d. Defaults, withdrawals, walkovers, and retirements. A player is credited
with a win in the round robin if:
• The opponent withdraws;
• The opponent creates a walkover;
• The opponent retires; or
• An official defaults the opponent.
When breaking a tie, only completed sets count as sets won and
only completed games count as games won. A player who is
defaulted for any reason other than lateness shall not play in
subsequent matches and may not be declared the winner of the
round robin. A player who is defaulted, retires, or creates a
walkover shall finish lower than every player who has an identical
match record.
USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw) 87

NORTHWEST
(Round #3 Losers from North)
COMPASS DRAW SHEET
UNITED STATES TENNIS ASSOCIATION
COMPASS DRAW
WEST EAST
SOUTHWEST
(Round #3 Losers from West)
NORTH
(Round #2 Losers from East)
SOUTH
(Round #2 Losers from West)
Fig. 7
88 USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw)
NORTHEAST
(Round #3 Losers from East)
SOUTHEAST
(Round #3 Losers from South)
(Undefeated Winner)

FAC Comment II.B-9: The Referee’s determination as to whether a match should
be scored as a default (and its type), withdrawal, or retirement affects the outcome
of the round robin. Therefore, the Referee should use great care in determining
why a player is not playing a match.
e. Procedures when there is more than one round robin draw in an event.
When there are six or more players entered, then the event may be
divided into more than one round robin. Before the round robins begin,
the Tournament Committee shall set forth in writing the exact
procedure for determining who advances to the final round (winners
only or winners and runners-up) and whether a round robin or single
elimination format shall be used to determine the winner of the final
round.
i. Preliminary round robins. Seeding shall be used to place the
strongest players in different divisions. The seeding principles
set forth in USTA Regulation II.A.4. shall apply.
ii. Final round. The overall winner shall be determined by playing
another round robin or a single elimination format. The
Tournament Committee may allow not only the winner of each
round robin but also the runner-up in each round robin to advance
to the final round. If the Tournament Committee allows runnersup
to advance to the final round, the runner-up of each round
robin shall play the winner of another round robin. In the final
round the placement of the prior winners and runners-up shall
be determined by random drawing, but no first match shall pair
a winner and runner-up from the same round robin. If the
Tournament Committee does not allow runners-up to play in
the final round, then the final round pairings shall be made by
a random drawing.
7. Compass draw.
a. When authorized. Compass draws may be used in any tournament
provided the entry form states the tournament shall be played using
a compass draw format.
b. Seeding. Seeding may be used to place the strongest players using
the seeding principles set forth in USTA Regulation II.A.4. Seeds
shall be drawn according to the procedures used for making a
standard draw.
c. Making draw. Each player is placed on a line on the center draw sheet.
The procedure for making a standard draw shall be followed for
determining the exact line on which each player is placed.
FAC Comment II.B-10: For a Compass Draw of 8, use the first match loser format
with a playoff for 8 players in TDM.
d. Byes. Complications will develop if there are byes in the draw.
Therefore, it is best to limit the entries to 16, 32, or 64. A substitute
list is helpful to eliminate problems caused by last minute
withdrawals. If byes must be placed in the draw, distribute them
USTA REGULATIONS II.B. (Making The Draw) 89

evenly in the quarters and halves of the draw as described in USTA
Regulation II.B.4.d.i.(A).
e. Progression in draw. At the end of each round, the winners continue
in their tournament in the same direction, while the losers move to
other points on the compass to form a new satellite tournament.
f. Specific procedures for draw of 32. See Figure 7.
At the end of round 1:
• The winners go east;
• The losers go west.
At the end of round 2:
• The east losers go north;
• The west losers go south.
At the end of round 3:
• The east losers go northeast;
• The north losers go northwest;
• The west losers go southwest;
• The south losers go southeast.
At the end of round 4:
• The losers are out of the tournament (unless it is announced in
writing before the start of the first match of the tournament that
there will be semifinal playoffs);
• The winners play the finals on each draw sheet.
g. Specific procedures for draw of 16. Use only the top half of the draw
at each compass point. Follow the same procedure as in a draw of 32
except that round 4 is the finals instead of the semifinals.
h. Specific procedures for draw of 64. Use two 32 draw sheets. Round
4 becomes the quarterfinals of each tournament instead of the
semifinals. At the end of round 4 all losers are out of the
tournament. The draw sheet tournaments continue with their own
semifinal matches until there is an eventual winner for each. (The
losers of the semifinals are out of the tournament.)
i. Prizes. The major prizes go to the east winner (who is undefeated)
and to the east runner-up (who has lost only to the east winner). Next
in order are the winners and runners-up from: northeast, north,
northwest, west, southwest, south, and southeast. The Tournament
Committee shall determine how many prizes are to be awarded.
8. Alternate method for making collegiate and scholastic draws. USTA
Regulation XII. provides an alternate method for making collegiate and
scholastic draws.
9. Application to team competition. The provisions of this USTA Regulation
II.B. except for paragraphs 1. and 2. do not apply to team competition
tournaments.
C. Changes in Draw
1. Withdrawal of player before play starts.
a. Withdrawal of seeded player before play starts. If a seed withdraws
after the draw has been made but before the start of play, the Referee
may do any of the following:
i. fill the vacated position with a person not already in the draw
whose inclusion would not affect the seedings;
90 USTA REGULATIONS II.C. (Changes In The Draw)

ii. remake the draw;
iii. relocate the players whose seeding groups have changed:
• 16 draw.
Seeds 1-4 withdrawing. If any of the four seeds
withdraws, the next player eligible for seeding becomes
the fourth seed, and to the extent necessary the three
remaining original top four seeded players are assigned
their new seeds, and any player whose Seeding Group
has changed is moved to the correct position.
• 32 draw.
Seeds 1-4 withdrawing. If any of the first four seeds
withdraws, the fifth seed becomes the fourth seed, and to
the extent necessary the three remaining original top four
seeded players are assigned their new seeds, and any
player whose seeding group has changed is moved to the
correct position. The next player eligible for seeding moves
into the open fifth seed position.
Seeds 5-8 withdrawing. If the withdrawal is among
seeds five through eight, the next player eligible for
seeding takes the position vacated by the withdrawing
seed.
• 64 draw.
Seeds 1-4 withdrawing. If any of the first four seeds
withdraws, the fifth seed becomes the fourth seed, and
to the extent necessary the three remaining original top
four seeded players are assigned their new seeds, and any
player whose Seeding Group has changed is moved to
the correct position. The ninth seed takes the position
vacated by the fifth seed, and the next player eligible for
seeding takes the open ninth seed position.
Seeds 5-8 withdrawing. If the withdrawal is among seeds
five through eight, the ninth seed takes the position
vacated by the withdrawing seed, and the next player
eligible for seeding takes the open ninth seed position.
Seeds 9-16 withdrawing. If the withdrawal is among
seeds nine through 16, the next player eligible for
seeding takes the position vacated by the withdrawing
seed. See USTA Regulation II.A.8. for the definition of
seeding groups.
• Filling a vacant position. To fill a vacant non-seed position
created by any move described in i. through iii. above, the
Referee should follow USTA Regulation II.C.1.b.
FAC Comment II.C-1: Follow the same principles for draws larger than 64.
iv. replace the withdrawing seed with the next player who would
have been seeded and fill in the newly seeded player’s former
position in the draw with an alternate or a lucky loser (if there
was a qualifying tournament).
USTA REGULATIONS II.C. (Changes In The Draw) 91

FAC Comment II.C-2: Principles for replacement of a player also apply to a player
who asks to withdraw but is defaulted instead because the player’s reason for not
playing is based on a reason other than injury, illness, or personal emergency.
FAC Comment II.C-3: In ITF Adult or Senior Circuit tournaments, the ITF requires
the use of the method in USTA Regulation II.C.1.a.iv. Referees of ITF tournaments
should check the ITF website to verify that there are no changes to this ITF procedure.
In all other cases, Referees may choose among the four methods. The second
and third methods are more appropriate for withdrawals that occur before the match
schedule has been published or several days before the start of play. They also may
be more appropriate in cases involving the withdrawal of a high seed. The first and
fourth methods are simpler and may be more appropriate in the case of last minute
withdrawals because the Referee will have to notify fewer players of the changes. The
Referee is not required to change the draw if none of these methods is feasible.
b. Withdrawal of player who was not seeded and filling a vacant position
created by moving seeded players. The Referee may do any of the
following:
i. Add player to draw. If there are players awaiting entry into the
draw, fill the position with a person not already in the draw whose
inclusion would not affect the seedings;
ii. Leave player in draw. If there are no players awaiting entry into
the draw, leave the player in the draw and advance the opponent
by a withdrawal.
iii. Remove player. If there are no players awaiting entry into the
draw and removing a player from the draw would eliminate a
round of play in the:
• Main draw: Move players using the principle of
randomness so that there are no byes; or
• Consolation draw: Add a bye so that the byes are evenly
balanced and move the player displaced by the bye, if any,
to the line previously occupied by the withdrawing player.
FAC Comment II.C-4: Examples of eliminating a round of play include not only
reducing a draw of 33 to 32 or a draw of 17 to 16, but also reducing a draw of 49
to 48 or a draw of 25 to 24 in tournaments with Feed-In Championships.
iv. Move unseeded players if there are no players awaiting entry
into draw and withdrawal would create double bye. If there
are no players awaiting entry into the draw and the withdrawal
would create a double bye, then the Referee may:
(A) Move opponent of highest seed who does not have bye.
Choose the opponent of highest seed who does not have
bye and move this player to the proper position in the
double bye. (Proper position is the top line of the pairing
in the top half and the bottom line of the pairing in the
bottom half.);
(B) Move player in adjoining match. If all seeded players
have byes and there is a first-round match in the
92 USTA REGULATIONS II.C. (Changes In The Draw)

Players Omitted from Draw
Fig. 8
USTA REGULATIONS II.C. (Changes In The Draw) 93

adjoining match, then move one player from the
adjoining match to the vacant position. (This creates a
second-round match between the same players who
would otherwise play each other in the first round.)
FAC Comment II.C-5: Matches are adjoining if the winners of these matches
will meet in the next round.
(C) Move player from another first-round match. If the
adjoining match also contains a bye, first identify the
quarter with the most players. If two or more quarters have
the most players, then select a quarter in the half opposite
the quarter where the vacant position is located. If the
quarter is in the top half, select the first pair of players who
have a first-round match and move the player on the
bottom of the pairing to the vacant position. If the quarter
is in the bottom half, select the first pair of players who have
a first-round match and move the player on the top of the
pairing to the vacant position.
2. Players omitted from draw. See Figure 8. Any player whose entry is
received on time and is otherwise acceptable will not be denied a place
in the draw because of administrative error or oversight by tournament
officials unless the Referee determines that play has proceeded too far to
make changes in the draw practicable. The entire draw does not have to
be remade. Instead, the following procedure should be followed:
a. If play has not begun and if omitted player would not have been
seeded, then the player’s place in the draw should be determined by
a random drawing. The random drawing includes the omitted player
and all unseeded players. The player whose name is drawn is placed
on the line previously occupied by the last bye that was placed in the
draw. See USTA Regulation II.B.4.d. for the order in which byes are
placed in the draw. Unless the omitted player’s name was the one
drawn, the name is positioned on the line previously occupied by the
player whose name was drawn. For example, there is a draw of 27
with eight seeds and five byes. Seeds 5, 6, 7, and 8 were randomly
drawn to lines 28, 5, 20 and 13, respectively. Therefore, the last
available bye went on line 27 opposite the fifth seed. Figure 8
illustrates this procedure. Davidson has been omitted from the draw.
A drawing including Davidson and all unseeded players is held. The
name of Edwards, which is on line 18, is drawn. Edwards’ name is
removed from line 18 and placed on line 27. Davidson’s name is
placed on line 18.
If the draw has no byes, use the same random drawing procedure
to determine the player who will play a preliminary match. A random
drawing is held among the unseeded players to determine the
opponent in the preliminary match. For example, there is a 32-draw
with no byes. Davidson has been omitted from the draw. A drawing
is held among Davidson and the unseeded players to determine who
will play a preliminary match. The name of Edwards, which is on line
94 USTA REGULATIONS II.C. (Changes In The Draw)

18, is drawn. Edwards’ name is removed from line 18 and Davidson’s
name is put in its place. A drawing is now held among the unseeded
players (including Davidson) to determine who plays a preliminary
match against Edwards. Franklin’s name is drawn. Franklin’s name is
removed from line 11. Edwards and Franklin play a preliminary match
for the right to occupy line 11. Figure 8 illustrates this procedure.
b. If play has not begun and if the omitted player would have been seeded,
then the seeding should be changed. To the extent necessary seeded
players are assigned new seeds. Players whose seeding group has not
changed remain on the same lines. Only those players whose seeding
group has changed are moved to new lines corresponding to their new
seeding group. See USTA Regulation II.A.8. for a definition of seeding
groups. The original lowest seed will no longer be seeded. This player’s
new position is determined by using the procedure for an unseeded
player who has been omitted from the draw. For example, there are
four seeds, including Brown on line 9, who is seeded third, and Jones
on line 24, who is seeded fourth. Davidson was omitted from the draw
and should have been seeded third. Davidson is placed on line 24,
which was previously occupied by Jones; Jones is no longer
seeded. Use the procedure in sub-paragraph 2.a. above to
reposition Jones.
c. If play has begun or if scheduling problems make it impossible to use
the foregoing procedures, then one method for determining the
omitted player’s place in the draw would be for the omitted player to
play one of the non-seeded players holding a place opposite a bye.
The specific place would be determined by lot. If only seeds have
byes, then the omitted player shall play the lowest seed who received
a bye.
3. Late entries and substitutions in the draw.
a. When to accept late entries and make substitutions. The Referee
may accept a late entry or substitute a new player or team into the
draw if the Referee (preferably assisted by a Tournament Committee
member) determines that the ability of a new player or team does
not invalidate the seedings. The Referee and Tournament
Committee should keep in mind that it is generally desirable to
encourage play.
i. In an elimination-type tournament no player or team who has
lost a match may be reinstated into the draw.
ii. A substitution may be made for a player or team who has
reached the second round by virtue of a bye, disqualification,
default for a reason other than misconduct, or withdrawal.
iii. A substitution may be made for a player who is injured during
the warm-up of the player’s first-round match or a secondround
match that the player has reached by virtue of a bye.
iv. If the Tournament Committee has provided the Referee with a
priority list, the Referee shall use this list in filling places in the
draw before accepting any late entry.
v. Except in extremely unusual circumstances, the draw will not be
remade after it has been announced.
USTA REGULATIONS II.C. (Changes In The Draw) 95

. Positioning the player or team. The Referee shall place the new player
or team in the draw by using whichever of the following principles
is the first to apply.
i. If one member of each of two doubles teams withdraws, then
the Referee may combine the two remaining players into a
new team. If one of the original doubles teams drew a bye, then
the new team should be placed opposite this bye. If both of the
original doubles teams or if neither of the original doubles teams
drew a bye, then the new team should be placed in the draw in
one of the slots occupied previously by the two original teams
with the position being determined by lot.
ii. If a singles player or one member of a doubles team withdraws,
then the Referee shall substitute another player for the
withdrawing player.
iii. If no player or team withdraws, then the Referee shall place the
entry on the line previously occupied by the last bye that was
placed in the draw. See USTA Regulation II.B.4.d. for the order in
which byes are placed in the draw.
4. Correcting error in seeding. If the Tournament Committee decides that it
has made an error in seeding the players, it may correct the error only if
no affected seeded player has begun a match. If the Tournament
Committee decides to correct the error, it should first redo the list of
seeded players. The seeded players’ names are moved to new lines
corresponding to the number of their new seeded positions only when the
seeding group into which the player falls changes. If after the revision any
original seed is no longer seeded, then the displaced seed is moved to the
line vacated by the newly seeded player. In some cases this procedure will
result in byes not being distributed in numerical order to the seeded
players.
FAC Comment II.C-6: Here is an example of correcting an error when it is
discovered that an unseeded player already in a draw of 64 should be the
first seed.
• The Committee assigns a new number to each seed according to the
new seeding order. The former number 16 seed is no longer seeded.
• Move the new number 1 seed to line 1.
• The former number 1 seed becomes the number 2 seed and is moved
to the line previously occupied by the former number 2 seed.
• The former number 2 seed becomes the number 3 seed and is moved
to the line previously occupied by the former number 4 seed.
• The former number 4 seed becomes the number 5 seed and is moved
to the line previously occupied by the former number 8 seed.
• The former number 8 seed becomes the number 9 seed and is moved
to the line previously occupied by the former number 16 seed.
• Move the former number 16 seed to the line previously occupied by
the new number 1 seed.
• All other seeds remain on their current lines.
96 USTA REGULATIONS II.C. (Changes In The Draw)

FAC Comment II.C-7: In some cases the procedure for correcting an error
in seeding in USTA Regulations II.C.4. will result in the byes not being
distributed in numerical order to the seeded players. For example, in a draw
of 25 with eight seeds there will be only seven byes available for eight seeds.
When the Tournament Committee realizes that it left unseeded a player who
should have been seeded fifth, it uses the procedure to place the new
number five seed on the line previously occupied by the former number
eight seed. This leaves seeds six through eight with byes even though the
number five seed does not receive a bye. This result is mandated by USTA
Regulation II.B.4.d., which does not allow a bye to be moved after the draw
has been made.
D. Scheduling Matches. Scheduling should balance fairness to the players and
the need to assure that the tournament is completed on time. This involves
making maximum use of available courts, minimizing “dead time” between
matches, and assuring appropriate rest for competitors.
1. Factors. The Referee should consider the following factors:
• Conditions affecting the draw;
• Regulations affecting the schedule;
• Match timing;
• Weather and available light;
• Players’ requests for special scheduling;
• Equalizing, to the extent possible, rest between matches for
opponents; and
• The availability and desirability of officiating assistance.
2. Conditions affecting scheduling. Various conditions affect the initial
scheduling:
• The size of the draws;
• Draw format including consolations, if any;
• The number of courts and hours they are available;
• Scheduling guidelines and rest period requirements;
• The number of players who are in more than one division; and
• The match format used in each event.
A combination of these factors may lead the Tournament Committee to
make decisions limiting participation.
3. Estimating length of matches. There are two common methods for
estimating the length of matches.
a. Scheduling with a consistent amount of time between matches. The
following estimates apply:
Indoors 1 hour and 15 minutes
Outdoor hard courts 1 hour and 30 minutes
Outdoor clay courts 1 hour and 45 minutes
(early rounds) 1 hour and 30 minutes
No-ad scoring matches 1 hour and 15 minutes
b. Garman System. This method is based on a mathematical analysis of
National level tournaments and is designed to reduce player waiting
times while maximizing court usage. It takes into consideration
anticipated defaults, retirements, long matches, and short matches. It
USTA REGULATIONS II.D. (Scheduling Matches) 97

TABLE 6
Scheduling Guidelines for Junior Divisions:
Maximum Number of Matches per Day
Match Format 12s Divisions 14s, 16s, & 18s Divisions
All Matches: Best of 3
tiebreak sets
All Matches: Tiebreak in
lieu of 3rd set or short
sets
Main Draw Singles:
Best of 3 tiebreak sets
Doubles and/or
Consolation Singles:
8-game pro sets
Main Draw Singles:
Tiebreak in lieu of 3rd
set or short sets
Doubles and/or
Consolation Singles:
8-game pro sets
Combinations of singles,
doubles, and consolation
singles not shown above.
2 singles
2 singles +
1 doubles
1 singles 1 singles
+ +
2 doubles 2 doubles
3 doubles 3 doubles
3 singles
3 singles +
1 doubles
2 singles 2 singles
+ +
1 doubles 2 doubles
1 singles
+
3 doubles 3 doubles
4 doubles
2 main draw singles
2 main draw singles +
2 doubles and/or
consolation singles
1 main draw singles 1 main draw singles
+ +
3 doubles and/or 3 doubles and/or
consolation singles consolation singles
4 doubles and/or 4 doubles and/or
consolation singles consolation singles
3 main draw singles
3 main draw singles +
2 doubles and/or
consolation singles
2 main draw singles 2 main draw singles
+ +
2 doubles and/or 3 doubles and/or
consolation singles consolation singles
1 main draw singles 1 main draw singles
+ +
3 doubles and/or 4 doubles and/or
consolation singles consolation singles
4 doubles and/or 5 doubles and/or
consolation singles consolation singles
117 games, no more 117 games, no more
than 88 of which than 115 of which
should be singles should be singles
If a player enters more than one division, these guidelines apply separately to each division.
Completion of suspended matches. When a match is carried over from a preceding day, it
is counted as a match for these scheduling guidelines if the player so elects and if 16 or more
games of singles or 20 or more games of doubles are required to finish the match.
98 USTA REGULATIONS II.D. (Scheduling Matches)

TABLE 7
Scheduling Guidelines for Adult, Senior, Family, and Wheelchair Divisions:
Maximum Number of Matches per Day
Best of 3 Tiebreak in lieu
Divisions Any Format Tiebreak Sets of 3rd Set
25 through 60 3 matches, no more
than two of which
should be singles
65 through 80 2 matches
85 & 90 2 matches, only
one of which should
be singles
Wheelchair 3 matches, no more 4 matches, no more
than 2 of which should than 3 of which
be singles should be singles
All other divisions No more than 2 singles; No more than 3
no guideline for doubles singles; no guideline
for doubles
If a player enters more than one division, these guidelines apply separately to each division.
Completion of suspended matches. When a match is carried over from a preceding day,
it is counted as a match for these scheduling guidelines if the player so elects and if 16 or more
games of singles or 20 or more games of doubles are required to finish the match.
schedules a number of matches at short intervals based on the
probability that there will be courts available. The system results in a
steady stream of check-ins rather than large numbers of players
checking in at one time.
FAC Comment II.D-1: A USTA publication on the Garman System is available
from the USTA Officials Department, 70 West Red Oak Lane, White Plains, NY
10604.
4. Players’ requests for special scheduling. The Referee should honor the
request if it is reasonably possible to do so and if fairness to all players can
be assured. A player may request special scheduling of the player’s first
match. The Referee has discretion to honor or deny requests for special
scheduling of subsequent matches.
5. Scheduling matches of players with long commutes. When possible, avoid
scheduling matches of players with long commutes for very early or late
matches.
6. Players are responsible for obtaining starting times. The players are solely
responsible for learning the time and place of their matches. A player’s
request for information as to the scheduled time of the player’s first match
shall be honored. The players should not rely on being told the time of their
matches and should check the draw.
USTA REGULATIONS II.D. (Scheduling Matches) 99

7. Posting and changing the schedule. The Referee shall post the schedule on
the official draw sheet. Before beginning any round, normally the Referee
should post the time of the next round (for both winners and losers) on the
official draw sheet. Once the schedule has been posted, it should not be
changed except for a compelling reason. If amended, the Referee shall
promptly notify all affected players.
8. Adjoining matches. The Referee should schedule matches whose winners
will meet in the next round at about the same time so that the winners will
have about the same amount of rest before they play each other.
9. Singles and doubles. The Referee should keep in mind possible conflicts
that may develop because of players who are competing in singles and
doubles. When possible in Adult, Senior, Family, and Wheelchair Divisions,
the Referee should schedule singles matches before doubles.
FAC Comment II.D-2: In deciding whether to schedule singles or doubles
matches first in Junior tournaments, the Referee should consider many factors
including:
• Whether the singles draw is for endorsement spots;
• Whether ranking points are awarded for doubles for combined rankings;
• Whether differences in match formats for singles and doubles and their effect
on minimum rest periods; and
• The weather.
10. Required rest between matches The Referee shall offer players the minimum
rest between matches that are set out in USTA Regulation III.C.1. and
Table 9. The Referee shall take into consideration these rest periods when
the Referee prepares the schedule.
11. Required rest between sets. The Referee shall follow USTA Regulation
III.C.2. and Table 10 that provides for rest periods between sets.
12. Scheduling guidelines. When possible, the Referee should comply with
the scheduling guidelines in Tables 6 and 7. These guidelines are
mandatory for all tournaments listed on the National Junior Tournament
Schedule, except that they shall not apply to divisions that are required
to use ITF tournament regulations. See USTA Regulation IX.A.12. These
guidelines are mandatory for Category I USTA Adult, Senior, and Family
National Championships. See USTA Regulation X.A.2.g.i. These
guidelines are also mandatory for Category I USTA Wheelchair National
Championships other than divisions that are required to use ITF
tournament regulations. See USTA Regulation XIII.A.2.g. These
guidelines are also mandatory for Category II USTA Wheelchair
Tournaments, other than divisions that are required to use ITF tournament
regulations. See USTA Regulations XIII.A.1.b. and XIII.A.3.g.
a. Junior Divisions. In addition to the guidelines in Table 6:
• All players should be given at least 12 hours of rest between
the completion of their last match of any day and the start of
play of their first match of the following day;
• In the 12 and 14 divisions, no match should start nor should a
suspended match resume after 8 p.m.; and
• In the 16 and 18 divisions no match should start nor should a
suspended match resume after 10 p.m.
100 USTA REGULATIONS II.D. (Scheduling Matches)

FAC Comment II.D-3: Tables 6 and 7 (which list the maximum number of
matches that ideally should be played per day) and Table 9 (which establishes
minimum rest periods between matches) are designed to ensure that players
receive at least a minimal amount of rest. Because so many tournaments are
played over a relatively short period, it often is not possible to provide long
enough rest periods and to limit the number of matches played per day so as
to ensure that players get optimal rest. When a Referee has sufficient time
available, the Referee should provide players with an adequate amount of rest
and not just a minimal amount of rest. Factors that a Referee may want to
consider in setting the number of matches per day and the rest period between
matches include the length of the matches played that day, the temperature, and
the humidity.
FAC Comment II.D-4: The guidelines in USTA Regulation II.D.12. and Table 6
are mandatory for all tournaments on the National Junior Tournament Schedule
except for those divisions playing under ITF Regulations. The guidelines in
USTA Regulation II.D.12. and Table 7 are mandatory for all Category I USTA
Adult, Senior, and Family National Championships, all Category I USTA
Wheelchair National Championships, and all Category II USTA Wheelchair
Tournaments, except for those divisions playing under ITF Regulations. If the
Referee has difficulty scheduling matches without violating a guideline, the
Referee should consult the appropriate USTA staff and USTA competition
committee for assistance.
b. Sectional and District limitations. Sectional and District
Associations may further limit the number of matches played in
one day to reflect local considerations.
13. Court surfaces. The Tournament Committee shall not arrange for playing
any division on more than one type of court surface. When a tournament
cannot be finished on this surface, the Committee may use available
courts of any type. However, USTA Regulation X.A.2.f. requires that the
semifinals and finals of Category I USTA Adult, Senior, and Family
National Championships normally be played on the surface specified in
the title and USTA Regulation XIII.A.3.f. requires that the semifinals and
finals of Category I USTA Wheelchair Championships normally be played
on the surface specified in the title.
USTA REGULATIONS II.D. (Scheduling Matches) 101

III. CONDUCTING THE TOURNAMENT
A. Tournament Committee Responsibilities Once Tournament Starts
1. Keep order. The Tournament Committee shall keep order on the grounds.
2. Provide supplies including singles sticks. The Tournament Committee shall
assure that each court is provided with singles sticks for singles matches
using a doubles net and all supplies that it deems necessary for a match.
3. Provide balls. At least three new balls shall be used to start a match at
tournaments above the sectional championship level and are recommended
for use to start a match at the sectional championship level.
4. Finish tournaments on different courts and at different times. The
Tournament Committee shall arrange for enough courts so that under
normal conditions the tournament can be completed on time and so that the
Referee can schedule matches in each division on the same surface type.
When a tournament cannot be finished on the original surface, the
Committee may use available courts of any type. However, USTA
Regulation X.A.2.f. requires that the semifinals and finals of Category I
USTA Adult, Senior, and Family National Championships normally be
played on the surface specified in the title; USTA Regulation XIII.A.3.f.
requires all Category I USTA Wheelchair National Championships
normally be played on the surface specified in the title.
If there is no practical way to finish on schedule, the Committee shall
either make arrangements mutually agreeable to the players involved to
finish at a later date or in the absence of such arrangements, declare the
tournament unfinished and distribute the prizes equitably among the stillinvolved
players.
B. Referee Responsibilities After Draw Has Been Made
1. Generally supervise all aspects of play. The Referee (or in the Referee’s
absence the Deputy Referee) shall be present during play. The Referee
exercises general supervision over all aspects of play, including, but not
limited to, the conduct and actions of players, coaches, parents,
spectators, officials, ballpersons, groundskeepers, and the administrative
crew. The Referee shall use judgment in all situations not specifically
covered by the ITF Rules of Tennis or USTA Regulations.
2. Schedule matches. The Referee is responsible for scheduling matches and
assigning courts (including moving a match in progress to another court
at any time). Normally a player’s singles match will precede the player’s
doubles match, but this is not mandatory. A player’s request for information
as to the scheduled time of the player’s first match shall be honored. See
USTA Regulation II.D.6. The Referee shall not schedule any division to
play on more than one surface type, except that the Referee may do so
when necessary to complete the tournament on time.
3. Disqualify ineligible players. Upon presentation of proof, the Referee shall
disqualify a player who has entered a tournament for which the player is
ineligible because of age or other restrictions that apply for that tournament.
The Referee may reinstate the loser of the last match won by the disqualified
player.
4. Determine who may enter the playing area. The Referee shall determine
who may enter the playing area.
102 USTA REGULATIONS III.A. (Tournament Committee Responsibilities…)

FAC Comment III.B-1: The playing area is the area inside the fences or backstops.
Any designated spectator seating or standing area is not part of the playing area.
5. Default players. The Referee may default a player for cause, which includes,
but is not limited to, tardiness, misconduct, or failure to follow the Referee’s
instructions or those of the Chair Umpire or Roving Umpire.
6. Consider appeals. The Referee rules on appeals from players defaulted by
the Chair Umpire. USTA Regulation IV.E.4. refers to this situation.
FAC Comment III.B-2: The Referee should not reverse the Chair Umpire’s
Default unless there is a compelling reason.
7. Handle infractions observed in non-umpired matches. In non-umpired
matches, the Referee and Deputy Referees may take appropriate action
with respect to any infraction of the ITF Rules of Tennis or USTA
Regulations they observe.
8. Suspend and postpone matches. The Referee may postpone or suspend
play when weather, light, surface conditions, health concerns, safety
concerns, or other circumstances justify so doing. Suspension of a match
because of darkness should be done only at the end of an even number of
games in the set or at the end of a set.
FAC Comment III.B-3: An incomplete match refers to a match that was started
but not completed. It is anticipated that the match will be completed. The Referee
shall record the time and score when the match was stopped, who was serving
and from which side, and the reason for the interruption.
9. Determine ball change pattern. The Referee determines the ball-change
pattern subject to the right of the Chair Umpire to order a ball change at other
than the normal time when in the Chair Umpire’s opinion abnormal conditions
warrant so doing.
10. Assign and replace Umpires. The Referee appoints and replaces or
reassigns, when necessary, Roving Umpires, Chair Umpires, Line Umpires,
and Net Umpires. The Referee shall not remove an Umpire from a match
because of a player’s request. These duties may be delegated to the Chief
Umpire, if there is one.
11. Decide questions of law. The Referee decides any question of law that a
Chair Umpire is unable to decide or that is referred to the Referee as an
appeal by a player. The Referee’s decision in these cases shall be final.
See Appendix V, Case 1 of ITF Rules of Tennis and USTA Comment V.1.
12. Appoint Deputy Referee. The Referee or Tournament Committee shall appoint
a Deputy Referee to act as the Referee whenever the Referee will be away
from the Referee’s normal post and out of touch with it for any reason
whatsoever, including participation in a match as a player or as an official.
Either the Referee or Deputy Referee shall be present during play.
13. Permit special grass court shoes. When playing on grass the Referee may
permit the use of special grass court shoes.
USTA REGULATIONS III.B. (Referee Responsibilities After Draw Has…) 103

A. Definitions
Actions Initiated by Player or an Adult on behalf of a Junior
Actions Initiated by an Official
Withdrawal
Walkover
Retirement
Injury, Illness,
or Personal
Emergency
Adult Discipline
Default
Default for Refusal
to Play
Abandoned
Match
Unplayed
Match
Disqualification
TABLE 8
Draw Sheet Terminology and Procedures
A withdrawal occurs when a player decides not to play all matches in an
event. A withdrawal occurs only before (or during the warm-up for) a
player’s first match in an event. If the withdrawal occurs before entries
close, the withdrawal may be for any reason. If the withdrawal occurs after
entries close (regardless of whether the draw has been made), it must be
for injury, illness, or personal emergency. A withdrawal also may occur as
a result of a tournament administrative error. Refusal to play for any other
reason is treated as a default.
A walkover occurs when there has been an administrative error or when a
player decides not to play a match in an event because of injury, illness, or
personal emergency. Refusal to play for any other reason is treated as a
default. When a player decides not to play the player's first match but is
allowed to play in the consolation, the first match is treated as a walkover.
A retirement occurs when a player is unable to continue playing a match or
resume a suspended match because of injury, illness, personal emergency,
or adult discipline. Refusal to play for any other reason is treated as a default.
These terms should be understood in their everyday sense. The terms also
include situations when an adult decides that a Junior will not play because
of injury, illness, or personal emergency.
Bona-fide reasons for not playing other than illness or injury shall be treated
as personal emergencies. Wanting to get home earlier or to play in another
sporting event is not considered a personal emergency.
A Referee should give a player the benefit of the doubt when deciding whether
the player’s reason for not playing is bona-fide. For example, a young female
player may be too embarrassed to reveal her real reason for not wanting to
play or not being able to continue playing. Other examples of bona-fide
reasons for not playing could include being emotionally distressed over the
break up of a relationship or over the death of a relative or friend.
Adult discipline occurs when a parent, coach, or other person responsible for
a Junior disciplines the Junior by not allowing the Junior to start or finish a
match. Adult disciplines are treated as defaults if the match has not started and
as retirements if the match has started. There is no such thing as a withdrawal
or walkover because of an adult discipline.
A default occurs when the Referee does not allow a player to begin or continue
a match. Examples of this kind of default include a player who does not show
up, a player who is defaulted for lateness, and a player who is defaulted for
receiving an injection, infusion, or supplemental oxygen.
A default also occurs when a player refuses to play or continue to play for
reasons other than injury, illness, or personal emergency. Examples of this
type of default include refusing to play in order to get home sooner or in
order to participate in another sporting event.
An abandoned match refers to a match that has started, but the Referee has
decided that the match will not be completed. There is no winner or loser of the
match.
An unplayed match refers to a match that the Referee decides will not be started
for any reason other than a withdrawal, walkover, default, or retirement.
There is no winner or loser of the match.
A disqualification occurs when the Referee removes a player from an event
because the player was not eligible for the event.
104 USTA REGULATIONS III.B. (Referee Responsibilities After Draw Has…)

B. After Entries Close But Before Draw is Made
Withdrawal
because of injury,
illness, or
personal
emergency
Refusal to play
for other reasons
Defaults
Withdrawals
TABLE 8
Draw Sheet Terminology and Procedures (Cont’d.)
Withdrawals because of injury, illness, or personal emergency normally do
not need to be reported but should be documented in tournament records.
A player who withdraws for a reason other than illness, injury, or personal
emergency must be reported (USTA Regulation V.A.3.) The withdrawal will
not be shown on the draw sheet and will need to be reported separately.
Withdrawals in order to play in another tournament or because the
player was entered in two overlapping tournaments must be reported unless
both tournaments agreed to the arrangement.
C. After the Draw Was Made But Before Play Begins
What Happened TDM Code
Disqualification Def [dq]
Misconduct before first match Def [cond]
Refusal to start match for reason other than injury, illness, personal
emergency, or adult discipline Def [refsl]
Adult discipline for a Junior to not start a match for disciplinary reasons Def [ad]
Tournament administrative error (e.g., tournament entered player in wrong
division) Wd [admin]
Injury Wd [inj]
Illness Wd [ill]
Personal emergency Wd [emerg]
Double withdrawal Wd/Wd
Note: In a tournament without any alternate available to play, the Referee may allow a player who
does not play a first match in the main draw because of injury, illness, or personal emergency to
play in the consolation draw. In this case the first match in the main draw is treated as a walkover
instead of a withdrawal.
Note: If an alternate is placed in the draw, the default or withdrawal will not be shown on the draw.
The default or the withdrawal must be reported separately, if the action would result in assessment
of suspension points under the USTA Suspension Point System or penalties by any of its District
or Sectional Associations.
USTA REGULATIONS III.B. (Referee Responsibilities After Draw Has…) 105

Walkovers
Defaults
Retirements
Other
D. After Play Starts
TABLE 8
Draw Sheet Terminology and Procedures (Cont’d.)
What Happened TDM Code
Injury Wo [inj]
Illness Wo [ill]
Personal emergency
Tournament administrative error (e.g., tournament told player
Wo [emerg]
incorrect time) Wo [admin]
Double walkover Wo/Wo
Disqualification for cause or ineligibility Def [dq]
Misconduct before or between matches Def [cond]
Failure to start match because of adult discipline
Refusal to start match for reason other than adult discipline, injury,
illness,or personal emergency. (After the Referee has conclusively
confirmed that a player refuses to play a match, the Referee need
Def [ad]
not wait until the scheduled time of the match to record the result.) Def [refs]
Not showing up
Lateness for match including, but not limited to, intending to play
but mistakenly arriving at the wrong time, location, or without
Def [ns]
proper equipment Def [late]
Lateness for resumption of suspended match or after Score +
rest period Def [late]
Double default
Refusal to continue playing a match for reason other than injury,
Def/Def
illness, personal emergency, or adult discipline Def [refs]
Default for receiving an injection, IV, or supplemental oxygen Def [med]
Default under Point Penalty System Score + Def [pps]
Injury Score + Ret [inj]
Illness Score + Ret [ill]
Personal emergency Score + Ret [em]
Retirement because of adult discipline Score + Ret [ad]
A player who retires from a match remains eligible for consolations, place playoffs, doubles
and subsequent round robin matches.
Abandoned Match Abd
Unplayed match Unp
Note: When a player is unable to play because of injury, illness, or personal emergency, it is
good practice to note on the draw the nature of the injury, illness, or personal emergency. If a
trainer or doctor is present at the tournament, it is good practice to have the trainer or doctor
examine the player to confirm the injury or illness.
106 USTA REGULATIONS III.B. (Referee Responsibilities After Draw Has…)

C. Rest Periods
1. Rest between matches.
The Referee shall offer the players the minimum rest between matches as set
forth in Table 9.
FAC Comment III.C-1: This regulation (which establishes minimum rest between
matches), USTA Regulation II.D.12., and Tables 6 and 7 (which provide
recommendations on the maximum number of matches that should be played per
day) are designed to ensure that players receive at least a minimal amount of
rest. Because so many tournaments are played over a relatively short period, it
often is not possible to provide long enough rest and to limit the number of
matches played per day so as to ensure that players get optimal rest. When a
Referee has sufficient time available, the Referee should provide players with an
adequate amount of rest and not just a minimal amount of rest. Factors that a
Referee may want to consider in setting the number of matches per day and the
rest period between matches include the length of the matches played that day,
the temperature, and the humidity.
FAC Comment III.C-2: Should the Referee make every reasonable effort to give
comparable rest to winners of matches who will play each other in the next round?
Yes.
FAC Comment III.C-3: May the Referee shorten the rest between matches in
tournaments using no-ad scoring? No.
FAC Comment III.C-4: A junior player enters the 16 singles and the 18 doubles
divisions. The player is scheduled to play two singles followed by one doubles
match. How much rest must the Referee offer the player between the matches?
The Referee must offer the player 60 minutes between the singles matches
because the matches are in the same division. The Referee is required to offer
the player only 30 minutes between the second singles match and the first
doubles match because these matches are in different divisions.
FAC Comment III.C-5: Same situation as in FAC Comment III.C-4 except that
the player is scheduled to play a singles match, the doubles match, and the
singles match. How much rest must the Referee offer the player between the
matches? The Referee is required to offer the player only 30 minutes between
each match because in each case the matches are in different divisions.
2. Rest periods between sets.
The set breaks and rest periods between sets are set forth in Table 10.
D. Suspension of Play
1. Suspension of play. The Referee may postpone or suspend play when
weather, inadequate light, surface conditions, health concerns, safety
concerns, or other circumstances justify doing so. When, in the opinion
of the Chair Umpire or Roving Umpire, playing conditions justify
suspension of the match, the official may advise the Referee. When
possible the official shall obtain the Referee’s approval before suspending
play. Suspension of a match because of darkness should be done at the
end of an even number of games in a set or at the end of a set.
USTA REGULATIONS III.D. (Suspension of Play) 107

TABLE 9
Minimum Rest Between Matches
Best of three or best of
Divisions five tiebreak set matches
(including no-ad scoring)
Juniors 60 minutes except 30 minutes in
doubles only tournaments
Senior 35-45 & 60 minutes
Parent-Child
Senior 50-90;
Parent-Child with
minimum parental age; 90 minutes
Grandparent-Grandchild;
Husband & Wife
(Combined Ages)
Wheelchair • Match of 60 minutes or less:
30 minutes
• Between 60 & 90 minutes:
45 minutes
• 90 minutes or more:
60 minutes
NTRP without 60 minutes
age restrictions
NTRP 35-45 60 minutes
NTRP 50-90 90 minutes
All other divisions 30 minutes
QuickStart Tennis formats: The Referee shall offer the players reasonable rest, which in many
cases will be no more than 15 minutes.
For any other format (including matches played with a 10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of a third
set), the minimum rest period is 30 minutes.
When a junior “plays up” in age division or a senior or adult “plays down” in age division, the player
is governed by the age division in which the player plays.
Players who participate in more than one division are entitled to only 30 minutes.
The Sectional Association, District Association, or the Referee may authorize additional rest when
any of them concludes that the length of the match, heat, humidity, or other conditions justify an
extension.
108 USTA REGULATIONS III.D. (Suspension of Play)
Pro set
formats
30 minutes
30 minutes
45 minutes
• Match of 60 minutes or less:
30 minutes
• Between 60 & 90 minutes:
45 minutes
• 90 minutes or more:
60 minutes
30 minutes
30 minutes
45 minutes
30 minutes

Wheelchair Family & NTRP Senior Adult Junior
TABLE 10
Time Allowed Between Sets
After 2nd set with no After 2nd set with After 3rd set
Divisions tiebreak in lieu of tiebreak in lieu of in best
3rd Set 3rd Set of five sets
Boys’ & Girls’ 12-16
Mandatory 10-Minute
rest r period during which
no player shall practice
120-second set break
Boys’ & Girls’ 18 120-second set break* 120-second set break Mandatory
10 Minutes
Mens’ Open, 25, & 30 120-second set break 120-second set break
Tournament
may allow
10 minutes
Women’s Open, 25, & 30
Mixed Doubles
(Open, 25, & 30)
Husband-Wife
Mixed Doubles
Senior Mixed Doubles
(35 & older)
Husband-Wife
10-minute rest period at
option of any player unless
tournament gives notice
that it will eliminate break.
120-second set break
Mixed Doubles
10-minute rest period
(Combined Ages)
Senior 35-90
Parent-Child,
Senior Parent-Child, &
Grandparent-Grandchild
NTRP
at option of any player 120-second set break
Wheelchair Open 120-second set break* 120-second set break
All other Wheelchair 10-minute rest period at 120-second set break
Divisions
option of any player
When a junior “plays up” in age division or a senior “plays down” in age division, the player is governed
by the age division in which the player plays.
When play is suspended for 10 minutes or more, any authorized rest period may be taken only after two
consecutive sets in a best of three set match (three consecutive sets in a best of five set match) have been
played without interruption. Completion of an unfinished set counts as one set.
* When there is heat, humidity or other adverse conditions and after notice before the match, the Referee
may grant 10 minutes, during which no player shall practice.
USTA REGULATIONS III.D. (Suspension of Play) 109

2. Player may not leave tournament area during suspended match without
permission of Referee. When a match has been suspended, a player may
not leave the tournament area until the player has obtained from the Referee
either the time the player is next to play or clearance to leave.
E. Medical Timeout and Bleeding Timeout
Medical timeouts and bleeding timeouts are administered pursuant to
Table 11.
1. Medical timeout. A medical timeout consists of evaluation time as
determined by the Referee plus a maximum of three minutes treatment
time. The maximum time allowed for evaluation and treatment is 15
minutes.
FAC Comment III.E-1: The Tournament Committee should familiarize itself with
the USTA Emergency Care Guidelines. See Part 4.
2. Bleeding timeout. A bleeding timeout consists of up to 15 minutes to stop
visible bleeding, clean up the court, and dispose of contaminated items.
3. Medical condition. Medical condition includes, but is not limited to, an
injury, illness, or heat-related condition or cramping, or any condition
that the player believes requires diagnosis or treatment. Medical condition
also includes aggravation of a pre-existing condition.
4. Non-treatable medical conditions. Players may not receive a medical timeout
or treatment any time during a match or a warm-up for the following medical
conditions:
a. Any medical condition that cannot be treated appropriately during a
match, such as degenerative conditions not helped or eased by oncourt
treatment;
b. General player fatigue, such as fatigue not accompanied by cramps,
vomiting, dizziness, blisters, or other similar treatable conditions; and
c. Any medical condition requiring injection, intravenous infusion, or
supplemental oxygen. A player who receives any injection,
intravenous infusion, or supplemental oxygen, except under
circumstances specifically authorized by USTA Regulations, shall be
immediately defaulted. Diabetics may use devices to check blood
sugar, may administer subcutaneous injections of insulin, and may
use battery-powered insulin pumps. Asthmatics may use hand-held,
non-battery, or non-electrical inhalers.
FAC Comment III.E-2: A player who receives an injection, IV infusion, or
supplemental oxygen during a rest period shall be defaulted. However, there is
no penalty for these actions during a suspension of play in which the Referee
allows the players to leave the tournament area.
5. Request for medical timeout. A request for a medical timeout may be made
by a player to the Referee, Chair Umpire, or other official at any time during
the match or warm-up.
110 USTA REGULATIONS III.E. (Medical Timeout and Bleeding Timeout)

FAC Comment III.E-3: If a player has two medical conditions for which the
player requests two medical timeouts, the player should make both requests
at the same time. The maximum time that play may be interrupted for
evaluation and treatment of the two conditions is 15 minutes.
6. Leaving playing area. A player requesting a medical timeout or bleeding
timeout may leave the playing area to contact the Referee, the Deputy
Referee, or other official in charge of the match. If an official is present,
the player may not leave the playing area without the official’s permission.
7. Coaching not permitted. No coaching shall be permitted during the
suspension of play for a medical timeout or bleeding timeout.
FAC Comment III.E-4: When no qualified medical person is available, the 3-minute
limit on treatment starts when the official finishes explaining the medical timeout
regulation. For this reason the official may want to delay explaining the regulation.
For example, when the supplies and equipment needed to treat a player are not
nearby, the official may delay explaining the medical timeout regulation until after
the official has walked the player to the supplies and equipment.
FAC Comment III.E-5: The time that it takes the player to get clothing and
equipment (other than a racket) back into adjustment and the time it
takes to walk back and forth to the court is not included in the treatment time but
is included in the overall 15-minute limit.
FAC Comment III.E-6: If an official becomes aware that a player has a medical
condition that is being treated on odd-game changeovers, the official should
carefully monitor the changeovers to make certain that no player receives coaching.
FAC Comment III.E-7: Early in the third set a player felt woozy and requested
a medical timeout. The Referee told the player that the player was not entitled
to a medical timeout because the player was suffering from non-treatable loss
of physical condition. Was the Referee’s decision correct? No. The Referee should
have allowed enough time for a qualified medical person or trainer to evaluate
whether the player was suffering from general fatigue that was not accompanied
by a treatable medical condition such as cramps, vomiting, some forms of
dizziness, or blisters. If the player’s general fatigue was accompanied by a
treatable medical condition, then the Referee should have allowed it to be
treated. Otherwise no treatment is allowed.
FAC Comment III.E-8: Same situation as in FAC Comment III.E-7 except no
qualified medical person or trainer is on site. The Referee’s decision was not
correct. The Referee should have explained the medical timeout rule to the player
and allowed the player to be treated by whomever the player chooses.
FAC Comment III.E-9: What happens if a player aggravates an old hamstring
injury during the warm-up and then re-aggravates it during the match? The player
is entitled to a medical timeout during the warm-up and again during the match.
FAC Comment III.E-10: What happens if a player takes a medical timeout during
the warm-up because the player has just pulled a hamstring muscle and
USTA REGULATIONS III.E. (Medical Timeout and Bleeding Timeout) 111

then aggravates that injury during the match? The player is entitled to another
medical timeout during the match.
FAC Comment III.E-11: A player requested a medical timeout for treatment of leg
cramps. The Referee granted the request. Can a player receive treatment for loss
of physical condition? Yes. A player may be treated as long as the condition is
treatable. The ITF Rules of Tennis no longer distinguish between injuries and
natural loss of physical condition.
FAC Comment III.E-12: A player’s left leg started cramping so the player
requested and received a medical timeout. One-half hour later the player’s right
forearm cramped up and the player requested another medical timeout. The
Referee gave the player another medical timeout. Was the Referee’s decision
correct? No. A player is entitled to only one medical timeout for all cramping and
heat-related conditions during a match.
FAC Comment III.E-13: A player’s left leg cramped, and the player requested and
received a medical timeout to treat this condition. Later the player received a
code violation point penalty and a code violation game penalty. With the score
4-4 and 40-30 in the final set, the player’s leg cramp recurs. The player loses the
point to make the score 4-5. The player hobbles to the chair where the player
normally sits on changeovers. Throughout the changeover the player rubs his leg
in a futile attempt to get rid of the cramp. After 60 seconds the Chair Umpire
announces “time.” After 90 seconds the player is still seated in the chair rubbing
the player’s left leg. What should the Chair Umpire do? The Chair Umpire should
announce “Code violation. Delay of game. Default.” The Chair Umpire should not
issue a time violation because it is clear that the reason for the delay was related
to the player’s physical condition. Only if the Chair Umpire had any doubt about
whether the delay was caused by the player’s physical condition would the Chair
Umpire issue a time violation instead of a code violation.
FAC Comment III.E-14: A junior player started bleeding from the nose. The only
way that the bleeding could be stopped was by placing a piece of cotton in the
player’s nose. The player does not want to play with the cotton. What should the
Referee do? The Referee should explain that the player must choose between
playing with the cotton and being required to retire.
FAC Comment III.E-15: At 3-2 in the first set a junior player started bleeding from
the nose and received a bleeding timeout for this condition. Early in the second set
the nose bleed recurred and the player asked for a second bleeding timeout. The
official denied the second bleeding timeout, but appropriately allowed the player
to be treated briefly to staunch the bleeding by placing cotton plugs in the player’s
nose. The official also cautioned the player that further treatment of the nose bleed
must occur during changeovers or set breaks. Play resumed but two games later
the player suffered a massive nose bleed that again stopped play. What action
should the official take at this point? The official should tell the player that he
obviously cannot continue play and must retire from the match.
FAC Comment III.E-16: What should an official do after a player vomits on the
court? The player may receive a 3-minute medical timeout. The official should
follow the clean-up procedure for bleeding.
112 USTA REGULATIONS III.E. (Medical Timeout and Bleeding Timeout)

TABLE 11
Medical Timeouts, Bleeding Timeouts, and Toilet/Change of Attire Breaks
A. When Timeout May Be Taken
Medical condition during warm-up • Immediately after request • At the end of warm-up
Medical condition during match • Immediately after request • Next changeover
• After qualified medical • After Referee or other
person or trainer evalu- official arrives and
ates and is prepared to explains the medical time-
treat the medical condition out provision
Visible bleeding Mandatory bleeding timeout begins when player notifies
official or acknowledges that there is visible bleeding
Toilet/Change of Attire Break When official determines need is genuine. Change of attire
breaks are limited to set breaks unless there is a clothing
malfunction
B. Administration
of the
Timeout
Evaluation time
begins
Treatment time
begins
Maximum
amount of
treatment time
Treatment time
ends
Maximum total
time
If maximum total
time is exceeded
Medical Timeout When
Qualified Medical
Person Available
When qualified medical
person arrives at court
After evaluation by
qualified medical
personnel
When treatment ends
and it has been
determined that player is
able to continue playing
Penalize under PPS,
except that if the medical
tImeout was taken during
the warm-up and the
player is unable to
compete, the match
does not begin
Medical Timeout When
No Qualified Medical
Person Available
Not applicable
After official explains
medical timeout
regulation to player
3 minutes, which includes the time to determine
whether the player is able to continue playing
When treatment ends
and it has been
determined that player
is able to continue
playing
Penalize under PPS,
except that if the medical
tImeout was taken during
the warm-up and the
player is unable to
compete, the match
does not begin
Bleeding Timeout
Not applicable
When player
notifies official or
acknowledges that
there is bleeding
15 minutes
When bleeding has
stopped, playing area
has been cleaned up,
& someone has
disposed of
contaminated items
15 minutes (regardless of number of conditions treated during the stoppage in play)
• If bleeding has not
stopped, the player
must retire
• If bleeding has
stopped, but
playing area is not
cleaned up,
Referee may move
match or continue
cleaning up the
court
USTA REGULATIONS III.E. (Medical Timeout and Bleeding Timeout) 113

Who may treat
Treatment during
90-second
Changeover or
Set Break
Where treatment
may occur during
Timeout
Qualified medical person
or trainer
C. Limit on Number of Timeouts
Any person who
player selects.
Official may provide
supplies
• A player may receive on-court evaluation,
treatment, or supplies from anyone for any
treatable medical condition
• A player or someone on behalf of the player shall
notify an official before using any supplies for
treatment of a medical condition
• A player may receive on-court evaluation or
treatment during no more than two changeovers
or set breaks (consecutive or non-consecutive)
• A player may treat himself or herself or receive
supplies an unlimited number of times. A player
may treat his or her doubles partner
Qualified medical
person, trainer, or
any person who
player selects
Not applicable
• On court
• Or off court, if authorized by an official (Off-court treatment does not change
the time limits)
Cramping and heat-related One in warm-up and one in match. Limit
conditions applies even if a heat-related condition or cramping is
in different parts of body
General fatigue No timeout allowed, but qualified medical person or
trainer may evaluate to determine if the problem is
general fatigue
Visible bleeding One in warm-up and one in match. Additional bleeding
timeout is allowed if visible bleeding occurs in a
different area of the body
Medical condition that is not No timeout allowed, but qualified medical
treatable person or trainer may evaluate to determine if the
problem is treatable
Treatable medical condition • One per medical condition
• No more than two medical timeouts during one
stoppage of play regardless of the number of
treatable medical conditions
• A player who has aggravated a condition that was
treated in the warm-up may take an additional
medical timeout for that condition during the match
.
Toilet/Change of Attire Break No limit but official must decide that need is genuine and
not because of general fatigue. Play continues if the
request is not granted. The player has a reasonable
amount of time for the break
114 USTA REGULATIONS III.E. (Medical Timeout and Bleeding Timeout)

F. Toilet/Change of Attire Break
A toilet/change of attire break consists of a reasonable amount time when an
official determines that there is genuine need. No coaching is allowed during a
toilet/change of attire break.
FAC Comment III.F-1: When possible these breaks should be taken during a
set break. If this is not possible, then the break should be taken at an odd game
changeover. Breaks taken at other times should be limited to true emergencies.
FAC Comment III.F-2: Gastrointestinal problems are medical problems that
are governed by medical timeout provisions and not by the toilet-break
provisions.
G. Shortening Tournaments
Inclement weather, health concerns, or safety concerns may force the Referee
to take steps to shorten the tournament to keep the tournament on schedule,
including, but not limited to:
1. Switch to no-ad scoring. The Referee may switch to no-ad scoring for any
complete round. However, USTA Regulation IX.A.6. prohibits no-ad scoring
in USTA Junior National Championships and USTA Regional Tournaments.
2. Switch to 10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of final set or switch to pro sets.
The Referee may switch to the 10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of a deciding
final set or to pro sets for any complete round with the following exceptions:
• USTA Regulation IX.A.7. requires the Referee of a USTA Junior
National Championship or a USTA Regional Tournament to get the
permission of the Director of Junior Competition or the Director’s
designee before switching, even in cases of inclement weather,
health concerns, or safety concerns;
• See USTA Regulations X.A.2.h. and X.F.5. for when the 10-Point
Match Tiebreak or pro sets may be used in Category I USTA Adult,
Senior, and Family National Championships; and
• USTA Regulations XIII.A.3.d.-h. for when the 10-Point Match Tiebreak
or pro sets may be used in Category I USTA Wheelchair National
Championships.
3. Strictly enforce pre-match warm-up time and breaks between sets.
4. Tighten court usage. Use “to be followed by” scheduling and have players
waiting at courtside as soon as matches finish.
5. Cancel matches.
a. Junior Divisions. Referees are encouraged to cancel matches in the
following order:
• consolation doubles;
• consolation singles;
• main draw doubles; and
• main draw singles.
This order of cancelling matches is mandatory for tournaments on
the National Junior Tournament Schedule. See USTA Regulation
IX.A.12.
b. Other divisions. If some matches in a division must be canceled, start
with consolation rounds. Cancel main draw singles matches last.
If there is no practical way to finish an event, the Committee shall either make
USTA REGULATIONS III.G. (Shortening Tournaments) 115

arrangements that are mutually agreeable to the players to finish at a later date,
or in the absence of such arrangements, declare the tournament event unfinished.
FAC Comment III.G-1: The Referee should cancel matches on a division-bydivision
basis and should try to avoid a situation in which some, but not all,
matches in a round in a division are completed.
FAC Comment III.G-2: What does a Referee do if a tournament event cannot be
finished without violating some of the scheduling guidelines? First, the Referee
may not violate the minimum rest between matches set forth in Table 9. Second,
the Referee should remember that the principle behind these guidelines is the
protection of the health of the players. Third, the Referee should keep to a
minimum the number of situations in which the guidelines in USTA Regulation
II.D.12. and Tables 6 and 7 are not followed. For example, it makes sense to start
a 12-and-under match after 8 p.m. if that will prevent several players from having
to play three singles matches the following day. This situation might also mean that
the Referee may have to delay the start of the next morning’s matches in order to
give a player enough sleep over night. In short the Referee has to use judgment,
keeping in mind the principle of the health of the players.
H. Ball Change Errors, Ball Replacement, and Practice Balls
1. Ball change errors. Ball change errors are handled under ITF Rules of Tennis
27i.
2. Balls that become unfit for play. If a ball becomes unfit for play (for example,
ball breaks or loses compression), it shall be replaced immediately. If a
ball becomes wet, it may be taken out of play temporarily until it dries, or
it may be replaced.
3. Replacement of balls. If a ball has to be replaced during the warm-up or
before the start of the third game after a ball change, the ball shall be
replaced with a new ball. At all other times it shall be replaced with a ball
of like wear to the remaining balls.
4. Resuming play after suspension of match. In matches where a ball change
is authorized only at the start of the third set, warm-up after a suspension
may be conducted with the match balls.
In all other matches, warm-ups after a suspension should be
conducted with balls other than the match balls. If other balls are not
available, then the match balls may be used, but the balls should be
changed two games sooner than the originally specified number of games.
When an Umpire or Referee determines that the condition of the balls has
materially changed since suspension of play, the match shall be resumed
with balls whose condition is equivalent to the condition of the balls that were
being used before their condition materially changed. If this is not possible,
the match shall be resumed with new balls and re-warm-up shall be
conducted with the new balls.
5. Practice during intermission. The Referee may permit practice on the match
court during an intermission, but not with the match balls.
116 USTA REGULATIONS III.G. (Shortening Tournaments)

IV. PLAYER RESPONSIBILITIES AND CONDUCT
A. Checking in at Tournament
1. Prove USTA membership. A player shall provide the Tournament Committee
with proof of USTA membership or deposit sufficient funds with the
Committee to purchase a membership. A foreign nonresident player who
has proof that the player is a member of the player’s National Association
is exempt from this requirement. The Committee may delegate this duty to
the Referee.
2. Check-in at tournament desk. A player shall check in at the tournament desk
before the scheduled time of each match. The Referee shall designate a
place at which players shall check in. A player is not deemed to have arrived
until the player checks in at the designated place and the player is properly
clothed, equipped, and ready to play. The Referee may penalize a player who
is on site for lateness if a court is available and the player has failed to check
in at the tournament desk by the scheduled match time. See FAC Comment
IV.D-1.
3. Obtain time of next match. The player is responsible for obtaining the time
of the player’s matches from the Referee, rather than vice versa. Unless
specifically authorized by the Referee, schedules of play carried in
newspapers or other media are not official, and a player utilizes them at
the player’s own risk.
B. Player Responsibilities under The Code
The Code shall apply to all matches played without a Chair Umpire and to matches
played with a Solo Chair Umpire except to the extent the Solo Chair Umpire
informs the players that the official is assuming some of their responsibilities.
The Code is a USTA publication originally written by Col. N.E. Powel. The
principles set forth in The Code shall apply in all cases not specifically covered by
the USTA Regulations.
C. Standards of Conduct
1. General. Players, persons who appear to be associated with a player
(including, but not limited to, parents and coaches), officials, and organizers
of any tournament are under a duty to encourage and maintain high
standards of proper conduct, fair play, and good sportsmanship. They are
under an obligation to avoid acts which may be considered detrimental to
the game of tennis. Detrimental acts include, but are not limited to, the acts
set forth in USTA Regulation IV.C.
The Chairperson of any tournament may withhold all or part of any
prize money or expenses payable to any player charged by the
Chairperson or by the Referee of the tournament with conduct
inconsistent with the principles set forth in USTA Regulation IV.C.,
provided a written grievance is filed within three days of the conduct in
accordance with USTA Regulation V.B. Any prize money or expenses so
withheld shall be withheld until a final determination of the charges in
the grievance has been made. Immediately after the final determination,
the funds withheld, less the amount of any fine, shall be promptly paid to
the player.
2. USTA Anti-Doping Program. The USTA is committed to ensuring fair and
drug free competition. Individual athletes bear the ultimate responsibility
for choosing for themselves to compete fairly and drug free. Participation
USTA REGULATIONS IV.C. (Standards of Conduct) 117

in USTA tournaments constitutes consent to be tested for drugs. Use of
banned substances and doping methods is cheating and may result in
penalties, including suspension and permanent disqualification. The USTA
in conjunction with the ITF has developed a program of education, testing,
research, penalties, and rehabilitation. The USTA Board of Directors
(hereinafter “Board”) has adopted and supports the USTA Anti-Doping
Program. Copies of this program may be obtained from the USTA and its
USTA Sectional Associations.
FAC Comment IV.C-1: The USTA publishes the United States Tennis
Association Anti-Doping Program. See this book for the list of prohibited
substances. The handbook is available from USTA Coaching Education and
Sports Science Department.
3. Shoes. A player may not wear shoes that mar or damage the court.
4. Warm-up. A player who refuses to warm-up with the opponent forfeits the
right to a warm-up. During the warm-up or a re-warm-up, a player may
have any person hit with the player if the opponent refuses to do so.
5. Leaving court. Once a match with a Chair Umpire has begun, a player
may not leave the court without permission from the Chair Umpire. In a
non-officiated match a player may leave the court for the purpose of
contacting the Referee or for a toilet/change of attire break, provided the
player does this with minimum delay.
FAC Comment IV.C-2. May a player leave the court to get water if none is
available on the court? Yes, but a player should arrange for someone to deliver
water to the player. When this is not possible a player may leave the court to
get water on a changeover or set break. The player must be ready to play within
90 seconds on a changeover and within 2 minutes on a set break.
6. Practice during intermission. During an authorized intermission in all
divisions other than juniors, the Referee may permit practice on the match
court. In Junior Divisions, no player may practice on any court during an
authorized intermission. Practice with the match balls shall never be
permitted.
7. Removal of official. A player is not entitled to have an official removed from
a match.
8. Inspection of ball marks. A player shall not pass the net to inspect a ball
mark.
9. No coaching. Except as permitted under Rule 30 of the ITF Rules of Tennis,
a player may not receive coaching during any suspension or interruption of
play due to the following:
a. Medical timeout or bleeding timeout under USTA Regulations
III.E.1 and III.E.2.;
b. Maladjustment of a player’s clothing, footwear, or equipment under
Rule 29(b) of the ITF Rules of Tennis;
c. Toilet/change of attire break or attire break under Rule 29(c) of the
ITF Rules of Tennis and USTA Regulation III.F.; or
d. Seeking the assistance of the Referee under USTA Regulation IV.C.5.
118 USTA REGULATIONS IV.C. (Standards of Conduct)

Coaching is permitted during an authorized rest period under Rule 30
and during any other authorized suspension of play under either USTA
Regulation III.D.1. or Rule 30. A temporary interruption of play during
which the players do not leave the playing area is not a “suspension” of play
for these purposes. Coaching is not permitted during any warm-up.
10. No abuse of players or officials.
a. No person shall abuse official or player. The Chair Umpire, Referee,
and any other official responsible for ensuring that a match is played
under conditions which are fair to all players shall make certain that
no parent, relative, coach, or other person associated with a player
abuses an official or player.
b. Official may request abusive person to desist or leave tournament
area. A player who enters a sanctioned tournament or match
consents to being penalized under the Point Penalty System for
abusive conduct by a person who appears to be associated with the
player. If the official observes the conduct, the official shall suspend
play and request that the person desist. If the abuse continues, the
official may direct the person to leave the tournament area. In a
flagrant case the official may immediately direct the person to leave
without requesting the person to desist.
c. Point Penalty System applies to abuse. If the person refuses to
follow the instructions to leave, then the official may penalize the
player associated with the person under the Point Penalty System.
(USTA Regulation IV.D.8. outlines the right to appeal.)
11. Player shall not enter two tournaments at same time. When entries close,
a player shall not be entered in two or more sanctioned tournaments, if any
part of the tournaments overlap unless each Tournament Committee
involved understands the situation and concurs in writing. After a player
has been eliminated from a tournament whose schedule of play partially
overlaps with that of a second tournament, the player may enter the
second tournament. See USTA Regulations IX.A.9.a.ii., and
IX.A.10.a.ii., which establish a special procedure that allows multiple
entries into USTA National Championships and USTA National Opens.
12. Player shall not enter a tournament intending to withdraw if the player’s entry
is accepted in another tournament. A player shall not enter a tournament
with the intention of withdrawing if the player’s entry is accepted in another
tournament, unless the Tournament Committee for the tournament in which
the player has entered understands the situation and concurs with the
contemplated action.
13. Player shall not enter tournament player cannot finish. Player shall not enter
a tournament (including mandatory consolation) knowing the player will
be unable to finish.
14. Player shall not transfer entry. Player shall not transfer entry in a tournament
to another player.
15. Player shall not withdraw from tournament after entries close except for
illness, injury, personal emergency, or previously authorized entry into
another tournament. A player shall not withdraw from a tournament after
entries close except for illness, injury, personal emergency, or previously
authorized entry into another tournament. If the player withdraws for other
USTA REGULATIONS IV.C. (Standards of Conduct) 119

easons after the draw has been made and the player has not been replaced
with another player, the match shall be recorded as a default.
A withdrawing player shall immediately notify the Tournament
Committee or Referee by telephone or electronic communication that the
player will not be playing.
• If the player is not playing because of an injury or illness, the player
shall deliver written verification of the injury or illness from a medical
professional to the Referee no later than the last scheduled day of
the tournament.
• If the player is not playing because of a personal emergency, the
player shall deliver a written description of the situation to the Referee
no later than the last scheduled day of the tournament. The Referee
shall determine whether the situation is a personal emergency.
The written verification and written description requirements are
mandatory for all USTA Junior National Championships and USTA Regional
Tournaments. The Tournament Committee may waive these requirements
unless prohibited from doing so by applicable National, Sectional, or
District regulations.
16. Player shall not fail to appear for reasons other than injury, illness, or
personal emergency. A player shall not enter a tournament and then fail to
appear for a match (whether in the qualifying, main, or consolation draw)
except for illness, injury, or personal emergency. If the player’s reason for
failing to appear is not one of these reasons, or if the player gives no reason
for failing to appear, then the match shall be recorded as a default.
FAC Comment IV.C-3: A junior player entered in a tournament on the National
Junior Tournament Schedule who withdraws before the draw is made or who
withdraws after the draw is made, but is replaced with an alternate, and the
reason for the withdrawal is not for injury, illness, personal emergency, or
previously authorized entry into another tournament is subject to the
Suspension Point System. See Table 20. Sectional and District Associations
may have similar systems that penalize or otherwise discipline players.
17. Player shall not engage in unsportsmanlike conduct. During the course of
a match a player shall not engage in:
a. Verbal abuse. Swear at an official, a spectator, or an opponent in a
voice that can be heard by any person;
b. Visible or audible profanity or obscenity. Use profanity or insulting,
abusive, or obscene language in any way that may be heard by any
person or use obscene, insulting, or abusive gestures;
c. Racket abuse. Throw or break a racket other than in the normal course
of play;
d. Ball abuse. Deliberately hitting, throwing, or kicking a ball that is not
in play if the ball:
• leaves the playing area;
• hits or comes close to hitting any person; or
• could cause damage or harm.
e. Physical abuse. Threaten or inflict bodily injury to anyone; or
f. Other unsportsmanlike conduct.
120 USTA REGULATIONS IV.C. (Standards of Conduct)

18. Player shall not engage in gambling activity. A player shall not:
a. associate with professional gamblers;
b. bet or act as a bookmaker on matches;
c. accept money or other consideration for losing a match or for winning
by only a particular margin; or
d. be a party to any payment of money or other consideration to another
person to induce the person to lose a match or to win by only a
particular margin.
19. Point Penalty System. A player shall not engage in conduct that calls for a
penalty under the Point Penalty System. Any player who violates any USTA
Tournament Regulation may be penalized under the Point Penalty System.
D. Point Penalty System
1. Mandatory use in any sanctioned tournament. The Point Penalty System
applies to violations occurring during the warm-up and the match in any
sanctioned tournament except that it does not apply to tournaments that
use a QuickStart Tennis format.
2. Purposes of the System. The purposes of the System are to:
a. deter unsportsmanlike conduct;
b. ensure compliance with the continuous-play rule; and
c. ensure on-time appearance for matches.
The objective of the Point Penalty System is not to punish, but to secure
compliance with the ITF Rules of Tennis and USTA Regulations.
3. Code violations for misconduct. Misconduct shall be penalized pursuant
to Table 12.
4. Time violations. Time violations shall be penalized pursuant to Table 13.
5. Delay between points. When practical in tournaments using a certified
official in direct observation of the match, the time that shall elapse from the
moment the ball goes out of play until the ball is struck shall not exceed 20
seconds.
6. Officials authorized to impose penalties.
a. Referee. A Referee may impose penalties on the basis of personal
observation or that of any other official or Court Monitor.
b. Chair Umpire. The Chair Umpire is primarily responsible for imposing
penalties in a chaired match. If a Line Umpire observes a conduct
violation or is the object of unsportsmanlike conduct by a player, the
Line Umpire shall, as soon as possible and without disrupting play,
inform the Chair Umpire. The Chair Umpire shall then make a decision
under the Point Penalty System.
c. Roving Umpire. Roving Umpires are primarily responsible for
imposing penalties in matches without Chair Umpires. Roving
Umpires may impose a penalty based only on their observations.
7. Flagrant violations. While the imposition of penalties normally follows Table
12, any flagrantly unsportsmanlike act may result in immediate default.
If an Umpire imposes the default, the player may appeal to the Referee. If
the Referee imposes the default, the player may appeal to the Tournament
Appeals Committee.
8. Appeal of penalty to Referee. A player has the right to appeal a penalty, but
the appeal is limited to questions of law. See Appendix V, ITF Rules of
Tennis.
USTA REGULATIONS IV.D. (Point Penalty System) 121

9. Penalties to be imposed on a doubles team. A penalty on a member of a
doubles team is considered to have been imposed on the team.
10. Penalties treated as if points actually played. All penalties under the Point
Penalty System are treated as though the penalty points or penalty games
actually had been played so far as serving order, court occupancy, and ball
change are concerned. One exception, as Table 14 indicates, is that a
player penalized for lateness also shall be deemed to have lost the toss
provided for in Rule 9 of the ITF Rules of Tennis. The penalized player is
allowed to choose an option, but only after the opponent has chosen. A
second exception is that the first ball change shall be calculated from the
first game played. The choice to serve or receive shall apply to the first
game played.
11. Time delays when each side is responsible. If both players or teams are
equally responsible for delay during a match, any penalty will be imposed
upon the server.
12. Penalties after medical condition develops. Except during the warm-up,
a player suffering from a medical condition may buy time with a penalty.
13. Penalties imposed between games or before match. A penalty imposed
between games or before the start of a match shall apply to the first point
of the next game scheduled to be played.
14. Point penalties. A point penalty is scored as though the player had played
and lost what would have been the next point.
15. Player may not decline penalty. A player who is the beneficiary of a penalty
imposed upon the opponent may not decline to accept it. A player who
disobeys the instructions of an official in such a case is liable to being
defaulted.
16. Reporting penalties to Referee. When feasible, a Roving Umpire should
promptly notify the Referee that a code violation has been assessed. After
a match, officials shall report to the Referee each code violation imposed.
17. Other disciplinary action. Nothing in the Point Penalty System rules out a
subsequent imposition of monetary fines, suspensions, or other disciplinary
actions by whatever governing body has jurisdiction.
18. Announcing score after penalty. After a point or game penalty, the new
score should be announced. After assessing a penalty that ends the match,
the official should delay announcing the score until the official determines
whether the penalized player will appeal.
19. Lateness. Lateness for a match, lateness for resumption of a suspended
match, and lateness after a rest period shall be penalized pursuant to Table 14.
20. Default for failure to arrive on time.
a. Discretion of Referee. The Referee is responsible for issuing defaults
for failure to arrive on time. After considering all relevant
circumstances, the Referee may elect not to default a player or to
reverse a default for failure to arrive within 15 minutes of the time
when the match was scheduled and called.
b. Appeal of default. If the Referee defaults a player for failure to arrive
within 15 minutes of the time when the match was scheduled and
called, the player may appeal the default to the Tournament
Appeals Committee. The Committee may reverse the default after
consideration of all relevant circumstances. If the Committee
122 USTA REGULATIONS IV.D. (Point Penalty System)

Code Violations
Delay
• Not resuming play within 30 seconds after a
medical timeout or bleeding timeout
• Delay caused by obvious cramping (but
only if the player has already received a
medical timeout for cramping)
• Receipt of evaluation or treatment for one
condition on more than two changeovers
or set breaks
• Taking more than two medical
timeouts during one stoppage of play
• Not resuming play after a changeover or set
break during which the player received
treatment
• Not playing within 20 seconds of having
been directed to resume play
• Passage of 20 seconds after any time
violation
• Delay caused by getting a replacement
racket that is not on court
• Leaving the playing area for an
unauthorized reason
Conduct
• Visible or audible profanity or obscenity
• Abuse of racket, balls, or equipment
• Verbal or physical abuse of a player or
official
• Receipt of coaching
• Abusive conduct by a player or a person
associated with a player (USTA Regulation
IV.C.10. refers to this situation)
• Retaliatory calls (obviously bad calls made
in retaliation for the opponent’s calls)
• Unsportsmanlike conduct (any other
conduct that is abusive or detrimental to
the sport)
• Failure to follow the instructions of an
official
• Violation of any USTA Tournament Regulation
(USTA Regulation IV.C.21.)
TABLE 12
POINT PENALTY SYSTEM (PPS)
Code Violations and Penalties
Penalties
Violations shall be penalized as follows:
First Offense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Point
Second Offense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Game
Third Offense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Default
A single flagrant unsportsmanlike act
may be penalized by defaulting the player.
See USTA Regulation IV.D.7.
A game penalty assessed during a set
tiebreak results in loss of the set. If
assessed during a 10-Point Match
Tiebreak, this results in the loss of the
match.
USTA REGULATIONS IV.D. (Point Penalty System) 123

Time Violations
• Delay between points or after
warm-up
• Violation of the 90-second
changeover or 120-second set
break provisions
Both players equally late up to 15
minutes
Both players more than 15
minutes late
Both players late but arrive at
different times
TABLE 13
Time Violations
Penalties
Violations shall be penalized as
follows:
First Offense.....................Warning
Each additional
violation .........One Point Penalty
When a player is late in arriving for the player’s scheduled match time and
any court is available, the Referee shall start the lateness penalty clock. The
Referee is not required to keep a court open while waiting for a player.
A player is not deemed to have arrived until the player checks in at the
place designated for checking in for matches and is properly clothed,
equipped, and ready to play. A team is not deemed to have arrived until both
partners have arrived.
A. Lateness for Start of Match
If one player or team is late
TABLE 14
Penalties for Lateness
Penalties
5 minutes or less:
Loss of toss plus 1 game
5:01 - 10 minutes:
Loss of toss plus 2 games
10:01 - 15 minutes:
Loss of toss plus 3 games
More than 15 minutes: default
Except for a default, the Referee
shall never assess more than a
3-game penalty for lateness
No penalty
124 USTA REGULATIONS IV.D. (Point Penalty System)
The Referee may default both
players, or the Referee may reinstate
the match using the principle in
effect when both players are late but
arrive at different times.
The penalty accrues on the arrival of
the first player (A). The opponent (B)
loses the toss and one, two, or three
games depending on the time
elapsed between A’s arrival and B’s
arrival.

B. Lateness for Resumption
of Suspended Match
C. Lateness after Rest Period
Lateness of one player up to 5 minutes
Lateness of one player for more than
5 minutes
Both players equally late up to
5 minutes
Both players are more than
5 minutes late
TABLE 14 (Cont’d)
Penalties
The same penalties are assessed as for
lateness for the start of a match except
there is no loss of toss.
Game Penalty
Default
The last player to arrive loses one game
unless the difference in arrival times is
more than 5 minutes, in which case the
last player to arrive is defaulted
The Referee may:
• Default both players;
• Allow the match to continue without
penalty; or
• Allow the match to continue and
penalize the last player to arrive one
game unless the difference in arrivals
times in more than 5 minutes, in
which case the last player to arrive is
defaulted.
reverses the default and if an alternate already has been placed in
the draw, the Committee may not reinstate the defaulted player in
the main draw or add the player to the consolation unless an
opening becomes available.
c. Penalties assessed before default. If the Referee elects not to
declare a default, or if a declared default is reversed by either the
Referee or the Tournament Appeals Committee, any penalties for
lateness assessed before the default shall stand unless the lateness
was caused by an error of a tournament official. For example, if
player A, after having been assessed a penalty of loss of toss plus
3 games, is defaulted for failure to arrive within 15 minutes of the
time when the match was scheduled and called, and the default is
subsequently reversed, the penalty of loss of toss plus 3 games
shall stand, and player A begins play with the score 0-3.
The player who received the benefit of the default shall have no right
to appeal the reversal of the default.
FAC Comment IV.D-1: When a court is available, the Referee calls the matches
on or shortly before the scheduled match time. If a court is not available, the
Referee may delay calling the matches until a court is available. When several
matches are scheduled at the same time, the Referee shall call all the matches
at the same time. For example, if five matches are scheduled at 10:00 a.m. but
only one court is available, the Referee should call all matches shortly before
USTA REGULATIONS IV.D. (Point Penalty System) 125

Racket Abuse
Ball Abuse
Audible or Visible
Obscenity or Profanity
Verbal or Physical Abuse
TABLE 15
Guidelines for Assessing Penalties
Always Generally Sometimes
Action Penalize Penalize Penalize
• Throwing a racket that, even
inadvertently, strikes a person x
• Throwing a racket into the fence or net x
• Throwing a racket in anger or in any
manner that could or does endanger any
person or that damages any part of the
court surface or equipment x
• Breaking a racket x
• Tossing a racket into the air x
• Tossing a racket at the player’s bag x
• Bouncing a racket on the court x
• Deliberately hitting, throwing, or
kicking a ball that is not in play that hits
a person x
• Deliberately hitting, throwing, or
kicking a ball that is not in play that
leaves the playing area x
• Deliberately hitting, throwing, or
kicking a ball that is not in play that
comes close to hitting a person x
• Deliberately hitting, throwing, or
kicking a ball that is not in play in a
manner that could cause damage or harm x
A player who hits the opponent while legitimately trying to return a ball to the
opponent should not be penalized.
• Words and gestures that are considered
patently offensive to court personnel,
players, or spectators x
• References to sexual functioning x
• References to deities when associated
with curses x
• Physical attacks, even if no one is hurt x
• Traditional fighting words x
• Ethnic or racial slurs x
• References to sexual orientation x
• Attacks on the competence of an official x
• Taunting x
126 USTA REGULATIONS IV.D. (Point Penalty System)

Verbal or Physical Abuse( Cont’d)
Coaching
TABLE 15 (Cont’d)
Guidelines for Assessing Penalties
Always Generally Sometimes
Action
• Insulting or abusive words and
Penalize Penalize Penalize
gestures that are directed at a person
• Words and gestures that are
disrespectful, disruptive, or
intimidating such as a loud“Come on”
or “Okay” after the opponent double
x
faults or makes an error on an easy shot
• Words and gestures that are in the face
of a person such as a strong pumped fist
x
directed at close range to an opponent x
• Receipt of coaching x
• Retaliatory calls x
• Other unsportsmanlike conduct x
An official may immediately default a player for a single flagrant unsportsmanlike act.
Examples of acts that may justify a penalty of immediate default include: physical attacks;
injury to an official or player through an act of racket or ball abuse; spitting on a person; and
racial, religious, and sexual orientation slurs.
Unsportsmanlike
Conduct
10:00 a.m. and should start the lateness clock on all players who have not
checked in by 10:00 a.m.
When more matches are scheduled than there are courts available, the
Referee may put the matches out in any order. A player does not escape the
lateness penalty because the player’s match was one of the last matches to be put
on the court.
If one of several matches scheduled at the same time is put out early and
when the scheduled time arrives there is no available court, the lateness clock
does not start until another court becomes available.
FAC Comment IV.D-2: Guidelines for Implementing Point Penalty System
An accepted method of match control is for an official to caution a player
whose behavior is borderline. The official should never caution a player
whose misconduct is clear; instead, the official should issue a code violation.
Implementation of the Point Penalty System requires judgment. If the player’s
action is such that the official believes that the action should not be repeated,
then at least a caution is required and a code violation may well be appropriate.
A “yes” answer to any of the following questions requires action under the PPS.
• Is the player’s action dangerous to any person on or around the court?
• Is the player’s action abusive towards any person on or around the court?
• Is the player’s action unreasonably delaying the match?
• Is the player’s action unsportsmanlike conduct (for example, making a
retaliatory call)?
USTA REGULATIONS IV.D. (Point Penalty System) 127

Table 15 contains guidelines for assessing penalties.
FAC Comment IV.D-3: A player came back 90 seconds late after the 10-minute
rest period, and the Umpire penalized the player one game. Was this the
correct ruling? Yes. The PPS provides a game penalty for any lateness after a rest
period, with default after five minutes.
FAC Comment IV.D-4: A player took a medical timeout because of cramping.
Later in the match the player cramped again, acknowledged that it was a cramp,
and was unable to continue play. The Roving Umpire assessed a code violation
point penalty for delay and told the player to resume play. After another 20
seconds passed without the player resuming play, the official assessed a game
penalty. Should the player have been defaulted because the player had already
received a medical timeout? No. The Roving Umpire handled the situation
correctly. Even after a medical timeout a player may gain additional time
through use of the PPS without being immediately defaulted. Once an official
directs a player to resume play, the player must play within 20 seconds or be
assessed another code violation.
FAC Comment IV.D-5: Player A was assessed a point penalty because of
misconduct. In the next game, Player B, who was Player A’s partner,
committed a conduct violation and was assessed a penalty of one game. Player
A and Player B protested, saying that since this was Player B’s first offense they
should have been assessed only a point. Is this correct? No. An offense by either
partner counts as a team offense, cumulatively.
FAC Comment IV.D-6: A player took a medical timeout. Later the player received
additional treatment for that condition during a changeover. The treatment
lasted more than 90 seconds, and the player was late in resuming play. The
Chair Umpire assessed a warning against the player for a time violation. Was the
Umpire’s decision correct? No. A player may be treated during any changeover.
But if the treatment lasts more than 90 seconds, the player is subject to a code
violation for delay.
FAC Comment IV.D-7: A player received a code violation point penalty. Shortly
thereafter, when the player was assessed a game penalty for a second code
violation, the player demanded that the Referee be called. Must this demand be
met? If the appeal involves a question of law, the Referee must be called. Most
appeals involving the PPS will involve questions of law. If the appeal involves
only a factual issue, the Referee should not be called.
FAC Comment IV.D-8: Player A is penalized loss of toss and a game penalty for
lateness; Player B elects to serve. Player A then asks to serve, claiming that the
penalty game counts as the first game of the match. Decision? Player B will serve
the first game actually played. Player B’s decision to serve applies to the first game
actually served, not the penalty game.
128 USTA REGULATIONS IV.D. (Point Penalty System)

FAC Comment IV.D-9: Player A is penalized loss of toss and a game penalty for
lateness. Player B asserts that Player A has lost the right to a warm-up. Is this
correct? No. Player A is entitled to a warm-up.
FAC Comment IV.D-10: The score is 2-0 and 15-15 in the third set with Player
A serving. Player B has already received a medical timeout for a heat-related
condition. Player B appears to be cramping and is unable to play within 20
seconds. The official issues a time violation warning and orders Player B to
resume play. Player B is not able to play within an additional 20 seconds. The
official issues a code violation for delay and penalizes Player B with a point
penalty. The score is now 30-15. Player B is not able to play within an additional
20 seconds. What should the official do? The official should treat this as another
code violation for delay and penalize Player B with a game penalty.
FAC Comment IV.D-11: Same situation as in FAC Comment IV.D-10 except
that the official has assessed Player B the game penalty, the score is now 3-0, and
the players are taking their 90 seconds on the changeover. What happens if
Player B does not resume play after the changeover? The official does not have
to advise Player B to resume play. Instead the official should default Player B
under the Point Penalty System.
FAC Comment IV.D-12: Same situation as in FAC Comment IV.D-10 except that
with the score 30-15 after being assessed a point penalty, Player B asks for
another medical timeout. What should the official do? If the cramping is obvious
and if Player B does not resume play within the allotted time between points, the
official shall immediately assess a game penalty. Otherwise the official should
ask Player B why player B needs the medical timeout. If Player B says
cramping, then the official should advise Player B that Player B is not entitled
to a medical timeout and should order Player B to resume play. The official
should assess a game penalty against Player B if Player B is not ready to play
within 20 seconds. If Player B states that the problem is a pulled muscle, the
official must allow a medical timeout. If it is determined that Player B did not pull
a muscle but instead is cramping, the medical timeout ends. The official tells
Player B to resume play. If Player B does not resume play within 20 seconds, the
official should assess a game penalty.
FAC Comment IV.D-13: What should happen when one player repeatedly fails to
call out the score and officials are called to the court repeatedly to settle scoring
disputes? The official should tell the player that The Code § 31 requires the server
to call out the score. In a particularly egregious case, the official may treat
subsequent incidents as code violations for failure to follow the instructions of an
official.
FAC Comment IV.D-14: What should an official do when a player has been
overruled more than once during a match? At some point, an official may caution
the player (or team) that future overrules will be penalized under the Point Penalty
System as unsportsmanlike conduct. There is no hard and fast rule as to how
many overrules is “too many.” An official should consider all factors including:
USTA REGULATIONS IV.D. (Point Penalty System) 129

• the age and experience of the player;
• the closeness of the calls;
• the importance of the points on which the overrules have occurred;
• the factors that might have caused the player to miss the call (e.g., a
sudden gust of wind blew the ball in at the last minute versus apparent
outright cheating or a retaliatory call); and
• the frequency with which the overrules occur.
An official should consider cautioning a player if there have been two overrules
during the same set. Once an official cautions a player that subsequent
overrules will be penalized under the Point Penalty System, the official must
penalize subsequent overrules.
FAC Comment IV.D-15: What should an official do when a player grunts so loudly
that play on nearby courts is affected? The official may treat loud grunting as a
hindrance. If the official concludes that the grunting affected the outcome of the
point on the court where the grunting occurred, the official may order that the
point be replayed. The official should advise the player that subsequent loud
grunting that affects the outcome of a point will be treated as a hindrance and will
result in loss of the point. An official should not order a point replayed on an
adjacent court even if the grunting may have affected the outcome of a point on
that court.
FAC Comment IV.D-16: What should an official do when a player engages in
loud outbursts in a foreign language? If the loud outburst is in a language that
the official does not understand, the official should caution the player that
further foreign language outbursts that are not understood by the official will
be penalized under the Point Penalty System as unsportsmanlike conduct.
E. Defaults and Disqualifications
1. Default of player for cause. The Referee, Deputy Referee, Chair Umpire, or
Roving Umpire may default a player. A player may be defaulted for cause
including, but not limited to, tardiness, misconduct, or failure to follow the
instructions of an official.
2. Disqualification of ineligible player. Upon presentation of proof, the Referee
shall disqualify a player who has entered a tournament for which the player
is ineligible because of age or other restrictions that apply for that
tournament. The Referee may reinstate the loser of the last match won by
the disqualified player.
3. Appeal to Tournament Appeals Committee of disqualification or unilateral
default issued by Referee. If the Referee disqualifies or unilaterally defaults a
player, the player shall notify the Referee within 15 minutes of being notified of
the disqualification or default of the player’s intent to appeal to the Tournament
Appeals Committee. The Tournament Appeals Committee’s decision on any
appeal shall be final.
4. Appeal to Referee of default issued by official other than Referee. A player who
has been defaulted by an official other than the Referee may appeal the decision
to the Referee. The Referee’s decision shall be final. In the absence of the
Referee, a Deputy Referee shall decide the appeal unless it was that Deputy
130 USTA REGULATIONS IV.E. (Defaults and Disqualifications)

Referee who issued the default, in which case the Tournament Appeals
Committee shall decide the appeal.
5. Players shall not leave playing area while appeal is pending. When a player
appeals an on-court disqualification or default, the player must appeal
before the players leave the playing area. When an appeal has been made,
no player shall depart the playing area until the appeal has been acted upon.
6. When defaulted player may play in other events. A player who has been
defaulted for misconduct shall not participate in any other events in that
tournament. Tardiness is not considered misconduct. A default for
misconduct assessed against a doubles player shall not prohibit the
participation of the partner in other events in that tournament unless, in the
judgment of the Referee, the conduct of both partners contributed to the
default. A player who has been defaulted for a reason other than
misconduct is entitled to play in all other events in the tournament, provided
that once a player has been replaced in the main draw by an on-site alternate,
the player is not entitled to play in the consolation. See USTA Regulation
II.B.5.c.
7. Betting. If a player bets on any match, the Referee shall immediately default
the player from all events and remove the offender from any further
connection with the tournament.
USTA REGULATIONS IV.E. (Defaults and Disqualifications) 131

V. POST-TOURNAMENT REGULATIONS
A. Responsibilities of Tournament Committee and Referee After Completion
of Tournament
1. Submit draw sheets to USTA within seven days. Within seven days after
the completion of a tournament, the Tournament Committee shall submit
to the body issuing the sanction complete, legible draw sheets containing
first and last names of all players, match scores, and other information
that is required by the body issuing the sanction. Failure to submit these
reports may bring about disciplinary action by the sanctioning body. The
foregoing also applies to Feed-In Championships and consolations
conducted as part of the tournament.
2. Reports on players whose prize money was withheld. Within three days
after the completion of a tournament, the Tournament Committee shall
file a report with the USTA Grievance Committee on any player whose
prize money was withheld pursuant to USTA Regulation IV.C.1. Failure to
submit these reports may bring about disciplinary action by the
sanctioning body.
3. Referee reports violations of USTA Regulations within three days. Within
three days after the end of a tournament, the Referee shall file a written
report of all violations of USTA Regulations and penalties imposed with
the Sectional Association where the tournament was held and with the
Sectional Association where the player is domiciled. If the tournament
was a junior tournament published on the National Junior Tournament
Schedule, the Referee also shall file the report with the USTA Junior and
Collegiate Competition Department. A Referee’s failure to file the written
report within three days after the end of a tournament shall not invalidate
any post-tournament disciplinary action based on violations of USTA
Regulations nor shall it invalidate any penalties imposed.
B. Grievances
Any official, volunteer, player, or person associated with a player (including,
but not limited to, a parent or coach) who observes a violation of USTA
Regulations, standards of conduct, fair play, or good sportsmanship may file
a written grievance according to the grievance procedures of the Sectional
Association where the tournament was held; except if the conduct arises out
of any of the following tournaments, the grievance shall be filed with the
Chairperson of the USTA Grievance Committee, c/o USTA Executive Director,
70 West Red Oak Lane, White Plains, New York 10604:
• Junior tournaments on the National Junior Tournament Schedule;
• Adult, Senior, and Family tournaments on the National Adult, Senior, and
Family Tournament Schedule;
• USTA National Intersectional Team events;
• Category I USTA Wheelchair National Championships, or
• International competitions in which USTA players participate.
(See USTA Bylaw 43 for procedures and time frames for the filing of grievances
and appeals.)
C. Suspensions by Sectional Associations
A Sectional Association that imposes a suspension from participation in
tournaments as the result of a grievance arising out of a sectional matter or as
a result of a suspension imposed under its Suspension Point System shall
132 USTA REGULATIONS V.A. (Responsibilities of Tournament Committee…)

eport the suspension to the USTA National office within seven days of the
suspension becoming final under the Sectional Association’s procedures. If
the suspension involves Adult, Senior, Family, or Wheelchair tournaments, the
Sectional Association shall forward a copy of the notice of suspension to the
USTA National Competitive Play Department. If the suspension involves Junior
tournaments, the Sectional Association shall forward a copy of the notice of
suspension to the USTA Junior and Collegiate Competition Department. The
failure to forward the notice of suspension within seven days after the
suspension becomes final shall not invalidate the suspension.
USTA REGULATIONS V.C. (Suspensions by Sectional Associations) 133

VI. QUICKSTART TENNIS FORMATS
A. Purpose
QuickStart Tennis formats help players learn tennis by utilizing specialized
equipment, a smaller court, and modified scoring.
B. Boys’ and Girls’ 8 Divisions
1. Format. The following QuickStart Tennis format is required for use in
sanctioned tournaments in Boys’ and Girls’ 8 divisions and is
recommended for other competitions in these divisions.
a. Court. The court shall be a 36-foot court as described in Figure 9.
b. Ball. The ball shall be a stage 3 (red) ball of any composition as
described in Appendix VI of the ITF Rules of Tennis.
c. Racket. The racket shall be no longer than 23 inches (58.5 cm).
d. Scoring. The match shall consist of the best two out of three
games. Each game shall consist of a 7-Point Tiebreak, except that
the players shall not change ends during the game. The players
shall change ends after each game.
2. Draw format and size. Tournament draws shall be any non-elimination
format such as a compass draw or round robin. The maximum draw
size shall be 32. Tournaments should not last more than one day.
3. Results not considered for ranking. Results shall not be considered for
ranking.
4. Special provisions. A tournament in these divisions:
• Requires a Tournament Director, who may also serve as the
Referee;
• Requires a Referee, but the recommendation for the use of a
USTA-certified Referee does not apply;
• Shall offer reasonable rest to players between matches; and
• Does not use the Point Penalty System.
FAC Comment VI.B-1. Because QuickStart Tennis formats matches are
relatively short, the minimum rest period of 30 minutes in Table 9 does not
apply. In many cases a rest period of no more than 15 minutes will be
appropriate.
FAC Comment VI.B-2. The USTA recommends that Boys’ and Girls’ 10
divisions use a QuickStart Tennis format. Recommendations for these
divisions are:
1. Court. The court shall be a 60-foot court as described in Figure 10.
2. Ball. The ball shall be a stage 2 (orange) or stage 1 (green) ball of
any composition as described in Appendix VI of the ITF Rules of
Tennis.
3. Racket. The racket may not exceed 25 inches (63.5 cm).
4. Scoring. The scoring shall be the best of three sets. The first two
sets shall be short sets. The third set shall consist of a 7-Point
Tiebreak.
5. Draw format. Tournament draws shall be any non-elimination
format such as a compass draw or round robin. Tournaments
should not last more than one day.
134 USTA REGULATIONS VI.A. (Purpose)

6. Results not considered for ranking. Results from tournaments that
use the QuickStart Tennis format shall not be considered for
ranking.
7. Special provisions. A tournament using the QuickStart Tennis
format in these divisions:
• Requires a Tournament Director, who may also serve as the
Referee;
• Requires a Referee, but the recommendation for the use of a
USTA-certified Referee does not apply;
• Shall offer reasonable rest to players between matches; and
• Does not use the Point Penalty System.
➝
36'
➝
➝
➝
13'6'
18'
➝
➝
Instructions for Laying Out 36-Foot Court
on Top of Regulation 78-Foot Court
➝
9' ➝
4'6" ➝
➝
36-Foot Court
Fig. 9
The Court
The court shall be a rectangle that is 36 feet long and 18 feet wide.
This size shall be used for singles and doubles.
The Net
The court shall be divided across the middle by a net suspended by a
cord that shall pass over or be attached to two net posts at a height of 2
feet 9 inches. The net shall be fully extended so that it completely fills the
space between the two net posts and must be made of sufficiently small
mesh so that a ball cannot pass through it. The height of the net at its
center shall be 2 feet 9 inches.
Marking the Lines on the Court:
• Create two baselines by drawing lines that are 36 feet apart at the
ends of the court. (This places the baselines on top of the doubles
sidelines of a 78-foot court.)
USTA REGULATIONS VI.B. (Boys’ and Girls’ 8 Divisions) 135

• Create two sidelines by drawing lines that are 18 feet apart and
perpendicular to the baselines. They are used for singles and
doubles. (This places the sidelines on the baseline and service
line of a 78-foot court.)
• Create two service lines by drawing lines between the sidelines
that are parallel to each baseline and 4 feet 6 inches inside each
baseline.
• Create the center service line by starting at one service line and
drawing a line parallel to the sidelines that is half way between
the sidelines and that ends at the other service line. (The center
service line results in the formation of two service courts on each
side of the court.)
• Divide each baseline in half by a 2-inch wide center mark that is
drawn inside the baseline and parallel to the sidelines.
• All lines shall be 1.5 inches wide, the same color, and shall clearly
contrast with the color of the surface. If the lines are painted on a
78-foot court, they shall be of a different color than the lines on the
78-foot court and shall stop 2 inches from the standard lines.
• All measurements shall be made to the outside of the lines.
➝
27'
➝
➝
➝
9' ➝
Instructions for Laying Out 60-Foot Court
on Top of Regulation 78-Foot Court
➝
21'
60-Foot Court
➝
The Court
The court shall be a rectangle that is 60 feet long and 21 feet wide for
singles and 60 feet long and 27 feet wide for doubles.
The Net
The court shall be divided across the middle by a net suspended by a
cord that shall pass over or be attached to two net posts at a height of 3
feet 6 inches. The net shall be fully extended so that it completely fills the
space between the two net posts and must be made of sufficiently small
136 USTA REGULATIONS VI.B. (Boys’ and Girls’ 8 Divisions)
60'
Fig. 10
➝
10'6"
➝
➝
3'
➝
➝

mesh so that a ball cannot pass through it. The height of the net at its
center shall be 3 feet. The net may be held down by a strap. The strap and
band shall be primarily white.
Marking the Lines on the Court
• Create two baselines by drawing lines that are 60 feet apart at the
ends of the court.
• Create two singles sidelines by drawing lines that are 27 feet apart
and perpendicular to the baselines. Leave a 2-inch gap in each
sideline immediately behind each service line.
• Create two doubles sidelines by drawing lines that are 33 feet apart
and perpendicular to the baselines. (This places the doubles
sidelines on top of the singles sideline for a 78-foot court.)
• Use the existing service lines of the 78-foot court as the service
lines.
• Use the existing center service line of the 78-foot court as the
center service line.
• Divide each baseline in half by a 2-inch wide center mark that is
drawn inside the baseline and parallel to the sidelines.
• All lines shall be 1.5 inches wide, the same color, and shall clearly
contrast with the color of the surface. If the baselines and singles
sidelines are painted on a 78-foot court, they shall be of a different
color than the lines on the 78-foot court.
• All measurements shall be made to the outside of the lines.
USTA REGULATIONS VI.B. (Boys’ and Girls’ 8 Divisions) 137

VII. OFFICIATING REGULATIONS
A. Referee. The Referee is the official who is responsible for assuring that the
competition is fair and played under the ITF Rules of Tennis and the USTA
Regulations. The Referee supervises all aspects of play including, but not
limited to, the conduct and actions of players, coaches, parents, spectators,
officials, groundskeepers, and administrative crew. See USTA Regulations
I.C.4 and III.B. and Table 3.
FAC Comment VII.A-1: Referee Procedures
1. The Referee’s should be present whenever matches are being played.
When the Referee is not present or is playing a match, the Referee shall
appoint a Deputy Referee who shall be present.
2. The Referee and other officials shall settle scoring disputes in
non-officiated matches by using their best judgment. They should first
attempt to get the players to reconstruct the score so that they agree on
it. Thereafter, the following options are listed in order of preference:
• Counting all points or games agreed on by the players, with only
the disputed points or games being replayed;
• Playing from a score mutually agreeable to the players; and
• Deciding the score by a coin toss.
(See USTA Comments 5.4-6.)
3. The Referee shall obtain and prepare the scorecards unless the Referee
delegates this duty to the Chief Umpire or the Chair Umpire.
FAC Comment VII.A-2: Deputy Referee Procedures
The Referee may appoint a Deputy Referee to assist in the performance of the
Referee’s duties or to assume these duties when the Referee is absent.
FAC Comment VII.A-3: Field Referee Procedures
A Field Referee is a Deputy Referee at a secondary site who shall:
1. Act as the Referee at the secondary site (the decisions are final to the
same extent that the Referee’s decisions are final);
2. Provide information to the players or officials regarding the scoring
system, ball change, warm-up, and rest periods;
3. Advise the other officials of their responsibilities including
enforcement of the Point Penalty System and the foot fault rules;
4. Oversee the conduct of play for all courts at the site, enforce the ITF
Rules of Tennis, Point Penalty System, USTA Regulations, and The
Code, and take appropriate actions with respect to any infractions that
the Referee or the other officials observe;
5. Assure that the singles sticks are installed for singles matches and
removed for doubles matches and that the net is measured and properly
tensioned at the start of the day and at appropriate times;
6. Penalize a player who is late under the Point Penalty System;
7. Avoid umpiring matches (when this is not possible, the Referee shall
appoint a qualified Deputy Referee); and
8. When necessary serve simultaneously as the Field Referee and a
Roving Umpire.
138 USTA REGULATIONS VII.A. (Referee)

FAC Comment VII.A-4: May the Referee authorize a player to wear a cell
phone in vibrate mode? Unless the Referee specifically authorizes a player
to wear a cell phone in vibrate mode, any cell phone that is brought to the
court must be turned off and placed so that it can be neither seen nor heard.
A Referee might authorize a doctor or emergency medical responder who is
on call to wear a cell phone in vibrate mode. The Referee should advise the
opponent that the player is authorized to wear the cell phone. If the
authorized cell phone vibrates during a point, play continues unless the
opponent claims a let based on an unintentional hindrance. If a player’s cell
phone rings, the opponent may stop the point and claim the point on the
grounds of a deliberate hindrance.
FAC Comment VII.A-5: May an official control the location of devices
capable of receiving information? Yes. An official may require that these
devices be placed where they can neither be seen nor heard.
B. Chief Umpire
The Chief Umpire appoints and replaces or reassigns, when necessary, Chair
Umpires, Line Umpires, Roving Umpires, and Net Umpires in those
tournaments where the Referee has delegated these duties to the Chief Umpire.
FAC Comment VII.B-1: Chief Umpire Procedures
1. Obtain from the Referee the court availability, the number of officials
to be used for each match, the ball change, and other pertinent
information.
2. Recruit the necessary competent Umpires, establish their availability,
and schedule their daily court assignments.
3. After coordinating the time and place with the Referee, schedule a
pre-tournament meeting of all Umpires in order to discuss the general
conditions involved in working the tournament.
4. Conduct a meeting of the involved Umpires before each session of the
tournament to give direction, inform them of changes in procedures or
to review previous matches as a means to improve future performance.
5. Evaluate the work of all Umpires and offer constructive criticisms and
suggestions.
6. Prepare the scorecard for each match and maintain a file of all
completed scorecards.
7. Furnish the media with any factual information they may request,
subject to the approval of the Referee.
8. Designate the method of deployment of on-court officials during a
match, following USTA standard procedures.
C. Chair Umpire
1. Enforces the rules and regulations. The Chair Umpire conducts the
match in accordance with the ITF Rules of Tennis and USTA
Regulations.
2. Calls the lines when no Line Umpire is assigned. In the absence of any
USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire) 139

Line Umpire or Net Umpire, the Chair Umpire assumes all their duties
except those delegated to another Umpire or to the players.
3. Assigns the officials to the lines. When the Referee or Chief Umpire has
not given specific assignments to the various Line Umpires, then the
Chair Umpire makes these assignments in the way best to utilize their
services.
4. Enforces instructions as to who enters playing area. The Chair Umpire
shall enforce the Referee’s instructions as to who may enter the playing
area, and in the absence of instructions the Chair Umpire shall
determine who may enter the playing area.
5. Requests replacement of official for good cause; rearranges
assignment of officials. The Chair Umpire may request that the Referee
or the Chief Umpire replace one or more Umpires if, and only if, the
Chair Umpire determines that there is good and sufficient cause. In any
case, play shall continue pending the decision. The Chair Umpire may
rearrange the assignment of Umpires at any time.
6. Calls the score. The Chair Umpire calls the points, games, and sets at
the end of each, respectively, and when asked to call them.
7. Sees that players change ends and play continuously. The Chair
Umpire sees that the players change ends in accordance with the rules
(allowing them no delay or rest during a tiebreak). The Chair Umpire
sees that they resume play promptly at the end of an authorized rest
period and sees that play is continuous.
8. Scorecard. The Chair Umpire records the points, games, and sets on
the scorecard. The Chair Umpire signs the scorecard at the end of the
match and delivers it without delay to the Chief Umpire or the Referee.
The failure of the Chair Umpire to sign or deliver the scorecard does
not invalidate the match.
9. When Line Umpire is unable to make call. When a Line Umpire is
unable to make a call, the Chair Umpire may make the call. While a
replay is to be avoided if at all possible, the Chair Umpire shall order a
point replayed if a valid call cannot be made.
10. Suspension of match. The Chair Umpire shall advise the Referee when
playing conditions justify suspension of the match. When practicable,
the Chair Umpire shall obtain the Referee’s approval before suspending
play.
11. Alters ball change. The Chair Umpire may call for a ball change at other
than the prescribed time when abnormal conditions warrant so doing.
12. Final decision on fact questions; overrules clear mistakes. The Chair
Umpire makes the final decision on every question of fact in the match,
including the overruling of the Net Umpire or Line Umpire if required to
correct a clear mistake.
FAC Comment VII.C-1: What is the difference between a “Question of Fact”
and a “Question of Law”? “Questions of Fact” involve whether a specific
event happened. Examples include whether a ball is in; whether a ball
touched a player, whether a ball bounced twice, and whether a server’s foot
touched the baseline before the serve was struck. “Questions of Law” involve
the application of the rules or regulations to facts that have already been
140 USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire)

determined. Examples include determining whether an act was a hindrance;
whether a player should have been assessed a code violation for misconduct;
and the procedure for correcting errors in serving order, serving and receiving
position, and ends.
13. Decisions on questions of law subject to appeal. The Chair Umpire
decides all questions of law, subject to an appeal by a player to the
Referee. Appendix V, Cases 1 and 2 of the ITF Rules of Tennis, USTA
Regulation IV.D.8., and USTA Regulation IV.E.4. refer to this
situation.) The Referee also decides any question of law that a Chair
Umpire is unable to decide. When the matter under consideration
affects the scoring of a match, the Chair Umpire shall immediately bring
it to the Referee’s attention and suspend play pending the decision. In
all other cases of appeal, play shall be continued while the matter is
being considered. The Referee’s decision in such cases shall be final.
14. Defaults player for cause. The Chair Umpire may default a player for cause,
which includes, but is not limited to, tardiness after an intermission,
misconduct, or failure by the player to comply with instructions.
15. Calls service lets and “walking and running” foot faults. The Chair Umpire
calls service lets and foot faults that are in violation of the “walking or
running” prohibition.
16. Balls that touch ceiling. On an indoor court where part of the ceiling area
is obstructed from the view of the Chair Umpire and the Net Umpire, the
Chair Umpire may assign the calling of touches in that area to one of the
other Umpires.
17. Miscellaneous violations. The Chair Umpire calls any violations during
play in which:
a. A ball in play touches a player;
b. A player touches the net or the opponent’s court while the ball is
in play;
c. A player strikes the opponent’s return before it has passed the net;
d A not-up (double-bounce) occurs;
e. An illegal carry, double-hit, or other illegal stroke is made; and
f. A ball in play passes through the net.
These duties, or portions thereof, may be delegated to the Net Umpire.
FAC Comment VII.C-2: Chair Umpire Procedures
1. Learn the basic facts about the match, such as name of tournament,
event (men’s, women’s, singles, doubles, etc.), the round, best of sets,
correct names, and residences of the players, and the ball change. This
information should be on the scorecard. If it isn’t, write the information
on the card.
2. Your supplies should include a stopwatch, measuring device, and
eraser-equipped pencils. Optional equipment includes a cap or visor,
safety pins, adhesive tape, and bandaids.
3. When you go to the court (preceding the players), check the height of
the net. Ensure that singles sticks are in place on opposite sides of
the net, or removed for doubles; check the ball supply (including
USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire) 141

used balls) and equipment for the Umpire’s chair. Also, confirm the
availability of players’ supplies, water, towels, sawdust, etc.
4. Have a pre-match conference with players. Be brief and informative.
Always bring the players (in doubles at least one member of each
team) together at the net near the center strap. Discuss only
necessary information, for example, the number of balls in use, the
ball change pattern, and anything unusual such as longer warm-ups
or reduced crews with the chair calling some of the lines. An example
of such a discussion: “Gentleman, we’re using 4 balls; change at 9
and 11.” Toss a coin for winner’s choice according to Rule 9.
5. In making the pre-match announcement, be brief! An example: “Ladies
and gentlemen, this third round match will be the best of three
tiebreak sets. To the left of the chair, from Rye, NY, Alex Adams and
from White Plains, NY, Jerry Baker; to the right of the chair, from
Greenwich, CT, Chris Clark and from Hicksville, NY, Don Dunn.
Adams and Baker won the toss and chose to receive.” (This part of
the introduction should be made after the two minute or one minute
announcement during warm-up.) “Time.” (Glance to see that the
players and officials are ready.) “Don Dunn to serve...Play!” If the
match will use no-ad scoring and a 10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of
the third set, the introduction should be: “Ladies and gentlemen, this
third round match will consist of two tiebreak sets. No-ad scoring will
be used. A 10-Point Match Tiebreak will be used at one set all.” At one
set all the Umpire should announce: “A 10-Point Match Tiebreak will
now be played to decide the match.”
6. If there is any doubt, ask the players how to pronounce their names
before the pre-match conference. Announce each player only as the
player serves for the first time and again after any intermission. In
announcing a match involving players from another country, introduce
the visitor(s) first.
7. Titles, such as Mr., Mrs., or Ms. are used when directly
communicating with a player or issuing a penalty. Use only the
players’ surnames on scoring. For example, “Advantage Adams.”
8. In doubles, use the server’s name when the server’s team has
the advantage and use the name of the player receiving when the
receiver’s team has the advantage.
9. Call games as follows:
• “Game, Smith; first game.”
• “Game, Smith; three all, first set.”
• “Game, Jones; first game, second set.”
• “Game, Jones; Jones leads 3-2 and 1 set to love.”
• “Game, Jones; Jones leads 3-2, second set; first set, Smith.”
• “Game, Jones; three all, second set.”
• “Game, Smith; first game, final set.”
Call sets as follows: “Game and second set, Smith, 7-5. One set all.”
The scores of previous sets are never given.
10. When announcing a tiebreak, use the following: “Game, Smith. 6-all,
first set. Tiebreak.”
11. In calling the score in a tiebreak, give the leader’s score, then the score
142 USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire)

of the opponent, then the name of the leader, for example, “4-zero,
Scott”, or “3-2, Jones-Smith” or “3-all.” In tiebreaks use “zero” instead
of “love.”
12. When the score reaches “Deuce” in no-ad scoring in events other than
mixed doubles, announce “Deuce, Deciding Point, Receivers’ Choice.”
13. To prevent play from starting, say: “Wait, please.” To interrupt play, say:
“Let.” Say: “Replay the point,” if the interruption requires it. Don’t say:
“Play a let.”
14. If there is an unusual interruption in play (medical timeout, equipment
repair, etc.) be sure to inform the opposing player(s) and the
crowd. Keep your announcement very brief and simple: “Ladies and
gentlemen, Mr. Adams is taking a medical timeout.” The objective is to
keep everyone informed of what is occurring on court.
15. When a player takes a medical timeout, be sure to start your watch.
Announce: “2 minutes,” “1 minute,” then “30 seconds” to let the players
know the time remaining.
16. The call for first serve let is: “Let, first serve”; on a second serve: “Let,
second serve.”
17. Remember at changeovers to call “Time” at 60 seconds. On set breaks,
call “Time” at 90 seconds. If a player is late leaving the courtside chair,
you may call “15 seconds” at the end of 75 seconds. This warning
should be used sparingly and is not mandatory.
18. A code violation should be announced in accordance with the following
examples: “Code violation, delay of game, point penalty, Mr.
Adams”; “Code violation, ball abuse, game penalty, Mr. Adams”; “Code
violation, racket abuse, default, Mr. Adams.” Always know what you are
going to say before announcing a violation.
19. Time violations should be announced in accordance with the
following example: “Time violation, warning, Mr. Baker.” Each
subsequent delay: “Time violation, point penalty, Mr. Baker.”
Always know what you are going to say before announcing a
violation.
20. An accepted method of match control is for an official to caution
a player whose behavior is borderline. The official should never
caution a player whose misconduct is clear; the official should issue a
code violation.
21. An official may caution a player on a changeover to avoid a future
time violation. For example, the official may quietly tell a
player: “Watch the 20 seconds,” if the player is getting close to a time
violation between points. The player is now on notice that if the
player is not ready within 20 seconds, the official will issue a time
violation.
22. The following is an example of announcing the outcome of a match:
“Game, set, match, Adams; She wins two sets to love: 7-6, 6-2.”
23. In announcing the outcome of a match, use the term “default” when a
player fails to appear on time or is guilty of misconduct. For example
“Game, set, match; Jones wins 6-4, 2-4, default.” When a player is
unable to continue a match because of a medical condition, the record
USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire) 143

should show the score at the time followed by the word “retired” and a
description of the medical condition. For example, “6-1, 2-4, retired,
cramps.” When a player is unable to continue a match because of a
medical condition, announce the score followed by the term “retired.”
For example, "Mr. Jones is retiring due to an injury (illness). Smith
wins, 6-1, 2-4, retired.”
FAC Comment VII.C-3: Chair Umpire Techniques
1. Promptness in announcing the score at the end of a game is one trait of
a competent Chair Umpire. It gives the players confidence in the official.
Applause plays an important part in the timing of your score calling.
Except for game ending points, you should always try to announce the
score just as the applause is subsiding. An example for game ending
points: “Game Smith,” (pause and let applause begin to subside),
“Jones leads 2-1”. Occasionally, in an exciting match there will be
prolonged applause that continues up to the instant the server is
ready to start the next point. If the players look to you for the score, of
course give it. But even in matches where there is frequent applause
there will be very brief and routine points. You will be able to quickly
announce the new score before the few scattered handclaps start.
That’s one place where variety and promptness are important.
Keep the score and the server in mind to more accurately
announce the score and mark your card at the end of the point.
WARNING: don’t let your scorecard marking become so extensive that it
keeps you from seeing something important between points.
Remember the two most important things to keep in mind:
a. Look at the point-losing player and
b. Check the receiver as the server is preparing to serve.
2. The Line Umpire’s calls should be so loud and clear that normally no
repetition is necessary. It may be necessary to repeat an occasional call
because of crowd noise or as an affirmation of a close call. In such
cases your comment should be: “The ball was out” (or “good,” as the
case may be). Don’t say: “The Line Umpire called it out,” obviously
disclaiming responsibility for the call.
3. If there is not a Net Umpire you will call lets. Don’t announce let
unless the serve actually is good. You also make the calls for any
uncovered lines. Do so in a clear voice so both players can hear you.
4. Always keep the point score in your head, using your scorecard to
confirm it. Repeating the score silently to yourself is a good habit,
particularly when a controversy is brewing.
5. Where a call of good is overruled, the approved wording is “Out, (give
the correct score).” Where an out call is overruled, the approved
wording is “Correction, the ball was good, replay the point (or give the
correct score).”
6. Be alert to the players on close calls. Judicious use of a hand signal or a
positive nod with eye contact will confirm a call. If verbal confirmation is
required, the phrasing should be: “I saw the ball good (or out)” or “I
agree with the call.” DO NOT SAY “It was not a clear mistake.”
144 USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire)

7. Four characteristics mark the delivery of a good Chair Umpire: a
natural sounding but well-projected voice; proper inflection in calling
the score; promptness; and some variety in timing and intensity.
Avoid the monotony of having all your announcements sound alike.
Always know what you are going to say before you open your mouth.
Use a conversational tone of voice and avoid a sing-song delivery.
8. When all the players agree that a line or let call is in error, accept the
players’ version.
9. Do not cross your legs during play.
FAC Comment VII.C-4: Solo Chair Umpire Procedures
1. When only a Chair Umpire is available to conduct a match, the
official is called a Solo Chair Umpire. A Solo Chair Umpire will, in
general, have the same duties and authority as the Chair Umpire with
Line Umpires.
2. The responsibilities of the Solo Chair Umpire and the players are
described below. Depending on the sophistication of the players, the
Solo Chair Umpire should cover some or all of these responsibilities
in a brief pre-match meeting.
a. The Solo Chair Umpire is there to help the players by assuring
that the match is played under the fairest circumstances
possible.
b. The players shall call all lines promptly and loudly. Any doubt
about a line call should be resolved in favor of the opponent.
c. The Solo Chair Umpire overrules clear mistakes. This includes
“good” balls that are called “out.” This includes obviously “out"
balls that are called “good.” It does not include close “out” balls
that are called “good.” If the Solo Chair Umpire overrules an
“out” or “fault” call, then the player who made the call loses the
point.
d. The Solo Chair Umpire makes all other calls including, but not
limited to, foot faults, lets, not-ups, and code violations.
e. The Solo Chair Umpire may explain the ball change policy and
should conclude the meeting by asking if there are any questions.
3. The Referee or the Solo Chair Umpire may modify the above
line-calling procedure with the exception that the overrule shall
continue to be exercised. Two examples are that the Solo Chair
Umpire might call all the lines or the service line only.
4. Sections may authorize Solo Chair Umpires to call all lines in
designated tournaments.
5. In certain professional and ITF tournaments, the Solo Chair Umpire
may be required to call all lines.
FAC Comment VII.C-5: Scorecard Marking Procedures
Keep scorecard marking to a minimum. This allows you to spend more time
watching the players and coaches for possible conduct violations. Brief
examples of a modified scorecard are shown. Before going to court complete
USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire) 145

Example of Scorecard Marking
Fig. 11
146 USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire)

The tiebreak score is reported as 7-6(x) or 6-7(x) with (x) being the number
of points won by the loser. For example, 7-6(4) means the tiebreak score was
7-4, and 6-7(14) means the tiebreak was 14-16.
Fig. 12
USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire) 147

CODE VIOLATIONS (POINT PENALTY SCHEDULE)
Step Set Games Points Player Code Description
W
P
G
D
3
3
TIME VIOLATIONS
1-0
1-0
15-15
Ad
Smith
Team / Player(s) Team / Player(s)
Jones Smith
148 USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire)
VA
VA
yelled “you stupid idiot”
at baseline umpire
screamed at chair: “you’re
worse than the baseline umpire”
Step Set Games Points Player 20 90 Step Set Games Points Player 20 90
W
P
P
3
3
1-0
1-0
15-40
3rd
deuce
X
X
W
P
P
Fig. 13

as much of the scorecard as possible including the players’ names in
cumulative game columns, first ball change, and ball number.
1. Serves. Aces are shown with A’s, double faults with D’s and missed
first serves with a small dot in mid-line.
2. Code violations. A point penalty for a code violation is shown by a “C”
in the box of the player who was not penalized. (See third
point of second game.) A game penalty is shown by writing
“Game Penalty” on the line of the player who was not penalized (See
second game.) (Fig. 12).
3. Time violations. A warning given for the first time violation is shown by
a “T” in the box of the offender. You should circle the “T”. (See fifth
point of second game.) Subsequent time violations are shown by a “T”
in the box of the player who was not penalized (See eleventh point of
second game.) (Fig. 12).
4. Placement of the server’s initials and names. The placement of
the server’s initials indicates the end of the court (for example the
Chair Umpire’s right or left) from which the service is delivered.
5. Cumulative game score. The cumulative score is shown in the
example with each player’s score written after each game. You may
also write only the score of the winner of each game.
6. Service breaks. An “X” through the game number in the column
captioned “GAME” indicates a service break. (See example in the
third game.)
7. Ball changes. Underline the server’s column and the set score column
to indicate a ball change. The wavy line after the fourth game means
that a ball change should follow game 4. Some Umpires also lightly
shade the set score boxes or use a highlighter.
8. Significant events. You should make notes about significant events
such as an injured player, cramps, toilet breaks, and the precise
nature of a conduct violation. Use the appropriate table on the back
side of the card (Fig. 13).
9. Service order in tiebreak. As soon as you know who serves first in the
set, place the initials of the players in proper order over each box on
the tiebreak section.
FAC Comment VII.C-6: Clay Court Ball Mark Inspection Procedures
To the extent applicable, the Ball Mark Inspection Procedures for a Chair
Umpire in Appendix V of the ITF Rules of Tennis, also apply to a Referee,
Deputy Referee, or Roving Umpire. The following additional procedures apply
when one of these officials is called to the court. The official shall find out if the
players agree on which mark is the ball mark.
• If the players agree on the mark but disagree on the reading of the
mark, the official shall decide if the mark is in or out.
• If the players disagree on the mark, the official shall find out from the
players the kind of shot that was played and the direction in which the
ball was hit. If this enables the official to determine which mark is the
ball mark, the official shall decide if this mark is in or out.
USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire) 149

• If the official is unable to determine which mark is the ball mark, then
the determination of the player at the end with the mark stands. The
official then decides if this mark is in or out.
FAC Comment VII.C-7: What happens if the receiver does not play a second
serve because the Line Umpire calls “fault” and immediately corrects the
call? The server is entitled to two serves. But note that if the serve was a
clear ace and that the Line Umpire’s call did not affect the receiver’s ability to
play the ball, then the server wins the point.
FAC Comment VII.C-8: The first service is a fault. The server has begun the
service motion for the second service when the Chair Umpire calls “wait,
please” because a ball from another court has rolled onto the court or
because there is some other interference. Is the server entitled to two serves?
Yes. The server was in the service motion, and this delay was caused by
outside interference so the server receives two serves.
FAC Comment VII.C-9: In a match with a Chair Umpire, a player’s hat flies
off. What should the Chair Umpire do? The first time a hat flies off, a ball
drops from a pocket, or some other item of clothing (including a towel) falls
off, a let shall be called regardless of whether the item lands in or out of the
court. The Chair Umpire shall caution the player that any subsequent similar
incident shall result in a loss of point for deliberate hindrance.
FAC Comment VII.C-10: Player A drives a hard ball to Player B’s baseline. The
Baseline Umpire calls “out,” then reverses the call to “good.” What should the
Chair Umpire do? The Chair Umpire should accept the reversed call and allow the
point to stand as won by Player A if the Chair Umpire is convinced beyond any
doubt that the erroneous call did not affect Player B’s chance to make a play.
FAC Comment VII.C-11: On a second service, a Line Umpire calls “fault” and
immediately corrects it. Meanwhile the receiver tries to return the serve but
fails to make a good return. Is the server entitled to two serves? Yes. The
server is entitled to two serves on the ground that, assuming the corrected
call to be the correct one, the server had in fact put the ball in play. Once the
ball is in play and a let is called for any reason, the point must be replayed.
FAC Comment VII.C-12: A serve that has landed in the proper court bounces
and strikes a Line Umpire. The receiver asks that a let be called on the
ground that the receiver was hindered in playing the ball because it struck
the Line Umpire. If the Line Umpire was in proper position (in the chair or
standing near it in the customary position for judging the sideline on a
service), the point stands as played with the server winning the point. If the
Line Umpire had left the assigned position, either in an attempt to avoid being
hit or for any other reason, the Chair Umpire may call a let if the Chair Umpire
feels that the receiver could have played the ball if the Line Umpire had been
properly positioned.
150 USTA REGULATIONS VII.C. (Chair Umpire)

FAC Comment VII.C-13: Player A hits a fast serve near the far sideline. The Line
Umpire is unable to make a call on it. Player A appeals to the Chair Umpire for a
decision. The Chair Umpire says: “I know it was good, but unless the Line
Umpire calls it, I can’t.” Was the Chair Umpire’s decision correct? No. If the Chair
Umpire knew the ball was good, the Chair Umpire must make the call. If the
Chair Umpire cannot make the call with certainty, the point should be replayed.
D. Roving Umpire
A Roving Umpire is an official who exercises jurisdiction over more than one
court. Duties are similar to those of a Chair Umpire and include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Ensuring that assigned courts are ready for play;
2. Enforcing the warm-up time and Point Penalty System;
3. Promptly reporting to the Referee any code violations;
4. Resolving scoring disputes;
5. Overruling line calls and calling foot faults when the Roving Umpire is in
direct observation of the court;
6. Defaulting players for cause; and
7. Controlling spectators.
FAC Comment VII.D-1: Roving Umpire Procedures
The Roving Umpire is a USTA certified official, preferably a certified Chair
Umpire, who exercises officiating jurisdiction over the courts assigned.
The Referee or Field Referee shall advise the Roving Umpires of the courts to
which they are assigned, and their responsibilities, the scoring system, ball use,
ball change, warm-up and rest periods, and Point Penalty System. The Referee
or Field Referee, taking into consideration court configuration and the
regulations that apply to the tournament, shall advise the Roving Umpires on
how to call foot faults, overrules, and Point Penalty System violations.
The Roving Umpire shall:
1. Exercise discretion when calling foot faults or dealing with any
infractions so as not to disturb neighboring courts.
2. Install singles sticks when needed and when time permits, measure
the net.
3. Enforce the warm-up time limit by advising the players when they have
two minutes before the start of play.
4. Help resolve scoring disputes by using judgment. First attempt to get
the players to reconstruct the score so that they agree on it. Thereafter,
the following options are listed in order of preference:
• Counting all points and games agreed on by the players, with
only the disputed points or games being replayed;
• Playing from a score mutually agreeable to the players; and
• Deciding the score by a coin toss.
5. Control spectators.
6. Enforce the Point Penalty System (code and time violations).
7. Overrule a player’s line call only when in direct observation of that one
court. When a Roving Umpire overrules a player’s out call, that player
loses the point. The Roving Umpire may not overrule as a result of a
player appeal.
USTA REGULATIONS VII.D. (Roving Umpire) 151

8. Avoid staying on one court and officiate all courts uniformly.
9. Be highly visible, but not spy on the players.
10. Help resolve on-court disputes according to The Code.
11. Allow any player to call a let.
FAC Comment VII.D-2: The receiver’s cell phone rings just as the server
tosses the ball. The receiver makes no attempt to return the ball and instead
answers the phone and does not resume playing for about one minute. A
Roving Umpire discovers the situation. What should the official do? The
server wins the point because the ringing cell phone does not entitle the
receiver to get unready. The official shall also penalize the receiver with at
least one penalty under the Point Penalty System for delay. If the official can
determine with certainty that the delay was more than 40 seconds, the
official shall assess two penalties.
FAC Comment VII.D-3: It is improper for an official to warn a player that the
player is in danger of footfaulting.
FAC Comment VII.D-4: A Roving Umpire should never overrule an extremely
close ball. Players are playing under The Code and are expected to give their
opponents the benefit of the doubt. Therefore, a Roving Umpire should be
reluctant to call a ball out that has been played as good. The overrule of an out
ball that has been played as good may be made only when a Roving Official is
stationed on court.
E. Net Umpire
1. Calls “net” on lets. The Net Umpire makes a call of “net,” followed by a
hand signal, any time a served ball touches the net in passing it.
2. Makes calls delegated under USTA Regulation VII.C.17. The Net Umpire
calls, if asked to do so by the Chair Umpire, any violations set forth in
USTA Regulation VII.C.17.
3. Ball change. The Net Umpire sees that balls are changed at the proper
times and checks each new ball for suitability.
4. Checks net. The Net Umpire adjusts the net to the proper height before
play begins, on set breaks, and at such other times as the Chair Umpire
may desire, and makes sure that singles sticks are in place or removed, as
required.
5. Alternate scorecard. The Net Umpire keeps an alternate scorecard as a
check for the Chair Umpire if requested.
FAC Comment VII.E-1: Net Umpire Procedures
1. The Net Umpire’s primary duty is to call “nets.” The Net Umpire sees
that balls are changed at the proper times. The Chair Umpire may
assign other duties such as setting up the court and calling throughs.
The Net Umpire should sit comfortably, feet slightly apart but not
protruding into the court. The Net Umpire should place a hand along
the side of the net band and ahead of the net post (or singles stick) and
152 USTA REGULATIONS VII.E. (Net Umpire)

sight along the top of the band. The hand away from the net should be
used to touch the net. The hand should be raised and a verbal “net” call
made to indicate a “net.” The hand should be removed from the net
once the ball is in play. Eyes and ears are by far the key elements in
detecting nets.
2. Net Adjustment: Stand on the side opposite the buckle of the strap, so
if you have to change the height you can depress the net with your
body as you lean over it. This relieves any strain on the strap while
you change the setting.
F. Line Umpire
1. Calls line. The Line Umpire calls all shots relating to the assigned lines.
2. Unsighted signal. The Line Umpire promptly indicates to the Chair Umpire
by an unsighted signal when the official is unable to make a call.
3. Corrections. When a Line Umpire calls a ball out in error, the Line Umpire
shall immediately make a correction. If a ball that was out was not called
out immediately, the Line Umpire shall remain silent.
4. Foot faults. When assigned to a baseline, a sideline, or a centerline, the
Line Umpire calls foot faults that pertain to a player’s touching the line
or the imaginary extension thereof. The Line Umpire should answer
when a player asks what occasioned a call of foot fault.
5. Code violations. The Line Umpire shall report to the Chair Umpire any
code violations that the Line Umpire saw or heard that were not heard or
seen by the Chair Umpire.
FAC Comment VII.F-1: Line Umpire Procedures
1. A Line Umpire’s only calls are: “out,” “fault,” “foot fault,”
“correction,” “safe,” and “unsighted.” “Safe” and “unsighted” are
indicated by visual signals only. “Fault” is used only with respect to a
serve that is out. “Correction” is used to indicate immediately that an
erroneous call has been made. Not making any call on a ball is
tantamount to calling it good.
2. Visual signals for “out” and “fault” follow the oral calls and are made
by extending the arm with the palm of the hand held vertically,
fingers together, shoulder high, in the direction in which the ball is
out. If the Line Umpire and the Chair Umpire are located on the same
side of the court, the Line Umpire’s hand should be extended forward
(not to the side) to facilitate the Chair Umpire seeing the signal. A
“foot fault” is signaled by raising either arm to the vertical position. A
“correction” is signaled by raising either arm to the vertical position
followed by the corrected signal. A call of good or “safe” is signaled
by holding both hands together, backs of hands to chair,
approximately knee high in front of the body; the Line Umpire’s
hands should be tilted in the direction of the Chair Umpire when both
officials are located on the same side of the court. “Unsighted” is
signaled by placing the back of the hands to the Chair in a vertical
position just below the eyes.
USTA REGULATIONS VII.F. (Line Umpire) 153

3. Make “out,” “fault,” “foot fault,” and “correction” calls loudly and
crisply followed by the proper hand signal. This is particularly
important on balls that are hit at a high rate of speed or land near the
line. A “safe” signal is used to reassure the Chair Umpire of a call when
the ball has hit on, or within approximately 18 inches inside of a line.
An “unsighted” call is used to tell the Chair Umpire that the Line
Umpire was unable to see a shot.
4. To be valid, a Line Umpire’s out call on A’s shot to B’s court that B plays
must be made before B’s shot has either gone out of play or has been hit
by A.
5. The Line Umpire should give the server the benefit of any doubt in
calling a foot fault. Do not make any call until the ball has touched the
racket of the server.
6. If play continues after a fault, foot fault, or out call, the Line Umpire
should immediately repeat the call. If the score that the Chair Umpire
announces varies from the Line Umpire's call or if the Chair Umpire is
making a procedural error such as allowing the wrong player to serve,
the Line Umpire shall immediately bring this to the attention of the
Chair Umpire.
7. A Line Umpire who observes a code violation not seen or heard by the
Chair Umpire shall report this to the Chair Umpire without interrupting a
point. This should be done before the start of the next point.
8. With the exception of shoes and socks, white is a prohibited color for
the clothing of a Line Umpire.
9. A Line Umpire is accountable to the Chair Umpire only.
10. A Line Umpire who has been overruled should accept the overrule
without comment. Any query from a player concerning a line call should
be referred to the Chair Umpire.
11. A Line Umpire shall not call a “touch,” “not-up,” “carry,”
“double-hit,” “through,” “invasion,” or “foul shot.”
12. When a Line Umpire’s relief does not appear on schedule, the Line
Umpire shall continue working until the relief arrives.
FAC Comment VII.F-2: Line Umpire Techniques
1. Any hand signal should be given with a fully extended arm and should
be held momentarily to give the Chair Umpire the opportunity to
observe the signal. A ball should never be called out until it has
touched the ground or a permanent fixture.
2. All Line Techniques (Except Service). Look to where the action is;
as the ball passes the net and you have the possibility of a call,
turn your eyes and head to the line in the area where the ball is going
to land, thereby giving yourself the best chance to make the correct
call. Focus directly on the line.
Baseline. Chair angled properly, maximum angle not farther than the
intersection of the service line and the far side line. Body positioned
so that head is directly on the line. Sit forward to look alert. Watch for
foot faults.
Long Lines. Assume “ready position” as server prepares to toss
154 USTA REGULATIONS VII.F. (Line Umpire)

all. Maintain ready position throughout point. The ready
position should not be rigid or uncomfortable. Calls and signals are
made from the ready position. Assume “at ease” position at point’s
end. When calling the serve from behind the receiver, select the best
position from which to make the call. The following are acceptable:
a. On the line, crouched low;
b. Inside the line in a normal ready position; and
c. Outside the line in a normal ready position.
Choose the option most comfortable for you which allows you to
make the most accurate call. After the serve, move quickly
into position to call the long line during play. The center service Line
Umpire goes to “at ease” position just after the serve hits the court
unless this Umpire makes a call.
Service Line. Chair is straight on the line. Do not angle the chair.
Lean forward to get best angle and view of server preparing to serve.
When server is ready to toss ball, turn your head and focus your eyes
directly on the near quarter of the line being served to. Lean forward if
this will enable you to call the line with accuracy. If you still have a
problem with served balls slipping under your vision, focus closer to
you. Focus directly on the line.
3. A Line Umpire should sell calls with decisiveness, a crisp tone of
voice, and a prompt hand signal following the voice. The Line
Umpire should make some intelligent differentiation in the relative
volume and urgency of calls. Obviously, it is not necessary for a
service Line Umpire to shout “fault” loudly on a serve that hits the top
of the net and lands 10 feet beyond the service line. This is not to
encourage anyone to be overly casual or tardy in making calls.
4. In doubles, the Line Umpire calling the side line also calls the side
service line. In making these calls, a Line Umpire should be in a
position with an unobstructed view.
5. A Line Umpire who is in a player’s way should make a definite effort
to avoid the player while maintaining his or her position.
6. A Line Umpire should not assume the role of a ballperson. However
this does not preclude handing a ball within easy reach to a player or
a ballperson or catching a towel thrown by a player and handing it to
a ballperson.
7. A Line Umpire’s biggest problem is to maintain concentration and
alertness. When seated, a Line Umpire should never relax completely
or cross the legs during play. A Line Umpire should avoid distractions
such as conversing with a spectator.
8. Line Umpires should warm-up their eyes before going on court or
during the warm-up.
FAC Comment VII.F-3: Clay Court Ball Inspection Procedures
Line Umpires are not responsible for inspecting ball marks, but the Chair
Umpire may ask for help in locating a mark. If a Line Umpire thinks that the
Chair Umpire may need help in locating a mark, the Line Umpire should keep
the Umpire’s eyes on the ball mark instead of giving immediate eye contact to
USTA REGULATIONS VII.F. (Line Umpire) 155

the Chair Umpire. If a Line Umpire is working on a short crew, the Line
Umpire should stay in position until the Umpire is sure that the mark does
not have to be checked.
Do not get into a discussion with the player about the mark.
FAC Comment VII.F-4: On the second service, the server has tossed the ball in
the air and is about to strike it when the Line Umpire calls “foot
fault,” whereupon the server catches the ball instead of striking it. What
should the Line Umpire do? The Line Umpire should call “correction” (as there
could be no fault since the ball was not struck, or struck at). The Chair
Umpire should then inform the player that, as a result of an interrupted serve,
the server has two serves to come.
G. Considerations for All Officials
1. Aiding a player. No official, unless the official is a qualified medical
person or athletic trainer, shall aid a player who is suffering from a
medical condition. An official should manage a medical condition
consistent with the USTA Emergency Care Guidelines. Nonetheless,
any official may provide supplies.
FAC Comment VII.G-1: An official needs to maintain impartiality. When no
other person is available, it is appropriate for the official to manage care
pursuant to the USTA Emergency Care Guidelines. See Part 4.
2. Applauding prohibited. No official shall applaud a player.
3. Infractions observed in non-Umpired matches. In non-Umpired
matches, the officials may take appropriate action with respect to any
infraction of the rules or regulations they observe.
4. Enforcing instructions as to who enters playing area. The official in charge
of the match shall enforce the Referee’s instructions as to who may enter
the playing area, and in the absence of instructions shall determine who
may enter the playing area.
5. Betting. No official or member of the Tournament Committee shall bet on
any match in the tournament. If an infraction occurs, the Tournament
Committee shall immediately remove the offender from any further
connection with the tournament.
FAC Comment VII.G-2: Court Monitors
Court Monitors are not certified officials. They assume limited duties to help
ensure fair and sportsmanlike play at sites lacking a sufficient number of
certified officials. The Referee or Field Referee shall advise the Court Monitors
of the courts to which they are assigned and their responsibilities, which
include:
1. Maintain control over assigned courts;
2. Measure the net at the beginning of the first match and at other
appropriate times;
3. Time warm-ups and, when possible, announce “two minutes” at two
minutes before the end of the warm-up, and announce “time” when
play is to begin;
156 USTA REGULATIONS VII.G. (Considerations for All Officials)

4. Call foot faults, remembering that there is never a warning;
5. Stop play when the monitor observes a code violation and seek
assistance from the Referee or other official;
6. Settle scoring disputes on a limited basis;
7. Overrule clear mistakes if authorized to do so by the Referee;
8. Time rest periods;
9. Record scores of matches if requested;
10. Inform the desk of open courts and of the progress of matches in
play;
11. Send for a certified official if there is a question of rule interpretation;
12. Call the score if assigned to only one court.
H. Officials Council
The Officials Council operates on the District, Sectional, and National levels
for the purpose of teaching, developing, evaluating, and certifying officials.
Any individual USTA member who complies with the certification
requirements of this regulation becomes a member of the Officials Council.
I. USTA Officials Committee
The USTA Officials Committee shall administer and supervise the Officials
Council. The Committee shall assure that an adequate number of approved
schools are held each year. It shall also prepare the annual certification
application and test for each category of officials. It shall be responsible for
developing officiating techniques and procedures and for evaluating officials.
J. Sectional and District Officials Committees
Each Sectional and District Association shall designate an officials
committee with a chairperson and a vice chairperson. These committees
shall assist the USTA Officials Committee with the administration of the
Officials Council. The Sectional and District committees may establish their
own requirements for non-members of the Officials Council; that is, officials
from outside the covered geographic area or honorary members.
K. Definitions for Certification
1. Certified Officials: Provisional Umpire, Associate Official, Sectional
Umpire, Sectional Chair Umpire, Sectional Referee, USTA Roving
Umpire, USTA Line Umpire, USTA Chair Umpire, USTA Referee, USTA
Chief Umpire, National Line Umpire, National Chair Umpire, National
Referee, National Chief Umpire, Professional Line Umpire, Professional
Chair Umpire, Professional Referee, Professional Chief Umpire, and
Intercollegiate Official.
2. Year: The calendar year.
3. National Chairperson of Officials: The Chairperson of the USTA Officials
Committee appointed by the USTA President.
4. Evaluation: The rating of an official’s performance by a trained USTA
Trainer-Evaluator.
5. Satisfactory evaluation: A satisfactory evaluation is an evaluation which
evidences acceptable performance at the certification level for which the
official is applying.
USTA REGULATIONS VII.K. (Definitions for Certification) 157

FAC Comment VII.K-1: The purpose of the Training-Evaluation Program is to
improve the standards of officiating by achieving consistency in procedures
and general conduct of officials. This concentration on technique is intended to
improve accuracy which dictates on-court performance. The Training-
Evaluation Program also assists in the classification of officials for certification
purposes and in selection for succeeding rounds of a tournament. National
and Sectional Trainer-Evaluators are selected to perform evaluations and a
certain amount of training is required for their selection. National
Trainer-Evaluators are a very small cadre of officials who are sent to selected
tournaments to instruct and evaluate officials in the proper and current
methods of officiating. All Sectional Associations should have Sectional
Trainer-Evaluators in their area who have fulfilled the training requirements.
6. National evaluation: An evaluation by a National Trainer-Evaluator who is
approved by the National Chairperson of Officials.
7. Sectional evaluation: An evaluation by a Sectional Trainer-Evaluator who
is approved by the Sectional Chairperson of Officials and the National
Chairperson of Officials.
8. Tournaments: USTA sanctioned or approved tournaments, ITF, ATP,
WTA, intercollegiate tournaments, high school tournaments, and
generally recognized foreign tournaments. Tournaments with more than
one event and tournaments with a qualifying, main draw, or consolation
count only as one tournament for certification purposes. The same
tournament may not be used to meet the requirements for being certified
as a Chief Umpire and Referee. A collegiate dual match may not be used
as a tournament for the purpose of certification as a Referee.
9. On-court officials: Certified officials excluding Referees and Chief
Umpires.
10. Friend at Court (FAC): The USTA Officials Handbook.
L. Certification
Certification is from January 1 to December 31. Tests and dates of schools shall
be available through the District, Sectional, and National Chairpersons of
Officials.
M. General Certification Requirements
1. Vision. Each year, each on-court official shall attest to having vision of
20/20, either corrected or uncorrected. Every even year, each on-court
official (excluding Provisional Umpires) shall submit to the USTA a
physician’s or an optometrist’s statement attesting that the official has
20/20 vision, either corrected or uncorrected.
2. Tests. Each certified official shall pass the written test for each category
in which the official is certified.
3. Schools. Each certified official shall successfully complete an approved
school for each certification category. The National Chairperson of
Officials has the right to approve all training schools. The Sectional
Chairperson may approve schools as delegated by the National
Chairperson. The USTA Officials Committee determines the school
requirements for each category, and the National Chairperson of
Officials shall approve all instructors.
158 USTA REGULATIONS VII.L. (Certification)

4. Number of tournaments. Every year an official shall meet the
certification requirements by serving in the preceding year in, at
minimum, the specified number of tournaments, matches, or days.
5. USTA membership and certification. Each certified official shall be a USTA
member. Field Referees, Roving Officials, Sectional Trainer-Evaluators
and National Trainer-Evaluators shall be certified officials.
6. Work record. Each official shall submit the official’s work record to the
USTA on a continuous basis. The Sectional Chairperson shall approve
or disapprove certification based on the work record and also shall
obtain the approval or disapproval of certification by the official’s District
Chairperson, if there is one. Review of the work records start on
October 15. Certification as a National or Professional Official shall
require the approval of the National Chairperson of Officials.
7. Code of Conduct. All officials shall adhere to the standards in the Officials’
Code of Conduct as set forth in Friend at Court.
N. Specific Certification Requirements
1. Provisional Officials:
a. Provisional Umpire. A Provisional Umpire is exempt from the
school requirement but must pass a written test. A person
becomes a Provisional Umpire immediately upon passing the
written test for Provisional Umpires.
i. Advancement to Sectional Official. If later during the same
calendar year the official meets the work requirements for
becoming certified as a Sectional Official, the official may
become certified as a Sectional Official by passing the
applicable test or tests. The official is excused from meeting
the school requirement only during the first year as a
Provisional Umpire.
ii. Certification in year following advancement to Sectional
Official. If an official advances from Provisional Umpire to a
Sectional Official during the year, the official will not be
re-certified during the next year as a Sectional Official until the
official has passed the applicable test or tests and has
successfully attended an approved school.
b. Provisional Referee. A Provisional Referee shall have attended
the required school or schools conducted by an approved USTA
Trainer/Evaluator and shall have passed all applicable tests
required of a Referee. A Provisional Referee may serve as a
Referee for tournaments below the Sectional Championship level.
If during the same calendar year the Provisional Referee meets the
work requirements for a Sectional Referee, the Provisional Referee
may then become certified as a Sectional Referee.
2. Associate Umpire:
a. Shall be certified by a foreign national tennis association
recognized by the International Tennis Federation;
b. Does not have to fulfill the general certification requirements except
the USTA membership requirement; and
c. Shall pay a yearly fee to offset expenses of mailings.
USTA REGULATIONS VII.N. (Specific Certification Requirements) 159

3. Sectional and USTA Officials. Each year Sectional and USTA Officials shall
pass the written tests for the categories in which they are certified. Tests
shall apply for certification in the calendar year following the year in
which they are taken. Each year these officials shall successfully
complete a school for the categories in which they are certified. Schools
apply toward certification in the calendar year following the year in which
they are completed.
a. Sectional Umpire: Shall have officiated for a total of five of the
following:
Line Umpire days;
Chair Umpire matches; or
Roving Umpire days.
Chair Umpire matches used to qualify for this category may not be
used to also qualify for Sectional Chair Umpire.
b. Sectional Chair Umpire: Shall have served as a Chair Umpire in five
matches.
c. Sectional Referee: Shall have served as a Referee or as a Deputy
Referee for an entire tournament.
d. USTA Roving Umpire: Shall have satisfied the requirements for a
Sectional Umpire, shall have served as a Roving Umpire for at
least 15 days, and shall have successfully completed the Referee
school.
e. USTA Line Umpire:
i. Shall have officiated as a Line Umpire for 10 days; and
ii. Shall have received satisfactory evaluation(s) as a Line Umpire.
f. USTA Chair Umpire:
i. Shall have officiated as a Chair Umpire in ten matches;
ii. Shall have been previously certified as a Sectional Chair
Umpire; and
iii. Shall have received satisfactory evaluation(s) as a Chair
Umpire.
g. USTA Referee: Shall have served as a Referee for three entire
tournaments, one of which may have been as a Deputy Referee.
h. USTA Chief Umpire: Shall have served as a Chief Umpire for one
tournament.
4. National and Professional Officials. Tests and schools for the National
Officials and Professional Officials shall be required only at the
direction of the USTA Officials Committee.
a. National Line Umpire:
i. Shall have officiated as a Line Umpire for 20 days in matches
at USTA National Championships, Intercollegiate National
Championships, ITF International Championships, or
professional tournaments with prize money of at least
$10,000. At least ten of these days shall have been in USTA, ITF,
ATP, or WTA tournaments with prize money of at least $50,000;
ii. Shall have been certified as a USTA Line Umpire or higher line
category within the previous two years; and
iii. Shall have received satisfactory National evaluations as a Line
Umpire.
160 USTA REGULATIONS VII.N. (Specific Certification Requirements)

. National Chair Umpire:
i. Shall have officiated in 20 matches as a Chair Umpire at
USTA National Championships, Intercollegiate National
Championships, ITF International Championships, or
professional tournaments with prize money of at least
$10,000.
• No more than eight of these matches may be
Intercollegiate National Championships;
• The remaining matches must be in at least two
tournaments;
ii. Shall have been certified as a USTA Chair Umpire or higher
chair category within the previous two years; and
iii. Shall have received satisfactory National evaluations as a
Chair Umpire.
c. National Referee: Shall have served as a Referee in four entire
tournaments, two of which shall have been in USTA National
Championships, ITF International Championships, Intercollegiate
National Championships, or professional tournaments with prize
money of at least $10,000.
d. National Chief Umpire: Shall have served as a Chief Umpire of two
USTA National Championships, ITF International Championships,
Intercollegiate National Championships, or professional
tournaments with prize money of at least $10,000. One of these
tournaments shall have been a USTA, ITF, ATP, or WTA tournament
with prize money of at least $50,000.
e. Professional Line Umpire:
i. Shall have officiated as a Line Umpire for 50 days in
professional tournaments with prize money of at least
$50,000. Thirty of these days shall have been in USTA, ITF,
ATP, or WTA tournaments with prize money of at least
$150,000;
ii. Shall have been certified as a National Line Umpire or higher
line category within the previous two years; and
iii. The National Chairperson of Officials shall consider reports
and evaluations from tournament supervisors and Referees in
certifying these officials.
f. Professional Chair Umpire:
i. Shall have officiated as a Chair Umpire in 40 matches in
professional tournaments with prize money of at least
$50,000. Twenty-five of these matches shall have been in
USTA, ITF, ATP, or WTA tournaments with prize money of at
least $150,000;
ii. Shall have been certified as a National Chair Umpire or higher
Chair Umpire category within the previous two years; and
iii. The National Chairperson of Officials shall consider reports
and evaluations from tournament supervisors and Referees
in certifying these officials.
g. Professional Referee: Shall have served as a Referee in five
tournaments, all of which shall have been USTA National
USTA REGULATIONS VII.N. (Specific Certification Requirements) 161

Championships, ITF International Championships, Intercollegiate
National Championships, or professional tournaments with prize
money of at least $10,000. At least three of these tournaments shall
have been USTA, ITF, ATP, or WTA tournaments with prize money of
at least $10,000.
5. Professional Chief Umpire: Shall have served as a Chief Umpire of three
USTA National Championships, ITF International Championships,
Intercollegiate National Championships or professional tournaments
with prize money of at least $10,000. One of these tournaments shall
have been a USTA, ITF, ATP, or WTA tournament with prize money of at
least $150,000.
6. Intercollegiate Official: Shall have officiated for a total of five days, which
may be any combination as a Chair Umpire, Roving Umpire, or Referee
for intercollegiate dual matches or tournaments. (An official who has
successfully completed an ITA Training School and passed all appropriate
tests may be certified as a Provisional Intercollegiate Official.)
7. Waivers: The National Chairperson of Officials may waive any certification
requirement, except the vision and USTA membership requirements.
O. Denial of Certification and Decertification
1. The District, Sectional, or National Chairperson of Officials, for good
cause, may refuse to approve an official’s application or certification
category, even though that official has met the technical certification
requirements.
2. The National Chairperson of Officials may decertify an official for cause.
3. Recertification of a decertified official shall have the approval of the
National Chairperson of Officials.
P. Appeal Procedure
1. An official whose District Chairperson of Officials refuses to approve
the official’s application or certification category may appeal that
decision to the Sectional Chairperson of Officials. If the Sectional
Chairperson of Officials denies the appeal, the official may appeal to the
National Chairperson of Officials. The decision of the National
Chairperson shall be final.
2. An official whose Sectional Chairperson of Officials has refused to
approve the official’s application or certification category may appeal
that decision to the National Chairperson of Officials. The decision of
the National Chairperson shall be final.
3. If the National Chairperson of Officials refuses to approve an official’s
application or certification category that has been previously approved
by the official’s Sectional Chairperson, that official may appeal to the
USTA Officials Committee. The decision of the Committee shall be final.
4. If an official has been decertified by the National Chairperson of Officials,
the official may appeal to the USTA Officials Committee. The decision of
the Committee shall be final.
5. Any appeal shall be in writing and shall be sent by certified mail.
6. Any person submitting a written appeal shall be entitled to prompt written
notification of all decisions. All decisions shall be sent by certified mail.
Q. Honorary Officials
The USTA Officials Committee, with the approval of an individual’s District and
Sectional Chairmen of Officials, may honor an individual as follows:
162 USTA REGULATIONS VII.O. (Denial of Certification and Decertification)

1. Life Umpire: An official who has been certified for 20 years, plus all those who
have been designated as “Life Umpire” before March 19, 1982.
2. Umpire Emeritus: An official who through long or special service as a
certified official deserves a special place of recognition.
3. Honorary Umpire: A person who has made a major contribution to areas
related to officiating, even though the person may not have been active as
an on-court official.
R. Records on Officials
1. The USTA Officials Committee shall maintain records for each official,
including the official’s address, certification, and evaluations.
2. Evaluations shall be provided annually to the appropriate Sectional
Chairperson of Officials.
3. Upon request, a District Chairperson, Sectional Chairperson, or
Sectional President shall receive copies of records for the
chairperson’s respective District or Section.
4. An official shall receive a copy of the official’s record yearly.
S. Notification to Members of Officials Council
The USTA Officials Committee shall periodically notify members of the Officials
Council of rules, regulations, changes by the USTA, ITF, and ITA in rule
interpretations, and other pertinent information.
USTA REGULATIONS VII.S. (Notification to Members of Officials Council) 163

VIII. GENERAL RANKING REGULATIONS
A. Definition of Ranking Period
Ranking data for all divisions shall be obtained from all designated tournaments
(see USTA Regulation VIII.D.1.), and the ranking period for all players shall be
January 1 through December 31 unless the applicable National, Sectional, or
District regulations provide for a different ranking period.
B. USTA Membership Required
Only persons enrolled with the USTA as an Adult, Junior, Family, Life, or Honorary
member and in good standing on the last day of the ranking period shall be
considered for a ranking.
C. Ranking Systems
1. Head-to-Head Ranking System. The Head-to-Head Ranking System is a
method of ranking players or teams that is based on wins, losses, and
exposure. In this ranking system a strong win record is essential for a high
ranking, and significant wins are required for any ranking. A strong record
is generally preferred over a long record. Exposure is important and should
be measured by the number of good quality opponents that a player plays,
rather than solely by the number of tournaments played. Comparative
scores may be considered only when records are otherwise equal. Under
this system, defaults, withdrawals, walkovers, and retirements are treated
as follows:
a. Defaults before first service, walkovers, and withdrawals. The
following are not considered for ranking purposes:
• A default that occurs before the first service of a match;
• Withdrawals; and
• Walkovers.
b. Defaults during a match. All completed matches and all matches in
which a player is defaulted during the course of the match are
considered for ranking purposes. Any default is a loss for the player
defaulted and a win for the player who advances.
c. Retirements. A retirement is a loss for the player retiring and a win
for the player advancing.
2. Points Per Round Ranking System. The Points Per Round Ranking System
is a method of ranking players or teams that is based on earning ranking
points for the round that a player or team reached and, in some cases, wins
over highly ranked players or teams.
3. Sectional Association Ranking Systems. Sectional Associations shall
determine which of the two ranking systems, the Head-to-Head Ranking
System or the Points Per Round Ranking System, is used to rank players
or teams at the Sectional level and shall publish its ranking system. A
Sectional Association may also allow its District Associations or
subdivisions to make this decision. In this case, the District Association or
subdivision shall publish its ranking system.
D. Results Considered for Rankings
1. Sectional and District tournaments. All matches from any tournament that
has been sanctioned by the applicable Sectional or District Association shall
be considered for ranking in that Sectional or District Association unless
prohibited by the applicable Sectional or District ranking regulations or USTA
164 USTA REGULATIONS VIII.A. (Definition of Ranking Period)

Regulation VI.B.3. (QuickStart Tennis formats). Regulations for Sectional
or District Associations may authorize additional tournaments for
consideration for ranking.
The applicable Sectional or District Association or the applicable
committee shall determine in which ranking period the ranking data from
tournaments that begin in one ranking period but are not completed until
after the beginning of the next ranking period shall be considered.
2. Matches generally may count in only one division. No match may count for
ranking in more than one division, unless the applicable National, Sectional,
or District ranking regulations provide for a match to count in more than
one division.
3. Results from tournaments based on race, creed, color, or national origin not
counted. Results of any tournament from which entrants have been
excluded by reason of race, creed, color, or national origin shall not be
considered for ranking purposes.
4. Exhibitions not counted. Exhibitions shall not be considered for ranking
purposes.
E. Ranking Considerations
1. Ranking based on record. Rankings shall be based solely upon a player’s
results for the ranking period under consideration.
2. Insufficient data. An insufficient data category may be used for those
players or teams with an outstanding record but who do not meet the
minimum ranking requirements of the applicable National, Sectional, or
District ranking regulations.
3. Class A category and numerical groupings. A Class A category or numerical
groupings may be used when considered appropriate by a ranking
committee for giving recognition to players or teams that qualify for a
ranking but did not receive specific numerical rankings, or in the case of a
tie.
4. Ranking lists in Junior Divisions shall show birth date of players. All ranking
lists for the junior age divisions, whether National, Sectional, or District,
shall show the date of birth of each ranked player as officially recorded in
the USTA membership records.
USTA REGULATIONS VIII.E. (Ranking Considerations) 165

IX. JUNIOR NATIONAL TOURNAMENTS AND NATIONAL RANKING
A. Junior National Tournament Regulations
1. Overview of Junior National Tournament System. Annually the USTA
shall publish the National Junior Tournament Schedule, which shall
include the following junior tournaments:
a. USTA Junior National Championships. The USTA shall sanction
the following USTA Junior National Championships pursuant to
USTA Regulation XVII.D.:
i. USTA National Championships. Each year the USTA shall hold
four groups of USTA National Championships for boys and
girls in each age division (18, 16, 14, 12).
FAC Comment IX.A-1: Ordinarily, USTA National Championships in each
group in all age divisions are held during the same time period. Occasionally
USTA National Championships that are grouped together are not held during
the same time period. For example, the USTA Spring National
Championships in the Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Divisions are held about three
weeks before the other age divisions.
ii. USTA National Opens. Four times each year the USTA shall
hold four concurrent USTA National Opens for boys and girls
in each age division at different sites. This makes a total of 16
USTA National Opens in each age division.
iii. USTA Team Championships. The USTA shall sanction and
hold the following additional USTA Junior National
Championships:
• USTA Boys’ 18 National Team Championships
• USTA Girls’ 18 National Team Championships
• USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 16 Intersectional Team
Championships
• USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 16, 14, and 12 Zone Team
Championships
iv. USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic Championships
(East/West). The USTA shall sanction and hold the USTA
Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic Championships
(East/West).
b. USTA Regional Tournaments. The Junior Competition Committee
in consultation with the USTA Player Development Division shall
determine criteria for sanctioning USTA Regional Tournaments
pursuant to USTA Regulation XVII.D. to be placed on the National
Junior Tournament Schedule.
c. USTA International Tournaments. USTA International Tournaments
are USTA sanctioned tournaments played under ITF tournament
regulations, but not sanctioned by the ITF. The Junior Competition
Committee in consultation with the USTA Player Development
Division shall determine criteria for sanctioning USTA International
Tournaments pursuant to USTA Regulation XVII.D. to be placed
on the National Junior Tournament Schedule. These tournaments
are played under ITF tournament regulations.
166 USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations)

d. ITF tournaments on National Junior Tournament Schedule. The
Junior Competition Committee in consultation with the USTA Player
Development Division shall determine criteria for selecting ITF
tournaments to be placed on the National Junior Tournament
Schedule. These tournaments are played under ITF tournament
regulations.
2. Eligibility for USTA Junior National Championships.
a. Players eligible. USTA Junior National Championships shall be
open to:
i. U.S. citizens. Citizens of the United States.
ii. Certain aliens.
• Permanent resident aliens. Permanent resident aliens
of the United States.
• Diplomats. Aliens who have resided in the United
States continuously for more than one year and who
are members of families of persons in the diplomatic
or consular corps.
• Aliens with Refugee Status. Aliens who have been
granted Refugee Status.
• Aliens with Asylee Status. Aliens who have been
granted Asylee Status.
• Aliens with Temporary Protected Status. Aliens who have
been granted Temporary Protected Status.
• Aliens with Adjustment Status. Aliens whose I-485
(Application to Register Permanent Resident or Adjust
Status) has been accepted for filing.
• British Columbians. Canadian citizens and landed
Canadian immigrants who reside in British Columbia.
(These players may be excluded from wild card
selection.)
FAC Comment IX.A-2: Documents commonly used to support a particular
alien status include a permanent resident alien card (green card), Form I-94,
and a receipt confirming filing of the I-485.
b. Loss of eligibility. Players (including U.S. citizens) who have made a
declaration of citizenship to a foreign country or who have accepted
endorsement from another federation to an ITF junior or open
tournament shall not be eligible to participate in USTA Junior
National Championships, except that:
• Those players from British Columbia listed in USTA
Regulation IX.A.2.a.; and
• Players from Puerto Rico, U.S. Virgin Islands, Samoa, and
Guam may play in USTA Junior National Championships if
they meet the eligibility criteria of USTA Regulation IX.A.2.a.
c. Reinstatement of eligibility. A player who has previously qualified to
play in these tournaments and who lost this right by:
• Accepting endorsement from another federation to an ITF
junior or open tournament;
USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations) 167

• Playing on a foreign team; or
• No longer being classified by the Department of Homeland
Security as an alien with a status listed in USTA Regulation
IX.A.2.a.
may apply for reinstatement. The Director of Player Development
or the Director’s Designee, the Senior Director for Junior and
Collegiate Competition, the Director of Junior Competition, the
Chairperson of the Junior Competition Committee, and the
Coordinator of Junior Rankings, in consultation with the USTA
General Counsel, shall rule on the request. The player may appeal
the ruling to the Board.
3. National Standings List. At least monthly, the USTA shall publish National
Standings Lists for individual players in each Junior Division. The Junior
Competition Committee shall determine the dates on which the lists are
published and the criteria for inclusion on the lists. Annually it shall
publish the criteria.
4. Seeding criteria and procedure. The Junior Competition Committee
shall determine the seeding criteria and procedure for USTA National
Championships, USTA National Opens, USTA Regional Tournaments,
and the USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic Championships
(East/West). The seeding criteria and procedure, which shall be based
on the standing, ranking, and selection systems, is published in Table
16. The Director of Junior Competition or the Director’s designee shall
seed each tournament after consulting with the Tournament Committee.
5. Match formats for USTA National Opens, USTA Team Championships,
USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic Championships (East/West),
and USTA Regional Tournaments. The Junior Competition Committee
shall determine the match formats to be used in USTA National Opens,
USTA Team Championships, USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic
Championships (East/West), and USTA Regional Tournaments. These
formats shall be published on the USTA website and in Table 17. (See
USTA Regulation IX.A.9.o. for match formats used in the USTA National
Championships.) The match formats for USTA International
Tournaments and ITF tournaments on the National Junior Tournament
Schedule are controlled by ITF tournament regulations.
6. No-ad scoring prohibited in USTA Junior National Championships and
USTA Regional Tournaments. No-ad scoring may not be used in USTA
Junior National Championships and USTA Regional Tournaments even
when there is inclement weather, health concerns, or safety concerns.
The use of no-ad scoring in USTA International Tournaments and ITF
tournaments on the National Junior Tournament Schedule is controlled
by ITF tournament regulations.
7. Shortening USTA Junior National Championships and USTA Regional
Tournaments. The Director of Junior Competition or the Director’s designee
may authorize the Referee of a USTA Junior National Championship or a
USTA Regional Tournament to use a match format not previously
authorized because of:
• Inclement weather;
• Health concerns; or
• Safety concerns.
168 USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations)

TABLE 16
Seeding Criteria for USTA National Championships (Juniors Only),
USTA National Opens, USTA Regional Tournaments, and USTA Boys’ and
Girls’ 18 Intersectional Championships (East/West)
Tournament Committees shall use the criteria in this table to submit their
proposed seeding to the Director of Junior Competition.
A. Number of Seeds in Singles and Doubles Draws
Draw Size Required Number of Seeds
128 or 192 32 seeds: top 16 seeded numerically; next 16 seeded alphabetically
96 or 64 16 seeds: top 8 seeded numerically; next 8 seeded alphabetically
32 8 seeds: all seeded numerically
16 4 seeds: all seeded numerically
8 2 seeds: all seeded numerically
B. Singles Seeding Criteria for USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 and 16 National
Championships
1. Seeding shall be done using the most recently published National Standings List
of the division.
• Players may be moved within major groups (1-4, 5-8, 9-16, 17-32) due to
direct wins if players are separated by less than 100 ranking points.
• Players may be moved between major groups due to direct wins if players
are separated by less than 50 ranking points.
2. Players not previously seeded who are ranked in the:
• top 500 on the most recently published WTA ranking list or top 1000 of
the most recently published ATP ranking list,
• top 100 on the most recently published ITF ranking list, and
• top 100 on the most recently published ITA ranking list
shall also be considered for seeding.
C. Singles Seeding Criteria for USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 14 and 12 National
Championships
Seeding shall be done using the most recently published National Standings List
of the division in the order in which players appear on the list.
• Players may be moved within major groups (1-4, 5-8, 9-16, 17-32) due to
direct wins if players are separated by fewer than 100 ranking points.
• Players may be moved between major groups due to direct wins if players
are separated by fewer than 50 ranking points.
D. Singles Seeding Criteria for USTA National Opens, USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18
Interscholastic Championships (East/West), and USTA Regional Tournaments
Seeding shall be done using the most recently published National Standings List of
the division in the order in which players appear on the list.
USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations) 169

D. Singles Seeding Criteria…cont’d.
TABLE 16 (Cont’d)
• Players who are accepted based on their standing in the next younger age
division may be seeded in the last group of seeds (5-8, 9-16, or 17-32, depending
on the draw size) if they are in the top 50 of the most recently published National
Standings List of the next-younger age division.
• Players from the National Standings List of the division may be moved within
major groups (1-4, 5-8, 9-16, 17-32) due to direct wins if players are separated
by fewer than 100 ranking points.
• Players from the National Standings List of the division may be moved between
major groups due to direct wins if players are separated by fewer than 50 ranking
points.
E. Doubles Seeding Criteria
• Seeding shall be done using the most recently published National Standings List
of the division.
• Teams shall be seeded in the order of their combined standings (e.g., Player A
holds the #1 standing and Player B holds the #10 standing. The Team of A&B
would have the combined standing of 11.) Teams that have the same combined
standing shall be seeded in the order of the total number of doubles ranking
points held by each team.
• Tournament Committees of 18-and-under tournaments may consider for seeding
teams with players who have ATP/WTA rankings, ITF rankings, or ITA rankings.
• Teams may be moved within major groups (1-4, 5-8, 9-16, 17-32) due to direct
wins if the teams are separated by fewer than 100 ranking points.
• Teams may be moved between major groups due to direct wins if players are
separated by fewer than 50 ranking points.
• Teams not previously seeded who have combined doubles ranking points
higher than the last seeded team may be seeded in the last group (5-8, 9-16, or
17-32).
All matches in each round shall be played with the same format. Note,
however, the shortening of USTA International Tournaments and ITF
tournaments on the National Junior Tournament Schedule is controlled by
ITF tournament regulations.
8. Refund of entry fees. The Tournament Committee shall refund a player’s
entire entry fee if:
• The entry is not accepted;
• The withdrawal is for previously authorized entry into another
tournament; or
• The Tournament Committee has received written verification as set
forth in USTA Regulation IV.C.15. no later than the last scheduled
day of the tournament that the withdrawal is for injury, illness, or
personal emergency.
170 USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations)

Entry into USTA National Championship
Open application with entrants
chosen based on position
on most recent National
Standings Lists 1
4 USTA National Opens
Top 3 finishers in each
tournament, if otherwise
eligible, advance to
USTA National Championship
Direct entry based on position
on National Championship
Selection List 2
Entry by endorsement from
Sectional Associations
Wild card entry 3
National Standings List 4
USTA National
Championship
1 Both the list of the division and the list of the next younger division are used.
2 For Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Divisions, players in positions 1 through 40 shall be
accepted into a draw of 192, and players in positions 1 through 32 shall be
accepted into a draw of 128.
For Boys’ and Girls’ 16,14, & 12 Divisions, players in positions 1 through 24 shall
be accepted into a draw of 192, and players in positions 1 through 16 shall be
accepted into a draw of 128.
3 Limits on wild cards: 8 for draws of 192 and 4 for draws of 128.
4 Remaining spots filled with endorsed players on National Standings List.
Fig. 14
USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations) 171

In all other cases, a refund is not required. The Tournament Committee shall
not charge any fee (such as processing, service, or handling fee) for
refunding the entry fee.
9. USTA National Championships.
a. Entry.
i. Means of entry. Entries and entry fees must be received by
the Tournament Committee by the date stated in the
published entry information.
ii. Multiple entries allowed in USTA National Championships.
When entries close, a player may be entered in up to two
age divisions of USTA National Championships. The USTA
selects players for these age divisions in the following
order: 18; 16; 14; and 12. If a player is entered in two age
divisions and is selected into the older division, that player
shall not be eligible for selection into the younger division.
If a player is not selected for the older division, that player
is eligible for selection in the younger division and is
eligible to be an alternate in the younger division but not in
the older division.
iii. Player may play in only one age division. A player may play in
only one age division in each group of USTA National
Championships. If a player plays in singles and doubles, the
player shall play in the same age division.
b. Eligibility of professionals. Professional players who are age eligible
may enter and play in all USTA National Championships.
c. Draw size.
i. In each of the 18, 16, and 14 divisions, two tournaments
shall have a draw of 128 for singles and 64 for doubles and
two tournaments shall have a draw of 192 for singles and 96
for doubles.
ii. 12 divisions. Each tournament shall have a draw size of 128
for singles and 64 for doubles.
d. National Championship Selection List. The USTA shall publish
National Championship Selection Lists for singles in each division
with effective dates as of January 15, May 1, and October 1 of each
year. Each list shall consist of players who are eligible for the next
USTA National Championships as follows:
i. Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Divisions. Players in the Boys’ and Girls’
18 Divisions shall be listed in the following order:
(A) Sixteen players who have played in the singles draw of
at least:
• One National Ranking Tournament (as defined
in USTA Regulation IX.C.3.) in the List’s
division during the four months before the
effective date of the List; and
• Two other National Ranking Tournaments in
the List’s division during the 12 months before
the effective date of the List.
These players shall be listed in the order of strength of
172 USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations)

ecord calculated as of the effective date using the
USTA computer ranking program.
(B) Players not previously listed who have an ATP singles
ranking of 1000 or better or who have a WTA singles
ranking of 600 or better as of the effective date, which
players shall be listed in the order of their ranking; and
(C) Players not previously listed who have an ITF ranking of
100 or better as of the effective date, which players shall
be listed in the order of their ranking.
ii. Boys’ and Girls’ 16, 14, and 12 Divisions. Players who have
played in the singles draw of at least:
• One National Ranking Tournament (as defined in USTA
Regulation IX.C.3.) in the List’s division during the
four months before the effective date of the List; and
• Two other National Ranking Tournaments in the List’s
division during the 12 months before the effective date
of the List.
These players shall be listed in the order of strength of
record calculated as of the effective date using the USTA
computer ranking program.
FAC Comment IX.A-3: The May 1 National Championship Selection List is
used for both the USTA National Clay Court Championships and The USTA
National Championships, except that shortly after selection for the USTA
National Clay Court Championships is done, the list is republished and any
player who is not age eligible for The USTA National Championships is
removed and replaced with the next-highest eligible player.
e. Selection process for singles. Each Tournament Committee shall
accept players who have submitted timely entries and successful
wild card applicants into the singles draw in the following order:
i. Players on National Championship Selection List.
• Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Divisions. For a draw of 192, players
on the List in positions 1 through 40 shall be accepted;
and for a draw of 128, players on the List in positions 1
through 32 shall be accepted; or
• Boys’ and Girls’ 16, 14, and 12 Divisions. For a draw of
192, players on the List in positions 1 through 24 shall
be accepted; and for a draw of 128, players on the List in
positions 1 through 16 shall be accepted.
ii. Players who qualified from a USTA National Open. Players
not previously selected who are among the top three
singles finishers in each of the four immediately preceding
USTA National Opens shall be accepted, if otherwise eligible.
A player who has been defaulted for any reason from the
player’s final scheduled singles match shall not be eligible.
A player whose doubles team has been defaulted for any
reason in the player’s final scheduled doubles match shall
not be eligible if, in the judgment of the Referee, the
conduct of that player contributed to the default.
USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations) 173

iii. Players within Sectional Associations’ quotas. Players not
previously selected who are on the Sectional Endorsement
Lists and within the quota established by USTA Regulation
IX.A.9.f. shall be accepted in order as determined by their
Sectional Endorsers. A Sectional Association’s quota is never
reduced because of players selected into the draw by any
other method under USTA Regulation IX.A.9.e.
FAC Comment IX.A-4: The number of players that a Sectional Association
receives into a draw may be reduced. For example, if a player within the quota
withdraws after the draw has been made, the player is replaced by the highest
listed player on the Alternate List. See USTA Regulation IX.A.9.e.ix.
iv. Endorsed players on National Standings List. The
Tournament Committee shall fill the remaining spots in the
draw, except for those spots reserved for wild card
recipients, with endorsed players remaining on the most
recently published National Standings List in the order in
which their names appear.
v. Wild cards. As soon as practicable after the deadline for
accepting wild card applications, the Wild Card Committee
shall award no more than eight wild cards in a draw of 192
and no more than four wild cards in a draw of 128.
vi. Additional players on National Standings List. If the Wild
Card Committee awards less than the maximum number of
wild cards, the Tournament Committee shall fill the
remaining spots in the draw with endorsed players
remaining on the National Standings List used to accept
players into the draw pursuant to USTA Regulation
IX.A.9.e.iv.
vii. Alternates. The Tournament Committee shall prepare an
alternate list of those players not accepted into the draw who
come from two sources:
• The Sectional Endorsement Lists
• The doubles finalists in each of the four immediately
preceding USTA National Opens.
The Tournament Committee shall publish on the website the
list of alternates in the order in which their names appear on
the National Standings List used to accept players into the
draw pursuant to USTA Regulation IX.A.9.e.iv.
FAC Comment IX.A-5: A late entrant who appears on the National
Championship Selection List or a Sectional Endorsement List, or who qualified
from a USTA National Open, may be placed on the alternate list after timely
entries in an order determined by lot. See USTA Regulation I.H.4.
viii. Replacement of player before draw has been made. The
Tournament Committee shall replace a player who withdraws
174 USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations)

or is otherwise removed from the draw before it has been
made as follows:
• Player within Sectional Association quota. The
Tournament Committee shall replace a player who was
accepted as part of a Sectional Association’s quota with
the next player on the Sectional Endorsement List from
that player’s Sectional Association.
• Player not within Sectional Association quota. The
Tournament Committee shall replace a player who was
accepted into the draw but not as part of a Sectional
Association’s quota with the highest remaining
alternate.
ix. Replacement of player after draw has been made but before
completion of first round. The Tournament Committee shall
replace a player who withdraws, is defaulted, or is otherwise
removed from the draw after the draw has been made but
before the completion of the first round with the highest
listed remaining alternate.
f. Sectional Associations’ quotas. Each Sectional Association shall
be entitled to a quota of accepted players based on the ratio that
the Sectional Association’s junior membership enrollment bears
to the total USTA junior membership enrollment. The USTA shall
calculate the quota by multiplying this ratio by:
• 100 for a draw of 192; or
• 60 for a draw of 128.
After filling the minimum quotas (see below), fractional values
obtained from the above computation shall be rounded up in
decreasing order until the tournament quota is filled. Enrollment
shall be based on the aggregate totals in each Sectional
Association and the USTA as of December 31 of the preceding year.
i. Maximum quotas. No Sectional Association shall have more
than 16 quota entries in a draw of 128. There are no
maximum quotas in draws of 192.
ii. Minimum quotas. Each Sectional Association shall have a
quota of no less than two entries.
g. Sectional Associations’ endorsement procedures.
i. Sectional Endorsers. Each Sectional Association shall
designate Sectional Endorsers who shall be familiar with the
playing records of the junior players within their Sectional
Associations.
ii. Sectional Endorsement List. Sectional Endorsers shall
provide each Tournament Committee with a Sectional
Endorsement List of the best-qualified, eligible players who
are available, reside within the Section, and are
recommended by the Sectional Association. The Sectional
Endorsement List shall rank the players in the order in which
the Sectional Association believes their records place them.
Sectional Endorsers may change the order of the endorsed
players at any time before the entry deadline.
USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations) 175

iii. Doubles-only endorsements. Each Sectional Endorser may
provide each Tournament Committee with a list of doubles
players or teams that are endorsed solely to play in the
doubles draw. The list shall rank the players or teams in the
order in which the Sectional Association believes their
records place them. Sectional Endorsers may change the
order of the endorsed players or teams before the entry
deadline.
iv. Playing up. Sectional Associations shall allow a player to
compete and be endorsed in any age division for which the
player satisfies the age eligibility requirement.
FAC Comment IX.A-6: The residence of all players is based on domicile.
h. Wild cards.
i. Eligibility for wild cards. Each wild card applicant must be in
good standing with the applicant’s Sectional Association and
submit a timely wild card application. A player may be in good
standing without being endorsed.
ii. Application. Players may obtain wild card applications from
their Sectional Associations and shall submit the
applications and supporting documents to the Director of
Junior Competition. The Director must receive the player’s
application and supporting documents no later than five
days after the entry deadline for the USTA National
Championship.
iii. Wild Card Committee. The Wild Card Committee shall be
comprised of the Coordinator of Junior Rankings, the
Chairperson of the Junior Competition Committee, the
Director of Junior Competition, the Director of Player
Development or the Director’s designee, and the
Tournament Director of the applicable USTA National
Championship. The Wild Card Committee shall consult with
USTA Player Development staff and the player’s Sectional
Association before granting a wild card.
iv. Criteria. Applications for wild cards may be considered in
extreme cases where extenuating circumstances have made
the normal procedure of qualification and endorsement
impossible. Wild cards also may be granted based on the
recommendation of the USTA National Coaching Staff that a
player has demonstrated significant potential at the National
and International level.
i. Players eligible for doubles. All players selected for singles shall be
eligible to enter the doubles.
Players who reach the doubles finals and are finishers in a USTA
National Open shall qualify for play in doubles in the next USTA
National Championship, provided they remain otherwise eligible
and have submitted timely entries. Players are not required to play
with the same partner. A player who has been defaulted for any
176 USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations)

eason from the player’s final scheduled match in singles shall not
be eligible. A player whose doubles team has been defaulted for
any reason in the player’s final scheduled doubles match shall not
be eligible if, in the judgment of the Referee, the conduct of that
player contributed to the default.
Vacancies in the doubles draw may be filled by the Tournament
Committee with alternates and players or teams receiving doubles-only
endorsements pursuant to USTA Regulation IX.A.9.g.iii.
j. Singles draw formats. In singles each tournament shall run either:
i. A compass draw with a playoff for third place; or
ii. A draw with a Feed-in Championship and a playoff for third
place.
The Junior Competition Committee shall specify which of the two
formats is used. If a draw with a Feed-in Championship is used, the
USTA Player Development Division and Junior Competition
Committee shall specify the round through which the losing players
are fed into the Feed-in Championship and any additional playoff
matches required. Each player shall play all matches unless the
failure to do so is attributable to illness, injury, personal emergency,
or adult decision.
FAC Comment IX.A-7: When a Feed-in Championship is used, the standard bye
placement method described in USTA Regulation II.B.4.d.i. shall be used.
k. Doubles draw format. In doubles each tournament shall run a
single elimination draw with a playoff for third place, except that
the Junior Competition Committee may authorize a consolation
draw at the request of the Tournament Committee. Each player
shall play all matches, unless the failure to do so is attributable to
illness, injury, or personal emergency.
l. Separating players from the same Sectional Association. The
singles draw shall avoid the presence in the same quarter of more
than one of the four players with the highest standing from the
same Sectional Association who are in the tournament, which
standing shall be determined using the most recently published
National Standings List. This regulation does not apply to wild card
entries.
m. Time when draws made. The draws shall not be made more than
seven days before the start of the tournament.
n. Remaking draws. If play has not begun, a draw may be remade:
• If any one of the top four seeds withdraws; or
• If two or more seeds withdraw.
o. Match formats. All main draw singles matches, third place singles
playoffs, and main draw matches in compass draws shall be the
best of three tiebreak sets, except that the final round of singles in
The USTA Boys’ 18 National Championships may be the best of
five tiebreak sets. The 7-Point Tiebreak shall be used in all tiebreak
sets of these matches. The Junior Competition Committee shall
determine the match formats for all other matches and shall
publish them on the USTA website and in Table 17.
USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations) 177

The chart shows the match formats that
will be used at tournaments on the National
Junior Tournament Schedule. A Referee
must get the authorization of the
Director of Junior Competition
to use other formats to complete a
tournament.
Main Draw
Singles Formats1 Consolation
Singles Formats
Doubles Formats
TABLE 17
Match Formats for 2010 Tournaments on the
National Junior Tournament Schedule
Best of 3 tiebreak sets x x x x x x3 Best of 5 tiebreak sets -The
USTA Boys’ 18 National
Championships Only (Kalamazoo)
Best of 3 tiebreak sets with a
10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu
x
of a 3rd set x x3 Best of 3 Tiebreak Sets with a
10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu
of 3rd Set
178 USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations)
USTA National Chmps.
BG 16, Intersectional
Team Championships
BG 18, 16, & 14
USTA National Opens
BG 12 USTA National Opens
USTA National Team Chmps.
USTA Zone Team Chmps.
USTA Regional Tournaments
and USTA Interscholastic
Championships
Consolation Singles includes: x x x x
All Feed-In Championship,
Modified Feed-in Championship,
and non-East Draw matches in a
Compass Draw
Best of 3 tiebreak sets x 2 x x 3
Best of 3 tiebreak sets with a
10-Point Match Tiebreak in
lieu of a 3rd set x 2 x 3
8-game pro set with a
10-Point Tiebreak at 8 games all x x x 3
8-game pro set with a
7-Point Tiebreak at 8 games all x x
Best of 3 short sets x3 1 Playoff for third place is considered a main draw singles match.
2 The best of 3 tiebreak sets shall be used in the semifinal, final, and playoff for third place doubles matches
at USTA National Championships. The match format for all other doubles matches shall be the best of 3
tiebreak sets with a 10-Point Match Tiebreak in lieu of a 3rd Set.
3 The USTA Regional Tournaments and USTA Interscholastic Championships may use any formats listed for
each event. See the TennisLink Tournament Home Page for the formats to be used at each tournament.
USTA International Tournaments and ITF Tournaments on the National Junior Tournament Schedule
ITF tournament regulations are used to determine the match formats for USTA International Tournaments
and ITF tournaments on the National Junior Tournament Schedule.

TABLE 18
2010 USTA International Tournaments
• USTA International Spring Championships—16 divisions
• Eddie Herr International Junior Tennis Championship—16, 14, & 12
divisions
• Nike Junior Tour USTA National Masters—14 & 12 divisions
• Prince Cup—16, 14, & 12 divisions
• Dunlop Orange Bowl International Championships—16 divisions
• Junior Orange Bowl International Championships—14 & 12 divisions
10. USTA National Opens.
a. Entry.
i. Means of entry. A player submits an entry and entry fee to
the USTA and designates the player’s order of preference
among the four USTA National Open sites.
ii. Multiple entries allowed. A player may be entered in up to two
age divisions of USTA National Opens when entries close. The
USTA selects players for these divisions in the following order:
18; 16; 14; and 12. If a player is entered in two age divisions
and is selected into the older division, that player shall not be
eligible for selection into the younger division. If a player is not
selected for the older division, that player is eligible for
selection in the younger division and is eligible to be an
alternate in the younger division but not in the older division.
iii. Player may play in only one age division. If a player plays in
singles and doubles, the player shall play in the same age
division.
b. Eligibility of players with ATP, WTA, or ITF ranking. An amateur with
an ATP, WTA, or ITF ranking is eligible to enter only if the player’s
name appears on the most recently published National Standings
List as of the entry deadline.
c. Draw size. Each tournament shall have a draw of 64 for singles and
32 for doubles.
d. Selection process. Players shall be accepted into the draws and
given preference in their choice of site in the following order:
i. Up to 32 players (up to eight per draw) from the top 200
players on the most recently published National Standings
List of the next-younger age division in the order in which
their names appear on this list;
ii. Up to 224 players (up to 56 per draw) from the most recently
published National Standings List for the age division in the
order in which their names appear on this list;
iii. Players not yet in the draw whose names appear on the
most recently published National Standings List of the age
division in the order in which their names appear on this list;
iv. Players not yet in the draw whose names appear on the most
recently published National Standings List of the
next-younger age division in the order in which their names
appear on this list; and
USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations) 179

v. The remaining entrants in the order of the strength of their
records.
Players not selected for their first choice shall remain in the pool of
applicants for entry into the other concurrent tournaments.
e. Alternates. Those players who have not been selected after all
four draws have been filled shall be placed in alternate pools at all
concurrent tournaments for which the players indicated a
preference. The Tournament Committees shall order the
alternates as follows:
i. Players in positions up to 600 from the National Standings
List of the division used to select players into the tournament
in the order in which their names appear on this List;
ii. Players not already placed on the alternate list in positions up
to 400 from the National Standings List of the next-younger
division used to select players into the tournament in the
order in which their names appear on this List;
iii. Players not already placed on the alternate list whose names
appear on the National Standings List of the division used to
select players into the tournament in the order in which their
names appear on this List;
iv. Players not already placed on the alternate list whose names
appear on the National Standings List of the next-younger
division used to select players into the tournament in the
order in which their names appear on this List; and
v. The remaining entrants in an order determined by lot.
FAC Comment IX.A-8: Late entrants may be placed on the alternate list after
timely entries in an order determined by lot. See USTA Regulation I.H.4.
f. Acceptance into USTA National Open makes player ineligible for
play in concurrent USTA National Open. Once a player has been
accepted into a USTA National Open, the player shall not be eligible
for play in any other USTA National Open held concurrently, except
that a player may submit a written request to move to another site
within the same age division if the draw at the requested site is not
full, the request is received by each Tournament Director no later
than 10 days before the start date of the tournament, and each
Tournament Director involved understands the circumstances and
concurs in writing.
g. Publication of selection. The USTA shall publish the names of the
entrants and alternates.
h. Singles draw format. In singles each tournament shall run a
Feed-in Championship and playoff for third place. The USTA
Player Development Division and Junior Competition Committee
shall specify any additional playoff matches required and the
round through which the losing players are fed into the Feed-in
Championship. Each player shall play all matches unless the
failure to do so is attributable to illness, injury, personal
emergency, or adult decision.
180 USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations)

FAC Comment IX.A-9: The standard bye placement method described in
USTA Regulation II.B.4.d.i. shall be used in the Feed-in Championship draw.
i. Doubles draw format. In doubles each tournament shall run a
single elimination draw and playoff for third place. Each player
shall play all matches unless the failure to do so is attributable to
illness, injury, or personal emergency.
j. Time when draws made. The draws shall not be made more than
seven days before the start of the tournament.
k. Remaking draws. If play has not begun, a draw may be remade:
• If any one of the top four seeds withdraws; or
• If two or more seeds withdraw.
11. USTA Team Championships, USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic
Championships (East/West), USTA Regional Tournaments, and USTA
International Tournaments.
a. Tournament regulations for USTA Team Championships, USTA
Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic Championships (East/West),
and USTA Regional Tournaments. Regulations for USTA Team
Championships, USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic
Championships (East/West), and USTA Regional Tournaments
shall be prepared by the Junior Competition Committee and the
USTA Player Development Division and shall be published.
b. Use of ITF tournament regulations at USTA International
Tournaments. USTA International Tournaments shall use ITF
tournament regulations. The list of USTA International
Tournaments shall be published. See Table 18.
c. Coaching in USTA Team Championships. Coaching shall be allowed
only in USTA Team Championships. Only the designated team coach
shall be allowed to coach. Each team may have only one designated
coach. Coaching may take place during changeovers and shall be
conducted in an unobtrusive manner at the fence line with the
coach outside the playing area while the player remains inside the
playing area.
12. Scheduling requirements. The scheduling guidelines in USTA
Regulation II.D.12. and Table 6 and the order for canceling matches
in USTA Regulation III.G.5.a. are mandatory for USTA Junior
National Championships and USTA Regional Tournaments. Scheduling
requirements for USTA International Tournaments and ITF
tournaments on the National Junior Tournament Schedule are
controlled by the ITF tournament regulations.
13. Eligibility for international competition. In compliance with ITF regulations,
in order to be endorsed by the USTA into ITF junior tournaments, a player
shall be a United States citizen as evidenced by possession of a valid U.S.
passport, birth certificate (not conclusive in all cases), or Certificate of
Naturalization.
A player residing in Puerto Rico who meets the eligibility criteria of
USTA Regulation IX.A.2.a. may play on the Puerto Rico or United States
international teams. A player residing in the U.S. Virgin Islands who meets
USTA REGULATIONS IX.A. (Junior National Tournament Regulations) 181

the eligibility criteria of USTA Regulation IX.A.2.a may play on the U.S.
Virgin Islands or United States international teams. Once a player has
competed for one team, the player may not compete on the other team
unless reinstated.
B. Junior National Suspension System
1. Application. The USTA Suspension Point System shall apply to
tournaments listed on the National Junior Tournament Schedule. It applies
to conduct:
• During all matches (main draw, compass draw, consolation,
qualifying, and doubles);
• During tournament activities;
• At tournament facilities; and
• At facilities, such as hotels, dormitories, and homes where
players stay.
Additionally each suspension point assessed at ITF tournaments becomes
one suspension point under the USTA Suspension Point System.
2. Suspension points. The USTA Junior and Collegiate Competition
Department shall record suspension points upon being notified of the
violations listed in Table 19.
3. Persons authorized to file suspension point reports with the Referee.
The following persons are authorized to file suspension point reports
with the Referee for offenses they personally witness:
• Tournament Committee members
• Chief Umpire
• Deputy Referees
• On-court officials (including Roving Officials)
• Court Monitors, if specifically authorized by the Referee
• Club or facility managers
• Hotel or dormitory managers
• Families housing players
• Player Development staff
FAC Comment IX.B-1: The USTA Junior and Collegiate Competition
Department, 10399 Flores Drive, Boca Raton, FL 33428 has forms that are
used to report code violations and suspension points that are assessed.
Suspension points are assessed by the Referee, Sectional junior staff, or
National junior staff. They are not assessed by the Tournament Director,
Roving Umpires, Chair Umpires, or Line Umpires.
4. Notification to Director of Junior Competition and Sectional Associations
of points levied. The Tournament Committee shall promptly inform the
Director of Junior Competition (hereinafter “Director”) of any points levied
against any player (foreign or American). The Director shall then inform
the player’s Sectional Association of the suspension points and any
resulting suspension, and the Sectional Association shall have the
opportunity to submit, on behalf of the player, any additional
information for consideration. Failure of the Director to notify a
Sectional Association of suspension points and any resulting
suspension shall not invalidate the points or the suspension.
182 USTA REGULATIONS IX.B. (Junior National Suspension System)

Defaults* Code
Violations
Improper Entry
or Withdrawal
Unsportsmanlike
Conduct
Gross
Misconduct
Playing
Under
Suspension
ITF Suspension
Points
TABLE 19
Suspension Points
Violation Suspension
Points
Each code violation (point, game, or default) except that
players who receive code violations because of delay
immediately after a medical timeout or because of obvious
cramping are not assessed suspension points. 2
Default for flagrant unsportsmanlike conduct on or off court 8
Default for refusal to play or continue to play (for reasons
other than illness, injury, or personal emergency) 5
Default because of an adult discipline 5
Default for no-show 5
Default for late arrival 1
Disqualification for ineligibility 3
*Suspension points for defaults are in addition to points previously assessed for
code violations.
Being entered when entries close in two or more sanctioned
tournaments scheduled to overlap unless each Tournament
Committee approves the multiple entries in writing 5
Withdrawal from tournament after entries closed for reason
other than injury, illness, personal emergency, or previously
authorized entry into another tournament 4
Unsportsmanlike conduct or inappropriate conduct on court
after a match or off court at locations such as the tournament
site, hotel, housing, or tournament sponsored event 5
Not using best efforts to win 2
Physical violence against another person on or off court by a
player, relative, coach, or other person associated with a player 10
Illegal use or possession of drugs 8
Possessing or drinking alcoholic beverages 8
Gambling activity (see USTA Regulation IV.C.18.) 8
Destruction of property
Playing in any sanctioned tournament while suspended
9
by USTA or one of its Sectional Associations 10
Each suspension point assessed at ITF tournaments and
USTA International Tournaments becomes one suspension
point under the USTA Suspension Point System 1
USTA REGULATIONS IX.B. (Junior National Suspension System) 183

5. Player suspension. The Director shall suspend players according to the
following schedule:
a. First suspension. If a player receives 10 suspension points within
a 12-month period, the player shall be suspended from
competing in USTA-sanctioned tournaments for three months. (If
no USTA National Championship falls during the 3-month period,
the player shall not be accepted into the USTA National
Championship immediately following the 3-month suspension
period.) Upon suspension these 10 points shall be cleared from the
player’s record. All other suspension points shall remain on the
player’s record and count towards a second suspension.
b. Second suspension. If a player receives 8 suspension points within
the 12 months immediately following the first suspension, the player
shall be suspended from competing in USTA-sanctioned
tournaments for six months. Upon suspension these 8 points shall be
cleared from the player’s record. All other suspension points shall
remain on the player’s record and count towards a third suspension.
c. Subsequent suspensions. If a player receives 6 suspension points
within the 12-month period immediately following the second
suspension (and any suspensions subsequent to the second
suspension), the player shall be suspended from competing in
USTA-sanctioned tournaments for a period to be determined by the
Director, the Chairperson of the Junior Competition Committee, and
one additional member of the Junior Competition Committee to be
appointed by the Chairperson. The suspension period shall not be
less than one year and may be up to the remainder of the player’s
junior career. These 6 points shall be cleared from the player’s record.
6. Written notice to player. After the Director has determined that a player
should be suspended, the Director shall send a notice by first class mail
and by certified mail (return receipt requested) to the player at the
address shown on the records of the USTA Membership Department.
The notice shall set forth:
• That the player is being suspended;
• The length of the suspension;
• The player’s right to appeal the suspension under USTA
Regulation IX.B.8.;
• The procedure for appealing the suspension; and
• A statement that if the player chooses not to appeal the
suspension, then the suspension shall begin 21 days after
the date the notice was mailed.
7. Player may request that suspension start immediately. When a player
accumulates sufficient points to be suspended, the player may request
that the suspension period begin immediately. The player shall mail the
request by certified mail, return receipt requested to the Director. If the
Director confirms that the player has accumulated sufficient points to
be suspended, the suspension shall begin on the date that the certified
notice was mailed.
8. Right to appeal suspension to USTA Grievance Committee. A player
shall have the right to appeal a suspension to the USTA Grievance
Committee in accordance with Bylaw 43. Absent good cause shown,
184 USTA REGULATIONS IX.B. (Junior National Suspension System)

any appeal shall be barred unless it is made in writing within 21 days of
the Director’s mailing the notice of suspension and shall be mailed first
class, certified, or registered mail to the Grievance Chairperson, c/o
USTA Executive Director, 70 West Red Oak Lane, White Plains, New
York 10604.
9. Effective date of suspension.
a. If an appeal of a suspension is not made to the USTA Grievance
Committee, the suspension begins 21 days after the Director mails
the certified notice of suspension to the player or such earlier date
as may be requested in writing by the player under USTA Regulation
IX.B.7.
b. If an appeal of the suspension is made to the USTA Grievance
Committee and if the initial decision affirms the suspension, the
suspension begins on the date the decision is mailed unless the
decision states otherwise or unless a stay is granted.
C. Junior National Rankings
1. Divisions ranked. The USTA shall publish rankings in the Boys’ and Girls’
18, 16, 14, and 12 Divisions.
2. Eligibility for National rankings. Players eligible to play in USTA Junior
National Championships are eligible for a National ranking. See USTA
Regulation IX.A.2.a. for these requirements.
3. National Ranking Tournaments. The following tournaments shall be
known as National Ranking Tournaments and only results from these
tournaments shall be considered for junior National rankings:
• USTA National Championships;
• USTA National Opens;
• USTA Team Championships;
• USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic Championships
(East/West);
• USTA Regional Tournaments;
• USTA International Tournaments;
• ITF tournaments listed on the National Junior Tournament
Schedule; and
• Sectional Ranking Tournaments (as defined in USTA Regulation
IX.C.4.).
4. Sectional Ranking Tournaments. Each Sectional Association shall
designate 12 Sectional Ranking Tournaments during the year. The
relative weights of these tournaments shall be determined as set forth in
USTA Regulation IX.C.6., provided, however, that each Sectional
Association shall be assigned the same number of tournaments with the
same relative weights and ranking points accumulated for winning
rounds.
5. Ranking points. Players shall earn ranking points in singles and doubles
as follows:
i. Points Per Round. Points Per Round are those points that are
awarded based on the round that the player or team reached.
ii. Bonus points. Bonus points are those points that are awarded
based on wins over highly ranked players.
6. Assignment of ranking points. Annually the Junior Competition
USTA REGULATIONS IX.C. (Junior National Rankings) 185

Committee and the USTA Player Development Division shall determine:
• The Points Per Round that shall be assigned to each round in each
National Ranking Tournament; and
• The bonus points awarded, if any, for wins over highly ranked
players.
The assigned ranking points shall be published on the USTA website.
7. Combined rankings. Junior National rankings are based on singles and
doubles ranking points. A player’s junior National ranking shall be
calculated by adding:
• 100% of the ranking points earned in singles from the eight
National Ranking Tournaments in which the player received the
most singles ranking points; and
• A percentage of the ranking points earned in doubles from the
eight National Ranking Tournaments in which the player
received the most doubles ranking points, which percentage
shall be determined by the Junior Competition Committee. The
percentage shall be published on the USTA website.
FAC Comment IX.C-1: The percentage assigned to doubles for 2010, is 15%.
8. Treatment of byes, withdrawals, walkovers, disqualifications, defaults,
and retirements.
a. Byes. A player who advances because of a bye does not receive
Points Per Round for advancing.
b. Withdrawals. A player who advances because of a withdrawal shall
receive Points Per Round for advancing but shall not receive any
bonus points.
c. Walkovers. A player who advances because of a walkover shall
receive Points Per Round for advancing but shall not receive any
bonus points.
d. Disqualification. A player who advances because of a
disqualification receives Points Per Round for advancing but shall
not receive any bonus points.
e. Defaults before the first point of the match. A player who advances
because of a default before the first point of a match shall receive
Points Per Round for advancing but shall not receive any bonus
points. Examples of these defaults include, but are not necessarily
limited to, defaults for:
• Lateness for the start of a match;
• Failure to show up for a match;
• Refusal to start a match;
• Code violations under the Point Penalty System occurring
during the warm-up; and
• Misconduct before or between matches.
f. Defaults after the first point of the match. A player who advances
because of a default after the first point of the match receives
Points Per Round and any bonus points that apply to the match.
Examples of these defaults include, but are not necessarily limited
to, defaults for:
186 USTA REGULATIONS IX.C. (Junior National Rankings)

• Code violations under the Point Penalty System;
• Lateness after a rest period;
• Lateness for resumption of a suspended match; and
• Refusal to continue to play a match.
g. Player defaulted for code violations receives no ranking points. A
player who has been defaulted for code violations under the Point
Penalty System shall not receive any ranking points that the player
had accumulated in the event.
h. Retirements. A player who advances because of the opponent’s
retirement shall receive Points Per Round for advancing and any
bonus points.
9. Matches generally may count in only one division. No match may count
for ranking in more than one division, except that results in the Boys’ and
Girls’ 18 Divisions from the USTA National Championships shall be
considered in the Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Divisions, the Men’s and Women’s
Open Divisions, and the Professional/National Open Men’s and Women’s
Ranking Divisions.
10. Players ranked. All players who received at least 200 ranking points shall
be ranked.
11. Ranking lists in Junior Divisions shall show birth date of players. All
ranking lists for the junior age divisions shall show the date of birth of each
player ranked as officially recorded on the USTA membership records.
12. Responsibilities of junior players seeking National ranking. Players shall
be responsible for regularly reviewing their player records and shall
promptly submit corrections to their player records to the USTA Junior
and Collegiate Competition Department. All corrections must be
submitted no later than January 30.
D. Junior National Ranking Committees
1. USTA President shall establish National ranking committees. The USTA
President shall establish National ranking committees under the Junior
Competition Committee to rank the divisions that are required to be
ranked under USTA Regulation IX.C.1. The USTA President may
appoint a Junior Ranking Coordinator to coordinate all National
rankings in these divisions. Subject to the approval of the USTA
President, vacancies in the Junior Ranking Coordinator position or on
the ranking committees may be filled by the chairperson of the Junior
Competition Committee. If the chairperson is unable to fill the vacancy,
the Junior Ranking Coordinator, subject to the approval of the USTA
President, shall fill the vacancy.
2. Committee size. Each ranking committee shall have at least two and no
more than five members inclusive of its chairperson. If a ranking
committee has an even number of members, the Junior Ranking
Coordinator may act as an additional member of the committee.
3. Tentative rankings. This is the first ranking determined by junior ranking
committees for both singles and doubles play. The tentative rankings and
the individual player records shall be published by January 15 of each
year. These tentative rankings have no official standing until certified by
the Junior Ranking Review Board.
4. Corrections must be received no later than January 30. Any corrections to
USTA REGULATIONS IX.D. (Junior National Ranking Comitttees) 187

a player’s record must be received by the chairperson of the appropriate
junior ranking committee no later than January 30 of each year.
E. Junior National Ranking Review Board
1. Composition. The Junior National Ranking Review Board shall consist of
a chairperson and two to four individual ranking committee members all
of whom shall be appointed by the USTA President. If an appeal comes
before the Junior National Review Board in a division in which its
chairperson is a member, the chairperson may not consider that appeal.
2. Meetings. The Junior National Review Board shall meet to finalize the
tentative rankings. Meetings may be held by telephone conference call or
other communication equipment that allows all persons participating to
hear each other.
3. USTA staff shall provide relevant data. The USTA staff shall provide all
relevant data to the Junior National Ranking Review Board.
4. Final rankings issued by March 1. These are the singles and doubles
rankings in all divisions that have been certified as official USTA rankings
by the Junior Ranking Review Board and shall be subsequently
published. These final junior rankings are determined after corrected
data have been received and acted upon by junior ranking committees.
Final junior rankings are not subject to appeal. The Junior National
Ranking Review Board shall issue the final rankings by March 1.
F. Confidentiality of Ranking Information.
Members of National ranking committees and the Junior National Ranking
Review Board shall not disclose any results of their deliberations or any other
information concerning the rankings before their release by the USTA.
188 USTA REGULATIONS IX.E. (Junior National Ranking Review Board)

X. ADULT, SENIOR AND FAMILY NATIONAL TOURNAMENTS AND RANKINGS
A. Adult, Senior, and Family National Tournament Regulations
1. Overview of Adult, Senior, and Family National Tournament System.
Annually the USTA shall publish the National Adult, Senior, and Family
Tournament Schedule, which shall include the following tournaments:
a. Category I USTA National Championships—Annual. The USTA
shall sanction at least one Category I USTA National
Championship in each of the divisions set forth below. Category I
USTA National Championships may be sanctioned on hard,
grass, clay, or indoor surfaces.
i. Adult Divisions. Men’s and Women’s Open and 30.
ii. Senior Divisions. Men’s and Women’s 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60,
65, 70, 75, 80, 85, and 90.
iii. Family Divisions.
• Father-Son, Father (60 & Over)-Son, Father (70 &
Over)-Son;
• Father-Daughter, Father (60 & Over)-Daughter, Father
(70 & Over)-Daughter, Father (80 & Over)-Daughter;
• Mother-Son;
• Mother-Daughter, Mother (60 & Over)-Daughter,
Mother (70 & Over)-Daughter;
• Husband-Wife Mixed, Husband-Wife Mixed
(Combined Ages 100 Years), Husband-Wife Mixed
(Combined Ages 120 Years), Husband-Wife Mixed
(Combined Ages 140 Years); and
• Grandfather-Grandson.
FAC Comment X.A-1: All Category I USTA National Championships in the
Men’s and Women’s 35-80, and Men’s 85 Divisions are also sanctioned by
the ITF and are played under ITF Seniors Regulations.
FAC Comment X.A-2: Although Category I USTA National Championships
are sanctioned in the Open Division, there is no Adult Open ranking. Results
in these tournaments count for the Adult National Open and
Professional/Adult National Open rankings.
b. Category I USTA National Championships—Optional. The USTA
may sanction one or more Category I USTA National
Championship in each division below. These Category I USTA
National Championships may be sanctioned on hard, grass, clay,
or indoor surfaces.
i. Adult Divisions. Mixed and 30 Mixed.
ii. Senior Divisions. 40 Mixed, 50 Mixed, and 60 Mixed.
FAC Comment X.A-3: Although Category I USTA National Championships are
sanctioned in the Mixed, 30 Mixed, 40 Mixed, 50 Mixed, and 60 Mixed
Divisions, there are no rankings in these divisions.
USTA REGULATIONS X.A. (Adult, Senior and Family National Tournaments…) 189

c. USTA National Intersectional Team Events. Annually the
Adult/Senior Competition Committee shall sanction USTA
National Intersectional Team Events in divisions as determined by
the Committee.
d. Super Category II USTA Tournaments and Category II USTA
Tournaments. Super Category II USTA Tournaments and Category
II USTA Tournaments are Sectionally sanctioned tournaments that
are selected by the Adult/Senior Competition Committee and the
USTA Competitive Play Department for inclusion on the National
Adult, Senior, and Family Tournament Schedule. The Adult/Senior
Competition Committee, in consultation with the USTA Competitive
Play Department, shall determine the selection criteria.
FAC Comment X.A-4: Some Super Category II USTA Tournaments and
some Category II USTA Tournaments are also sanctioned by the ITF.
These tournaments are played under ITF Seniors Regulations.
2. Tournament regulations for Category I USTA National Championships. All
Category I USTA National Championships that are sanctioned by the ITF
shall be played under ITF Seniors Regulations and shall follow the
requirements listed below when they are not inconsistent with ITF Seniors
Regulations. Any Category I USTA National Championship that is not
sanctioned by the ITF shall follow the requirements listed below.
a. Citizenship not required. Category I USTA National Championship
shall be open to citizens of the United States and non-citizens.
b. Draw regulations. Each Category I USTA National Championship
shall be required to offer singles and doubles in the divisions for
which the tournament has been sanctioned, except for Category I
USTA National Championships in the Adult Mixed, Senior Mixed,
and Family Divisions, which are only required to hold doubles.
i. Draw sizes. Draw sizes shall be determined by the
Tournament Committee. Selection for draws with limited draw
sizes shall be done as set forth in USTA Regulation I.H.4.,
except that the Tournament Committee has the discretion to
hold a Qualifying Draw. Wild cards may not be awarded.
FAC Comment X.A-5: Matches played in qualifiers for Category I USTA
National Championships do not count for National ranking, but they do
count for meeting the minimum participation requirements if the qualifier is
sanctioned as part of the Category I USTA National Championship.
ii. Consolation draws required. Category I USTA National
Championships shall include consolation draws in singles,
doubles, and mixed doubles. The Tournament Committee
shall determine the consolation format that shall be used.
iii. Playoff for third place. Category I USTA National
Championships shall have the losing semifinalists in all events
(singles, doubles, and mixed doubles) playoff for third place.
c. Seeding. The seeding method shall be the All-Factors Method of
seeding described in USTA Regulation II.A.4.a.
190 USTA REGULATIONS X.A. (Adult, Senior and Family National Tournaments…)

d. Match formats. All matches played in Category I USTA National
Championships shall use one of the following formats:
• The best of three tiebreak sets; or
• The best of five tiebreak sets.
FAC Comment X.A-6: USTA Regulation X.F.5. states that only the matches
played with the formats set forth in USTA Regulation X.A.2.d. shall count
for ranking, except when an alternate match format has been authorized in
advance by the Chairperson of the Adult/Senior Competition Committee or
the Chairperson’s designee. See also USTA Regulation X.A.2.h.
e. No-ad scoring may be used. Category I USTA National
Championships may use no-ad scoring.
f. Playing semifinals and finals on sanctioned surface. The semifinal
and final round matches shall be played on the surface on which the
tournament has been sanctioned unless more than 24 hours of
inclement weather or other cause prevents these matches from
being played on the sanctioned surface. For purposes of this
regulation, the designation “hard courts” includes all types of hard
courts, and the designation “clay courts” includes all types of clay
courts.
g. Scheduling.
i. Limit on number of matches per day. The scheduling
guidelines in USTA Regulation II.D.12. and Table 7 are
mandatory for all Category I USTA National Championships.
ii. Order of play. On any day of play, players’ matches should be
scheduled as follows:
• All singles main draw matches should take precedence
over all consolation matches;
• The first singles consolation match of the day may be
scheduled before a main draw doubles or main draw
mixed doubles match; and
• The first main draw doubles match of the day should be
scheduled before a second singles consolation match.
For the purpose of this regulation, playoff matches for third
place are considered part of the main draw.
h. Shortening tournaments. The Chairperson of the Adult/Senior
Competition Committee or the Chairperson’s designee may
authorize the Referee of a Category I USTA National Championship
to use a match format not previously authorized because of:
• Inclement weather;
• Health concerns; or
• Safety concerns.
All matches in each round shall be played with the same format.
Note, however, the shortening of any Category I USTA National
Championship sanctioned by the ITF is controlled by ITF Seniors
Regulations.
i. Practice courts. Practice courts should be available on the day
USTA REGULATIONS X.A. (Adult, Senior and Family National Tournaments…) 191

efore the start of the tournament and on each day during the
tournament.
3. Tournament regulations for USTA National Intersectional Team Events.
a. Scheduling guidelines and match limitations. The scheduling
guidelines and match limitations set forth in USTA Regulations
II.D.12. and X.A.2.g.i. and Table 7 shall not apply to players who
enter both singles and doubles.
b. Tournament Directors’ discretion. Tournament Directors may
impose entry and scheduling limitations provided they are
announced before the start of the tournament.
c. Coaching. Coaching shall be allowed in USTA National
Intersectional Team Events.
d. Other regulations. Other regulations for the USTA National
Intersectional Team Events shall be prepared by the Adult/Senior
Competition Committee and the USTA Competitive Play Department
and shall be published.
B. Divisions and Categories Ranked
The USTA shall issue rankings in the:
1. Adult National Open category. Men’s and Women’s Adult National Open
categories.
2. Professional/Adult National Open category. Men’s and Women’s
Professional/Adult National Open categories.
3. Adult Divisions. Men’s and Women’s 30 Divisions.
4. Senior Divisions. Men’s and Women’s 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75,
80, 85, and 90 Division.
5. Family Divisions.
• Father-Son, Father (60 & Over)-Son, Father (70 & Over)-Son;
• Father-Daughter, Father (60 & Over)-Daughter, Father (70 &
Over)-Daughter; Father (80 & Over)-Daughter;
• Mother-Son;
• Mother-Daughter, Mother (60 & Over)-Daughter; Mother (70 &
Over) Daughter;
• Husband-Wife Mixed; Husband-Wife (Combined Ages 100 Years);
Husband-Wife Mixed (Combined Ages 120 Years); Husband-Wife
(Combined Ages 140 Years); and
• Grandfather-Grandson.
C. Eligibility for National Ranking
In the Adult National Open and Professional/Adult National Open ranking
categories and the Adult, Senior, and Family Divisions, only the following
categories of persons are eligible to receive a national ranking:
1. U.S. Citizens. Citizens of the United States.
2. Certain aliens.
• Permanent resident aliens. Permanent resident aliens of the United
States.
• Diplomats. Aliens who have resided in the United States
continuously for more than one year and who are members of
families of persons in the diplomatic or consular corps.
• Aliens with Refugee Status. Aliens who have been granted Refugee
Status.
192 USTA REGULATIONS X.B. (Divisions and Categories Ranked)

• Aliens with Asylee Status. Aliens who have been granted Asylee
Status.
• Aliens with Temporary Protected Status. Aliens who have been
granted Temporary Protected Status.
• Aliens with Adjustment Status. Aliens whose I-485 (Application to
Register Permanent Resident or Adjust Status) has been accepted
for filing.
• British Columbians. Canadian citizens and landed Canadian
immigrants who reside in British Columbia.
FAC Comment X.C-1: Documents commonly used to support a particular alien
status include a permanent resident alien card (green card), Form I-94, and a
receipt confirming filing of the I-485.
D. Adult National Open Rankings
1. Points Per Round Ranking System. Rankings in the Adult National Open
Men’s and Women’s singles and individual doubles ranking categories
shall be based on a points per round ranking system. The Adult National
Open ranking period for all players shall be January 1 through December
31. Annually the USTA Pro Circuit Department shall determine:
• The tournaments that shall be considered for ranking;
• The ranking points that shall be assigned to each round in each
tournament;
• How byes, withdrawals, walkovers, disqualifications, defaults, and
retirements are handled; and
• How ranking ties are broken.
This information shall be published on the USTA website. Eligible players
must meet the minimum tournament participation requirements listed in
Table 20 to be ranked.
2. Corrections. Player records shall be published on the USTA website.
Players should check their records and submit verifiable additions and
corrections to the USTA Pro Circuit Department. Periodic updates to
the year-end rankings may be published after additions and corrections
are verified.
E. Professional/Adult National Open Rankings
1. Professional/Adult National Open rankings. Rankings in the
Professional/Adult National Open Men’s and Women’s singles and
individual doubles ranking categories are a composite of the most
recently published year-end ATP or WTA rankings and the Professional/
Adult National Open rankings described in USTA Regulation X.D. The
Professional/Adult National Open Ranking Period for all players shall be
January 1 through December 31. Eligible players must meet the minimum
tournament participation requirements listed in Table 20 to be ranked.
FAC Comment X.E-1: The Professional/Adult National Open ranking list is
also called the “Top 500 List” as it is used by the ITF to determine the top
500 ranked players for the purposes of selection into qualifying for ITF
professional tournaments.
a. Men’s Division. Eligible players shall be ranked in the following
order:
USTA REGULATIONS X.E. (Professional/Adult National Open Rankings) 193

TABLE 20
Adult National Open and Professional/Adult National Open
Minimum Tournament Participation Requirements for National Ranking
Ranking Category
Adult National Open Men’s
Singles and Doubles
Adult National Open Women’s
Singles and Doubles
Professional/Adult National Open
Men’s Singles and Doubles
Professional/Adult National Open
Women’s Singles and Doubles
Minimum Tournament Participation Requirements
One Category I USTA National Championship in the Open
Division*
and
Two additional tournaments from the following list:
• Sectional Championship in the Open Division
• Super Category II USTA Tournament in the Open Division
• Category II USTA Tournament in the Open Division
• USTA Pro Circuit Event**
• NCAA Division I National Tournaments (ITA All-American
Championships, ITA National Indoor Championships, and
NCAA Division I National Championships)
• USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 National Championships
Note:
• Three USTA Pro Circuit Events** may be substituted for one
Category I USTA National Championship in the Open Division.
• A second Category I USTA National Championship in the
Open Division* may be substituted for the two additional
tournaments.
One Category I USTA National Championship in the
Open Division*
or
Three USTA Pro Circuit Events**
and
Two additional tournaments from the following list:
• USTA Pro Circuit Event**
• NCAA Division I National Tournaments (ITA All-American
Championships, ITA National Indoor Championships, and
NCAA Division I National Championships)
• USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 National Championships
• Super Category II USTA Tournament in the Open Division
(If a player plays a Super Category II USTA Tournament,
the third tournament may be a Sectional Championship in
the Open Division.)
• Category II USTA Tournament in the Open Division (If a
Category II USTA Tournament is played, the third tournament
may be a Sectional Championship in the Open Division.)
* Playing in the qualifier round of 16 for a Category I USTA National Championship in the Open
Division also meets the participation requirement.
** Playing in the qualifier round of 32 for a USTA Pro Circuit Event also meets the participation
requirement.
i. The order in which their names appear on the most recent
year-end ATP ranking list. Ties shall be broken based on the
order tied players appear on the most recent Adult National
Open ranking list.
ii. Players not previously ranked in the order in which their names
appear on the year-end Adult National Open ranking list.
b. Women’s Division. Eligible players shall be ranked in the following
order:
194 USTA REGULATIONS X.E. (Professional/Adult National Open Rankings)

i. The order in which their names appear on the most recent
year-end WTA ranking list. Ties shall be broken based on the
order tied players appear on the most recent Adult National
Open ranking list.
ii. Players not previously ranked in the order in which their
names appear on the year-end Adult National Open ranking
list.
2. Corrections. Player records shall be published on the USTA website. Players
should check their records and submit verifiable additions and corrections
to the USTA Pro Circuit Department. Periodic updates to the year-end
rankings may be published after additions and corrections are verified.
F. Adult, Senior, and Family National Rankings
1. Adult, Senior, and Family ranking period. The Adult, Senior, and Family
ranking period for all players and teams shall be January 1 through
December 31.
2. National Ranking Tournaments. The following tournaments shall be
known as National Ranking Tournaments in the Adult, Senior, and Family
ranking divisions and only results from these tournaments using
approved match formats set forth in USTA Regulation X.A.2.d. shall be
considered for ranking:
• Category I USTA National Championships
• Super Category II USTA Tournaments
• Category II USTA Tournaments
• USTA National Intersectional Team Events
• Sectional Championships (as defined in USTA Regulation X.F.3.)
• Local Tournaments (as defined in USTA Regulation X.F.4.)
3. Sectional Championships. These are tournaments sanctioned by the
Sectional Associations as Sectional Championships in the Adult, Senior,
and Family Divisions that are not Category II USTA Tournaments.
4. Local Tournaments. Local Tournaments are tournaments sanctioned by
the Sectional or District Associations in the Adult, Senior, and Family
Divisions that are neither Super Category II USTA Tournaments,
Category II USTA Tournaments, nor Sectional Championships.
5. Matches considered for National ranking. Only matches in National
Ranking Tournaments that use the scoring system specifically described
in Rules 5, 6, and 7 and no-ad scoring described in Appendix IV of the
ITF Rules of Tennis and that are the best of three sets or the best of five
sets shall be considered for ranking except that:
• Matches that use other formats in Category I USTA National
Championships shall be considered for ranking if their use is
authorized in advance by the Chairperson of the Adult/Senior
Competition Committee or the Chairperson’s designee; and
• Matches that use other formats in all National Ranking
Tournaments shall be considered for ranking unless their use for
ranking is prohibited by the Adult/Senior Competition Committee.
6. Points Per Round ranking system.
a. Ranking points. Players shall earn ranking points in National
Ranking Tournaments based on a Points Per Round ranking
system. Annually the Adult/Senior Competition Committee shall
USTA REGULATIONS X.F. (Adult, Senior and Family National Rankings) 195

determine the ranking points that shall be assigned to each round
in each tournament and for participating in each tournament. This
information shall be published on the USTA website.
b. Relative weights of National Ranking Tournaments.
i. USTA National Intersectional Team Events. Annually the
Adult/Senior Competition Committee shall determine the
points for winning matches in the USTA National
Intersectional Team Events.
ii. Relative weights of other National Ranking Tournaments.
The relative ranking weights of other tournaments are listed
in Table 21.
Table 21
Relative Ranking Weights of Other National Ranking Tournaments
Relative
Tournament Type Ranking Weight
Category I USTA National Championship 10
Super Category II USTA Tournaments 5
Category II USTA Tournaments 4
Sectional Championships 2
Local Tournaments 1
c. Treatment of byes, withdrawals, walkovers, disqualifications,
defaults, and retirements.
i. Byes. A player who advances because of a bye does not
receive ranking points for advancing.
ii. Withdrawals. A player who advances because of a
withdrawal shall receive ranking points for advancing.
iii. Walkovers. A player who advances because of a walkover
shall receive ranking points for advancing.
iv. Disqualification. A player who advances because of a
disqualification shall receive ranking points for advancing.
v. Defaults. A player who advances because of a default shall
receive ranking points for advancing.
vi. Retirements. A player who advances because of the opponent’s
retirement shall receive ranking points for advancing.
d. Breaking ranking ties. If players or teams receive the same number
of ranking points, ties shall be broken using the following steps in
the order listed. As many ties as possible shall be broken before
using the next step:
• Most points earned in Category I USTA National Championships;
• Most points earned in Super Category II Tournaments and
Category II USTA Tournaments; and
• Most points earned in any other National Ranking
Tournament.
196 USTA REGULATIONS X.F. (Adult, Senior and Family National Rankings)

7. Calculating rankings in Adult and Senior Divisions.
a. Singles rankings. Subject to the limitations set forth in USTA
Regulation X.F.7.d. below, Adult and Senior singles rankings shall
be based on the total ranking points received during a calendar
year as follows:
• Men’s Divisions: total ranking points from up to five
tournaments in which the player received the most ranking
points.
• Women’s Divisions: total ranking points from up to four
tournaments in which the player received the most ranking
points.
b. Team doubles rankings. Subject to the limitations set forth in USTA
Regulation X.F.7.d. below, Adult and Senior team ranking doubles
in men’s and women’s divisions shall be based on the total ranking
points received during a calendar year from up to four tournaments
in which the team received the most ranking points.
c. Individual doubles rankings. Subject to the limitations set forth in
USTA Regulation X.F.7.d. below, Adult and Senior individual
doubles rankings shall be based on the total ranking points
received during a calendar year as follows:
• Men’s Divisions: total ranking points from up to five National
Ranking Tournaments in which the player received the most
ranking points.
• Women’s Divisions: total ranking points from up to four
National Ranking Tournaments in which the player received
the most ranking points.
FAC Comment X.F-1: There are no rankings in the Adult or Senior Mixed
Doubles Divisions.
d. Limitations.
• Players and teams must meet the minimum tournament
participation requirements listed in Table 22 to be ranked.
• Ranking points earned at no more than two Sectional
Championships shall be counted for a National ranking.
• Ranking points earned in at least one Category I USTA
Championship shall be included among the National Ranking
Tournaments that count for National ranking.
• Only those players or teams who receive at least 50 ranking
points shall be ranked.
8. Calculating rankings in Family Divisions. Each player or team must play
in one Category I USTA National Championship in order to receive a
National ranking (see Table 22). Family rankings shall be based on the
total ranking points received during a calendar year from the four
National Ranking Tournaments in which the player or team received the
most ranking points, except that:
• Ranking points earned at no more than two Sectional
Championships shall be counted for a National ranking.
USTA REGULATIONS X.F. (Adult, Senior and Family National Rankings) 197

Adult & Senior
Family
Division
Men’s 30-90 Singles,
Team Doubles, and
Individual Doubles
Women’s 30-90 Singles,
Team Doubles, and
Individual Doubles
TABLE 22
Adult, Senior, and Family Minimum Tournament
Participation Requirements for National Ranking
All Family Divisions:
Father-Son, Father-Daughter,
Mother-Son, Mother-Daughter,
Husband-Wife,
Grandfather-Grandson
Minimum Tournament Participation Requirements
One Category I USTA National Championship, including the
qualifier
One Category I USTA National Championship, including the
qualifier
• Ranking points earned in at least one Category I USTA National
Championship shall be included among the four National Ranking
Tournaments that count for National ranking.
G. Matches that Count in More than One Ranking Division or Category
Matches that count in more than one ranking division or category.
1. Results from tournaments that count for Adult National Open and
Professional/Adult National Open rankings. Results from all of the
tournaments that count for Adult National Open ranking may also count
for Professional/Adult National Open rankings.
2. Results from the NCAA Division I National Tournaments. Results from
the following NCAA Division I National Tournaments shall be considered
in both the Adult National Open and Professional/Adult National Open
ranking categories and the Men’s and Women’s Collegiate - NCAA
Division I ranking categories described in USTA Regulation XII.D.:
• ITA All-American Championships;
• ITA National Indoor Championships; and
• NCAA Division I National Championships.
3. Results from USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 National Championships. Results
from the USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 National Championships shall be
considered in both the Adult National Open and Professional/Adult
National Open ranking categories and the Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Divisions.
H. National Adult/Senior and Family Ranking Committees
1. USTA President shall establish National ranking committees. The USTA
President shall establish National ranking committees under the
Adult/Senior Competition Committee to rank the categories and divisions
that are required to be ranked under USTA Regulation X.B.3.-5. The
USTA President may appoint an Adult/Senior and Family Ranking
Coordinator to coordinate all National rankings in these divisions and
categories. Subject to the approval of the USTA President, vacancies in
the Adult/Senior and Family Ranking Coordinator position or on the
ranking committees may be filled by the chairperson of the Adult/Senior
Competition Committee. If the chairperson is unable to fill the vacancy,
198 USTA REGULATIONS X.G. (Matches that Count in More than One…)

the Adult/Senior and Family Ranking Coordinator, subject to the approval
of the USTA President, shall fill the vacancy.
2. Committee size. Each ranking committee shall have at least two and no
more than five members inclusive of its chairperson. If a ranking
committee has an even number of members, the Junior Ranking
Coordinator may act as an additional member of the committee.
3. Tentative rankings. This is the first ranking determined by a ranking
committee. The tentative rankings shall be made available to the tentative
ranked players by January 15 of each year. These tentative rankings have
no official standing until certified by the Adult/Senior and Family Ranking
Review Board.
4. Corrections and appeals must be received no later than February 5. Any
corrections to a player’s record or any appeal to the tentative rankings
must be received by the chairperson of the Adult/Senior and Family
Ranking Review Board no later than February 5 of each year.
I. Adult/Senior and Family National Ranking Review Board
1. Composition. The Adult/Senior and Family National Ranking Review
Board shall consist of a chairperson and two to four individual ranking
committee members all of whom shall be appointed by the USTA
President. If an appeal comes before the Adult/Senior and Family
National Review Board in a division or category in which its chairperson
is a member, the chairperson may not consider that appeal.
2. Meetings. The Adult/Senior and Family National Ranking Review Board
shall meet to finalize the tentative rankings in the Adult/Senior and Family
Divisions. Meetings may be held by telephone conference call or other
communication equipment that allows all persons participating to hear
each other.
3. USTA staff shall provide relevant data. The USTA staff shall provide all
relevant data to the Adult/Senior and Family National Ranking Review
Board.
4. Final rankings issued by March 1. These are the singles, doubles, and
mixed doubles rankings in all Adult, Senior, and Family Divisions that
have been certified as official USTA rankings by the Adult/Senior and
Family Ranking Review Board and shall be subsequently published. The
Adult/Senior and Family National Ranking Review Board shall issue the
final rankings by March 1.
J. Confidentiality of Ranking Information.
Members of the ranking committees and the Adult/Senior and Family National
Ranking Review Board shall not disclose any results of their deliberations or
any other information concerning the rankings before their release by the
USTA.
USTA REGULATIONS X.J. (Confidentiality of Ranking Information) 199

XI. PROFESSIONAL RANKINGS
A. Men’s Division
Eligible players (see USTA Regulation X.C.) shall be ranked in the Professional
Men’s singles and doubles divisions in the order in which their names appear
on the year-end ATP ranking list.
B. Women’s Division
Eligible players (see USTA Regulation X.C.) shall be ranked in the Professional
Women’s singles and doubles divisions in the order in which their names
appear on the year-end WTA ranking list.
C. Eligibility for National Ranking.
Only the the following categories of persons are eligible to receive a National
ranking:
1. U.S. Citizens. Citizens of the United States.
2. Certain aliens.
• Permanent resident aliens. Permanent resident aliens of the United
States.
• Diplomats. Aliens who have resided in the United States
continuously for more than one year and who are members of
families of persons in the diplomatic or consular corps.
• Aliens with Refugee Status. Aliens who have been granted Refugee
Status.
• Aliens with Asylee Status. Aliens who have been granted Asylee
Status.
• Aliens with Temporary Protected Status. Aliens who have been
granted Temporary Protected Status.
• Aliens with Adjustment Status. Aliens whose I-485 (Application to
Register Permanent Resident or Adjust Status) has been accepted
for filing.
• British Columbians. Canadian citizens and landed Canadian
immigrants who reside in British Columbia.
D. Review
Professional rankings are not subject to review or appeal.
200 USTA REGULATIONS XI.A. (Men’s Division)

XII. COLLEGIATE AND SCHOLASTIC TOURNAMENTS
AND COLLEGIATE RANKINGS
A. A Method for Making the Draw
1. Separating players from same schools. When a scholastic or
collegiate draw involves players from the same school or university,
such entries shall be placed in separate halves or quarters, as evenly as
possible, depending upon the number of entries from that school or
university.
2. Distribution of byes. Byes shall be distributed among the seeded players
in the order of their seeding. If the number of byes exceeds the number
of seeded players and if less than one player for each four lines on the
draw sheet has been seeded, then the byes shall be placed as though one
player for each four lines on the draw sheet had been seeded. Any
remaining byes shall be placed as provided in the USTA Regulations.
B. Scoring
1. Championship rounds.
a. Main draw. Two points for each match won.
b. Third-place play-off. One-half point for play-off for third and fourth
place if feed-in is used through the quarterfinal round; but, no
points for play-off for third and fourth place if feed-in through
quarterfinals is not used.
c. Byes. If a player receives a bye in the first round, 4 points are given
only if the second-round match is won.
d. Defaults. A default shall always be considered as a match won and
points awarded accordingly.
2. Consolation rounds with feed-in through the quarters.
a. Matches played. One point for each match won.
b. Byes. If player receives a first-round bye, one point is given if the
second-round match is won.
c. Defaults. In all instances a default shall be considered as a match
won and points awarded accordingly.
3. Consolation rounds with no feed-in through quarters. One-quarter point
for loser of finals and one-half point for winner of finals.
4. Ties. In the event of a tie, co-titles shall be awarded.
C. Eligibility for National Ranking.
Only the the following categories of persons are eligible to receive a National
ranking:
1. U.S. Citizens. Citizens of the United States.
2. Certain aliens.
• Permanent resident aliens. Permanent resident aliens of the United
States.
• Diplomats. Aliens who have resided in the United States
continuously for more than one year and who are members of
families of persons in the diplomatic or consular corps.
• Aliens with Refugee Status. Aliens who have been granted Refugee
Status.
• Aliens with Asylee Status. Aliens who have been granted Asylee
Status.
USTA REGULATIONS XII. C. (Eligibility for National Ranking) 201

• Aliens with Temporary Protected Status. Aliens who have been
granted Temporary Protected Status.
• Aliens with Adjustment Status. Aliens whose I-485 (Application to
Register Permanent Resident or Adjust Status) has been accepted
for filing.
• British Columbians. Canadian citizens and landed Canadian
immigrants who reside in British Columbia.
D. Collegiate Rankings
Eligible players shall be ranked in the following Collegiate Men’s and Women’s
singles and team doubles divisions in the order in which their names appear
on the academic year-end ITA ranking lists.
• Men’s and Women’s Collegiate – NCAA Division I
• Men’s and Women’s Collegiate – NCAA Division II
• Men’s and Women’s Collegiate – NCAA Division III
• Men’s and Women’s Collegiate – NAIA (National Association of
Intercollegiate Athletics)
• Men’s and Women’s Collegiate – NJCAA (National Junior College
Athletic Association)
The Collegiate ranking period shall be June 1 to May 31.
Results from the following NCAA Division I National Tournaments shall be
considered in both the Men’s and Women’s Collegiate—NCAA Division I
ranking categories and the Adult National Open and the Professional/Adult
National Open ranking categories described in USTA Regulations X.B.1. and
X.B.2.:
• ITA All-American Championships
• ITA National Indoor Championships
• NCAA Division I National Championships
Collegiate rankings are not subject to review or appeal.
202 USTA REGULATIONS XII.D. (Collegiate Rankings)

XIII. WHEELCHAIR NATIONAL TOURNAMENTS AND RANKINGS
A. Wheelchair National Tournament Regulations
1. Overview of Wheelchair National Tournament System. Annually the USTA
shall publish the National Wheelchair Tournament Schedule, which shall
include the following tournaments:
a. Category I USTA Wheelchair National Championships. The USTA
shall sanction at least one Category I USTA Wheelchair National
Championship in each of the following divisions:
• Men’s, Women’s, and Quad Open
• Men’s, Women’s, and Quad A
• Men’s and Women’s B
• Men’s C
• Junior Open/A (18 & Under)
• Senior Open/A (40 & Over) Doubles
• Senior B/C (40 & Over) Doubles
These tournaments may be held on hard, clay, or indoor
surfaces.
b. Category II USTA Wheelchair Tournaments. Category II USTA
Wheelchair Tournaments are tournaments sanctioned by Sectional
Associations that are selected by the Wheelchair Tennis Committee
and the USTA Competitive Play Department for inclusion on the
National Wheelchair Tournament Schedule. The Wheelchair Tennis
Committee, in consultation with the USTA Competitive Play
Department, shall determine the selection criteria. These
tournaments shall comply with USTA Regulations XIII.A.3.a-e.,
g., and h., unless the tournament has been sanctioned by the ITF,
in which case it shall be played under the ITF Regulations for
Wheelchair Tennis.
At least one Category II USTA Wheelchair Tournament shall be
selected for the National Wheelchair Tournament Schedule in each
of the divisions listed in USTA Regulation XIII.A.1.a.
c. ITF wheelchair tournaments. The USTA Competitive Play Department
shall determine criteria for selecting ITF wheelchair tournaments to
be placed on the National Wheelchair Tournament Schedule.
FAC Comment XIII.A-1: All of the Category I USTA Wheelchair National
Championships and the Category II USTA Wheelchair Tournaments in the
Men’s Open, Women’s Open, and Quad Open Divisions are also sanctioned
by the ITF and are played under the ITF Regulations for Wheelchair Tennis.
2. National Seeding Lists. At least monthly, the USTA shall publish National
Seeding Lists in each Wheelchair Division. The Wheelchair Tennis
Committee shall determine the criteria for inclusion on the National
Seeding Lists.
FAC Comment XIII.A-2: The Wheelchair Tennis Committee has established
the following criteria for inclusion on the National Seeding Lists:
• Players must have a current USTA membership; and
• Players must have played in at least two tournaments and had
USTA REGULATIONS XIII.A. (Wheelchair National Tournament Regulations) 203

at least one win in the 12-month period preceding the
publication of the List.
3. Tournament regulations for Category I USTA Wheelchair National
Championships. All Category I USTA Wheelchair National Championships
that are sanctioned by the ITF shall be played under ITF wheelchair
tournament regulations and shall follow the requirements listed below
when they are not inconsistent with ITF Regulations for Wheelchair
Tennis. Any Category I USTA National Championship that is not
sanctioned by the ITF shall have the following requirements.
a. Citizenship not required. Category I USTA Wheelchair National
Championships shall be open to citizens and non-citizens.
b. Singles and doubles draws. Each Category I USTA National
Wheelchair Championship shall be required to offer singles and
doubles in the divisions for which the tournament has been
sanctioned, except for Category I USTA Wheelchair National
Championships in the Senior Open/A (40 & Over) Doubles and
Senior B/C (40 & Over) Doubles Divisions, which are only required
to hold doubles.
i. Draw sizes. Draw sizes shall be determined by the
Tournament Committee. Selection for draws with limited
draw sizes shall be done as set forth in USTA Regulation
I.H.4., except that the Tournament Committee has discretion
to conduct a qualifying draw. Wild cards may not be
awarded.
ii. Singles consolation draw, compass draw, or round robin
required. Category I USTA Wheelchair National
Championships shall include consolation draws in singles.
The Wheelchair Tennis Committee shall specify the
consolation format that shall be used.
FAC Comment XIII.A-3: The Wheelchair Tennis Committee has authorized
the use of Feed-In Championship, Modified Feed-In Championship, First
Match Losers Consolation, and First Round Losers Consolation at
Category I USTA National Wheelchair Championships.
iii. Playoff for third place. The Tournament Committee shall
determine whether a playoff for third place shall be offered
and shall publish the information on the website by the time
it is prepared to receive entries. If the match is offered,
players must play the match unless failure to do so is
attributable to injury, illness, or personal emergency.
For the purpose of determining scheduling in compliance
with USTA Regulation XIII.A.3.g.ii. below, the playoff
matches are considered part of the main draw.
c. Seeding. The seeding method shall be determined by the
Tournament Committee and shall be either the All-Factors Method
of seeding described in USTA Regulation II.A.4.a. or the
204 USTA REGULATIONS XIII.A. (Wheelchair National Tournament Regulations)

Computerized List Method described in USTA Regulation II.A.4.b.
If the Computerized List Method of seeding is used, the
Tournament Committee shall use the most recently published
National Seeding List to order the seeds. However, when a
tournament in an Open Division receives entries from players or
teams who have a ranking in the top 75 on the most recently
published ITF ranking list, the players or teams shall be considered
for seeding.
d. Match formats. The Wheelchair Tennis Committee shall determine
the match formats to be used in Category I USTA Wheelchair
National Championships. These match formats shall be published.
FAC Comment XIII.A-4: The Wheelchair Tennis Committee has authorized
the use of the following match formats in Category I USTA National
Championships and Category II USTA Tournaments:
• The best of three tiebreak sets; or
• The best of three tiebreak sets with a 10-Point Match Tiebreak
in lieu of a 3rd set.
Note: Match formats of tournaments sanctioned by the ITF are controlled
by the ITF Regulations for Wheelchair Tennis.
e. No-ad scoring may be used. Category I USTA Wheelchair National
Championships may use no-ad scoring.
f. Playing semifinals, finals, and playoffs for third place on
sanctioned surface. The semifinal, final, and third place playoff
matches shall be played on the surface on which the tournament
has been sanctioned unless more than 24 hours of inclement
weather or other cause prevents these matches from being played
on the sanctioned surface. For purposes of this regulation, the
designation “hard courts” includes all types of hard courts and the
designation “clay courts” includes all types of clay courts.
g. Scheduling.
i. Limit on number of matches per day. The scheduling
guidelines in USTA Regulation II.D.12. and Table 7 are
mandatory for all Category I USTA Wheelchair National
Championships, except that they shall not apply to
tournaments that are required to use the ITF Regulations for
Wheelchair Tennis.
ii. Order of play. Rounds in the main draw should take
precedence over consolation rounds, except that a player may
be required to play one consolation singles match before the
main draw doubles match. For example, the second
consolation singles of the day for any player should be
scheduled after the main draw doubles each day.
h. Shortening tournaments. In the event of inclement weather, health
concerns, or safety concerns, the Referee may use a match format
not previously authorized for use at a Category I USTA Wheelchair
National Championship by the Wheelchair Tennis Committee. All
matches in each round shall be played with the same match format.
USTA REGULATIONS XIII.A. (Wheelchair National Tournament Regulations) 205

Note, however, the shortening of tournaments sanctioned by the ITF
are controlled by the ITF Regulations for Wheelchair Tennis.
i. Practice courts. One practice court for each 60 players in the
tournament shall be available on the day before the start of the
tournament and on each day during the tournament; however, in
no event shall more than two practice courts be required.
B. Wheelchair National Rankings
1. Divisions ranked. The USTA shall issue rankings in the following
divisions:
• Men’s, Women’s, and Quad Open
• Men’s Women’s, and Quad A
• Men’s and Women’s B
• Men’s C
• Junior Open/A (18 & Under)
• Senior Open/A (40 & Over)
• Senior Open/A (40 & Over) Doubles
• Senior B/C (40 & Over) Doubles
2. Eligibility for National ranking. Only the following categories of persons
are eligible to receive a National ranking:
a. U.S. Citizens. Citizens of the United States.
b. Certain aliens.
• Permanent resident aliens. Permanent resident aliens of the
United States.
• Diplomats. Aliens who have resided in the United States
continuously for more than one year and who are members
of families of persons in the diplomatic or consular corps.
• Aliens with Refugee Status. Aliens who have been granted
Refugee Status.
• Aliens with Asylee Status. Aliens who have been granted
Asylee Status.
• Aliens with Temporary Protected Status. Aliens who have
been granted Temporary Protected Status.
• Aliens with Adjustment Status. Aliens whose I-485
(Application to Register Permanent Resident or Adjust
Status) has been accepted for filing.
• British Columbians. Canadian citizens and landed Canadian
immigrants who reside in British Columbia.
FAC Comment XIII.B-1: Documents commonly used to support a particular
alien status include a permanent resident alien card (green card), Form I-94,
and a receipt confirming filing of the I-485.
3. Wheelchair ranking period. The Wheelchair ranking period for all players
and teams shall be January 1 through December 31.
4. National Ranking Tournaments and Matches.
a. National Ranking Tournaments. The following tournaments shall
be known as National Ranking Tournaments and only results from
these tournaments played during the Wheelchair ranking period
shall be considered for Wheelchair National rankings:
206 USTA REGULATIONS XIII.B. (Wheelchair National Rankings)

• Category I USTA National Wheelchair Championships
• Category II USTA Wheelchair Tournaments
• Sectional Ranking Tournaments (as defined in USTA
Regulation XIII.B.5.)
• ITF tournaments listed on the National Wheelchair
Tournament Schedule that are not Category I USTA National
Wheelchair Championships, Category II USTA Wheelchair
Tournaments, or Sectional Ranking Tournaments
b. National Ranking Matches. National Ranking Matches are matches
in ITF tournaments not listed on the National Wheelchair
Tournament Schedule between players who meet the eligibility
requirements of USTA Regulation XIII.B.2. that are reported to the
USTA Competitive Play Department. These matches shall be
considered for ranking.
FAC Comment XIII.B-2: An example of a National Ranking Match is a match
played in the US Open Wheelchair Championships (NY). Players should report
results of matches in ITF tournaments not listed on the National Wheelchair
Tournament Schedule to the USTA Competitive Play Department, 70 West Red
Oak Lane, White Plains, NY 10604.
Singles
Doubles
TABLE 23
Minimum Participation Requirements for Wheelchair National Ranking
Division
Men’s Open
Men’s A, B, and C
Women’s Open
Women’s A
Quad Open and Quad A
Women’s B
Junior Open/A (18 & Under)
Men’s Open
Men’s A, B , and C
Women’s Open
Women’s A
Quad Open and Quad A
Women’s B
Junior Open/A (18 & Under)
Senior Open/A (40 & Over)
Senior B/C (40 & Over)
Minimum Tournament Requirements*
4 tournaments, 2 of which must be Category I USTA Wheelchair
National Championships or Category II USTA Wheelchair
Tournaments
3 tournaments, 1 of which must be a Category I USTA
Wheelchair National Championship or a Category II USTA
Wheelchair Tournament
2 tournaments, 1 of which must be a Category I USTA
Wheelchair National Championship or a Category II USTA
Wheelchair Tournament
3 tournaments, 2 of which must be Category I USTA Wheelchair
National Championships or Category II USTA Wheelchair
Tournaments
2 tournaments, 1 of which must be a Category I USTA
Wheelchair National Championship or a Category II USTA
Wheelchair Tournament
* Tournaments must be played in the applicable division. For example, only Open Division
tournaments count toward meeting the minimum tournament participation requirements to receive
an Open ranking. Players must play at least one point in a match in a tournament to receive credit for
participation.
USTA REGULATIONS XIII.B. (Wheelchair National Rankings) 207

Table 24
Relative Ranking Weights for Wheelchair Tournaments
Tournament or Match Considered for Ranking Draw
Relative
Weight
• Category I USTA Wheelchair National Main Draw 75
Championships; Consolation 70
and Qualifier 75
• ITF tournaments on the National Wheelchair
Tournament Schedule that are neither Category II
USTA Wheelchair Tournaments nor Sectional
Ranking Tournaments.*
*The Florida Open is an example of an ITF tournament that
receives the greatest weight.
Category II USTA Wheelchair Tournaments Main Draw 60
Consolation 55
Qualifier 60
Sectional Ranking Tournaments Main Draw 50
National Ranking Matches Consolation 45
Qualifier 50
5. Sectional Ranking Tournaments. Sectional Ranking Tournaments are
Wheelchair tournaments sanctioned by the Sectional or District
Associations that have not been selected to be Category II USTA
Wheelchair Tournaments in the following divisions:
• Men’s, Women’s, and Quad Open
• Men’s, Women’s, and Quad A
• Men’s and Women’s B
• Men’s C
• Junior Open/A (18 & Under)
• Senior Open/A (40 & Over) Doubles
• Senior B/C (40 & Over) Doubles
6. Minimum ranking requirements. All singles players and doubles teams
meeting the following participation and win requirements shall be ranked
in singles or doubles.
a. Minimum tournament participation requirements. Minimum
tournament participation requirements for a Wheelchair National
ranking in singles or doubles are listed in Table 23.
b. One win required. Singles players and doubles teams must have at
least one win in a National Ranking Tournament to be considered
for ranking.
7. Relative ranking weights. The relative ranking weights are listed in
Table 24.
8. Matches may count in only one division. No match may count for
ranking in more than one division. If divisions are combined and a player
is placed in a higher division, the player shall receive participation credit
for the division in which the player played.
208 USTA REGULATIONS XIII.B. (Wheelchair National Rankings)

FAC Comment XIII.B.2: If the Men’s Wheelchair B and C Divisions are
combined in a tournament, the tournament shall be considered a B Division
event. Wins and losses shall count toward a B Division ranking only and the
player shall receive participation credit for the B Division only.
9. Treatment of defaults, withdrawals, walkovers, and retirements. The
treatment of defaults, withdrawals, walkovers, and retirements shall be
as set forth in USTA Regulation VIII.C.1.a.-c.
10. Corrections. Wheelchair singles and doubles player records shall be
published on the Internet on an ongoing basis. Wheelchair players
should check their records and submit verifiable additions and
corrections to the Wheelchair Ranking Coordinator. Each player who has
competed against another USTA player in an ITF-sanctioned tournament
shall report the verifiable results to the Wheelchair Ranking Coordinator.
Wheelchair rankings are done by computer and are not subject to
positional protest or appeal.
C. Wheelchair National Ranking Committees
1. USTA President shall establish National ranking committees. The USTA
President shall establish National ranking committees under the
Wheelchair Tennis Committee to rank the divisions that are required to
be ranked under USTA Regulation XIII.B.1. The USTA President may
appoint a Wheelchair Ranking Coordinator to coordinate all National
rankings in these divisions. Subject to the approval of the USTA
President, vacancies in the Wheelchair Ranking Coordinator position or
on the ranking committees may be filled by the chairperson of the
Wheelchair Tennis Committee. If the chairperson is unable to fill the
vacancy, the Wheelchair Ranking Coordinator, subject to the approval of
the USTA President, shall fill the vacancy.
2. Committee size. Each ranking committee shall have at least two and no
more than five members inclusive of its chairperson. If a ranking
committee has an even number of members, the Wheelchair Ranking
Coordinator may act as an additional member of the committee.
3. Confidentiality of ranking information. Members of the ranking
committees shall not disclose any results of their deliberations or any
other information concerning the rankings before their release by the
USTA.
USTA REGULATIONS XIII.C. (Wheelchair National Ranking Committees) 209

XIV. MEDALS AND PRIZES
A. Gold, Silver, and Bronze Balls
Gold balls shall be awarded to the winners, silver balls to the runners-up, and
bronze balls to the third-place playoff winners in:
1. USTA National Championships in Junior Divisions.
2. All Category I Adult, Senior, and Family National Championships listed
in USTA Regulations X.A.1.a. and b.
3. Category I USTA Wheelchair National Championships, except that
bronze balls shall be awarded at a tournament only if the tournament
website states that a third-place payoff will be held.
B. Gold Davis Cup Insignia
Gold Davis Cup insignia shall be awarded to the captain and each member of
a United States Davis Cup Team nominated to represent the United States in
the Final Round and to the captain and each nominated member of the
opposing team.
C. Gold Fed Cup Charm
A gold Fed Cup charm shall be awarded to the captain and each member of a
United States Fed Cup Team.
D. Restrictions on Trophy and Award Presentations
It is the policy of the USTA not to accept trophies or awards bearing the name
of a commercial or business concern and not to permit the presentation of
any such trophy or award at USTA National Championships.
210 USTA REGULATIONS XIV.A. (Gold, Silver, and Bronze Balls)

XV. USTA LEAGUE
A. Description
The USTA League shall consist of team competition for men and women with
advancement from local competition to Sectional and National competition to
determine annually a championship team in each approved level of competition.
B. Rating System
The official system used to determine the levels of competition shall be a rating
system approved by the Board.
C. Eligibility
Any individual who competes in a USTA League must be a current member of
the USTA in good standing and be domiciled within the boundaries of a USTA
Sectional Association or participate through a USTA Direct Member Club.
1. Adult Leagues. Any individual competing in the adult league shall have
reached the age of 18 years before or during the calendar year in which
the player plays the player’s first local league match.
2. Senior Leagues. Any individual competing in the senior league shall
have reached the age of 50 years before or during the calendar year in
which the player plays the player’s first local league match.
3. Super Senior Leagues. Any individual competing in a super senior
league shall have reached the age of 60 years before or during the
calender year in which the player plays the first local league match.
D. Authority for Committee to Adopt USTA League Regulations
The USTA League shall be conducted in accordance with the USTA League
Regulations, which shall include grievance procedures for league matters, as
adopted and amended by a committee appointed by the USTA President and in
accordance with procedures determined and approved by the Board.
USTA REGULATIONS XV.D. (Authority for Committee to Adopt League…) 211

XVI. USTA JR. TEAM TENNIS
A. Description
The USTA Jr. Team Tennis program shall consist of coed team competition
for boys and girls with advancement from local competition to District,
Sectional, and National competition to determine annually a championship
team at each level.
B. Eligibility
Any individual who competes in the USTA Jr. Team Tennis program shall be a
current member of the USTA. Any individual competing in USTA Jr. Team
Tennis shall be 18 years of age or under.
C. Authority for Committee to Adopt USTA Jr. Team Tennis Regulations
The USTA Jr. Team Tennis program shall be conducted in accordance with
the USTA Jr. Team Tennis Regulations that include grievance procedures as
adopted and amended by a committee appointed by the USTA President and
in accordance with procedures determined and approved by the Board.
FAC Comment XVI.C-1: USTA Jr. Team Tennis Regulations authorize play
on smaller courts that are either 36 feet long or 60 feet long. They also
authorize play with different rackets and balls. Figure 9 shows the
dimensions of a 36-foot court and Figure 10 shows the dimensions of a
60-foot court. See the USTA Jr. Team Tennis Regulations for specifics.
212 USTA REGULATIONS XVI.A. (Description)

XVII. SANCTIONING
A. General Information
1. Meaning of sanctioning. The USTA sanctioning process is intended to aid
the public, the player, and the tennis promoter. It helps to assure
uniformity of the rules of play; it permits the ranking of players on a basis
of an accepted standard; it encourages an orderly schedule of
tournaments that accommodates the reasonable needs of players,
promoters, and sponsors; and it fosters the aim of providing the public
with tennis of high caliber and ethical standards.
Sanctioning indicates that the tournament:
• Is an official USTA-approved tournament;
• Agrees to follow the ITF Rules of Tennis;
• Agrees to follow USTA Regulations; and
• Results will be considered by the applicable USTA National,
Sectional, District, or local ranking committees if the applicable
ranking regulations authorize the results to be considered.
2. Definition of tournament. Tournament refers to all forms of competition,
including, but not limited to, tournaments, championships, team
championships, matches, exhibitions, events, intersectionals,
international competitions, and zonals. Tournaments are classified as
amateur, professional, or open.
3. Applicant must be Organization Member. Only an Organization Member
may apply for a sanction to hold a tournament. The person submitting
the application must be authorized to do so by the Organization Member.
4. Discrimination not allowed. Tournament sanctions shall be awarded and
sanctioned tournaments shall be conducted without regard to race,
creed, color, national origin, or sexual orientation. By submitting an
application to sanction a tournament, the applicant agrees that it will not
discriminate against any participant because of the participant’s race,
creed, color, national origin, or sexual orientation, except that entries into
USTA Junior National Championships are limited to US citizens and
certain aliens (see USTA Regulation IX.A.2.) and except that Sectional
Associations, District Associations, and subdivisions of Sectional
Associations may limit entry in some tournaments to U.S. citizens and
certain aliens residing in their territory. A violation of this provision may
result in a refusal to issue any further sanctions to the applicant.
5. Submission of application. Most applications must be submitted online.
The entity that is responsible for approving the sanction (USTA Board,
appropriate USTA competition committee, Sectional Association, District
Association, or subdivision of a Sectional Association) may require the
applicant to submit information in addition to information submitted in
the online application. When online application is not available, the
applicant shall submit the sanction application to the entity that is
responsible for approving the application. All Organization Members that
submit an application agree to run tournaments pursuant to USTA
Regulations.
FAC Comment XVII.A-1: Applications for sanctions for tournaments that are
approved by Sectional Associations, District Associations, and subdivisions of
USTA REGULATIONS XVII.A. (General Information) 213

Sectional Associations are submitted online. Applications for USTA Junior
National Championships, USTA Regional Tournaments, and USTA International
Tournaments are submitted to the Junior Competition Committee through an
online bid process. Applications for Category I USTA Adult, Senior, and Family
USTA National Championships are submitted to the Adult/Senior Competition
Committee through an online process or on an offer and contract form.
Applications for Category I USTA Wheelchair National Championships are
submitted to the Wheelchair Tennis Committee through an online process or
on an offer and contract form.
6. Payment of sanction fee. The sanction fee for a tournament for which
online application is available is generally paid electronically to the USTA.
Once the sanction is approved, the USTA directs the fee to the proper
recipient. In all other cases the sanction fee is paid to the appropriate
competition committee or the Sectional Association, District Association,
or subdivision of a Sectional Association that approves the sanction.
7. Issuance of sanction. When a Sectional Association, a District
Association, or subdivision of a Sectional Association issues a sanction,
the entity issuing the sanction shall send notice of approval of the
sanction to the USTA Legal Department.
8. Use of USTA name in reference to tournament. The Organization Member
that holds the sanction and sponsors a USTA-sanctioned tournament
may use the name, initials, and logo of the USTA to the extent
determined by the USTA .
9. Use of certified officials recommended in sanctioned tournaments. The
USTA recommends that every on-court official, Referee, Roving Umpire,
and Chief Umpire be certified in accordance with USTA Regulation VII.
in the appropriate classification.
10. USTA does not assume financial responsibility for tournaments. The
USTA does not assume financial responsibility for any tournament. Any
loss incurred shall be the sole responsibility of the sanction holder.
11. Sanction will not be issued if prior sanction fee is delinquent. A sanction
shall not be approved if the applicant, promoter, Organization Member,
or other person or entity directly or indirectly owning or controlling the
tournament is delinquent in the payment of any sanction fee charged for
a sanction previously applied for and issued, unless the delinquent
sanction fee is paid or the USTA Committee, Sectional Association,
District Association, or subdivision of a Sectional Association that
approved the sanction waives the delinquency.
12. Specification in title of whether tournament is open to professionals, an
invitational, or a closed tournament. The titles of junior tournaments do
not need to include the word amateur because, with the exceptions of the
USTA National Championships, which are open to professionals (see
USTA Regulation IX.A.9.b.), only amateurs may play in junior
tournaments. USTA tournaments other than junior tournaments should
specify in the title whether the tournament is open to amateurs only,
professionals only, or both. Absence of any designation in the title means
that the tournament is open to both amateurs and professionals,
214 USTA REGULATIONS XVII.A. (General Information)

although for clarity, the word “Open” should be included when
applicable. The word “Invitational” in the title means that tournament
entry is by invitation only. The word “Closed” in the title means that
tournament entry is restricted to a specific geographic area. Absence of
any designation in the title usually means that the tournament is not an
invitational and is open to players from all areas.
13. Definition of gross revenues. For purposes of USTA Regulation XVII.,
gross revenues means all monies received for:
• Entry fees;
• Admissions to the grounds, courts, and stands after deduction of
governmental and municipal taxes;
• Sales of advertising less direct expenses; and
• Contributions from whatever sources, including sponsors.
For junior tournaments, the entry fees, donations, and contributions
shall not be counted in the gross revenues test.
14. Tournament may lose sanction if it does not comply with USTA
Regulation XVII. and the terms of the sanction. The failure of a
tournament to comply with any requirement of USTA Regulation XVII.
or any other condition imposed by the body issuing the sanction may
result in forfeiture of the sanction.
B. USTA League and USTA Jr. Team Tennis Approved Without Necessity of
Sanction
USTA League and USTA Jr. Team Tennis are hereby approved by the USTA
without any sanction application.
C. Sectional and District Tournaments and Leagues other than USTA League
and USTA Jr. Team Tennis
1. Sanction approval. Sectional Associations approve the sanctions for:
• Tournaments (See definition in USTA Regulation XVII.A.2.) that
are not approved by USTA Regulation XVII.B. or subject to the bid
process of USTA Regulations XVII.D.-E.;
• Leagues (other than USTA Leagues and USTA Jr. Team Tennis) if
the league wants the matches played during the season to count
for ranking;
• Intra-Organization Member Tournaments in which the Organization
Member wants the matches to count for ranking; and
• Intercollegiate and interscholastic tournaments. These
tournaments do not have to be sanctioned but may be sanctioned
with or without a sanction fee being charged.
A Sectional Association may delegate the sanction approval process to
its District Associations or subdivisions.
2. Sanction fees. A Sectional Association shall set the sanction fees, if any,
and may delegate the setting of sanction fees to its District Associations
or subdivisions.
3. Rights for sanctioned prize money tournaments over $5000. The
television, cable, satellite, internet, radio, film, and video rights for all
sanctioned prize money tournaments over $5000 shall, unless the
Sectional Association is notified otherwise by the Tournament
Committee at least 120 days before the start of the tournament or at the
time of filing of the sanction application, whichever is later, be reserved
USTA REGULATIONS XVII.C. (Sectional and District Tournaments and…) 215

y the USTA to facilitate the sale of these rights on a national or
multi-event basis. The net proceeds of the sale of these rights shall be
divided 80% to the tournament and 20% to the Sectional Association.
D. USTA National Championships, USTA Junior National Championships, USTA
Regional Tournaments, and USTA International Tournaments (other than the
US Open and those USTA National Championships that are Awarded by the
USTA Board)
1. Primary host site shall be Organization Member. The primary host site of
each USTA National Championship, USTA Junior National
Championship, USTA Regional Tournament, and USTA International
Tournament shall be an Organization Member.
2. Sectional Association must approve sanction. The appropriate
competition committee shall consider only those applications that have
the approval of the Sectional Association of the site.
3. Sanctioning process.
a. Application requirements. The applicant shall submit the
application on the USTA-approved form.
• Applicants for Category I USTA Adult, Senior, and Family
National Championships and Category I USTA Wheelchair
National Championships shall also submit a complete
description of the applicant’s facilities, proposed tournament
organization, and such other information as may be pertinent
in considering competing bids.
• Applicants for USTA Junior National Championships, USTA
Regional Tournaments, and USTA International Tournaments
may submit or be asked to submit other information in
support of their applications.
FAC Comment XVII.D-1: The online sanction application does not gather
certain information on the form. For example, it does not ask for detailed
information on the proposed site, tournament organization, amenities provided
to players, and hotels. If an online sanction application form is used, this
additional information is submitted in writing to the competition committee.
b. Application deadline. The deadline for an application submitted to
the Adult/Senior Competition Committee or the Wheelchair Tennis
Committee is August 1 of the year before the start of the
tournament. The Junior Competition Committee shall set the
application deadline for tournaments submitted to it and shall
notify the Sectional Associations and existing sanction holders of
the deadline by January 1.
FAC Comment XVII.D-2: The USTA staff is responsible for publicizing the
process for submitting applications for National tournaments and the
deadline by which applications are due. Generally, this information is
published on the USTA website, is sent to existing sanction holders, and is
sent to Sectional Associations who are asked to forward the information to
their Organization Members.
216 USTA REGULATIONS XVII.D. (USTA National Championships, USTA…)

c. Submission to appropriate competition committee. Applicants
shall submit the application to the appropriate competition
committee for consideration and approval or disapproval.
• Junior. Organization Members shall submit applications for
USTA Junior National Championships, USTA Regional
Tournaments, and USTA International Tournaments to the
Junior Competition Committee.
• Adult, Senior, and Family. Organization Members shall
submit applications for Category I USTA Adult, Senior, and
Family National Championships to the Adult/Senior
Competition Committee.
• Wheelchair. Organization Members shall submit applications
for Category I USTA Wheelchair National Championships to
the Wheelchair Tennis Committee.
d. Notice to competing applicants of their right to appear before
appropriate competition committee. The chairperson or the
chairperson’s designee shall inform all Organization Members of
competing applications and may require them to submit additional
information in order to consider the competing applications.
Representatives of all Organization Members shall be permitted to
appear in person, by proxy, or by electronic means to make
presentations to the committee in support of their applications at
all meetings in which applications are considered.
e. Approval of sanctions. The appropriate competition committee
shall review the applications and then approve or disapprove them
as soon as possible after the application deadline. Upon approval
of a sanction, the chairperson or the chairperson’s designee shall
notify the successful applicants.
f. Tournament contract. No sanction approval shall be considered
final until the Organization Member completes and returns a
tournament contract in the form approved by the appropriate
competition committee and payment of the sanction fee (see USTA
Regulation XVII.D.4.) has been received.
g. Right of USTA Board to assume responsibility for sanctioning
process. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the USTA Board may, at
its discretion, assume the responsibilities of a competition
committee to sanction a USTA National Championship or USTA
Junior National Championship.
4. Sanction fees.
a. Championship in which prize money is not offered. The sanction
fee for a USTA Junior National Championship or a USTA National
Championship in which prize money is not offered shall be $100
per national championship division, which amount is to
accompany the application.
b. Sanction fee for championship in which prize money is offered. If
prize money is offered, the sanction fee is $100 per division or 1%
of the prize money, whichever is greater. However, unless USTA
Regulation XVII.F.2. applies, the fee shall not exceed $2000.
c. USTA Regional Tournaments and USTA International Tournaments.
USTA REGULATIONS XVII.D. (USTA National Championships, USTA…) 217

The sanction fees for USTA Regional Tournaments and USTA
International Tournaments shall be $100 per tournament. The
USTA shall rebate the sanction fees to the Sectional Associations in
which the tournaments are held.
5. Tournament titles for USTA National Championships and USTA Junior
National Championships. The applicable competition committee
establishes the title for USTA National Championships and USTA Junior
National Championships under its jurisdiction. The title shall include,
where applicable, the age, sex, surface, and any other divisions of the
tournament. The initials USTA shall be used in identifying USTA National
Championships and USTA Junior National Championships, except that
the initials US only may be used in identifying the US Open.
FAC Comment XVII.D-3: The following are examples of titles for these
tournaments: USTA Girls’ 18 National Championships; USTA National
Women’s 35 Hard Court Championships; and USTA National Indoor ROHO
Gateway Classic.
6. Tournament titles for USTA Regional Tournaments and USTA
International Tournaments. The title of a USTA International Tournament
may include the initials USTA. The titles of USTA Regional Tournaments
and USTA International Tournaments are subject to the approval of the
Junior Competition Committee.
7. Television, cable, satellite, internet, radio, film, and video rights. The
USTA reserves all television, cable, satellite, internet, radio, film, and
video rights for all USTA National Championships and USTA Junior
National Championships. If the USTA relinquishes these rights and they
are subsequently sold and if no other arrangements have been mutually
agreed to before the award of the sanction, the gross proceeds shall be
divided between the USTA and the Organization Member that holds the
sanction as follows:
• The first $1000 shall belong to the Organization Member;
• The next $9000 shall be divided 50% to the Organization Member
and 50% to the USTA;
• The next $10,000, 35% to the Organization Member and 65% to
the USTA; and
• All amounts over $20,000, 25% to the Organization Member and
75% to the USTA.
E. ITF Junior Tournaments. The ITF regulations require that ITF junior
tournaments played in the United States be either organized by the USTA or
sanctioned by the USTA. The Junior Competition Committee shall be notified
of all applicants for tournaments requiring sanction approval. The process
for sanction approval shall be as set forth in USTA Regulations XVII.D.3.d.
and e.
F. US Open and Other Tournament Sanctions Awarded by USTA Board
1. Right of USTA Board to award sanctions. The USTA Board awards the
sanction for the US Open and has the right to assume the responsibility
for sanctioning USTA National Championships and USTA Junior National
218 USTA REGULATIONS XVII.E. (ITF Junior Tournaments)

Championships, as set forth in USTA Regulation XVII.D.3.g. The USTA
Board may also award the sanction for any tournament not described in
USTA Regulation XVII.
2. Sanction fees. The sanction fee for the US Open and any tournament not
described in USTA Regulation XVII. that is approved by the Board shall
be negotiated by the Sectional Association in whose territory the
tournament is held, the Organization Member that applies for the
sanction, and the USTA or its specifically designated representative. The
agreement shall not become binding on the USTA until approved by the
Board. The Sectional Association shall receive that part of the sanction
fees as shall be agreed upon by the USTA and the Sectional Association.
The division, if any, of the sanction fee shall be negotiated by the
President and Secretary-Treasurer of the USTA with the President and
Treasurer of the respective Sectional Association. The payment to the
Sectional Association shall not exceed $2000. The sanction fee for any
USTA National Championship or USTA Junior National Championship
approved by the USTA Board shall be as set forth in USTA Regulation
XVII.D.4.
3. Commercial identification for tournaments when sanction requires USTA
Board approval. If the sanction for a tournament requires the approval of
the USTA Board, no other name, such as that of a tournament sponsor,
may, without prior approval of the Board, be included in the official title.
4. Television, cable, satellite, internet, radio, film, and video rights. The
USTA reserves all television, cable, satellite, internet, radio, film, and
video rights for all tournaments when sanctions are awarded by the
USTA Board.
USTA REGULATIONS XVII.F. (US Open and Other Tournament Sanctions…) 219

XVIII. AMATEUR AND PROFESSIONAL STATUS
A. Definitions
Amateur and professional tennis players are within the jurisdiction of the USTA.
1. Amateur shall not receive pecuniary advantage because of skills as tennis
player. A tennis player is an amateur if the player does not receive and
has not received, directly or indirectly, pecuniary advantage by the
playing, teaching, demonstrating, or pursuit of the game except as
expressly permitted by the USTA.
2. Definition of professional. All other tennis players who accept the
authority of, and who are in good standing with, the USTA shall be
designated as professionals.
3. Amateur remains amateur throughout tournament. A player starting play
in a tournament as an amateur shall remain an amateur for the purposes
of that tournament.
B. Warning
Acceptance of the expenses or prizes or undertaking employment allowed by
these regulations may jeopardize the amateur’s eligibility under rules and
regulations of the amateur’s school or another amateur organization in which
the amateur is interested. Before accepting any expenses or prizes or
undertaking any tennis related employment, an amateur should consider the
eligibility rules of the amateur’s school and any other amateur organization in
which the amateur is interested.
C. Acts That Will Cause Loss of Amateur Status
1. Prize money. An amateur may not play for a money prize or any other
prohibited prize or sell a prize or transfer the right to a prize to another
person.
2. Teaching and coaching. An amateur may not teach, coach, instruct, or
demonstrate the game except as authorized in USTA Regulation XVIII.D.
3. Films and books. An amateur may not accept money or gain pecuniary
advantage by permitting the taking of tennis action films or television
films of the amateur or by permitting the use of his or her name as the
author of any book or article on tennis of which he or she is not the actual
author.
4. Services. An amateur may not accept money for services not actually
rendered.
5. Endorsements. An amateur may not permit the amateur’s name,
initials, or likeness to be placed on tennis equipment or apparel of which
the amateur is not the actual manufacturer, wholesaler, retailer, or seller.
An amateur may not permit the use of the amateur’s name, initials, or
likeness in the advertising or other sales promotion of any goods of any
manufacturer, wholesaler, retailer, or seller.
D. Acts That Amateur May Engage in Without Losing Amateur Status
1. Reasonable expenses actually incurred. An amateur may be
reimbursed for reasonable expenses actually incurred in connection with
participation in a tournament, match, or exhibition. See USTA
Regulation XVIII.E.
2. Scholarships to school. An amateur may receive a scholarship or other
benefits authorized by the amateur’s school that do not affect eligibility as
a tennis player for the school.
220 USTA REGULATIONS XVIII.A. (Definitions)

3. Tennis camp and school scholarships. An amateur may receive a
scholarship or other special award:
• That recognizes a particular achievement by the amateur other than
a prize won through participation in a tournament event or which
recognizes a particular ability and financial need of the amateur; and
• That permits the amateur, at no cost or at a reduced cost, to attend
a tennis camp or school, to participate in a tennis clinic, or to
receive tennis lessons, provided that the recipient has been
selected from a group of eligible recipients in accordance with
rules established by the donor of the scholarship or special award.
4. Employment in sporting goods industry. An amateur may enter into a
bona fide arrangement for services as an individual proprietor, partner,
employee, agent, or consultant with a manufacturer or seller of sporting
goods or other products, provided the services to be performed will not
violate any of these regulations.
5. Student employment as salaried tennis instructor. An undergraduate or
a graduate student in regular full-time attendance at a recognized high
school, college, or university, or a faculty member as described in
USTA Regulation XVIII.D.6. shall not lose amateur status because of
accepting employment as:
• A counselor at a summer camp;
• An assistant to a teaching professional;
• An employee or tennis instructor at a club or establishment where
tennis is played;
• An employee or tennis instructor of a Sectional or District
Association, a city recreation department or its equivalent, or a
recognized tennis patrons organization; or
• An employee in a public junior development program.
Remuneration for any such employment may only be on a salary basis
and may not be on a fee-for-lesson basis.
6. Faculty members serving as tennis coaches. Regular full-time faculty
members of a recognized high school, college, or university may teach
tennis to the pupils or coach the tennis team as part of their faculty
assignments without affecting their amateur standings.
7. Physical education teachers. An amateur may be a physical education
or sports teacher who receives pecuniary advantage by giving
elementary tennis instruction. Remuneration for any such employment
may only be on a salary basis and may not be on a fee-for-lesson basis.
E. Expenses That May Be Reimbursed Without Causing Player to Lose Amateur
Status
1. Reasonable expenses actually incurred. An amateur may be reimbursed
for reasonable expenses actually incurred in connection with participation
in a tournament, match, or exhibition.
2. Documentation of expenses. Where practicable, expenses must be
supported by receipts or other evidence of payment.
3. Lodging. An amateur may accept reimbursement for reasonable lodging
expenses.
4. Food. An amateur may accept reimbursement for reasonable food
expenses.
USTA REGULATIONS XVIII.E. (Expenses That May Be Reimbursed…) 221

5. Travel. Travel expenses are allowable for travel to a tournament from
home or a previous tournament if in fact travel was from a previous
tournament. Travel expenses are also allowable for actual return to the
amateur’s home from the tournament. Reimbursement shall be limited to
the following:
• Air, rail, or bus fare at coach rate;
• Local transportation; and
• Automobile expenses per vehicle plus tolls at a rate established by
the Board.
6. Entry fees. Entry fees are allowable expenses.
7. Expenses before and during tournament. Expenses incurred at a
tournament site for the period starting a maximum of two days before
the start of a tournament and ending on the day after a player is
eliminated from the tournament are allowable in accordance with these
regulations.
8. Expenses of spouse, parent, coach, or chaperone. Expenses for a
non-playing spouse, a parent, a chaperone traveling with an amateur, or a
coach are allowable in accordance with these regulations. Expenses for a
coach shall be related to practice for and participation in the tournament
at a tournament site.
9. Miscellaneous expenses. Expenses for laundry and soft drinks are
allowable if not provided by the tournament or host.
10. Documentation of expenses to USTA. Upon the written request of the
USTA Grievance Committee, Executive Committee, or the Board, an
amateur shall fully inform such committee or Board as to:
a. All expenses paid in connection with participation in any
tournament, match, or exhibition, including the furnishing to such
committee or Board of such additional information as may be
requested and including a sworn statement as to such expenses if
so requested; and
b. The details of any employment in the sporting goods industry or
other arrangement described in USTA Regulation XVIII.D.4.,
including furnishing to such committee or Board any written
agreement, correspondence, and memoranda relating thereto,
including a sworn statement as to such details if so requested.
Failure to comply promptly and fully with the request shall be grounds for
immediate suspension, which suspension shall continue until the amateur
has so complied with such request.
F. Reimbursement of These Expenses Will Cause Player to Lose Amateur Status
1. Reimbursements conditioned on round reached. Any arrangement for
payment of expenses shall not be conditioned on the round reached. A
tournament may enter into an arrangement for payment of part or all of
an amateur’s allowable expenses, as defined in this USTA Regulation
XVIII., conditioned upon the tournament obtaining sufficient funds for the
payment.
2. Reimbursement of expenses paid by someone else. An amateur may not
accept reimbursement for an expense if someone else (for example, a
sponsor) has paid such expense, unless the amateur actually returns
such payment to the sponsor.
222 USTA REGULATIONS XVIII.F. (Reimbursement of These Expenses…)

3. Lost income. Lost opportunities for income, attributable to playing a
tournament, are not allowable expenses.
4. Equipment and clothing. Equipment and clothing are not allowable
expenses.
5. Expenses not reimbursable by virtue of action of Sectional Association or
USTA Grievance Committee. No amateur may receive, directly or indirectly,
expenses of any kind in connection with playing tennis if permission to
receive expenses has been refused either:
• By the amateur’s Sectional Association; or
• By the USTA Grievance Committee.
An amateur whose Sectional Association has refused to allow the
amateur to receive the expenses may appeal to the USTA Grievance
Committee pursuant to USTA Bylaw 43.
G. Organization Member’s Role in Reimbursement of Amateur’s Expenses
1. Direct arrangements between Organization Member and amateur. All
arrangements, including the payment of expenses, for participation by an
amateur in a sanctioned tournament, match, or exhibition shall be made
by the Organization Member holding the tournament directly with the
amateur, the amateur’s Sectional Association, the Sectional Association in
which the tournament is being held, the team captain of any recognized
USTA team (whether on a National, Sectional, or District level), or the
chairperson for any sanctioned National or International tournament,
match, or exhibition.
Payments made to hotels for indebtedness incurred for lodging,
meals, etc., or to common carriers for transportation will be
considered as having been paid directly to the amateur.
Failure to comply with the above policy will be grounds for
immediate suspension, which suspension shall continue until the
Organization Member has so complied with the policy.
2. Expenses not reimbursable by virtue of action of Sectional Association or
USTA Grievance Committee. No Organization Member may pay, directly
or indirectly, expenses of an amateur if permission to pay the expenses
has been refused either:
• By the Organization Member’s home Sectional Association; or
• By the USTA Grievance Committee.
An Organization Member whose Sectional Association has refused to
allow it to pay the expenses of an amateur may appeal to the USTA
Grievance Committee pursuant to USTA Bylaw 43.
3. Organization Member may lose future sanction of its tournaments if it
violates USTA Regulation XVIII. An Organization Member that
disregards any provision of USTA Regulation XVIII. shall be deemed to
have acted in a way detrimental to the welfare of the game and may be
denied by the Board further sanctions to hold tournaments, matches,
or exhibitions. Any Organization Member charged by the Board with
having so acted may, at its request, have a hearing before the USTA
Grievance Committee pursuant to USTA Bylaw 43.
H. Amateur Prizes
1. Value of prizes for amateurs may not exceed $250 per event. The
maximum value of a prize that may be won by an amateur in any one
USTA REGULATIONS XVIII.H. (Amateur Prizes) 223

event is $250. Thus, if an amateur participates in both the singles and
doubles events in a particular tournament, the amateur could accept a
prize having a maximum value of $250 for participation in the singles
event and another prize having a maximum value of $250 for participation
in the doubles event.
2. Allowable prizes. A prize may include, but is not necessarily limited to, the
following:
• Trophy or medal;
• Merchandise (for example, apparel, suitcases, rackets, silverware);
• Gift certificate;
• Membership or playing privileges at a tennis club with the amateur
having the right to designate the club;
• Tennis lessons with the amateur having the right to designate the
professional or organization providing the lessons;
• Scholarship with the amateur having the right to designate the
school; and
• Tax deductible contribution by the Tournament Committee with the
amateur having the right to designate the recipient of the
contribution.
3. Cash prizes may not be given to amateurs. A prize cannot be cash or any
award which may be surrendered for cash.
4. Donation of prize money to school or tennis organization by
Tournament Committee. If a player cannot accept prize money or a prize
because the player is an amateur, then the Tournament Committee or
sponsor has the discretion to give the prize money or prize to:
• A high school or college;
• The athletic department of a high school or college, which may be
for a specific use such as the tennis team;
• A Sectional Association; or
• A tennis patrons organization that is approved by its Sectional
Association for receipt of the prize money or prize, provided that the
player does not determine the recipient.
I. Enforcement Procedure over Amateur Status
1. Role of USTA President and USTA Grievance Committee in payment
of amateur expenses. The President and the USTA Grievance
Committee, acting jointly, may exercise supervision and control over
the payment and acceptance of expenses as may in their judgments be
necessary to insure an observance of these regulations. The President
and the Chairperson of the Grievance Committee, acting jointly, are
authorized to engage and pay for investigative services as they deem
necessary and proper to insure the proper enforcement of these
regulations.
2. Sectional Association jurisdiction over amateur status. A Sectional
Association may elect to exercise jurisdiction over its amateurs and
require that they obtain special permission from it before accepting
expenses in connection with their participation in a tournament, match, or
exhibition. Election by a Sectional Association to exercise this jurisdiction
will become effective only upon receipt of formal notice by the Secretary
of the USTA.
224 USTA REGULATIONS XVIII.I. (Enforcement Procedure over Amateur…)

3. Consequences of violating USTA Regulation XVIII. An amateur who
violates any provision of USTA Regulation XVIII. will jeopardize the
player’s amateur status and will be subject to disciplinary action pursuant
to USTA Bylaw 43 or pursuant to the procedures of any appropriate
Sectional or District Association. An Organization Member that holds a
tournament and violates any provision of USTA Regulation XVIII. is
subject to disciplinary action pursuant to USTA Bylaw 43 or pursuant to
the procedures of any appropriate Sectional or District Association.
J. Reinstatement to Amateur Status
1. Reinstatement of a professional. If an amateur has become a professional
and then wishes to be reinstated as an amateur, the following principles
and requirements shall be applicable:
a. Written request to USTA Grievance Committee. The player shall make
a written request to the USTA Grievance Chairperson, c/o USTA
Executive Director, 70 West Red Oak Lane, White Plains, New York
10604.
b. Player was professional for less than one year and grossed less
than $3,000. If the period of time from the date the player first
became a professional through the date on which the player
ceased professional activities is less than one year, and if during
this period the aggregate of prize money won and of other gross
income received from professional activities is less than $3,000,
reinstatement as an amateur may be granted effective as of the
date between three months and six months following the date on
which the player ceased professional activities.
c. Player was professional for between one and two years and
grossed less than $10,000. If the period of time from the date the
player first became a professional through the date on which the
player ceased professional activities is a year or more, but is less
than two years, and if during this period the aggregate of prize
money won and of other gross income received from professional
activities is less than $10,000, reinstatement as an amateur may
be granted effective as of the date between six months and one
year following the date on which the player ceased professional
activities.
d. Player was professional for between two and three years and
grossed less than $25,000. If the period of time from the date the
player first became a professional through the date on which the
player ceased professional activities is two years or more, but is
less than three years, and if during this period the aggregate of
prize money won and of other gross income received from
professional activities is less than $25,000, reinstatement as an
amateur may be granted effective as of the date between one year
and 18 months following the date on which the player ceased
professional activities.
e. Player was professional for less than three years, grossed less than
$25,000, and subparagraphs b. through d. do not apply. If the
period of time from the date the player first became a
professional through the date on which the player ceased
USTA REGULATIONS XVIII.J. (Reinstatement to Amateur Status) 225

professional activities is less than three years, and if during this
period the aggregate of prize money won and of other gross income
received from professional activities is less than $25,000, and if
none of subparagraphs b. through d. is applicable, reinstatement as
an amateur may be granted effective as of a date reasonably
consistent with the principles set forth in subparagraphs a. through
c. above.
f. Player was professional for more than three years or grossed more
than $25,000. If the period of time from the date the player first
became a professional through the date on which the player ceased
professional activities is three years or more, or if the aggregate of
prize money won and of other gross income received from
professional activities is $25,000 or more, reinstatement as an
amateur may be granted effective as of a date reasonably consistent
with the principles set forth in subparagraphs b. through d.
2. Player who has turned professional more than once. If an amateur has
become a professional after having been previously reinstated as an
amateur, and then wishes to be reinstated again as an amateur, the
effective date for any reinstatement may be considerably longer than
the periods indicated in USTA Regulation XVIII.J.1.
3. USTA Grievance Committee may reinstate player. Any reinstatement shall
be made by the USTA Grievance Committee on evidence satisfactory
to it that reinstatement is merited.
226 USTA REGULATIONS XVIII.J. (Reinstatement to Amateur Status)

XIX. AMENDMENTS AND REQUESTS FOR WAIVERS
The USTA Regulations may be amended provided any such amendment is not
inconsistent with any provision of the USTA Constitution or the USTA Bylaws.
A. Amendment by Members
Amendments may be adopted by the affirmative vote of a majority of the
members of the USTA present and voting at any meeting of the members,
provided that notice of the proposed amendment be included by the
Secretary-Treasurer of the USTA in the notice of the meeting at which the
amendment is to be considered.
B. Amendment by Executive Committee
Amendments may be adopted by the affirmative vote of a majority of the
members of the Executive Committee present and voting at any meeting of the
Executive Committee, provided that notice of the proposed amendment be
included by the Secretary-Treasurer of the USTA in the notice of the meeting at
which the amendment is to be considered.
C. Process for Submitting Amendment
1. Persons authorized to submit amendments. An amendment proposed to be
made by the voting members of the USTA or the Executive Committee may
be submitted only by a Sectional Association (through its President or
Secretary), a member of the Executive Committee, or a USTA committee
(through its chairperson). A USTA committee shall submit a proposed new
USTA Regulation or amendment only if the committee, by majority vote, has
voted to submit the proposal. The committee chairperson shall forward the
proposal to the Secretary-Treasurer of the USTA and shall circulate it to other
bodies as the committee may direct.
2. Written proposals must be received by Secretary-Treasurer of USTA at
least 90 days before meeting. All proposals must be submitted in
writing to the Secretary-Treasurer of the USTA at least 90 days before
the meeting at which the proposals are to be considered.
3. Proposals of extreme urgency. If notice is provided to all members of the
Executive Committee at least 15 days before the scheduled meeting date
of the Committee, any proposal concerning a matter of extreme urgency
that could not have been foreseen 90 days before the meeting may be
considered, provided the proposal be determined by the affirmative vote
of a majority of the members of the Executive Committee present and
voting to be of extreme urgency.
D. Amendment by Board
Amendments may be adopted by the affirmative vote of a majority of the
members of the Board present and voting at any meeting of the Board held
during intervals between meetings of the Executive Committee, provided that:
1. Amendment included in notice. Notice of the proposed amendment or
new regulation shall be included by the Secretary-Treasurer of the USTA
in the notice of the meeting at which the amendment is to be considered;
and
2. Twenty-day advance notice required within USTA. The Secretary-
Treasurer of the USTA shall provide a copy of each amendment or new
regulation proposed to be made by the Board to each member of the
Executive Committee, to each Sectional President who is not a member of
the Executive Committee, to the Chairperson of the Constitution and Rules
USTA REGULATIONS XIX.D. Amendment by the Board) 227

Committee, to each Sectional Association office, and to the chairperson of
any USTA committee that is affected by the proposed amendment, not
less than 20 days before the date of the meeting at which the action is to
be considered.
E. Amendments Passed by Executive Committee and Board Are Subject to
Amendment at Next Meeting of Members
Pursuant to USTA Bylaw 65, amendments passed by the Executive Committee
or by the Board are subject to approval, disapproval, or amendment at the next
Annual, Semiannual, or Special Meeting of the membership upon the request of
the voting delegates at the meeting with sufficient strength to constitute a
majority vote of the membership.
F. Secretary-Treasurer of USTA Shall Provide Certain USTA Officials with Copy
of Amendment Within Sixty Days of Its Adoption
The Secretary-Treasurer of the USTA shall provide a copy of each amendment that
is adopted to each member of the Executive Committee, to each Sectional
President who is not a member of the Executive Committee, to each Sectional
Association office, to the Chairperson of the Constitution and Rules
Committee, and to the chairperson of any USTA committee that is affected by
the amendment within 60 days after the action.
G. Effective Date of Amendments
Amendments to USTA Regulations I-VII shall be effective on January 1
following their adoption, unless the Executive Committee or Board votes
that an amendment shall have a different effective date, in which case it
shall be effective on the date specified. Amendments to all other USTA
Regulations shall be effective immediately unless a later date is specified.
H. Amendments to The Code, USTA Comments to ITF Rules of Tennis, and
Comments to USTA Regulations
Amendments to The Code shall be subject to approval in accordance with the
procedures applicable for approval of USTA Regulations provided that any
amendment may be approved by the Chairperson of the Constitution and
Rules Committee and the General Counsel if they agree that it is a conforming
change required because of an amendment to the ITF Rules of Tennis or a
USTA Regulation.
If the Chairpersons of the Tennis Rules and Regulations Committee and the
Officials Committee jointly request that a change be made in the USTA
Comments to the ITF Rules of Tennis or the FAC Comments to the USTA
Regulations, the Chairperson of the Constitution and Rules Committee and the
General Counsel may authorize the change if they determine that it is consistent
with the ITF Rules of Tennis and USTA Regulations and that it is not
inconsistent with previous applicable actions of the USTA.
I. Request for Waiver
An Individual Member who believes the Individual Member is adversely
affected by a USTA Regulation may, for a compelling reason, petition for a
waiver of that regulation. The individual member shall submit the petition to
the USTA Executive Director, 70 West Red Oak Lane, White Plains, NY
10604-3602, at least 45 days before the requested effective date of the
waiver. The petition shall:
• Identify the regulation that the individual member would like to have
waived;
228 USTA REGULATIONS XIX.E. (Amendements Passed by Executive…)

• State the period over which the waiver is requested;
• State the compelling reason; and
• Submit documentation that fully describes the basis for the request.
Upon receipt of the petition, the Executive Director shall assign the
petition to an appropriate person for review and decision and shall notify the
individual member of the identity of the person to whom the petition has been
assigned.
Within 30 days of the assignment (unless further time is reasonable), the
person shall:
• Render a decision on the petition based on the investigation, hearing,
or consultation that the person deems appropriate; and
• Notify the Executive Director and the individual member of the
decision.
The individual member may appeal the decision to the USTA Grievance
Committee pursuant to Bylaw 43. The appeal shall be treated as an initial
grievance.
FAC Comment XIX.I-1: The International Tennis Federation determines the
ITF Rules of Tennis. Any request for waiver of the ITF Rules of Tennis
should be addressed to the ITF.
USTA REGULATIONS XIX.I. (Request for Waiver) 229

PART 4—USTA EMERGENCY CARE GUIDELINES
INTRODUCTION
Emergency Care Guidelines help prepare Tournament Directors for medical
emergencies and evacuations in case of disasters. The ordinary standard of care
does not require a Tournament Director to be trained in emergency medical care.
However, familiarity with these guidelines allows Tournament Directors to be
prepared for medical emergencies and evacuations in case of disasters.
TOURNAMENT PREPARATION
It is important to think about the possibility of a medical emergency taking place
at your tournament ahead of time. Once you have anticipated this possibility, you
have already begun preparation. Consider having the following in place at the
start of the tournament:
EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS
• Identify at least one working phone on site. If you are using a cellular
phone, keep it fully charged and verify that it works on site. Many cellular
phones do not connect in certain areas or locations.
• Know the phone number and location of the nearest hospital.
• Know the phone number of a local ambulance company. Let the company
know beforehand that you are hosting a tennis tournament, and speak to
appropriate personnel about the best protocol to follow in case of an
emergency.
• 911: Remember, when in doubt or in case of a medical emergency, call
911, which will activate the emergency response system and prompt an
emergency medical vehicle to be sent to your site.
• Walk the tournament site in order to know the best way for an emergency
vehicle to enter.
• Review with pertinent tournament personnel the emergency phone
numbers and the protocol for activating 911.
• When activating 911, or when calling the local ambulance company, keep
your instructions clear and indicate the following:
The number of people who are in need of emergency medical care
Their ages (or approximate ages)
The location
The person to whom emergency medical services should report
In addition to activating the emergency response system, try to locate the parent
or guardian of a minor as soon as possible. For adults, try to locate the spouse,
parent or next of kin as soon as possible. Remember, for emergency medical
care, activating 911/emergency response system takes precedence over calling
family members.
SUPPLIES (ON-HAND)
• Towels: Verify that ample towels are available for clean up and for use by
players, if necessary.
• Water: Verify that ample drinking water is available on site.
• Ice: Verify that ice is available for both heat illness and acute
strains/sprains.
230 USTA EMERGENCY CARE GUIDELINES

• Gloves: Verify that exam gloves are on site, as they are to be worn by
anyone who may come into direct contact with blood—which includes
caring for an injured player or spectator/staff—or cleaning a blood spill.
• First Aid Kit: A basic first aid kit may be used within your comfort zone. Do
not dispense medication except upon the documented recommendation
of a physician on site. Basic first aid kits include:
Band-Aids, both small and large
Medical gauze
Athletic tape and Elastic (ACE) bandages
Plastic bags, including red plastic bags
The text contained herein is for informational purposes only. The United States
Tennis Association does not assume liability for any information contained herein.
Any and all emergency care decisions should be made in consultation with a
licensed professional.
ON-SITE EMERGENCY CARE
The following sections describe medical situations and conditions the Tournament
Director may encounter. Remember, best practices mean identifying that
someone needs emergency medical care, and then accessing emergency
treatment via 911 or a local ambulance company.
UNIVERSAL PRECAUTIONS
Universal precautions is a term that means any human blood—including body
fluids tainted with blood—is considered contaminated and potentially infectious.
Thus, latex exam gloves are worn by anyone handling blood or blood products,
and the individual handling the blood should have no open sores (non-latex exam
gloves are available for latex-allergic/sensitive individuals). As a practical
example, exam gloves are worn by an individual who is applying pressure with a
towel or bandage to a player who is bleeding. Blood spills on court are best
cleaned in accordance with current USTA Regulations (Friend at Court: The USTA
Handbook of Tennis Rules and Regulations: medical timeout). If a mop and water
are not utilized, a towel with water is acceptable. In this instance, the individual
cleaning the court is wearing exam gloves. Blood products are disposed in readily
identifiable red plastic bags.
HEAT ILLNESS
Heat illness refers to an acute medical condition that arises from a combination of
dehydration and overheating within the body. Heat illness occurs most commonly
in hot, humid conditions, especially if there is little wind. It is important to be
aware of the temperature and humidity throughout the day, and to anticipate heat
illness occurrences when the apparent temperature, or heat index, is equal to or
greater than 90 degrees, as per the chart below.
The symptoms and signs of heat illness include unusual or excessive
tiredness, headache, nausea (with or without vomiting), cramps, dizziness,
passing out and high body temperature. Heat stroke is a medical emergency, and
typically individuals appear acutely ill, have a high body temperature, and are
unable to drink any fluids.
USTA EMERGENCY CARE GUIDELINES 231

Post signs advising players to drink plenty of fluids before, during and after
play. Try to provide and identify areas with shade for cooling, plenty of fluids, and
cold, wet towels or icepacks. If the player cannot drink or has no desire to drink,
has lost consciousness or has a change in level of consciousness, or if there is
any doubt about the player’s condition, arrange for emergency transport to the
nearest hospital via 911 or a local ambulance company. While awaiting
emergency transport to arrive, remove the player from the heat and cool the
player with cold, wet towels applied to the body—specifically the armpits, groin,
and head.
ACUTE ALLERGIC REACTIONS/ANAPHYLAXIS
Acute allergic reactions are most likely to occur at a tennis tournament as a result
of an insect bite or a bee/wasp sting. The reaction can range from localized
swelling and discomfort, to more generalized swelling, to difficulty breathing with
wheezing, to a life-threatening cardiovascular collapse. Localized reactions can be
treated with ice. If the rash continues to worsen, if there is any difficulty
breathing, if there is wheezing or facial swelling, or any changes in the level of
consciousness, arrange for emergency transport to the nearest hospital via 911
or a local ambulance company.
Some players may have an established history of severe allergic reactions and
may have experience using Epipen (epinephrine auto-injector). Such players may
self-administer Epipen in accordance with their comfort zone. Even in this
scenario, activate the emergency response system to ensure immediate medical
evaluation and management of the individual.
STRAINS/SPRAINS
Acute strains and sprains usually occur in the setting of a fall. Symptoms include
localized swelling and pain. Acute management includes limb elevation with
application of ice and a compression bandage (ACE bandage). Remember: RICE:
Rest; Ice; Compression; Elevation). Best practices include players consulting with
their physician for further management. For severe strains and sprains, best
practices include evaluation that day, either in a physician’s office or in the
emergency room, in order to rule out an underlying fracture.
OTHER EMERGENCIES
Life-threatening emergencies can occur at any time, and can include a seizure,
heart attack, sudden fall with head trauma, or sudden collapse. Your job is not to
make a diagnosis, but to activate the emergency response system via 911 or a
call to the local ambulance company. It is important to maintain an environment
of calm, and to remove all unnecessary people from the scene.
MEDICATION
Do not administer medication on site, including aspirin, products containing
acetaminophen, or over-the-counter cold remedies. Some over-the-counter
products contain medications that may be banned by the Tennis Anti-Doping
Program. It is the player’s responsibility to properly take such medications under
the direction of his physician, his guardian, or both. In addition, never supply any
food supplements, protein drinks, or energy supplements other than standard
232 USTA EMERGENCY CARE GUIDELINES

sport drinks (e.g., Gatorade). These supplements may be tainted with banned
substances for doping control.
THUNDERSTORMS AND LIGHTNING
Lightning is a potential severe hazard and life-threatening consequence of an
approaching storm near outdoor tennis matches. It is important to be prepared
for immediate cessation of all matches or warm-up in the event of lightning. In
essence, if lightning is sighted, stop all activity and direct everyone to seek
appropriate shelter. A 30-30 rule may be used, which is as follows:
• If lightning is sighted and thunder then occurs in 30 seconds or less,
instruct everyone on site to seek appropriate shelter. Dividing the number
of seconds between lightning and thunder by 5 gives the distance of
lightning in miles. (For example, a flash-to-bang count of 30 seconds
means a distance of 6 miles.)
• Resume tennis activity after a minimum of 30 minutes has elapsed since
the last lightening strike was seen.
The primary shelter choice is any substantial, frequently inhabited building
with working electricity, telephones and plumbing. While inside, avoid using
electrical devices or telephones attached to cords, and refrain from taking
showers. If such a building is not available, the next safest location is a fully
enclosed vehicle with a metal roof and closed windows. Do not touch the metal
framework while inside the vehicle.
Avoid the following locations:
• Open fields
• Proximity to open water
• Trees, flag poles, or light poles
If anyone has been struck by lightning, activate emergency medical services
immediately. If possible, move the injured person to a safer location.
USTA EMERGENCY CARE GUIDELINES 233

This Heat Index Chart provides general guidelines for assessing the potential
severity of heat stress. Individual reactions to heat will vary. It is noteworthy that
heat illness can occur at lower temperatures than indicated on the chart. In
addition, studies indicate that susceptibility to heat illness tends to increase with
the very young and the elderly.
1. Across the top of the chart, locate the ENVIRONMENTAL TEMPERATURE
(i.e., the air temperature).
2. Down the left side of the chart, locate the RELATIVE HUMIDITY.
3. Follow across and down to find the APPARENT TEMPERATURE. Apparent
Temperature is the combined index of heat and humidity. It is an index of
the body’s sensation of heat caused by the temperature and humidity (the
reverse of the “wind chill factor”).
Note: Exposure to full sunshine can increase Heat Index values.
HEAT INDEX
ENVIRONMENT TEMPERATURE [Fº]
70° 75° 80° 85° 90° 95° 100° 105° 110° 115° 120°
Relative Humidity Apparent Temperature*
0% 64° 69° 73° 78° 83° 87° 91° 95° 99° 103° 107°
10% 65° 70° 75° 80° 85° 90° 95° 100° 105° 111° 116°
20% 66° 72° 77° 82° 87° 93° 99° 105° 112° 120° 130°
30% 67° 73° 78° 84° 90° 96° 104° 113° 123° 135° 148°
40% 68° 74° 79° 86° 93° 101° 110° 123° 137° 151°
50% 69° 75° 81° 88° 96° 107° 120° 135° 150°
60% 70° 76° 82° 90° 100° 114° 132° 149°
70% 70° 77° 85° 93° 106° 124° 144°
80% 71° 78° 86° 97° 113° 136°
90% 71° 79° 88° 102° 122°
100% 72° 80° 91° 108°
*Combined index of heat and humidity…what it “feels like” to the body.
APPARENT TEMPERATURE HEAT STRESS RISK WITH PHYSICAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR PROLONGED EXPOSURE
90° - 105° Heat cramps or heat exhaustion possible
105° - 130° Heat cramps or heat exhaustion likely, Heatstroke possible
130° and up Heatstroke highly likely
Source: National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration.
234 USTA EMERGENCY CARE GUIDELINES

PART 5—UMPIRE ASSIGNMENT, SELECTION,
CERTIFICATION, AND TRAINING
I. USTA POLICY
A. Diversity and Inclusion: A Key Element of the USTA’s Core Values
Just as any good investor knows that you have to diversify your portfolio if
you want to maximize its value, so the USTA knows that by making tennis
open and accessible to all people of varied backgrounds, the value of the
sport, the overall crowd appeal and the potential for high returns will increase.
The USTA has made Diversity and Inclusion a Primary Strategic Priority and is
committed to growing the game through outreach and inclusion, as defined
by our USTA Board of Directors Approved Diversity Statement:
We, the United States Tennis Association, recognize diversity as
essential to achieving our mission: to promote and develop the growth
of tennis. For us, diversity refers to differences of culture, ethnicity,
race, age, gender, beliefs, religion, social and economic status, sexual
orientation, family status, physical ability, appearance, and ideas.
We are committed to achieving greater diversity throughout the
sport and fostering a tennis environment that is more inclusive.
Pursuant to its overall diversity policy, the USTA hereby promulgates this
statement on diversity in Umpire assignment, selection, certification, and
training.
B. Assignment & Selection of Chair Umpires for Tournaments
1. The USTA does not permit discrimination on the basis of gender, race,
or any other prohibited basis in the selection and assignment of Chair
Umpires to tournaments and matches.
2. All qualified Chair Umpires will be afforded equal opportunities to Chair
men’s and women’s matches regardless of their gender. The USTA,
where it has the authority to do so, will seek to assign qualified female
Chair Umpires to men’s tournaments and matches in numbers
approximating their representation in the qualified pool of applicants
available for these tournaments and matches. The USTA will urge USTA
Pro Circuit tournament officials and the Chief Umpires assigned to these
tournaments to do the same, and will take best efforts to include these
assignment goals in future contracts with entities holding USTA Pro
Circuit tournaments. When asked to recommend Chair Umpires for ATP
tournaments, the USTA will seek to recommend qualified female Chair
Umpires in numbers approximating their representation in the pool of
Umpires qualified and available to chair these tournaments.
3. All qualified Chair Umpires will be afforded equal opportunities to chair
tournaments and specific matches regardless of their race. The USTA,
where it has the authority to do so, will seek to assign qualified Chair
Umpires, regardless of their demographic background (i.e., race,
gender, sexual orientation, etc.), to matches, including later-round
matches, in numbers approximating their demographic representation
in the qualified pool of applicants available for these matches. The
USTA will urge USTA Pro Circuit tournament officials and the Chief
UMPIRE ASSIGNMENT, SELECTION, CERTIFICATION, AND TRAINING 235

Umpires assigned to these tournaments to do the same, and will take
affirmative steps to include these assignment goals in future contracts
with entities holding USTA Pro Circuit tournaments. When asked to
recommend Chair Umpires for ATP and WTA tournaments, the USTA
will seek to recommend qualified minority Chair Umpires in numbers
approximating their demographic representation in the pool of
Umpires qualified and available to chair these tournaments.
4.a. The process for applying for Chair Umpire positions at USTA Pro
Circuit events, non-US Open is:
• Step One. Work to achieve a Chair Certification by the USTA.
• Step Two. Indicate interest through the Sectional Chair to attend a
USTA Chair Academy to improve current skill level.
• Step Three. Register work availability with the USTA Officials
Department in the National Office (ITF certification encouraged
but not required).
4.b. The process for applying for Chair Umpire positions at the US Open is:
• Step One. Work to achieve a Chair Certification by the USTA.
• Step Two. Indicate interest through the Sectional Chair to attend
a USTA Chair Academy to improve current skill level.
• Step Three. Register work availability with the USTA Officials
Department in the National Office (ITF certification not required).
• Step Four. Indicate interest through the Sectional Chair to attend
an ITF White Badge School.
• Step Five. Achieve White Badge or better certification.
• Step Six. File an application to work the US Open by the annual
US Open deadline with the USTA Officials Department.
5.a. In selecting Chair Umpires and assigning them to USTA Pro Circuit
matches, the USTA will rely primarily on job related criteria such as:
(Not in any particular order)
• Availability
• Performance rating or evaluation from rating from USTA
Trainer/Evaluators and experienced USTA/ITF Certified Chair
Umpires/Referees
• Experience
• ITF Badge Level (encouraged but not required for Pro Circuit
events)
• Adherence to the USTA Officials’ Code of Conduct
5.b. In selecting Chair Umpires and assigning them to US Open matches,
the USTA will rely primarily on job related criteria such as: (Not in any
particular order)
• US Open Application accepted
• Performance rating or evaluation from rating from USTA
Trainer/Evaluators and experienced USTA/ITF Certified Chair
Umpires/Referees
• Experience
• ITF Badge Level
• Adherence to the USTA Officials’ Code of Conduct
• Nationality of the Umpire
• Whether a player exists on the Umpire’s “NO List”
236 UMPIRE ASSIGNMENT, SELECTION, CERTIFICATION, AND TRAINING

6. The USTA maintains records of the names of the Chair Umpires
assigned to all matches of each USTA Sanctioned Tournament.
C. Certification and Training of Chair Umpires
1. The USTA does not permit discrimination on the basis of gender, race,
or any other prohibited basis in the certification of Umpires and in the
selection of USTA-certified Umpires to be recommended for admission
to the ITF for Badge School.
2. All qualified Chair Umpires will be afforded equal opportunities to
obtain each USTA certification level and to be recommended for
admission into an ITF Badge School, regardless of their demographic
background (i.e., race, gender, sexual orientation, etc.). The USTA will
seek to recommend for ITF Badge School admission qualified Umpires,
regardless of their demographic background, who express written
interest in attending ITF Badge Schools in numbers approximating
their representation in the pool of qualified Umpires who express
written interest in attending these Schools.
3. The process for USTA-Certified Umpires to obtain recommendations
for admission to ITF Badge Schools or to attend USTA-operated chair
academies is:
Step One. Seek supplemental chair assignments at lower level USTA
Circuit events, Junior events, Collegiate events, or any events to gain
experience.
Step Two. Seek additional chair assignments at the Pro Circuit level for
Pro Level experience.
Step Three. Obtain applications from the ITF website or seek assistance
to obtain an application from the USTA Officials Department.
Step Four. Submit the completed application to the USTA Officials
Department.
4. Decisions by the USTA on whether to recommend USTA-Certified
Umpires to attend ITF Badge Schools are based on:
• Recommendation from the Sectional Chair;
• Performance rating or evaluation from National Trainer/ Evaluators
and experienced USTA/ITF Certified Chairs/ Referees;
• Pro Circuit Experience ;
• USTA certification for Chair Academies/Chair Certification by the
USTA for ITF schools;
• Adherence to the USTA Officials’ Code of Conduct.
5. Decisions for selecting Umpires certified by the USTA to attend
USTA-operated Chair Academies will be based primarily on job related
criteria such as:
• Recommendation from the Sectional Chair;
• Performance rating or evaluation from National Trainer/
Evaluators and experienced USTA/ITF Certified Chairs/ Referees;
• Pro Circuit;
• USTA certification for Chair Academies/Chair Certification by the
USTA for ITF schools;
• Adherence to the USTA Officials’ Code of Conduct.
6. The USTA maintains records of the names of USTA-Certified Umpires
recommended for admission into ITF Badge Schools, as well as the
UMPIRE ASSIGNMENT, SELECTION, CERTIFICATION, AND TRAINING 237

names of USTA-Certified Umpires who attend USTA-operated Chair
Academies. Upon request, the USTA will provide any USTA-certified
Umpire with the records relating to his or her request for a Badge
School recommendation or for admission to a USTA-operated Chair
Academy.
II. DISCRIMINATION COMPLAINT AND RESOLUTION PROCESS
A. Umpire Equal Opportunity Policy
The USTA does not permit discrimination on the basis of gender, race, color,
religion, national origin, marital status, citizenship status, veteran status,
sexual orientation, age, disability, or any prohibited basis in the selection and
assignment of Chair Umpires to tournaments and matches, or in the
certification of Umpires and the selection of USTA-Certified Umpires to be
recommended to the ITF for Badge School admission.
B. Umpire Complaint and Investigation Procedure
1. Any Umpire who believes that he or she has been subjected to
discrimination in violation of the Umpire Equal Opportunity Policy may
file a complaint in writing with the Chief Diversity Officer of the USTA,
either by mail 70 West Red Oak Lane, White Plains, NY 10604, or via
email at diversity@usta.com. The complaint shall include:
a. the date, time, and location of the acts or actions complained of;
b. the identities of the person or persons taking the disputed acts or
actions and any witnesses to them; and
c. the basis on which the acts or actions are believed to be
discrimination in violation of the Umpire Equal Opportunity
Policy.
2. The USTA will promptly and thoroughly investigate each complaint in
an impartial manner and, to the fullest extent possible, shall maintain
the confidentiality of all complaints and Umpire complainants. The
Umpire complainant shall be informed of the results of the
investigation.
3. If the USTA determines that discrimination in violation of the Umpire
Equal Opportunity Policy has occurred, it will immediately take
appropriate remedial and/or disciplinary action, up to and including
termination of the employment or contract of the responsible party if
the USTA has this authority.
4. The USTA will maintain the records of the Umpire Complaint and
Investigation Procedure, including those reflecting the nature of the
complaint, the investigation conducted, the results of the investigation,
and any actions taken as a result of the investigation, in accordance
with applicable legal standards.
5. No Umpire shall be subjected to retaliation or other detriment in his or
her relations with the USTA for filing, assisting with, or supporting in
any manner a complaint of discrimination in violation of the Umpire
Equal Opportunity Policy. If any retaliation or detriment occurs, the
affected Umpire may file an amended or a separate complaint with the
Umpire Diversity Officer to be processed and resolved in the manner
specified above.
238 UMPIRE ASSIGNMENT, SELECTION, CERTIFICATION, AND TRAINING

PART 6—UMPIRE AWARDS
John T. McGovern Award Recipients
The award is presented annually to a Chair Umpire or Line Umpire who has
given a lifetime of dedication, service, and expertise to tennis officiating.
1949—Donald M. Dickson,
Bronxville, NY*
1950—Craufurd Kent, Hollywood, CA*
1951—Harold A. Lebair,
New York City, NY*
1952—David S. Niles, West Newton, MA*
1953—Louis W. Shaw, Bayonne, NJ*
1954—Frank J. Tybeskey,
Philadelphia, PA*
1955—Hubert J. Quinn,
San Francisco, CA*
1956—H. LeVan Richards,
Falls Church, VA*
1957—Winslow M. Blanchard,
Scottsdale, AZ*
1958—Edward Mellor, Philadelphia, PA*
1959—Harold E. Ammerman,
Orange, NJ*
1960—J. Clarence Davies Jr.,
New York City, NY*
1961—Herbert J. Lewis,
Miami Shores, FL*
1962—Frank S. Dowling,
Indianapolis, IN*
1963—John Kroel, Clifton, NJ*
1964— William L. Macassin,
Ft. Lauderdale, FL*
1965—Ernest J. Oberlaender Jr.,
New York City, NY*
1966—John Stahr, Larchmont, NY*
1967—S. R. Bumann, Dallas, TX*
1968—John B. Coman,
Beverly Hills, CA*
1969—Frank Hammond,
New York, NY*
1970—E. Brooks Keffer, Wayne, PA
1971—Titus W. Sparrow, Boston, MA*
1972—Col. Richmond H. Skinner,
Wilmington, DE*
1973—Sydow Nieman, Pasadena, CA*
1974—Douglas Stewart, Milford, NJ*
1975—Florence Blanchard, Phoenix, AZ
1976—Samuel R. Cox, Bryn Mawr, PA*
1977—William Ackerman, Trenton, NJ*
1978—Harry Maiden,
South Pasadena, CA*
1979—J. Roy Dance, Memphis, TN
1980—John Sternbach, Vail, CO
1981—William S. Bigelow,
Maplewood, NJ*
1982—George M. Duganne, Miami, FL*
1983—Anita Shukow,
Roslyn Heights, NY*
1984—Nick Powel, Arlington, VA*
1985—Charles F. Beck,
Fort Lauderdale, FL
1986—R. Norris Bond, Boston, MA
1987—Joe Beerman, Bayside, NY
1988—Judy Popkin,
New York City, NY
1989—Jay Snyder, Hershey, PA
1990—Zeno Pfau, Richardson, TX
1991—Richard Kaufman, New Paltz, NY
1992—Peter Kasavage, San Ramon, CA
1993—Fran McDowell, Mt. Vernon, WA
1994—Joan Vormbaum, San Jose, CA
1995—Woodie Sublett-Walker,
Newburgh, IN
1996—Al Penelton, East St. Louis, IL
1997—Steve Ullrich, Tampa, FL
1998—Bill Barber, Brewster, MA
1999—Robert Cranor, Los Angeles, CA
2000—John Bramlett, San Bernardino, CA
2001—Jim Zimmerman, Dallas, TX*
2002—John Wong, San Francisco, CA
2003—Joan Bunny Williams,
Bluffton, SC
2004—Jerry Moore, Roswell, GA
2005—Norman Chryst, Scottsdale, AZ
2006—Shirley Damiano, Syracuse, NY
2007—Missy Malool, Bluffton, SC
2008—David Littlefield, Palm Springs, FL
2009—Lois R. Huggins, Newark, DE
*deceased
AWARDS 239

Jr. McGovern Award Recipients
With qualifying conditions similar to the John T. McGovern Award, the Junior
McGovern Award recognizes service and excellence by younger tennis officials.
1948—Ailie Tesloff, TX
1949—Frank Hammond, New York, NY*
1950—Andrew Dennon, Long Island, NY
1956—Jeffrey Cox, Bryn Mawr, PA*
1957—Betty Brown, Scarsdale, NY
1958—R. Michael Dunne, Greenwich, CT
1959—Helen S. Coman, Scarsdale, NY
1961—Tom Konchalski, Elmhurst, NY
1963—John B. Coman, Jr., Ojai, CA
1964—Jane Dally, So. Orange, NJ
1973—John J. Halonka, Jr., Hallandale, FL
1982—Scott Jason Svonkin,
Monterey Park, CA
240 AWARDS
1983—Jerold Reagan Lipp, Dallas, TX
1984—Dave Radoccia, Reading, MA
1990—Rocky Hardy, Greenbrier, AR
1992—Joe Maxberry, Jacksonville, FL
1993—Cecil Hollins, Ozone Park, NY
1994—Dan Oppenheim, Columbia, MD
1998—Jake Garner, Tallahassee, FL
2000—Chris Wilson, South Deerfield, MA
2004—Tom Skeen, Bountiful, UT
2007—Sally Paulus, Midland, MI
2008—Andrew Walker, Birmingham, MI
Jack Stahr Award Recipients
The award is presented annually to an Umpire in one of the Umpire’s first three
years at the US Open in recognition of hard work, professionalism, technical
ability and cooperative attitude. It recognizes outstanding work primarily as a
Line Umpire.
1984—Jerry Moore, Roswell, GA
1985—Greg Moorhead, Mesa, AZ
1986—Ray Delcastillo,
San Antonio, TX
1987—Dana Loconto, Gadsden, AL
1988—Kristine Coryell, Flossmor, IL
1989—Julie Watterson, Englewood, CO
1990—John Bramlett, San Bernardino, CA
1991—Beth Wallingford,
Indianapolis, IN
1992—Cathi Duncan, Newburgh, IN
1993—Clark Mayer, Hagerstown, MD
1994—Carole Cox, Brentwood, TN
1995—Vigi Dreker, Boca Raton, FL
1996—Revathy Solomon, Gretna, LA
1997—Jay French, W. Palm Beach, FL
1998—Ken Clarke, Redondo Beach, CA
1999—Ann Gilley, Fort Worth, TX
2000—Tracy Crossland, Chicago, IL
2001—Satsuki Prokop, Bellevue, WA
2002—Kevin Calhoun, Lexington, KY
2003—Donovan Kent, Buffalo, NY
2004—Francess Mudge-Lisk,
Prairie Village, KS
2005—Rob Roy, Los Angeles, CA
2006—Justin T. Willis, Greensboro, NC
2007—Jamey Davis, Mobile, AL
2008—Kevin G. Labor, Frisco, TX
2009—Kimberly Angermeier,
Henderson, KY

Nicholas E. Powel Award Recipients
This award is presented annually to a Sectional Chair or Line Umpire in
recognition of the importance of officiating at the local level.
1990—Lillian Donley, Scottsdale, AZ
1991—Margery S. Marshall,
Sacramento, CA
1992—Margaret Colchin, Knoxville, TN
1993—Eugene Heller, Sioux Falls, SD
1994—Lucille Frank, Denver, CO
1995—Claude Pickering, Lancaster, CA
1996—Arcadio Garza, San Antonio, TX
1997—Charles Mignon, Lincoln, NE
1998—Nan Burnam, Abilene, TX
1999—Berry Campagna, Greensburg, PA
2000—Mickey Harper, Midfield, AL
2001—Jim Cummings, Baltimore, MD
2002—Allan Smith, Dunwoody, GA
2003—Sally B. Utiger, Weston, MA
2004—Clarence Corbin, Gulf Breeze, FL
2005—Dennis Bennett, Boise, ID
2006—Patricia A. Friz, Wilmington, DE
2007—David DeGrafft, Lutherville, MD
2008—Charlotte Dlugolenski,
Fayetteville, NY
2009—Catherine Thomas, Palm Desert, CA
AWARDS 241

PART 7—INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA)
REGULATIONS
CONTENTS OF THE INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA)
REGULATIONS
I. Individual Competition—Singles and Doubles Tournaments..................................245
A. The Code.........................................................................................................................245
B. Calls in Matches with a Solo Chair Umpire or with no Chair Umpire
and no Line Umpires .....................................................................................................245
C. Service and Service Returns .........................................................................................247
D. ITA Scoring Systems......................................................................................................248
E. ITA Point Penalty System, Defaults, and Unintentional Time Violations ...................248
F. Restrictions on Players and Spectators ........................................................................251
G. Warm-up.........................................................................................................................251
H. Timeouts, Bathroom Breaks, and Equipment Adjustment ........................................251
I. Rest Periods, Continuous Play, and Time Between Matches ....................................253
J. Coaching.........................................................................................................................253
K. Coaches’ Code of Conduct ............................................................................................254
L. Equipment and Attire....................................................................................................254
M. Seeding—Ratio of 1 to 4................................................................................................255
N. Penalties for Lateness at Start of Match .......................................................................255
O. Post Match Interviews...................................................................................................255
P. Eligibility for Collegiate Competition.........................................................................255
II. Team Competition—Dual Meet Matches and Team Tournaments..........................255
A. Formats for Team Play ...................................................................................................255
B. General Rules.................................................................................................................256
C. Facilities and Equipment..............................................................................................259
D. Practice Courts ...............................................................................................................260
E. Officials...........................................................................................................................260
F. Trainer.............................................................................................................................260
G. ITA Scoring Systems in Team Matches in all Divisions.............................................261
H. ITA Point Penalty System and Defaults.......................................................................261
I. Starting Time..................................................................................................................262
J. Warm-up.........................................................................................................................263
K. Team Line-ups................................................................................................................263
L. Post Match Considerations ...........................................................................................266
III. ITA Tournaments—Rules, Regulations and Procedures ............................................266
A. General............................................................................................................................266
B. ITA Games Committee ..................................................................................................267
IV. ITA National Intercollegiate Events ...............................................................................267
A. Withdrawal from ITA National Intercollegiate Event ................................................267
B. ITA All-American Championships (Men and Women) .............................................268
C. ITA National Small College Championships (Men and Women) ...........................268
D. ITA National Intercollegiate Indoor Championships
(Men and Women).......................................................................................................268
E. USTA/ITA National Team Indoor Championships
(Men and Women).......................................................................................................268
F. ITA Division III National Team Indoor Championships (Men)..............................268
V. Tournament Management..............................................................................................268
A. Meetings.......................................................................................................................268
B. Ball Change in ITA Division I National Tournaments..............................................268
242 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

SUMMARY OF IMPORTANT ITA CHANGES FOR
2010 EDITION OF FRIEND AT COURT
[p. 251] ITA Regulation I.H.1. was revised to allow one medical timeout for
Division I men’s and women’s divisions. Exceptions are the Bleeding Timeout and
the Medical Timeout taken for a bathroom visit at an unauthorized time.
[p. 253] ITA Regulation I.I.1. was revised to provide that extreme heat situations
do apply to team competition (dual meets).
[p. 253] ITA Regulation I.J.3. requires all coaches to be registered with their
respective schools.
[p. 254] ITA Regulation I.L.1.a. tightens the tennis ball requirements for Division I,
II, NAIA, Junior/Community college men’s and women’s divisions.
[p. 255] ITA Regulation I.M. tightens the seeding ratio for collegiate tournaments.
[p. 256] ITA Regulation II.A.8. was updated to clarify the match format for Men’s
and Women’s Division III matches shall be 3-6 with nine team points and requires
5 minutes rest for those divisions after their doubles match.
[p. 257] ITA Regulation II.B.12. tightens determining the winner of a team meet.
[p. 258] ITA Regulation II.B.13.c. requires indoor facilities to meet the same
playable conditions as outdoor facilities.
[p. 261] ITA Regulation II.H.3.a. tightens the carry-over code violations after a
match is over in a team competition.
[p. 263] ITA Regulation II.I.2. tightens the team penalty for being late.
[p. 264] ITA Regulation II.K.5. sets new regulations for line-up changes once a
match has begun.
[p. 264] ITA Regulation II.K.7. sets new regulations for removing a player from a
doubles line up if a team has 6 or less healthy players.
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 243

FAC EDITORS’ NOTE
USTA officials are often called upon to officiate at intercollegiate events. This
section contains the Intercollegiate Tennis Association (ITA) officiating
regulations. These regulations are followed at most intercollegiate events.
USTA Regulations are in effect in college tennis except where explicitly
superseded by ITA, NCAA, NAIA, NJCAA, or Conference Rules.
Those ITA regulations that are substantially different from USTA Regulations
have been set in Bold Italics. ITA rules vary from USTA Regulations in the
following major areas:
• Overrule on verbal appeal only;
• Carry over of Point Penalty System;
• Player who changes call from out to good loses point;
• Receiver’s partner may not stand in service box; and
• Medical timeout procedure.
There are no corresponding USTA Regulations for the following ITA
Regulations.
• I.E.5. ITA Carry-Over Rules;
• I.F. Restrictions on Players and Spectators;
• I.J. Coaching;
• I.K. Coaches’ Code of Conduct; and
• II. Team Competition.
Before officiating at an ITA event, officials should confirm whether any
new changes have been adopted by the ITA and should check the “Rules”
section of the ITA website, www.itatennis.com.
RULES, REGULATIONS & TOURNAMENT PROCEDURES
The purpose of the official ITA Rulebook is to codify for college players,
coaches and USTA certified officials all the rules and regulations, and
tournament procedures which are unique to college tennis, as well as to
highlight those USTA rules which most often apply to college tennis.
These rules govern all collegiate play, except in the few cases where a specific
conference rule, NAIA, or NCAA tournament rule differs from the ITA
rule. In this case the conference rule, NAIA, or NCAA rule will take
precedence over the ITA rule. Otherwise, all ITA coaches are expected to follow
the ITA rules as closely as possible. Failure to do so should be reported
immediately to the ITA Ethics and Infractions Committee and the ITA National
Tournament Committees.
USTA Rules and Regulations are in effect in college tennis except where
explicitly superseded by ITA, NCAA, NAIA, NJCAA, or Conference Rules.
244 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS
ITA Board of Directors
December 2009

I. INDIVIDUAL COMPETITION—SINGLES AND DOUBLES TOURNAMENTS
A. The Code
All college match play will follow the principles set out in “The Code”
except where these rules provide otherwise.
B. Calls in Matches with a Solo Chair Umpire or with no Chair Umpire and no
Line Umpires
Many college matches are played without the assistance of a Chair Umpire
and Line Umpires. Some matches are officiated by a Solo Chair Umpire. In all
these matches, the players have the primary responsibility for making the
calls. The following principles apply in these matches.
1. Player makes calls on his side of the court. Each player shall make all
calls on his side of the court. A Solo Chair Umpire or Roving Umpire
shall not assist the player in making any call with any kind of verbal or
non-verbal signal.
2. Opponent gets benefit of the doubt. Whenever a player is in doubt he
shall make the call in favor of his opponent. Balls should be called “out”
only when there is a space visible between the ball and the line. A player
shall never seek aid from a Solo Chair Umpire, spectator, teammate or
coach in making a line call.
3. Disagreement between partners over a call. A doubles partner is
obligated to disagree with his partner if an erroneous “out” call is made.
When doubles partners disagree on a call, the point goes to the
opposing team. The point is never replayed.
4. Balls that a player does not see. There are no “unsighted” calls. If a
player does not see his opponent’s shot, he shall call the ball good. A
player shall never seek aid from a Solo Chair Umpire, spectator,
teammate or coach in making a line call.
5. Solo Chair Umpire and Roving Umpires shall not give assistance on
unsighted balls. The Solo Chair Umpire and Roving Umpires shall not
give assistance on balls that a player does not see.
6. Out calls must be made immediately. “Out” calls must be made
immediately. The call shall be made before either an opponent has hit
the return or the return has gone out of play. If no immediate audible or
visible call is made, the ball shall be considered good.
a. Clay court procedure. A player may quickly check a mark before
making a call on his side of the net.
7. Correcting an erroneous “out” call—opponent wins point. A player shall
reverse his “out” call if he realizes that he has made a mistake or if
he is uncertain of the call. The point goes to the opponent. It is never
played over.
8. Obligation of player to call his own ball “out” if he clearly sees it out. A
player shall call his own ball “out” if he clearly sees that it is out. This rule
does not apply to a player’s first serve. See rule C.2. and C.3.
9. How to challenge an opponent’s call. An opponent’s call may be
challenged by the query: “Are you sure of your call?” No further
discussion or delay is permitted. If the player making the call is
uncertain, he loses the point. It is never played over.
10. Players shall not cross the net to point out a mark or discuss a problem.
A player shall not cross the net to point out a mark or discuss a
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 245

problem. A player who does shall be penalized under the ITA Point
Penalty System.
11. Touches, invasion of opponent’s court, reaching over the net, and double
bounces. Calls involving a ball touching a player, a player touching the
net, a player touching his opponent’s court, hitting an opponent’s return
before it has passed the net, and a double bounce must be called by the
player committing the infraction. If there is a Solo Chair Umpire, he also
may make these calls. A Roving Umpire who observes the incident may
make the call if he directly observed the incident with or without an
appeal from a player.
12. Lets. There are no lets in college tennis except for a service let, an
interruption by an official or a spectator, and when play is interfered
with by an outside object. In Men’s Division I, there are no service
lets. If the serve hits the net and goes into the service box, the ball is
in play. Either player may call a service let if the player does so at the
instant when the let occurs. A Solo Chair Umpire may call service lets.
Requests for lets may not be made after a point is ended. A service let
call can be appealed and is an overrule if disallowed. The Solo Chair
Umpire umpire or the Roving Official shall call a let if he concludes that
a player is unaware of an invading object that is endangering him.
13. Only a coach or player may request a Line Umpire or Referee. Only a
coach or the player involved may request the presence of a Line Umpire
or Referee. The coach may physically go get the Line Umpire or Referee.
Play may be temporarily halted while the coach or the player seeks a
Referee or Line Umpire. Nonetheless, play must resume within five
minutes, even if attempts are still being made to obtain a Line Umpire.
14. Foot fault judges. A player or coach may request a foot fault judge. A
player may request that an opponent avoid foot faults. A player shall not
call a foot fault on an opponent. All foot faults must be called by an
Umpire, Referee, or Roving Umpire. A Roving Umpire or Referee need
not be stationed on the baseline in order to call foot faults so long as his
position gives him a clear view of the fault.
15. Server shall call score before each point. The server shall call the score
before each point except when there is a Solo Chair Umpire or
scorekeeper assigned to the match.
16. Settling disagreements over the score. If a disagreement over the score
occurs, the methods for settling the dispute in order of preference are:
— Count all points and games agreed upon by the players, with only the
disputed points or games being replayed;
— Resume play from a score mutually agreeable to the players;
— Use a coin flip.
17. Solo Chair Umpire shall not overrule call unless player immediately
appeals for overrule. A Solo Chair Umpire shall not overrule a call
unless it is challenged verbally at that moment (not at the end of the
point) by the opposing player. The Solo Chair Umpire shall not
prompt the request for an appeal.
18. Overrules by certified Roving Umpires. If appealed to, a certified Roving
Umpire may overrule a call if he is on that court or if he directly
observed the call.
246 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

19. Player who has been overruled twice shall thereafter be penalized under
the Point Penalty System. If the Solo Chair Umpire and Roving
Umpires have overruled a player or doubles team twice, the Umpire
shall penalize each subsequent overrule under the ITA Point Penalty
System. The failure to have an appeal upheld is not treated as an
overrule.
20. Excessive appeals for the apparent sake of disrupting play. A Solo Chair
Umpire shall caution any player making excessive appeals for the
apparent sake of disrupting play. Thereafter, if the Solo Chair Umpire
determines that the player is making appeals for the apparent sake of
disrupting play, he may penalize the player under the ITA Point
Penalty System.
C. Service and Service Returns
1. No more than twenty seconds between points. Both the server and
receiver must be ready to begin the next point within twenty seconds
of when the ball went out of play. Each player has the right to the full
twenty seconds to prepare for the next point.
2. Server’s appeal of a first serve that receiver calls good. The server (or
server’s partner in doubles) may make a first volley or half-volley of
the return of an out first serve which was played before appealing to
the Chair Umpire or Roving Umpire for an overrule. But if the server
(and the server’s partner in doubles) remains in the back court, the
appeal must be made before hitting the ball.
• If the appeal is granted, the server gets a second serve.
• If the appeal is not granted, then the point goes to the receiver.
A server whose appeal is denied is not subject to penalty under the ITA
Point Penalty System by virtue of the failure of his appeal.
3. Feinting, changing position, and intentional distraction. A player may feint
with the body while the ball is in play. A player may change position at any
time, including while the server is tossing the ball. Any movement or
sound that is made solely to distract an opponent, including, but not
limited to, waving the arms or racket or stamping the feet, is not allowed.
The receiver’s partner shall not stand in the receiver’s service box before or
during the serve. If a player does so, he shall be warned that if he does
so again he is subject to being penalized under the ITA Point Penalty
System.
4. Player should not return obviously out serves. A player should not
return a serve that is obviously out even when the return is
accompanied by an “out” call. This is a form of rudeness or
gamesmanship. A player may return a fast serve that just misses the
line inasmuch as the return is often a matter of self-protection.
5. Receiver who corrects his fault call to good loses the point. If the
receiver returns a ball and simultaneously calls a fault and then
changes his call to good, then the receiver loses the point because of
interference of play, even if the return is good.
6. If receiver is ready, then his partner is deemed ready. If the receiver has
indicated that he is ready and the server serves an ace, the receiver’s
partner cannot claim a let because he was not ready. The receiver’s
indication of being ready is tantamount to indicating that his team is ready.
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 247

D. ITA Scoring Systems
1. NCAA Divisions I, II and III, NAIA, and Junior and Community College
Matches. Regular scoring shall be used in all the ITA national, regional,
and sanctioned matches, unless both coaches agree otherwise.
E. ITA Point Penalty System, Defaults, and Unintentional Time Violations
1. Unsportsmanlike conduct is punished under ITA Point Penalty System.
Ethical and sportsmanlike conduct of players must be observed at all
times. Inappropriate conduct includes but is not limited to:
— Visible or audible obscenity or profanity;
— Racquet abuse;
— Ball abuse;
— Verbal or physical abuse of an official or player;
— Delay after a timeout, treatment at a changeover, being directed to
resume play, or a time violation;
— Being overruled more than two times; and
— Unsportsmanlike conduct.
A player who engages in such conduct commits a code violation and, he is
subject to being penalized under the ITA Point Penalty System.
2. Referee should advise players and coaches about the ITA Point Penalty
System. The Referee should always issue a general explanation to players
and coaches before the match about the ITA Point Penalty System. He
should define appropriate court behavior and enumerate specific types of
conduct violations and unsportsmanlike conduct in general.
3. ITA Schedule of Penalties. The “Warning” is not a part of the ITA Point
Penalty System, which consists of the following:
a. Point Penalty
b. Game Penalty
c. Disqualification
4. Referee has sole power to default players during dual meet matches and
ITA sanctioned tournaments. The Referee has sole power to default
players during dual meet matches and ITA sanctioned tournaments. If
there is a Chair Umpire or Roving Umpire, they are empowered to assess
point and game penalties but must inform the Referee in case a default
must be assessed.
Time Period
During Singles Match
Between Singles and
Doubles Matches
During Doubles Match
After Doubles Match
When Penalty Is Assessed
During Singles Match
If there is another singles match,
assess at start of that match;
otherwise assess at start of next
doubles match
During Doubles Match
If there is another doubles match,
assess at start of next doubles
match; otherwise assess at start of
next singles match
248 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

5. ITA Carry-Over Rules. The following ITA carry over rules shall be used in
national and sanctioned singles and doubles tournaments:
a. Penalties assessed during a match do not carry over to next
match. The ITA Point Penalty System is cumulative throughout
any individual singles or doubles match, but is also selfcontained.
All penalties assessed during a match will be erased at
the end of the match. The next match (whether singles or
doubles) will start with a “clean slate.”
b. Carry-over of code violations occurring after a match is over to
player’s next match. If a player commits a code violation after his
singles match is over, the penalty shall be assessed:
• At the start of his next singles match (consolation or main
draw); but
• If he has been eliminated from all singles competitions, then the
penalty will be assessed at the start of his next doubles match.
If a player commits a code violation after his doubles
match is over, the penalty shall be assessed:
• At the start of his next doubles match; but
• If the player has been eliminated from the doubles
competition, the penalty will be assessed at the start of his
next singles match. (Note that in this case the penalty will be
assessed against only the player who committed the
violation and not against both team members.)
c. Carry-over penalties are not part of progressive schedule of
penalties for next match. When a penalty is assessed under the
carry-over provision, that penalty does not count as part of the
progressive schedule of penalties for that match. For example,
Player A, who has just lost, commits a code violation after his
singles match. Player A is entitled to play in the singles
consolation so the penalty will be assessed at the start of his
consolation match. He then commits a code violation during the
consolation match. He is assessed a point penalty for that
violation.
d. Multiple Offenses. The Point Penalty System is in effect for carry
over purposes. If more than one violation occurs following a
player’s participation, that player may be subject to a game
penalty or disqualification to be applied under the carry over
provisions.
e. Singles player who is defaulted may normally play doubles. A
player who is defaulted in singles may play doubles, except when
the Referee (or the Referee in consultation with the Games
Committee in the case of an ITA national or sanctioned event)
determine that extraordinary and extreme circumstances (eg. see
paragraph 9. below) exist which require that he be barred from
playing doubles.
f. Doubles player who is defaulted may normally play singles. A
member of a doubles team that is defaulted may play singles,
except when the Referee (or the Referee in consultation with the
Games Committee in the case of an ITA national or sanctioned
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 249

event) determine that extraordinary and extreme circumstances (eg.
see paragraph 9. below) exist which require that he be barred from
playing singles.
g. In doubles, code violations are assessed against the team and not
individually. In doubles, the players are penalized as a team and not
as individual players.
6. Time violations. Time violations occur when a player takes more than 20
seconds between points or takes more than 90 seconds on
changeovers. A warning shall be given for the first violation.
Subsequent delays shall be penalized by a point loss for each violation,
with no accumulation. These violations are not part of the ITA Point
Penalty system.
7. Player who has been overruled twice shall thereafter be penalized under
the Point Penalty System. If the Solo Chair Umpire and Roving
Umpires have overruled a player or doubles team twice, the Umpire
shall penalize each subsequent overrule under the ITA Point Penalty
System. The failure to have an appeal upheld is not treated as an
overrule.
8. Physical contact prohibited. All physical contact between opposing
players, opposing coaches, a player and a coach, a player and an official
or a coach and an official is strictly prohibited. The Referee (or the
Referee in consultation with the Games Committee in the case of ITA
national and sanctioned events) shall immediately default any player
who initiates contact.
a. Singles player is barred from playing doubles. If the offense takes
place in singles and the offending player is playing doubles, he
shall be barred from doubles. Another player may be substituted
for the player who has been barred only if the original team has
not played a match and if the substitution would not change the
seedings.
b. Doubles player is barred from playing singles. If the offense takes
place in doubles, the offending player shall be barred from playing
singles.
9. Player outbursts may be penalized. An official following an appeal, who
hears a verbal outburst or grunting that is loud enough to disrupt play on a
neighboring court, shall caution the player that subsequent outbursts shall
be penalized under the ITA Point Penalty System.
10. Referee at ITA national and sanctioned events may disqualify a player
after consultation with the Games Committee. The Referee of ITA
national and sanctioned events may disqualify a player after
consultation with the Games Committee. The Referee is always a
member of the Games Committee at all ITA and sanctioned events.
11. Referee shall report defaults to ITA Ethics and Infractions Committee. In
all cases involving a player default, the tournament Referee must write a
report of this incident to the ITA Ethics and Infractions Committee.The
Committee may contact the Director of Athletics of the player’s school.
12. Player or coach ejected from match. A player or coach ejected from a
match must leave the tennis venue for the duration of the team match and
not be in an area where they are visible, in viewing distance.
250 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

13. Spitting. Spitting at or in the direction of an opponent or an official will be a
code violation and possible default. Spitting on the Court will be cautioned.
The player will be asked to spit off the Court or through the fence. If the
player continues to spit on the Court, it will be a code violation.
F. Restrictions on Players and Spectators
1. Spectators and other players barred from the court and adjacent court
in men’s tennis. In men’s tennis, no players or spectators shall be
allowed on the playing court or an adjacent court other than the
participants, except to attend to an ill or injured player.
2. Fellow women’s players may get no closer than the center service line of
the adjacent court. In women’s tennis, players are permitted no closer
than the center service line on the adjacent court. The Referee may
move the players further away.
3. Harassment of players prohibited. Team members and their spectators
shall not harass opposing team players. Electronic sound devices shall
not be used during play.
a. Harassment directed at individual match:
i. A warning may be given to the offender and the coach; and
ii. A point penalty shall be assessed at each following occurrence.
b. Harassment not match specific. If the harassment is not match
specific, the following steps shall be taken for continuing
infractions:
i. A warning may be given to the offender and the coach.
ii. A point penalty shall be assessed immediately against the
highest match in progress.
iii. A point penalty shall be assessed immediately against every
match in progress.
iv. Repeat the third step (iii.) each time the harassment occurs.
G. Warm-up
1. Five minute warm-up under normal conditions. Players shall have a
maximum of five minutes for warm-up before a match, unless the teams
were not able to take their thirty minute warm-up before the start of the
team match, in which case a ten minute warm-up is permitted. The Chair
Umpire or tournament Referee shall time the warm-up. Otherwise the
coaches must oversee the warm-up period.
2. All warm-up serves must be taken before the start of play. All warm-up
serves must be taken before the start of play. If the match is umpired,
the Umpire should give a warning when two minutes are left in the
warm-up.
3. Match starts with warm-up. The official start of a match is marked when
the on court warm-up begins between the two opponents (or two
doubles teams). It is mandatory to warm-up with the opponent/
opposing doubles team.
H. Timeouts, Bathroom Breaks, and Equipment Adjustment
1. Medical timeout. The USTA medical timeout regulation, USTA Regulation
III.E. and USTA Table 10, applies with the following exceptions:
a. In NCAA Division I, a player may have one medical timeout per
match. Should the player need an additional medical timeout, the
player will be retired. Exceptions are the bleeding timeout (which
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 251

follows USTA Rules) and the medical timeout taken for a bathroom
visit at an unauthorized time.
b. All other Divisions. NCAA Division II & III, NAIA and Junior/
Community College will default to the USTA medical timeout rule.
c. In all Divisions, a player may have one medical timeout during the
warm-up and another medical timeout during the match for the
same condition, following USTA Rules.
d. Coach may assist. When an obvious injury occurs, a coach may
assist and touch the player until a trainer arrives to diagnose and
treat the injury.
e. Length of timeout. Once the trainer reaches the player, the
trainer has a maximum of five minutes for diagnosis and
treatment. The maximum amount of time for treatment shall be
three minutes.
f. A trainer shall always be available to assist the player.
g. USTA Regulation III.F. Toilet visit does not apply.
h. Player may be treated on any changeover.
2. Bathroom breaks. A player must ask an official for a designated
“bathroom break.” The official may refuse this request if he determines
that the player is resorting to gamesmanship. Division I women are
allowed reasonable time for bathroom breaks and should take them on a
90-second changeover or set break.
If a player is able to take a bathroom break during the 90-second
changeover, this is permitted in addition to the bathroom breaks
described above.
3. No bathroom breaks in Men’s Division I Tennis. No bathroom breaks
shall be permitted in Men’s Division I Tennis. Men will have 90
seconds during the changeover to use the bathroom. After 90
seconds, the player will be subject to time violation penalties
(Warning, Point, Point, etc.) If no bathroom is available within a
reasonable distance from the courts, it is the responsibility of the
coaches and the Referee to determine prior to the start of the match,
how much time may be allowed. If a bathroom break is necessary for
medical problems, the break is to be treated as a medical timeout.
4. Contact lenses. Loss of a contact lens is considered an equipment
timeout. The Referee or Umpire may give the player up to fifteen
minutes to take care of the problem.
5. Foreign objects in the eye. The Referee or Umpire may give a player who
gets dust, an insect, or a foreign object in his eye a three minute timeout
to take care of the problem.
6. Refusal to give timeout when underlying purpose is gamesmanship.
The Referee or Umpire may refuse to give a player a timeout he is
otherwise entitled to receive if the Referee concludes that the player is
clearly resorting to gamesmanship.
7. Player who defaults from singles consolations normally may not play
doubles later that day. A player who is defaulted or retires from the
consolation singles due to injury or loss of conditioning may not play in
the main draw doubles later the same day. The Games committee may
waive this rule if a doctor or on-site official trainer confers with the player
and provides written documentation of the injury or loss of condition.
252 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

I. Rest Periods, Continuous Play, and Time Between Matches
1. No rest periods between second and third sets. There shall be no rest
period between the second and third sets. Extreme Heat: If the
temperature is 90° at the start of the match, the players shall be
offered a 10 minute rest period between the second and third sets.
Extreme heat situations apply to team competition (dual meets).
2. Ninety seconds allowed for changeovers. When changing ends a
maximum of ninety seconds shall elapse from the moment the ball goes
out of play at the end of the game to the time the ball is struck for the
first point of the next game. Umpires, if any, should call “Time” after one
minute in order to get the players back on the court if they haven’t
already left their chairs.
3. Rests between matches. After a match that lasts more than one hour, a
player may receive a rest period of up to 45 minutes. After a match that
lasts more than one and one half hours, a player may receive a rest
period of up to one hour. The Games Committee has the discretion to
modify these rules.
J. Coaching
1. When coaching is allowed. A coach may coach a player any time during
the match so long as he does not interfere with play. Coaches shall be
designated before the doubles matches and may only be redesignated
before the singles matches. Use of electronic communication devices
(e.g. walkie-talkies and cell phones) is prohibited.
2. Penalties when coach interferes with play. The purpose of coaching is to
offer advice to the player. Coaches shall not in any way distract or
annoy the opposing player. If a coach in any way interferes with play or
distracts an opposing player at any time, he shall receive a direct
warning from the Referee or Umpire. For any subsequent violation, his
player, on the court where the violation occurred, shall be assessed a
point penalty. Penalties for coaching are not treated as part of the ITA
Point Penalty System, and they do not accumulate.
3. Who may coach. Coaching is permitted by the head coach and two
designated coaches, who may be an assistant coach and/or a registered
volunteer coach and/or player. All assistant coaches and volunteer
coaches must be on the institutional coaching list and registered with
their respective school. Two coaches may coach on the same court at one
time.
4. Where coaches may coach. A coach may sit or stand near the net post
and must stay within the area where the players’ chairs or benches are
located or should be provided. The coach’s movement shall be limited
so as to not distract the players. A coach may change courts when his
movement will not interrupt play. Coaching is permitted outside the
fence perimeter. On an empty adjacent court, the coach may stand at the
doubles sideline on the same side as his own player. On the opponent’s
side, he must remain at midcourt. Coaches may coach within the lines
of the court only during a changeover or set break.
5. Conversations of coach with opposing player banned. A coach shall not
initiate a conversation with the opposing player or in any way get involved
with an on-court problem, except at the request of the Solo Chair Umpire,
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 253

tournament Referee, or the player or the coach of the player involved. At
no time should a player initiate a conversation with an opposing coach.
Violation of these provisions by the coach are subject to the Coach’s Code
of Conduct, Violations by the player shall result in the application of the
Point Penalty System.
6. On court problems. If a coach needs to be consulted due to a problem on
the court, it is desirable for the opposing coach to be present.
7. No Cheerleading. Coaches shall not cheerlead. A simple “good shot” or
a polite clap is not considered cheerleading.
K. Coaches’ Code of Conduct
The conduct of coaches before, during, and after any competition must be
exemplary.
Any deviation from this standard shall result in:
— a direct warning from the Referee or Umpire;
— if the coach’s behavior continues following the warning, the Referee
or official shall immediately assess a point penalty against his player
(on the court where the behavior occurred); if the behavior occurs
off court, the point shall be assessed immediately on the highest
match in progress; if the behavior occurs between the doubles and
singles matches, then the penalties shall be assessed on the singles
match once it begins; if the Referee assesses the penalty, there shall
be no appeal; if an official assesses the penalty, the coach may
appeal to the Referee, whose decision shall be final;
— if there are any further behavior problems with the coach, the
Referee may bar the coach from continuing to coach for the rest of
the event; and
— if the coach continues to coach, the Referee may declare a default of
all the coach’s players and teams whose matches are still in progress.
If the Referee bars a coach from further coaching or if he declares a
default, then he shall write a report to the coach’s Athletic Director and
send a copy to the ITA Ethics and Infractions Committee.
L. Equipment and Attire
1. Tennis Balls
a. Ball usage. In NCAA Division I singles: one can of balls (3 balls)
per set must be used, and in doubles: four (4) balls per doubles
pro-set must be used. In all other Divisions, a minimum of three
new yellow tennis balls, ITF-approved, shall be provided for each
match. The balls shall be changed at the end of the second set. In
doubles, four (4) balls per doubles pro-set must be used.
b. Wilson balls required for ITA national and regional championships
and all ITA sanctioned events. The official tennis ball of ITA is the
Wilson ball. It must be used in all ITA national and regional
championships, and all ITA sanctioned events.
c. Wilson balls recommended for dual matches. Whenever possible
ITA coaches should use the Wilson tennis ball in all dual meet
matches.
d. Replacement of lost or damaged balls. In a Solo Chair Umpired
match, the Umpire shall decide when to replace a lost or damaged
254 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

all. The Referee shall make this decision in all other situations. If
a Referee is not available, then both coaches must agree on this
decision. Lost or damaged balls shall be replaced with used balls
of comparable wear except when a ball is lost or damaged within
two games of when new balls were introduced.
2. Tennis Attire
a. Whenever possible, all ITA competitors should wear their official team
uniform during competition, warm-up, and the awards
ceremonies. If official uniforms are not available, wearing apparel
with school emblems or initials are recommended.
b. College players’ use of all athletic equipment and clothing from a
manufacturer or commercial enterprise shall adhere strictly to
NCAA rules.
M. Seeding—Ratio of 1 to 4
Players may be seeded in a ratio of one seed per four players.
N. Penalties for Lateness at Start of Match
1. Default after 15 minutes. In all ITA events (singles, doubles & team), the
Referee, after consultation with the Games Committee, may default a
player or team for being 15 minutes late for the starting time of the match.
2. Game penalties for lateness. If a court is available, the Referee may
penalize the late player or team one game for each 5 minutes or fraction
thereof of lateness. The late player or team also loses the toss. No more
than three games shall be assessed for lateness.
O. Post Match Interviews
In all ITA national championship events, the players shall make themselves
available upon request for media interviews within 10 minutes of the
completion of their matches. Failure to do so may result in the Men’s or
Women’s ITA National Tournament Committee disqualifying the player from
the tournament or from the next ITA Collegiate Rankings.
P. Eligibility for Collegiate Competition
Only players who are considered eligible for intercollegiate competition at the
time of entry:
by their school;
their conference (if any); AND
by their National governing body (e.g. NCAA or NAIA)
shall be eligible to participate in ITA sanctioned events and regional and
national collegiate championships. This rule applies equally to players who
are playing “unattached.”
Junior players not yet matriculating at a college level and professional
players not in school shall not compete in these intercollegiate events.
II. TEAM COMPETITION—DUAL MEET MATCHES AND TEAM TOURNAMENTS
A. Formats for Team Play
1. Six Singles followed by Three Doubles with Nine Team Points (6-3
Format). The format is six best-of-three set singles matches
followed by three eight game pro set doubles matches with a
tie-break at eight games all.
2. Three Doubles followed by Six Singles (3-6 Format). The format is
three eight game pro set doubles matches with a 12 point
tie-break at eight games all followed by six best-of-three set
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 255

singles matches.
3. Team Point formats. Team point are awarded in one of two ways.
a. Seven team points. Each singles match is worth one point.
The team that wins two or more of the three doubles
matches receives one point. Four or more points are
required to win the team match.
b. Nine team points. Each singles and doubles match is worth
one point for a total of nine points. Five or more points are
required to win the team match.
4. Matches shall be played to completion. All matches shall be
played to completion. Once the outcome of the doubles point (in a
seven team point format) has been determined, the remaining
match shall be played with a shortened format, with a 7-point
Tiebreak if the score reaches 7-7. Once the outcome of the team
match has been decided, a shortened format shall be played unless
both coaches agree otherwise. Matches still in the second set shall
play a Match Tiebreak for the third set. Any match already in the
third set shall be played to completion. A match that has not
started shall be the best of three sets with a Match Tiebreak in lieu
of the third set.
5. Men’s and Women’s Division I (3-6). The Men’s and Women’s
Division I format is 3-6 with seven team points. Players are given
a 10 minute break after their doubles matches. Should there be a
last minute change in the singles line-up, the opposing coach may
continue to meet with his players for up to an additional 5 minutes
after the line-up change is presented.
6. Other authorized Division I formats. In Division I, other formats
may be used as long as at least six individual players per team are
involved, both coaches agree on the format, and the format used
is not in conflict with conference rules.
7. Men’s and Women’s Division II (3-6). The format in Division II is
3-6 with nine team points.
8. Men's and Women's Division III (3-6). The format for men's and
women's Division III is 3-6 with nine team points. Players are
given a 5 minute break after their doubles matches.
9. Men’s and Women’s NAIA (3-6). The recommended format in
Men’s and Women’s NAIA is 3-6 with seven team points. Each
conference determines the format to be used.
10. Men’s and Women’s NAIA National Championships (3-6). The
format for the National Championships is 3-6 with nine team
points.
11. Men’s and Women’s Junior and Community College (6-3). The
format in Men’s and Women’s Junior and Community College
matches is 6-3 with nine team points.
B. General Rules
1. Rules for individual competition apply unless stated otherwise. The
rules for individual competition shall apply for team competition unless
specifically stated otherwise.
2. Conference rules. Conference rules shall supersede ITA rules when
matches are played between two teams within the same conference.
256 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

3. Matches between schools from different conferences. If a dual meet
match is played between teams from different conferences, then ITA
rules shall be followed.
4. Written contracts. Competing schools must sign written contracts for
dual matches. These contracts should be initiated by the home team and
should include all specified agreements or arrangements, such as
practice times and courts, starting time of match, use of indoor facilities,
scoring system, match format, balls, etc. The failure of a team to honor
the contract shall result in a default.
5. Limits on number of players who may play. There is no limit on the
number of players who may play in a dual meet match, unless
limitations are agreed to in the written contract signed by both schools
or unless conference rules provide otherwise. There may be a limit
placed on the number of players allowed to play in other sanctioned
team competitions. The USTA/ITA National Indoor Championships limits
each team to a maximum of eight players.
6. Bona fide institutional representative. Each team should be accompanied
by a bona fide institutional representative at all matches.
7. Home coach is responsible for spectator conduct. The home coach
shall make sure that the behavior of the spectators remains fair and
non-abusive. Under no circumstances may alcoholic beverages be
permitted at the site of a collegiate tennis match. Failure of the coach to
insure proper behavior shall result in the application of the ITA Point
Penalty System against the home team and in extreme cases, forfeiture
of the match.
8. Constitution of a team match for Small Colleges for ITA Ranking
Purposes. In small college tennis, a collegiate team match must consist
of six singles and three doubles to be considered for ITA team ranking.
9. Order of play on fewer than six courts. If fewer than six courts are being
used, start the singles with the number one match and continue starting
matches in numerical order.
10. Matches are best of three sets. All singles matches in a team meet shall
be best of three sets. All doubles matches in a team meet shall be an
eight game pro set.
11. Unfinished matches don’t count. Unfinished individual singles and doubles
matches shall not count in any way toward the final team scores. Unplayed
matches in ITA sanctioned tournaments do not count towards a player’s
win/loss record or for rankings.
12. Determining the winner of a team meet. Except in men’s and women’s
Division I tennis, the winner of a team meet is the team that wins the
majority of the individual matches (e.g. 5 out of 9 matches).
In men’s and women’s Division I tennis, (3-6 format), the winner
shall be the team that wins four points. All matches should be played to
completion, unless there are extenuating circumstances. An unfinished
match will be treated as a default by the withdrawing team, unless the
decision not to finish is mutually made by both coaches.
13. Inclement weather. Collegiate tennis is an outdoor sport. All matches shall
be played outdoors unless weather or court conditions threaten the health
and safety of student athletes or if contracted otherwise for winter
month competition. In the event of inclement weather, a team match
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 257

shall be continued indoors if varsity quality tennis facilities are
available. (See II.C.1. for a definition of varsity quality tennis facility).
a. Determining playable outdoor weather conditions
i. The projected weather forecast, for a minimum of two
hours out of a four-hour time period from the start of the
match, according to www.weather.com shall be:
• A high of at least 50°; or
• Sustained winds (not including wind gusts) of 20 miles
per hour or less.
ii. If the outdoor conditions have changed by the end of the
doubles play, it is understood that both coaches and the
Referee may agree to move the match indoors. If play is
suspended at any other point during the match due to
weather, play must resume outdoors within one hour of the
delay. If this is not possible, matches must be moved
indoors.
iii. When no indoor back-up is available, the match must be played
outdoors unless weather conditions are hazardous. If play is
suspended due to weather conditions, it is suggested that play
resume within two hours of the delay.
b. Decision to move indoors shall be made up to one hour before
start of match. The decision to move indoors shall be made up to
one hour before the start of the match if the weather conditions
are forecasted not to improve.
c. Matches played indoors. If a match is moved indoors due to
inclement weather, the indoor facility or covered courts must meet
the playable outdoor weather conditions stated in Rule II.B.13.a.
d. Match moved indoors stays indoors. If the match is moved indoors
due to inclement weather or darkness, it shall stay indoors until the
completion of the match.
e. Games Committee may modify inclement weather rules. In a
sanctioned team tournament, the Games Committee may modify
the inclement weather rule, if absolutely necessary.
f. Inclement weather procedures. The procedure to follow in the
event of darkness, inclement weather, or lack of acceptable indoor
facilities shall be reached between coaches before the start of a
match, preferably in the original match contract. If a postponed
match can be scheduled within a 48 hour period, the match shall
resume at the point of interruption. Otherwise, the match is not
replayed or continued at a later date unless both coaches agree to
do so or unless conference rules dictate otherwise.
14. Teams withdrawing. In a dual team meet, a team shall not cancel a
match due to ill or injured players. In the ITA National Indoor Team
Championships or a sanctioned team tournament, any team
withdrawing from the event once a written commitment has been made,
may only do so because of injuries or academic probation affecting a
minimum of three of the starting eight players. The injuries and
probation must be attested to by the team doctor and Athletic Director
in writing. Otherwise the team withdrawing will be penalized with three
258 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

defaults for ranking purposes.
15. Failing to play after a dual team tournament has started. Once a team
tournament has started, failure to play a team match shall result in a
default. This loss and any subsequent backdraw losses shall count as
ranking losses.
16. Consequences of failing to follow ITA rules. Failure to follow ITA rules in
any ITA sanctioned team tournament will cause the forfeiture of the ITA
sanction, and the results from such an event will not be considered for
ITA ranking purposes.
17. Matches between schools from different divisions. If a dual match is
played between teams from different divisions, the format of the home
team’s division shall be played, unless otherwise specified by written
contract.
C. Facilities and Equipment
1. Varsity quality tennis facility. A varsity quality tennis facility is one used
exclusively for tennis. The playing surface shall be of hard court
construction, designed specifically for tennis, and coated with a
recognized tennis surface. The only lines on the playing surface shall be
standard tennis court lines. A multi-purpose recreational facility is not
acceptable.
The playing surface shall extend from the backdrop to the backdrop.
Each backdrop shall be located at least 18 feet behind the baseline. The
backdrop curtains shall be at least 12 feet high. The walls of the facility
shall be at least 16 feet high. The ceiling shall be at least 35 feet high at
the net. The distance between the doubles lines of adjacent courts shall
be at least 10 feet.
The lighting shall average at least 75 foot candles with individual
lights placed in locations as specified by USTA guidelines for indoor
courts. Lighting levels shall be uniform over the primary playing area.
Visible light sources shall not be located directly over the singles courts.
Any matches played at an indoor facility not meeting these standards
must be agreed to in writing by both coaches before the start of the
match.
2. The host school shall provide for each match:
a. Center net straps;
b. Singles sticks and net measuring sticks (N.B. Singles sticks shall
be used in all matches where singles will be played on a doubles
court);
c. Scoreboards to display the running score for each court;
d. Team scoreboards;
e. ITF-approved championship tennis balls;
f. Water and first aid supplies; and
g. Dressing facilities, if requested by the visiting team (The visiting
team is usually responsible for its own towels).
3. When possible the host school shall provide:
a. Scorekeepers who shall act in an impartial and non-partisan manner;
b. Umpires;
c. Trainer services; and
d. Conference rule book (if any).
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 259

D. Practice Courts
1. Practice the day before or the morning before the match. When
requested, the host school shall make three practice courts (the same
courts as will be used in the match itself) available to the visiting team:
— for a minimum of two hours in the afternoon before the scheduled
match and
— one hour on the morning of the match.
The visiting coach must request these arrangements in writing at
least one week before his team’s arrival. The only exception is if
circumstances governing varsity court usage renders compliance
impossible. This must be confirmed in writing by the Director of
Athletics of the host school.
2. Practice immediately before start of match. In all cases, the visiting team
must be permitted to hit on three of the match courts for a minimum of 30
minutes immediately before the start of the team match.
E. Officials
1. Home coach is responsible for providing officials. The home coach shall
have available qualified persons to serve as officials. USTA certified
officials are considered qualified. In order for an official to be
considered "qualified," the official must attend both an ITA and a USTA
Sectional re-certification class, pass both the USTA Sectional and ITA
tests every year, and do the required work.
2. Two officials required for Division I Matches. In order to be
considered for ITA Rankings in Division I, the host school shall provide a
minimum of two USTA certified officials for each dual meet match. The only
exceptions shall be when USTA officials are not available or when the
coaches shall agree in writing before the start of the match that two USTA
officials are not required.
3. Neutral qualified Referee and Roving Official. It is strongly recommended
that the home team provide two neutral qualified officials for every team
match. These officials must be certified by the USTA, where USTA
certified officials are available. Whenever more than one official is
present, one official shall be designated as the Referee. The other official
may act as a Roving Umpire assisting the Referee.
Any Division I team wishing to be ranked by the ITA shall provide a
certified official who shall act as the Referee and one other official who
shall act as a Roving Official. Failure to do so should be reported
immediately to the ITA National Tournament Committee.
4. Requests for officials. If a coach or the player requests an official, the
Referee shall make the assignment. Play may be suspended for a
maximum of five minutes while an official is sought.
5. Referee may serve as Solo Chair Umpire if no one else is available. If no
one else is available the Referee may serve as Solo Chair Umpire. The
Referee continues to serve as Referee to the best of his ability.
6. When Referee has only one match under his jurisdiction. Once the
Referee has only one match under his specific jurisdiction, if requested,
he must go into the chair or stand near the net post in order to have a
better view of the match.
F. Trainer
1. Host school shall provide trainer. The host school shall provide the
260 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

services of a qualified trainer, preferably at the match site or at a training
facility within a five-minute walk of the match site. The NAIA recommends,
but does not require, a home team trainer at all home matches.
2. Referee has discretion to determine time allowed to locate trainer. The
Referee shall use his discretion in determining the time allotted to locate
a trainer if one cannot be found or is not available within five minutes of
the injury.
G. ITA Scoring Systems in Team Matches in all Divisions
Regular scoring shall be used in all team matches, unless both coaches agree
otherwise, or conference rules dictate otherwise.
H. ITA Point Penalty System and Defaults
1. Only Referee, Solo Chair Umpire, and Roving Umpires may assess code
violations in team matches. In team matches, only the Referee, Solo
Chair Umpire, and Roving Umpires may implement the ITA Point
Penalty System, unless both coaches agree otherwise. In a non-Division
I match if there is no official, both coaches must confer and agree
before assessing a code violation, unless a coach is coding his own
players.
2. Disqualification. The designated Referee has the sole power to
disqualify players during dual meet matches and ITA sanctioned
tournaments. Before disqualifying a player in a dual meet, the
Referee shall confer with both coaches and any other officials.
Coaches shall have the opportunity to offer an explanation of the
situation to the designated Referee. It two officials are supervising
the match (see II.E.1.-2.), they both must agree to the
disqualification.
In team tournaments the coaches shall have the right to appeal the
disqualification to the Tournament Committee. The player shall be
disqualified if there is no appeal or if the appeal is denied.
A Chair Umpire or Roving Umpire may give point and game penalties.
The Chair Umpire and Roving Umpire shall inform the Referee so that he
can stand by in case a disqualification must be given.
3. Carry over of code violations after a match is over in team competitions.
The following carry over rules apply in team competitions:
Code violation after the completion of a match.
a. Team matches where doubles is played first, followed by singles.
If a player commits a code violation after his/her doubles match is
complete, the penalty shall be assessed to the highest remaining
doubles team still in progress at the start of the next game or
immediately in a tie breaker. (For 7-point team format: the penalty
is assessed provided the doubles point has not yet been decided.
If the doubles point has been decided, the carry over penalty shall
be assessed at the start of that player's singles match). If that
player is not playing in the singles, the carry over penalty shall be
assessed to the no. 1 singles player from that team. If a player
commits a code violation after his/her singles match is complete,
the penalty shall be assessed to the highest remaining singles
player still on the court at the start of the next game or
immediately in a tie breaker.
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 261

There are five separate time segments when a player can commit
a code violation:
• During his/her first match (doubles) of the dual meet;
• After his/her first match (doubles) of the dual meet but
before the doubles point has been decided.
• After his/her first match (doubles) of the dual meet but
after the doubles point has been decided. (Applies only
to 7-point team format).
• During his/her second match (singles) of the dual
meet;
• After his/her second match (singles) of the dual meet.
b. In team matches where singles is played first, followed by
doubles. If a player commits a code violation after his/her
singles match is complete, the penalty shall be assessed to
the highest remaining singles player still on the court at the
start of the next game or immediately in a tie breaker. If the
singles matches have been completed, the carry over
penalty shall be assessed at the start of that player’s next
match. If that player is not playing in doubles, the penalty
shall be assessed to the no. 1 doubles team. If a player
commits a code violation after his/her doubles match is
complete, the penalty shall be assessed to the highest
remaining doubles team still in progress at the start of the
next game or immediately in a tie breaker.
There are four separate time segments when a player can commit
a code violation:
• During his/her first match (singles) of the dual meet;
• After his/her first match of the dual meet but where
singles matches remain in progress;
• During his/her second match (doubles) of the dual
meet;
• After his/her second match (doubles) of the dual meet
but where doubles matches remain in progress.
c. For the purpose of imposing Carry-over penalties after a
doubles match, the two doubles players remain a team until
one or both of them have left the court.
4. Penalties for physical contact between teams.
a. Singles player is barred from playing doubles. If the offense
takes place in singles and the offending player is playing
doubles, he shall be barred from doubles and another player
may be substituted in his place.
b. Doubles player is barred from playing singles. If doubles is
played first, the offending player shall be barred from
playing singles. All other players shall move up a position,
and a player may be substituted at the bottom of the line-up.
I. Starting Time
1. Starting time. All matches should begin promptly at the specified
starting time. The Referee shall make sure that the start of the team
match conforms to the time established in the contract unless a
262 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

different time is agreed upon by both coaches. By mutual agreement of
the coaches, individual matches may be delayed by a predetermined
period of time to accommodate a player late for a legitimate reason.
2. Team penalty for being late. If there has been no direct communication
with the team arriving late, the following should be applied: A team not
ready to begin the match within 15 minutes of the specified starting
time will lose the doubles point(s). A team is not ready to begin within
1 hour of the specified start time will forfeit the remaining singles
matches. However, under any and all circumstances, if a team is not
ready to begin its team match at the specified starting time, each player
on the starting lineup in singles shall begin one game down and shall
be deemed to have lost the toss. Under extenuating circumstances,
both coaches may agree to start the match at a later time.
J. Warm-up
For all Division I team matches and team tournaments, the warm-up shall
not exceed three minutes. For all other team matches and team
tournaments, the length of the warm-up shall not exceed five minutes,
except when the visiting team has not had a minimum of 30 minutes
warm-up directly before the start of the team match. In this case, a ten
minute warm-up will be permitted.
K. Team Line-ups
1. Exchange of line-ups and scorebooks. One hour before the start of the
match, the coaches shall simultaneously exchange their complete
singles and doubles line-ups. The ITA Scorebooks shall show all team
results throughout the year up to that day. If a coach does not have his
scorebook, the Referee shall send a letter to the ITA Ethics and
Infractions Committee.
2. Only physically able players shall be listed in the line-up. Coaches shall
list players in the line-up only if they are able to play.
3. Players must play in order of ability. The line-up shall always be based
on order of ability. “Matching up” is prohibited. In singles, players must
compete in order of ability with the best player on the team playing at
the No. 1 position, the second best at No. 2, and so on through all
positions. In case of injury or sickness, all players must move up. This
rule shall also apply to doubles play with the strongest doubles team at
No. 1, etc.
a. A player who has established a winning record at a team position
in six team matches and whose results show that he clearly is
stronger than the players below him may not be moved down. The
line-up must stay in order of ability.
b. If a top-six player (or team) clearly is stronger than the player
immediately above him, then the player must be moved up a
position.
c. Players of equal ability and equal record may alternate between
two adjacent positions so long as the alternating is not done for
the purpose of “matching up.”
d. A player shall not be moved down in the line-up because of:
i. An injury that has lasted and forced the player out of the
lineup for less than three weeks;
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 263

ii. Disciplinary measures; or
iii. Challenge matches after six team matches have been played
after January 1st of a school year.
4. Line-up changes in back-to-back dual matches. In back-to-back dual
meet matches (two consecutive dual meet matches played regardless of
time between matches), the team line-up (as played) may be changed. A
player may move up or down one position in this situation. The line-up
must still stay in order of ability.
5. Line-up changes once a match has begun. In a team match, the official
start of the doubles play of the match is marked when the on-court
warm-up begins between any of the three doubles teams and in singles,
when the warm up begins between any one of the six singles matches. In
NCAA Division I and II, once the warm up begins in any match (on any
number of courts), substitutions are not permitted. In all other Divisions:
if playing on less than 6 courts, the players not on the court may still be
substituted before the start of their warm up. (e.g. if playing on 4 courts
and the No. 5 player gets sick/injured while the No. 1- No. 4 are warming
up, you may move your No. 6 up to No. 5 and slide the remaining players
up.) Matches must be started in accordance to ITA Rule II.B.9.
6. Removing players from the team line-up. Before the start of the
dual-meet match, the coach shall submit the three doubles teams and
eight (or all) players available to play. For doubles, see Regulation K.6. If
a singles player is not listed (or in the top eight), the player may not be
inserted in the lineup at any time. The coach may remove a singles player
or players from the initial list after the doubles has been completed. Each
player listed below the removed player shall be moved up the appropriate
number of spots. If individual matches have begun, and this prevents
players from moving up, then the withdrawn player forfeits that match. A
player removed from the singles line-up may play doubles.
7. Removing players from the doubles line-up. A coach may remove any
player from the doubles line-up by making a direct line substitution. The
doubles line-up must still be played in order of ability. Players removed
from the doubles line-up may play in singles. Once the match has
officially begun, two players may be substituted for any doubles team
(only if the match begins with singles). The lineup must remain in order
of ability. If a team has 6 or fewer healthy players and a player in the
doubles line-up is injured/sick prior to the start of the match, they may
take a player from another doubles team to join the healthy player. One
of the healthy doubles teams must stay intact. The teams must still play
in order of ability and will default at the No. 3 position.
8. Team that is short on players. A team appearing with an insufficient
number of players shall default matches at the bottom of the line-up
(i.e., the six-man team appearing with five players must default at the
No. 6 singles position and in doubles, at the No. 3 position). If the No. 1
player is not available to compete all players must move up one
position. The No. 1 singles match cannot be forfeited. The minimum
number of players for a dual-meet match is four physically able players.
A team that does not meet this minimum must forfeit the match.
9. Appeals concerning unfair line-ups. If a coach feels that the opponent’s
264 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

line-up as presented is unfair, he should notify the designated Referee
and opposing coach of the protest. Any coach who wishes to submit a
match protest (after the completion of the match) must first inform the
opposing coach in writing (by fax or e-mail), with a copy sent at the
same time to the ITA office. This is necessary even when the opposing
coach and designated Referee were informed of the protest at the time of
the match. This written protest must be made within 48 hours of the
start of the match. If a match is between two schools from the same
conference, the protest must be handled by the conference. Once a
protest has been filed with the ITA Office, it will be sent to an ITA
Regional Ranking Committee if it involves teams from the same region,
or to the ITA National Ranking Committee if it involves teams from
different regions. A protest may also be sent separately to the ITA Ethics
and Infractions Committee, if the case warrants it. An ITA ranking and/or
Operating Committee has the right to make a ruling on a protest and, if
appropriate, reverse or overturn a result for ITA Ranking purposes. The
ITA will then recommend that the NCAA, NAIA, or NICAA committees
consider this ruling for postseason selection/seeding. A coach has the
right to appeal a protest ruling made by an ITA Ranking Committee to the
National Ranking Committee (for rulings made by Regional Ranking
Committees) or to the ITA Operating Committee (for rulings made by the
National Ranking Committee).
10. Moving matches to other courts. Once the dual meet match has begun,
a match shall remain on the same court until its conclusion, unless both
coaches agree to move it to another court. In an ITA national or
sanctioned event, the Referee or Games Committee may move matches,
if necessary. The match is considered to have started when the players
begin warming up together on the court.
11. Starting time for second round of matches.
a. Men’s & Women’s Division I (3-6 format). In Men’s Division I, the
singles players must be ready to play within 10 minutes of
completing their doubles matches. In Women’s Division I, the
singles players must be ready to play within 10 minutes of
completing their doubles matches.
b. All other matches. Each player shall be ready to play doubles
within 15 minutes after the completion of his singles match,
unless both coaches agree otherwise. A coach may request
from the official an additional 15 minutes (for a total of thirty
minutes) if extenuating circumstances exist (i.e. length of
match, trainer accessibility, etc.). Once all four players are
available to begin one of the doubles matches, that match shall
be played as soon as possible on whatever court is available,
unless both coaches agree to wait until the end of the remaining
singles matches.
12. Placement of injured or ill players in line-up. If a player is injured or ill
and cannot play for three weeks or longer, the coach should use his
discretion in determining where to place the player in the team line-up.
If the player has played the majority of his matches at one position, he
must be placed within two positions up or down to be within a “range.”
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 265

This rule does not apply to the NCAA Championships at the end of the
year.
13. Submission of line-ups at men’s ITA sanctioned or national team
events. In a men’s ITA sanctioned or national team event, all team
line-ups must be submitted to the Games Committee the day before
the start of the tournament at a time to be decided by the Tournament
Chair. Once team line-ups have been submitted and approved, no
changes shall be made in the order of the singles or doubles line-up
during the team event.
L. Post Match Considerations
1. Departure from court within 5 minutes. After a dual meet match,
players have 5 minutes to gather their equipment from the court and
leave the immediate playing area.
2. Appeal of a Referee’s decision. If a coach feels that a decision by the
Referee was incorrect and affected the result of the team match and
involves a team match played out of conference, he should file a
written protest with the ITA National Tournament Committee and send
copies to the opposing coach, both Athletic Directors, the Referee and,
when appropriate, to the conference commissioner and USTA office.
The decision of the ITA Ranking Committee on the appeal shall be
binding concerning ITA rankings. The decision shall be communicated
to the athletic directors and NCAA Chairs for their consideration.
3. Protests to ITA National Tournament Committee. If a coach believes a
match was played unfairly, or that the opposing coach did not follow
ITA rules, the coach should protest in writing to the ITA National
Tournament Committee. (See R.7 Appeals concerning unfair lineups.)
4. Home coach shall report scores to local media. The home coach shall
report the scores of the team match to the local media.
Additional Excerpts from ITA
Familiarity with the following excerpts may be helpful to the official in
performing his duties.
III. ITA TOURNAMENTS—Rules, Regulations and Procedures
A. General
1. National and Regional Collegiate Championships
National and regional collegiate championships, are by definition,
only those tournaments exclusively organized and administered
by the Intercollegiate Tennis Association, the NCAA, the NCAA
Conferences, the NAIA or the National Junior College Athletic
Association (NJCAA).
2. ITA Regional Championships
The ITA Regional Championships are administered by ITA
throughout the country from September through November.
3. ITA Sanctioned Events
a. A tournament must be sanctioned by the ITA in order for its
results to count for ranking purposes.
b. The Tournament Director is responsible for obtaining the ITA
sanction, paying sanction fees, ensuring that participants’
266 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

coaches are current ITA members, and filing results with the
ITA office within five days of completion of the tournament.
c. All ITA sanctioned events must use the Wilson tennis ball,
the official ball of the ITA.
d. Complete typed results must be filed with the ITA office, the
ITA National Ranking Coordinator, and the ITA Chair of the
region in which the sanctioned event took place.
e. The ITA office will notify all regional chairs of tournaments
sanctioned in their designated regions and of any
infractions which make the tournament results null and
void for ITA Ranking purposes.
f. It is the responsibility of the coach to file his team’s and
individual player’s results with the appropriate regional and
national ranking coordinator within the deadline for
reporting dates in order for his team and players to be
eligible for ITA Ranking consideration. Results from all ITA
sanctioned tournaments should also be recorded in the ITA
Scorebook.
4. The Draw
In all ITA national and sanctioned events—singles, doubles, and
team—it is obligatory (unless impossible to separate players
(and teams) within geographical regions in all first-round
matches, and also to separate players from the same team in
opposite halves, quarters, etc.
Byes, if any, are determined by lot...
5. ITA Tournament Policy—“Sunday Policy”
Participants (team, singles player, or doubles team) entered in an
ITA national, regional, or sanctioned tournament, will be expected
to compete on all days of the event, including Saturday and
Sunday. There will be no exceptions made for this rule.
B. ITA Games Committee
The Games Committee is comprised of the following individuals at any
specific ITA national or sanctioned event:
1. Tournament Director
2. Tournament Chair
3. Head Referee
4. Staff on-site
5. Members of the ITA National Tournament Committee who are
present at the event
6. Others designated by the Tournament Chair.
The primary function of the Games Committee is to oversee the
running of the tournament event.
IV. ITA NATIONAL INTERCOLLEGIATE EVENTS
A. Withdrawal from ITA National Intercollegiate Event
1. Once a player accepts an invitation, he cannot withdraw due to
academic concerns, except in extreme circumstances attested to by
the Dean’s office (in this case the Tournament Chair shall be
notified in writing by the Dean’s office immediately).
INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS 267

2. Any withdrawal due to physical injury or sickness shall be made
with written documentation from physician and athletic
department, which shall be provided to the Tournament Chair
within 24 hours of injury.
3. A player shall not accept entry if injured and not sure if he can
play except with the written approval of the Tournament Chair. In
this case, if approval is granted, the coach must notify the
Tournament Chair by phone and fax no later than eight days
before the start of the main draw event, if the player is still injured
and not fully recovered at that point.
4. Failure to follow these rules will result in two losses in the ITA
Rankings and the suspension of the player from the participation
in the next ITA national event
B. ITA All-American Championships (Men and Women)
C. ITA National Small College Championships (Men and Women)
D. ITA National Intercollegiate Indoor Championships
(Men and Women)
E. USTA/ITA National Team Indoor Championships
(Men and Women)
F. ITA Division III National Team Indoor Championships (Men)
V. TOURNAMENT MANAGEMENT
A. Meetings
The host institution is responsible for making arrangements for and
scheduling the following meetings, and for notifying the participants in
an advance mailing. All meetings should include the chair of the ITA
National Tournament Committee, the Tournament Director and the
head Referee, whenever possible.
1. ITA Coaches Meeting. A mandatory ITA coaches meeting must be
held on the eve of all ITA National Championship events to review
the tournament format, procedures and any other pertinent
information, as well as general ITA business. Attendance will be
taken at this meeting and a $50.00 (fifty dollar) fine payable to the
ITA will be assessed to those institutions with no representative
(either coach, assistant coach or other bona fide institution
representative) present. Failure to comply with the fine will result
in disqualification from participation at future ITA Grand Slam and
national events.
2. Officials. A meeting with the officials should be scheduled to
review procedures, scoring system, handling of appeals, etc.
B. Ball Change in ITA Division I National Tournaments
For all ITA Division I National Tournaments, in singles, a can of balls
must be used for each set (3 balls per set), and four balls (4) must be
used in doubles pro-sets.
268 INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION (ITA) REGULATIONS

PART 8—GLOSSARY
7-Point Set Tiebreak. The 7-Point Set Tiebreak is played when the players
reach 6-all in a Set. The first player or team to win 7 points by a margin of at least
2 wins the set 7-6.
10-Point Match Tiebreak. The 10-Point Match Tiebreak is played in some
matches in lieu of the deciding final set. The first player or team to win 10 points
by a margin of at least 2 wins the final set 1-0 and the match.
Abandoned Match. An Abandoned Match refers to a match that was started,
but the Referee has decided not to complete the match.
Adult Discipline. Adult Discipline occurs when a parent, coach, or other adult
responsible for a Junior disciplines the Junior by not allowing the Junior to start
or finish a match. Adult Discipline is treated as a Default if the match has not
started and as a Retirement if the match has started. There is no such thing as a
Withdrawal or Walkover because of an Adult Discipline.
Adult Divisions. The Open, 25, 30, Open Mixed Doubles, and 30 Mixed
Doubles comprise this group of divisions.
Advantage (Ad) Court: The advantage court refers to the service court that is
on a player’s side of the net to the left of the center service line as a player faces the
net. The court is called the advantage or ad court because points in which the
score is “Advantage” are always served to this court.
Advantage Scoring. This is the traditional scoring system in which the points
are 15, 30, 40, Deuce, and Advantage.
Advantage Set. This is a set in which a Set Tiebreak is not played when the
score reaches 6-6. Advantage sets are no longer played under USTA Regulations.
Occasionally an advantage set ends up being played when the players forget to
play a Set Tiebreak at 6-6.
All-Factors Method of Seeding. This seeding method is based on the players’
chances of winning the tournament as determined by the Tournament Committee.
Alley. The alley is the area between the singles sideline and the doubles
sideline.
Alphabetical Seeding. In some cases the Tournament Committee may group
seeded players together and assign each of them the same seed (for example, in
the group 5-8, each player in the group would be assigned the fifth seed).
Alternate. An alternate is a player who did not make it into the draw but
requests that the tournament consider the player for entry into the draw if an
opening in the draw develops.
Amateur. A player is an amateur if the player does not receive and has not
received, directly or indirectly, pecuniary advantage by the playing, teaching,
demonstrating, or pursuit of the game of tennis except as specifically authorized
by USTA Regulation XVIII.
Back Draw. This term is commonly used to describe the consolation part of a
Feed-In Championship draw.
Baselines. The baselines are the lines at the end of the court. The baselines
are 78 feet apart. On a doubles court the baselines are 36 feet long.
Bleeding Timeout. A Bleeding Timeout is a time-out of up to 15 minutes that
is allowed when a player is bleeding externally. The time is used to stop the
bleeding and to clean up the Playing Area.
GLOSSARY 269

Block Seeding. Block Seeding refers to the practice of taking the seeded
players and advancing them several rounds into the tournament. The unseeded
players play matches to reach the round where the seeded players have already
been stationed. The purpose of this practice is to allow all the unseeded players to
play several matches before facing a seeded player.
Bonus Points. Bonus Points are additional ranking points that are awarded for
wins over highly ranked players.
Bye. When there are not enough players to put one player on each line, byes
are placed on the open lines. A player who receives a bye does not have a first
round match.
Category I USTA National Championships. These tournaments are those
Adult, Senior, and Family USTA National Championships that are held on the
designated surfaces (grass, clay, hard, and indoor courts).
Category I USTA Wheelchair National Championship. These tournaments
are those Wheelchair USTA National Championships that are held on the
designated surfaces (grass, clay, hard, and indoor courts).
Category II USTA National Tournaments. These tournaments are sectionally
sanctioned tournaments that are selected by the Adult/Senior Competition
Committee and the USTA Competitive Play Department for inclusion on the
National Adult, Senior, and Family Tournament Schedule and that are designated
as Category II.
Category II USTA Wheelchair Tournaments. These tournaments are
sectionally sanctioned wheelchair tournaments that are selected by the
Wheelchair Tennis Committee and the USTA Competitive Play Department for
inclusion on the National Wheelchair Tournament Schedule.
Center Marks. The Center Marks are the 2 inch wide marks that are placed just
inside each Baseline and that mark the precise middle of the Baselines. The Center
Marks line up with the Center Service Line.
Center Service Line. The Center Service Line is the line that divides the Service
Lines and the Service Courts in half. The line is 2 inches wide and 42 feet long.
Chair Umpire. The Chair Umpire is the official responsible for conducting
one match in accordance with the ITF Rules of Tennis and the USTA Regulations.
Changeover. The changeover is the 90-second period after the end of every
odd game (other than the first game) of every set.
Chief Umpire. A Chief Umpire is an official responsible for hiring the
officials. In many tournaments, the Referee will delegate to the Chief Umpire the
responsibility for assigning, replacing, and reassigning officials.
Circuit. A series of tournaments that are organized as a group and generally
adopt a common set of special tournament regulations.
Closed Tournament. A closed tournament is a tournament that is limited to
residents of a particular geographic area.
The Code. The Code is a summary of the procedures and unwritten rules that
custom dictates that players follow. USTA Regulation IV.B. requires players to
follow The Code in all matches without officials.
Coman Tiebreak Procedure. The Coman Tiebreak Procedure requires the
Tiebreak to be played with the players changing ends after the first point and
thereafter every fourth point.
Combined Ranking. A combined ranking is a ranking that is based on both
singles and doubles Ranking Points.
270 GLOSSARY

Compass Draw. This is a non-elimination format that is so named because
players advance in four to eight different directions depending upon when they
lose their first match and when they lose their subsequent matches.
Computerized List Method of Seeding. This seeding method is based on a
computerized system of rankings or standings.
Consolation Draw. A consolation draw describes a group of different types
of draws in which losers in the main draw play an additional match or matches
against other players who have lost a match in the main draw.
Court. The term technically refers only to the area bounded by the baselines and
the singles sidelines in singles and the doubles sidelines in doubles. The singles
court is a rectangle 78 feet long by 27 feet wide. The doubles court is a rectangle
78 feet long by 36 feet wide.
Current NTRP Rating (computer rating). A rating generated by the USTA
NTRP computer rating system based on two or more matches.
Curtis Consolation. This format is a special Feed-In Championship that is
often used when there is a shortage of time or courts. Round of 16 losers and
quarterfinal losers play a separate consolation or consolations instead of being fed
back into the back draw. When a modified Curtis Consolation is played, some of
the back draws are played through the semifinals only.
Default. A Default occurs when a player is eliminated from an event under the
Point Penalty System (which includes penalties for lateness) or refuses to play for
reasons other than injury, illness, or personal emergency. It is also considered a
Default when a Junior does not start a match because of an Adult Discipline to
discipline the Junior. (Note that failure to finish a match because of an Adult
Discipline is considered a Retirement.)
Deputy Referee. A Deputy Referee is an official appointed by the Referee or
Tournament Committee to assist in the performance of the Referee’s duties or to
assume these duties when the Referee is absent. It is not unusual for a Deputy
Referee to assist in making the draw or to serve as the Referee at a secondary site.
Deuce Court. The deuce court refers to the service court that is on a player’s
side of the net to the right of the center service line as a player faces the net. The
court is called the deuce court because points in which the score is “Deuce” are
always served to this court.
Direct Acceptances. Players accepted directly into the main draw.
Disqualification. A Disqualification occurs when a player is removed from an
event because the player was ineligible for the event.
District Associations. The term refers not only to traditional District
Associations but also to other subdivisions of Sectional Associations.
Division. Division refers to one or two events in a tournament in which the
eligibility criteria are identical. For example, the Girls’ 16 Singles and Girls’ 16
Doubles are two events but only one division because their eligibility criteria are
identical.
Domicile. Domicile is a legal concept involving residence. It is defined as that
place where a person has that person’s true, fixed, and permanent home or that
person’s home for the indefinite future. A person can only have one domicile at
any one time. Eligibility for endorsement or for some closed tournaments is
often based on domicile.
Doubles Sidelines. The doubles sidelines are the two lines that define the
width of the court for doubles. The lines are 36 feet apart.
GLOSSARY 271

Endorsement. Endorsement refers to the process used by Sectional
Associations to list their players in the order in which they want the players
accepted into tournaments such as the USTA National Championships,
Intersectionals, and Zonals.
Event. In the narrow sense, this term refers to one draw in a tournament. For
example, the Girls’ 16 Singles and Girls’ 16 Doubles are two separate events within
the same division—the Girls’ 16 division. Sometimes this term is also used to
refer to an entire tournament.
Family Divisions. The Father-Son, Father (60 & Over)-Son, Father (70 &
Over)-Son, Father-Daughter, Father (60 & Over)-Daughter, Father (70 &
Over)-Daughter, Father (80 & Over)-Daughter, Mother-Son, Mother-Daughter,
Mother (60 & Over)-Daughter, Mother (70 & Over)-Daughter, Husband-Wife
Mixed, Husband-Wife Mixed (Combined Ages 100 years), Husband-Wife Mixed
(Combined Ages 120 years), Husband-Wife Mixed (Combined Ages 140 years),
and Grandfather-Grandson divisions comprise the Family Divisions.
Feed-In Championship. This term refers to a special form of consolation draw
in which the losers from the main draw are fed back into another draw against
players who lost in earlier rounds of the tournament. This format is very helpful
when the Tournament Committee wants to determine an order of finish through
6th place or through 12th place.
First Match Losers Consolation. This is a consolation draw in which the
losers in the first round and those second round losers who advanced to that
round by virtue of a bye or a Default are entered into the consolation draw.
First Round Losers Consolation. This is a consolation draw in which only the
losers in the first round are entered into the consolation draw.
Garman System. A staggered start time scheduling method based on
statistical analysis of the length of matches. The system reduces player waiting
time and maximizes court usage.
Group Seeding. In some cases the Tournament Committee may group seeded
players together and assign each of them the same seed (for example, in the group
5-8, each player in the group would be assigned the fifth seed).
Handshake. By shaking hands the players have acknowledged that they agree
the match was over.
Head-to-Head Ranking System. This is a method of ranking players or teams
that is based on wins, losses, and exposure.
Hindrance. A hindrance refers to a situation in which a player is hindered from
making a shot by anything that is not within the player’s control other than a
permanent fixture or a spectator’s outcry.
Incomplete Match. An incomplete match refers to a match that was started but
not completed. It is anticipated that the match will be completed.
Intersectionals. These are team tournaments held in the 16 and 18 age
divisions. Teams compete against teams from the other Sectional Associations. In
the 18 divisions, these competitions are now known as the USTA Boys’ 18 National
Team Championships and the Girls’ 18 National Team Championships.
Invitational Tournament. A tournament in which entry is by invitation only.
ITF Rules of Tennis. The ITF Rules of Tennis are the rules for the sport of
tennis. They are made by the International Tennis Federation (ITF). The USTA, as a
member of the ITF, has agreed that the ITF Rules of Tennis apply to all USTA
sanctioned tournaments.
272 GLOSSARY

ITF Tournaments on the National Junior Tournament Schedule. The ITF
Tournaments on the National Junior Tournament Schedule are tournaments jointly
sanctioned by the ITF and USTA that are placed on the National Junior Tournament
Schedule. These tournaments are played under ITF tournament regulations.
Junior Divisions. This group of divisions is comprised of the Boys’ and Girls’
12-and-under, 14-and-under, 16-and-under, and 18-and-under divisions.
Layered Consolation. This is a consolation format in which the losers in each
round are placed into their own consolation draw. Sometimes losers from two
rounds are placed in the same consolation.
Line Umpire. A Line Umpire is an official responsible for calling all shots
directed to the lines assigned to the official.
Local Tournaments. These are adult, senior, and family tournaments
sanctioned by the Sectional or District Associations that are not Super Category II
USTA Tournaments, Category II USTA Tournaments or Sectional Championships
and are considered for national ranking.
Lucky Loser. A player who has lost in the final round of the qualifying
tournament but who is allowed into the main draw when a player in the main draw
withdraws. If there are many withdrawals from the main draw, a lucky loser may
come from an earlier qualifying round.
Main Draw. The main draw is that part of a draw in which the remaining
players have not yet lost a match.
Match Format. The match format refers to the scoring format used by a
tournament.
Match Tiebreak. In some tournaments a Match Tiebreak may be played in lieu
of the deciding final set. The USTA uses only the 10-Point Match Tiebreak (first to
10 by a margin of 2).
Medical Timeout. A Medical Timeout consists of evaluation time as
determined by the Referee plus a maximum of three minutes to treat a medical
condition that is treatable. A player is not entitled to a Medical Timeout if the
condition is not treatable.
Mixed Doubles. Mixed Doubles is a doubles match in which each team
comprises a female player and a male player.
National Adult, Senior, and Family Tournament Schedule. This schedule is
published yearly by the Adult/Senior Competition Committee and the Competitive
Play Department and lists all National Ranking Tournaments other than Sectional
Championships and Local Tournaments.
National Championship Selection List. This is a list of the standings of the
top players that is used to determine which junior players are automatically
selected for the USTA National Championships.
National Junior Tournament Schedule. This schedule is published yearly by
the Youth Competition and Training Committee and lists all National Rankings
Tournaments other than the Sectional Ranking Tournaments.
National Ranking Matches. These are wheelchair matches in ITF tournaments
not listed on the National Wheelchair Tournament Schedule that count for national
ranking.
GLOSSARY 273

National Ranking Tournaments. These are the tournaments that are used
for national rankings. A list of junior tournaments is found in USTA Regulation
IX.C.3. and the National Junior Tournament Schedule. A list of adult, senior, and
family tournaments is found in USTA Regulation X.F.2. and the National Adult,
Senior, and Family Tournament Schedule. A list of wheelchair tournaments is
found in USTA Regulation XIII.B.4.a. and the National Wheelchair Tournament
Schedule.
National Standings List. This is a monthly standing list of junior players in
each age division used for selection of:
• some players into the USTA National Championships;
• all players into the USTA National Opens; and
• all players into some of the tournaments on the National Junior Tournament
Schedule.
It is also used as a resource in determining seeding.
National Wheelchair Tournament Schedule. This schedule is published yearly
by the Wheelchair Tennis Committee and the Competitive Play Department and lists
all National Ranking Tournaments other than Sectional Ranking Tournaments.
Net Posts. Two net posts are used to suspend the net that divides the court.
The net posts for doubles courts are 3 feet 6 inches high with their centers located
3 feet outside the outer edge of the doubles sidelines.
Net Strap. The net strap is a strap that is placed over the net at the center of
the net to make sure that the height of the net at its center is 3 feet.
No-Ad Scoring. This is a scoring system that is the same as the traditional
system except that when the score reaches 40-40, only one additional point is
played to determine the winner of that game. In Mixed Doubles, a male server
serves this point to the male receiver, and the female player serves this point to the
female receiver. In all other events, the Receiver chooses the side from which the
Server must serve.
No Let Rule. The No Let Rule requires that a match be played without the
service let in Rule 22a of the ITF Rules of Tennis.
Non-Elimination Tournaments. This term describes a group of different
tournament formats in which players are never eliminated after they lose. The best
known example is the Compass Draw.
NTRP. NTRP stands for National Tennis Rating Program. The system rates
players by ability levels ranging from 1.5 to 7.0.
NTRP Divisions. These divisions are comprised of all the divisions in which
eligibility is based on NTRP rating. Note that NTRP divisions have age and NTRP
criteria.
Numeric Scoring. Numeric scoring consists of substituting "zero," "one," "two,"
and "three" for "Love," "15," "30," and "40." The principle of winning four points by a
margin of two is preserved. Deuce may be announced by "Deuce" or by "3-all," "4-all,"
etc. Advantage may be announced by "Advantage" or "4-3," "5-4," etc. When language
is a barrier, hand signals are often used with a clenched fist indicating "Deuce."
On-site Alternate. An on-site alternate is a player not accepted in the draw
who has checked in at the tournament and has asked to be placed in the draw if a
spot becomes available.
274 GLOSSARY

Permanent Fixtures. Permanent fixtures include any scoring device that is
attached to a net post, the areas of the net outside the singles sticks in a singles
match, the doubles posts in a singles match that is using singles sticks, fences,
backstops, curtains, seating areas, officials’ chairs, the ceiling, and lights for the
court.
Place Playoff. A place playoff is a match that is played to determine a player’s
final place in the tournament such as a third place playoff or a seventh place
playoff in a Feed-In Championships.
Playing Area. The Playing Area is the area inside the fences or backstops. Any
designated seating or standing area is not part of the Playing Area.
Point Penalty System. This is a system of penalties designed to deter
unsportsmanlike behavior during matches. The first penalty results in loss of a
point; the second penalty results in loss of the game in progress, and the third
penalty results in a Default.
Points Per Round. Points Per Round are the ranking points that are awarded
in a Points Per Round Ranking System.
Points Per Round Ranking System. This is a method of ranking players or
teams that is based on earning ranking points for the round reached, and in
some cases, for wins over highly ranked players or teams.
Professional. All players who are not amateurs as defined by USTA
Regulation XVIII. are considered professionals.
Pro Set. A Pro Set is a scoring system consisting of one set only. The most
common Pro Set is one in which the first player to eight games wins the match. If
the score reaches 8-8, a 7-Point or 10-Point Tiebreak is played.
Qualified Medical Person or Trainer. A Qualified Medical Person or Trainer is a
person who the Referee authorizes to evaluate whether a medical condition is
treatable and to treat players for treatable conditions during a Bleeding Timeout or a
Medical Timeout. Typically this person will be a physician, certified Sports Medicine
Trainer, or a person otherwise qualified by academic accomplishment, experience in
sports medicine, or sports training.
Qualifiers. Players included in the main draw as a result of their success in the
qualifying tournament.
Qualifying Tournament or Qualifying Draw. A Qualifying Tournament or
Qualifying Draw is a tournament or draw in which those players who advance far
enough earn places in the Main Draw.
Question of Fact. “Questions of Fact” involve whether a specific event
happened. Examples include whether a ball is in; whether a ball touched a player;
whether a ball bounced twice; and whether a server’s foot touched the baseline
before the serve was struck.
Question of Law. “Questions of Law” involve the application of the rules or
regulations to facts that have already been determined. Examples include whether
an act was a hindrance, whether a player should have been assessed a Code
Violation for misconduct, and the procedures for correcting errors in serving
order, serving and receiving position, and ends.
QuickStart Tennis Formats. QuickStart Tennis formats use specialized
equipment, a smaller court, and a shorter match format.
GLOSSARY 275

Quota. Each Sectional Association is guaranteed a minimum number of
players who will be accepted into the USTA National Championships. This number
is the Sectional Association’s quota. It is based on the number of junior members
residing in the Sectional Association.
Ranking. Ranking is a static concept. It is a player’s “final” position at the end
of a ranking period. It does not change at the end of the specified period.
Referee. The Referee is generally responsible for supervising all aspects of
play. The Referee is responsible for assuring that the competition is fair and played
under the ITF Rules of Tennis and the USTA Regulations.
Rest Period. The USTA Regulations require a rest period of 10 minutes after the
second set in a best of three tiebreak set match in all divisions except the Boys’ and
Girls’ 18 divisions and the adult divisions. USTA Regulations also require a Referee
to offer a player a rest of at least 30 minutes between matches. For most play in
junior and adult divisions, a Referee is required to offer players 60 minutes between
matches. For most play in senior divisions, a Referee is required to offer players
90 minutes between matches. The rest period requirements can be found in
USTA Regulation III.C.
Retirement. A Retirement occurs when a player is unable to continue
playing a match or resume playing a suspended match because of injury, illness,
or personal emergency. It is also treated as a Retirement when a junior player
does not finish a match because of an Adult Discipline. A person who retires
from a match remains eligible for other matches including consolations, place
play-offs, and doubles.
Round Robin. A round robin is a format in which a player plays every other
player in the draw.
Roving Umpire. A Roving Umpire is an official other than the Referee or a
Deputy Referee who exercises jurisdiction over more than one court.
Scheduling Guidelines. These are USTA Regulations that assist the Referee in
determining how frequently matches should be scheduled and how many matches
should be scheduled per day. The USTA requires Referees to follow these
guidelines in its national championships and in tournaments on the National
Junior Tournament Schedule.
Sectional Endorser. Each Sectional Association lists its players in the order in
which the Sectional Association has decided that the players should receive entry
into the USTA National Championships, Zonal Team Tournaments, and
Intersectional Tournaments. The person who prepares this list for the Sectional
Association is the Sectional Endorser.
Sectional Ranking Tournaments. These are sectional tournaments that count
for junior or wheelchair national ranking. In the case of junior rankings, each
Sectional Association is allowed to designate 12 junior tournaments within its
section that will count toward national ranking.
Seed. This term refers to a player who is given a preferential position in the draw
by virtue of the player’s record. The player is positioned in the draw so that the player
usually will not play another seed until at least the third round. This player is more
likely to receive a bye than players who are not seeded.
Seeding Groups. Seeding Groups refer to 1,2, 3-4, 5-8, 9-16, and 17-32 seeds.
Self-rating. A self-rating is a rating by a player who is new to the NTRP
system. The player uses the NTRP guidelines to select the level of play that the
player believes best describes the player’s ability.
276 GLOSSARY

Senior Divisions. The Men’s and Women’s 35 and older divisions and the 40
Mixed Doubles, 50 Mixed Doubles, and 60 Mixed Doubles comprise the Senior
Divisions.
Service Courts. The service courts consist of the area between the net and the
service lines. The service courts are bisected by the center service line thereby
forming two service courts on each side of the net.
Service Lines. The service lines are the two lines that are 27 feet long and
21 feet from the net (and 18 feet from the baselines) that run from one singles
sideline to the other singles sideline.
Set Break. The Set Break is the 2-minute break after the end of each set. If this is
not possible, then the break should be taken at an odd game changeover. Breaks
taken at other times should be limited to true emergencies.
Set Tiebreak. The Set Tiebreak is the 7-Point Tiebreak Game that is played to
decide a set when the set score reaches 6-all.
Short Sets. This is a scoring system in which the first player to win four
games wins the set. If the score reaches 4-4, a 7-Point Set Tiebreak is played.
Single Elimination Format. In this tournament format, once you lose you are
out and do not get to play any additional matches.
Singles Sidelines. The singles sidelines are the two lines that define the width
of the court for singles. The lines are 27 feet apart.
Singles Sticks. Singles sticks are sticks that are 3 feet six inches high that
substitute for singles posts in those courts that are equipped with doubles net
posts. The centers of the sticks are located 3 feet outside the outer edge of the
singles sidelines.
Solo Chair Umpire. A Solo Chair Umpire is a Chair Umpire who handles a
match without the assistance of line umpires.
Standard Game. The standard game refers to games in which the traditional
scoring of “Love,” “15,” “30,” “40,” “Deuce,” “Advantage,” and “Game” is used.
The standard game stands in contrast to the scoring for a Tiebreak Game.
Standing. Standing is a dynamic concept. It is a player’s position on a list
generated by the USTA ranking program at a certain point in time. It may change
from time to time.
Super Category II USTA National Tournaments. These tournaments are
sectionally sanctioned tournaments that are selected by the Adult/Senior
Competition Committee for inclusion on the National Adult, Senior, and Family
Tournament Schedule and that are designated as Super Category II.
Suspension Point System. This is a system under which junior players are
assessed points for unsportsmanlike behavior in tournaments on the National
Junior Tournament Schedule. A player who accumulates too many points is
suspended from national play.
Tiebreak Game. The Tiebreak Game is the term used by the ITF for the
7-Point Set Tiebreak that is played to decide a set when the game score reaches
6-all.
Tiebreak Set. This is the normal type of set that is played under USTA
Regulations. A 7-Point Set Tiebreak is played when the score reaches 6-6.
GLOSSARY 277

Toilet/Change of Attire Break. A player is allowed to take a Toilet/Change of
Attire Break when an official determines that there is a genuine need. The player is
allowed a reasonable period of time. When possible the break is taken during a Set
Break. If this is not possible, the break is taken at an odd-game changeover. Breaks
taken at other times are limited to true emergencies.
Tournament. Tournament refers to most forms of competition, including but
not limited to, tournaments, championships, team championships, matches,
exhibitions, events, intersectionals, international competitions, and zonals. It
generally does not include USTA League Tennis Programs and USTA Jr. Team
Tennis (Youth). Most tournaments offer more than one event. Each event has its
own eligibility criteria.
Tournament Appeals Committee. This committee is responsible for deciding
appeals of the Referee’s Disqualification or unilateral Default of a player.
Tournament Area. The tournament area refers to the entire tennis facility or
center where tennis is played. It includes the area outside the fences
surrounding the courts and any clubhouse or similar building.
Tournament Chairperson. The Tournament Chairperson is the chairperson of
the Tournament Committee.
Tournament Committee. The Tournament Committee is the committee that is
responsible for putting on the tournament on behalf of the organization that holds
the tournament sanction.
Tournament Director. The Tournament Director is the chief executive officer
for the Tournament Committee and is directly responsible for all administrative
details. Often the Tournament Director and the Tournament Chairperson are the
same person.
Unplayed Match. An Unplayed Match refers to a match that the Referee
decides will not be played for any reason other than a Withdrawal, Walkover,
Default, or Retirement.
USTA International Tournaments. USTA International Tournaments are USTA
sanctioned tournaments played under ITF tournament regulations, but not
sanctioned by the ITF.
USTA Junior National Championships. This term is used to collectively
describe the USTA National Championships, USTA National Opens, USTA Team
Championships, and USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic Championships
(East/West).
USTA Jr. Team Tennis. This is a team competition for youth who are 18 years
of age and under. USTA membership is not required. Players advance from local to
district, sectional, and national competition.
USTA League. This is a program for men and women in which teams
comprised of players with the same NTRP rating are established. USTA
membership is required. Players must reach 19 years of age during the calendar
year of the competition. Teams advance from local to district, sectional, and
national competition.
USTA National Championships. These tournaments constitute the highest
level of USTA national tournaments held.
USTA National Opens. These tournaments constitute the second highest level
of USTA Junior National Championships held.
278 GLOSSARY

USTA Regional Tournaments. The Youth Competition and Training Committee
sanctions a number of national level tournaments in addition to the USTA Junior
National Championships and USTA International Tournaments. These additional
tournaments are called USTA Regional Tournaments.
USTA Team Championships. The USTA Team Championships are comprised
of the following tournaments:
• USTA Boys’ 18 National Team Championships;
• USTA Girls’ 18 National Team Championships;
• USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 16 Intersectional Team Championships; and
• USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 16, 14, and 12 Zone Team Championships.
Walkover. A Walkover occurs when there has been an administrative error or
when a player decides not to play a match in an event because of injury, illness, or
personal emergency.
Wheelchair Divisions. This group of divisions is comprised of those divisions
limited to wheelchair tennis players.
Wild Card. A wild card entry into a USTA National Championship may be
granted to a player when extenuating circumstances prevent the player from
entering through the normal qualifying or endorsement procedure. Wild Cards
also may be granted based on the recommendation of the national coaching staff
to a player who has demonstrated significant potential at the national or
international level.
Withdrawal. A Withdrawal occurs when a player decides not to play all
matches in the event because of injury, illness, or personal emergency. A
Withdrawal also may occur because of tournament administrative error.
Zonals. These are team competitions held in the 12, 14, and 16 age divisions
that are held in different regions or zones. Teams represent their Sectional
Associations.
GLOSSARY 279

PART 9—INDEX
INDEX TO THE RULES OF TENNIS, THE CODE,
AND USTA REGULATIONS
(Abbreviations: R Rule; C Code; Reg USTA Regulation; USTA Comments USCom. ;
FAC Comments FACom; and G Glossary. Entries in bold are also in Glossary.)
SUBJECT REFERENCE
10-and-under competitions ....................FACom. VI.B-2 [p. 134]; Appendix VI [p. 35]
Abandoned Match..................................................................................Table 8 [p. 104]
Accidental Injury ...........................................................................See Medical condition
Ace, apparent or clear ..........................................C 27 [p. 48]; FACom. VII.C-7 [p. 150]
Adjustment, clothing, shoes, or equipment ........R 29b. [p. 23]; Reg. IV.C.9.b. [p. 118]
Advantage .........................................................................................................R 5a. [p. 6]
Advantage Court.........................................................................................Fig. 1 [p. 41]
Advantage Scoring.........................................................................................R 5a. [p. 6]
Advantage Set ...................................................................R 6 [p. 8]; USCom. 6.1 [p. 8]
Advertising......................................................................R 1 [p. 4]; Appendix III [p. 29]
Adult Discipline..........................Table 8.A., C., & D. [pp. 104-106]; Table 19 [p. 183]
Adult Divisions...................................Reg. I.G.2.b.i.-iii. [p. 60]; Reg. X.A.1.a.i. [p. 189]
Adult National Championships ..................See USTA National Championships (Adults)
Adult National Rankings..................................................................Reg. X.B.-J. [p. 192]
Adult, Senior, and Family National Tournaments and Rankings......Reg. X.A. [p. 189]
Age Divisions
Adult, Senior, and Family .......................................Reg. I.G.2.b.i. & iii. & v. [p. 60]
Junior .................................................................Reg. I.G.2.a. [p. 60]; Table 4 [p. 62]
Parent-child ..............................................................................Reg. I.G.2.b.v. [p. 61]
Aliens.........Reg. IX.A.2.a.ii. [p. 167]; FACom. IX.A-2 [p. 167]; Reg. IX.A.2.c. [p. 167]
Reg. IX.C.2. [p. 185]
Alley...........................................................................................................…Fig. 1 [p. 41]
Alphabetical seeding.......................................................................................G [p. 269]
Alternate........FACom. IV.C-3 [p. 120]; Reg. IV.D.20.b. [p. 122]; Reg. IV.E.6. [p. 131]
Reg. IX.A.9.a.ii. [p. 172]; Reg. IX.A.9.e.vii. & viii. [p. 174]
FACom. IX.A-5. [p. 174]; Reg. IX.A.9.e.ix. [p. 175]; Reg. IX.A.9.i. [p. 176]
Reg. IX.A.10.a.ii. [p. 179]; FACom. IX.A-8. [p. 180]; Reg. IX.A.10.e. & g [p. 180]
On-Site Alternate......................................................................................G [p. 274]
Amateur ...............................Reg. I.G.4. [p. 66]; Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]; FAC. I.H-2 [p. 70]
Reg. XVIII. [p. 220]
Amateur circuit ...................................................................See Tournament Regulations
Amateur Tournaments ................................Reg. I.A.2 & 5. [p. 52]; Reg. I.G.2.d. [p. 61]
Reg. I.G.4. [p. 66]; Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]; Reg. XVII.A.2. [p. 213]
Reg. XVII.A.12. [p. 214]
Amendments to ITF Rules...................................................................................R [p. 27]
Amendments to USTA Regulations.....................................................Reg. XIX. [p. 227]
Appeal of Default..............................................................................Reg. III.B.6. [p. 103]
Reg. IV.D.20.b. [p. 122]; Reg. IV.E.3-5. [p. 130]
Appeal of question of law .............................Appendix V [p. 32] & Cases 1 & 2 [p. 33]
USCom.V.I [p. 33]; Reg. III.B.11. [p. 103]; Reg. VII.C.13. [p. 141]
Appeal of penalty for Code Violation ...........Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. IV.D.8. [p. 121]
Appeal of suspension .......................................................................Reg. IX.B.8. [p. 184]
Appeals Committee ...............................................See Tournament Appeals Committee
Arguments .......................................................................................................C 14 [p. 47]
ATP.............................Reg. I.A.3. [p. 52]; FACom. I.A-1. [p. 52]; Table 16.B.2. [p. 169]
Table 16.E. [p. 170]; Reg. IX.A.9.d.i.(B) [p. 173]; Reg. IX.A.10.b. [p. 179]
280 INDEX

Back Draw ......................................................................................……………G [p. 269]
Ball
Abuse................................Reg. IV.C.17.d. [p. 120]; Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 15 [p. 126]
Approved brands.........................R 3 [p. 4]; USCom. 3.3 [p. 5]; Appendix I [p. 27]
Reg. I.F.2. [p. 59]; FACom. I.F-1 [p. 59]
Bouncing before serving ..........................................................................C 39 [p. 50]
Broken.......................R 3 & Case 1 [p. 5]; USCom. 3.1 [p. 5]; Reg. III.H.2. [p. 116]
Caught before bounces.........................R 24f. [p. 15] & Case 8 [p. 16]; C 42 [p. 50]
Caught on serve that hits net ................................................................R 22a. [p. 14]
Changing condition........................................................................USCom. 3.2 [p. 5]
Discarding second ball...............................................................USCom. 26.4 [p. 19]
Embedded in net ..........................................................................USCom. 11.1 [p. 9]
Good if cannot be called out .............................USCom. 12.1 [p. 9]; C 6 & 8 [p. 46]
Hitting around net post .........................................................................R 25c. [p. 17]
Hitting ball on court...................................................R 25f. [p. 17] & Case 2 [p. 18]
Hitting before crosses net................................................R 24h. [p. 15]; C 20 [p. 47]
Hitting below top of net ........................................................................R 25c. [p. 17]
Hitting bird...........................................................................……R 26, Case 3 [p. 18]
Hitting hat...................................................................................USCom. 24.2 [p. 16]
Hitting into ground ..........................................................R 24c. [p. 15]; C 21 [p. 48]
Hitting line ..............................................................................R 12 [p. 9]; C 7 [p. 46]
Hitting net between singles stick and net post ........................USCom. 13.1 [p. 10]
Hitting net post ................................................ US Com. 13.3 [p. 10]; R 19c. [p. 13]
R 25a. [p. 17]; R 25c [p. 17]
Hitting permanent fixture ........................................USCom. 11.1 [p. 9]; R 13 [p. 9]
USCom. 13.2 [p. 10]
Hitting pipe support...................................................................USCom. 25.4 [p. 18]
Hitting player or anything he wears or carries.....................................R 24i. [p. 15]
R 24, Case 8 [p. 16]; C 20 [p. 47]
Hitting receiver on serve ...................R 22a. [p. 14]; R 24i. [p. 15] & Case 8 [p. 16]
Hitting server’s partner on serve ..........................................................R 19d. [p. 13]
Hitting scoring device ............................................R 13 [p. 9]; USCom. 13.2 [p. 10]
Hitting singles stick ............................................R 19c. [p. 13]; R 25, Case 1 [p. 17]
Hitting stationary or moving object ...................................R 26, Cases 3 & 4 [p. 18]
Hitting through net...................................................................................C 21 [p. 48]
Hitting umpires or umpire stand .............................................R 2 [p. 4]; R 13 [p. 9]
FACom. VII.C-12 [p. 150]
In Play ...........................................................................................USCom. 11.1 [p. 9]
Mark inspection, clay court .............Appendix V [p. 34]; FACom. VII.C-6 [p. 149]
New .......................................................R 3b. [p. 4]; C 43 [p. 51]; Reg. I.F.4. [p. 60]
Number for play .....................R 3a. [p. 4]; Reg. I.F.4. [p. 60]; Reg. III.A.3. [p. 102]
Playing wrong ball ......................................................................R 25, Case 2 [p. 18]
Removal from court.................................USCom.20.1 [p. 13]; USCom. 25.2 [p. 18]
Replacement ...........................................................................Reg. III.H.2-4. [p. 116]
Retrieving from another court .................................................................C 41 [p. 50]
Rolling on court .......................................R 23, Case 1 [p. 14]; USCom. 23.3 [p. 15]
C 19 [p. 47]; C 30 [p. 49]; FACom. VII.C-8 [p. 150]
Soft....................................................................R3, Case 1 [p. 5]; USCom. 3.1. [p. 5]
Specifications.....................................R 3 [p. 4]; Appendix I [p. 27]; Table 1 [p. 27]
Stray, requesting.......................................................................................C 41 [p. 50]
Third..........................................................................................................C 23 [p. 48]
Type...............................Appendix I [p. 27]; Reg. I.F.1. [p. 59]; Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]
Unfit..........................R 3, Case 1 [p. 5]; USCom. 3.1 [p. 5]; Reg. III.H.2-4. [p. 116]
Volleying ball while outside court .............................................R 24, Case 8 [p. 16]
INDEX 281

Volleying before crosses net............................................R 24h. [p. 15]; C 20 [p. 47]
Warm-ups with ...........................................Reg. I.F.5. [p. 60]; Reg. III.H.4. [p. 116]
Ball Change
Correcting error...........................R 27c [p. 19]; R 27i. [p. 20]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 21]
Reg. III.H.1. [p. 116]
Pattern .........................................R 3b. [p. 4]; Reg. I.F.3. [p. 60]; Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]
Re-warm-up ...............................................................................USCom. 29.9 [p. 24]
Tiebreak.................................................................R 3b.i. [p. 5]; Reg. I.E.1.e. [p. 58]
Ball Marks.................................Appendix V. [p. 34]; C 22 [p. 48]; Reg. IV.C.8. [p. 118]
FACom. VII.C-6 [p. 149]; FACom. VII.F-3 [p. 155]
Ball Toss...........................................................................................................R 16 [p. 11]
Catching .......................................................................................R 19, Case 1 [p. 13]
One-armed server.....................................................................................R 16 [p. 11]
Swinging, missing ................................................................................R 19b. [p. 13]
Banners .........................................................................R 1 [p. 3] & Appendix III [p. 29]
Baselines..............................................................R 1 [p. 3]; Fig. 1 [p. 41]; Fig. 2 [p. 42]
Bathroom break...........................................................See Toilet/Change of Attire Break
Betting ....................Reg. IV.C.18. [p. 121]; Reg. IV.E.7. [p. 131]; Reg. VII.G.5. [p. 156]
Bleeding Timeout.............................................Reg. III.E.2. [p. 110]; Table 11 [p. 113]
FACom. III.E-14-15. [p. 112]
Block Seeding ...............................................................................................See Seeding
Bonus Points............................................................................................….See Ranking
Broken Racket ........................................USCom. 4.2 [p. 6]; R 29b. [p. 23]; C 44 [p. 51]
Broken String ....................................................USCom. 4.2 [p. 6]; USCom. 21.7 [p. 14]
USCom. 23.2 [p. 15]; R 29b. [p. 23]; C 44 [p. 51]
Byes ...................Reg. II.B.4.c-e. [p. 75]; FACom. II.B-2 [p. 77]; FACom. II.C-7 [p. 97]
FACom. IX.A-7 [p. 177]
Calls
Audible .....................................................................................................C 15 [p. 47]
Benefit of doubt to opponent .........................USCom. 12.1 [p. 9]; C Preface [p. 45]
C 6 & 8 [p. 46]
Corrections ............................Appendix V [p. 32] & Cases 1-7 [p. 33]; C 12 [p. 47]
Disagreement between partners..............................................................C 14 [p. 47]
Electronic Review Procedures....................................................Appendix V. [p. 34]
Looking across line.....................................................................................C 9 [p. 46]
On your side ...............................................................................................C 5 [p. 46]
Overrules ..........................................Appendix V [p. 32]; FACom. VII.D-4 [p. 152]
Prompt....................USCom. 11.2 [p. 9]; Appendix V [p. 32] & Cases 3 & 6 [p. 33]
C 18 [p. 47]
Questioning ..............................................................................................C 16 [p. 47]
Requesting help..................................................................C 11 [p. 47]; C 40 [p. 50]
Responsibility .................................................C 5 [p. 46]; C 13 [p. 47]; C 20 [p. 47]
Spectators..................................................................................................C 17 [p. 47]
Service line in doubles.............................................................................C 25 [p. 48]
Treat all points the same ..........................................................................C 10 [p. 46]
Two chance option....................................................................................C 18 [p. 47]
Unsighted calls .......................................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. VII.C.9. [p. 140]
FACom. VII.C-13 [p. 141]; Reg. VII.F.2. [p. 153]
Visible .......................................................................................................C 15 [p. 47]
When far away............................................................................................C 9 [p. 46]
Carry.....................................................R 24f. [p. 15]; USCom. 24.5 [p. 17]; C 20 [p. 47]
Catching Ball ...............................................R 24f. [p. 15] & Case 8 [p. 16]; C 42 [p. 50]
Catching Ball on Racket ...............................................................................R 24f. [p. 15]
Catching Ball Toss ...........................................................................R 19 & Case 1 [p. 13]
282 INDEX

Category I USTA National Championships..............................Reg. X.A.1.a. [p. 189]
Category I USTA Wheelchair National Championships ....Reg. XIII.A.1.a. [p. 203]
Reg. XIII.A.3. [p. 204]
Category II USTA Tournaments.................................................Reg. X.A.1.d. [p. 190]
Category II USTA Wheelchair Tournaments .......................Reg. XIII.A.1.b. [p. 203]
Cellular Phones .............................................USCom. 23.2 [p. 15]; USCom. 26.3 [p. 19]
USCom.30.1 [p. 25]; FACom. VII.A-4 [p. 139]; FACom. VII.D-2 [p. 152]
Center Marks .....................................................................................................R 1 [p. 4]
Center Service Line ..........................................................................................R 1 [p. 4]
Certification of Officials......................................................Reg. VII.H.-R. [pp. 157-163]
Chair Umpire..................................................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. VII.C. [p. 139]
Alters ball change...................................................................Reg. VII.C.11. [p. 140]
Assignment..................................................Reg. VII.B. [p. 139]; Part 5 I.B. [p. 235]
Assigns line umpires................................................................Reg. VII.C.3. [p. 140]
Calls balls that touch ceiling..................................................Reg. VII.C.16. [p. 141]
Calls lines ....................................Reg. VII.C.2. [p. 139]; FACom. VII.C-13 [p. 151]
Calls score .................................................................................Reg. VII.C.6. [p. 140]
Calls service lets .....................................................................Reg. VII.C.15. [p. 141]
Certification ............................................Reg. VII.M. [p. 158]; Reg. VII.N. [p. 159];
Reg. VII.O. [p. 162]; Part 5 I.C. [p. 237]
Code violations...........................................................................Reg. IV.D.6. [p. 121]
Continuous play .......................................................................................R 29 [p. 23]
Defaults ...................................................................................Reg. VII.C.14. [p. 141]
Deliberate double-hits ...........................................................Reg. VII.C.17. [p. 141]
Determines who enters playing area.......................................Reg. VII.C.4. [p. 140]
Enforces continuous play.........................................................Reg. VII.C.7. [p. 140]
Enforces rules, regulations.......................................................Reg. VII.C.1. [p. 139]
Factual decisions..........................................................................Appendix V [p. 32]
USCom. V.1 [p. 33]; Reg. VII.C.12. [p. 140]
Foot faults, walking, running................................................Reg. VII.C.15. [p. 141]
Invasion of opponent’s court .................................................Reg. VII.C.17. [p. 141]
Law, questions of.........................................................................Appendix V [p. 32]
USCom. V.1 [p. 33]; Reg. VII.C.13. [p. 141]
Not-ups....................................................................................Reg. VII.C.17. [p. 141]
Overrule ......................................................Appendix V [p. 32] & Cases 3-5 [p. 33]
Procedures and techniques .............................................FACom. VII.C-2-3 [p. 141]
Rearranges official assignments ..............................................Reg. VII.C.5. [p. 140]
Removal of official....................................................................Reg. VII.C.5. [p. 140]
Scorecard........................................Reg. VII.C.8. [p. 140]; FACom. VII.C-5 [p. 145]
Suspension of match............................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. VII.C.10. [p. 140]
Throughs .................................................................................Reg. VII.C.17. [p. 141]
Touches....................................................................................Reg. VII.C.17. [p. 141]
Training..........................................................................................Part 5 I.C. [p. 237]
Unsighted calls .......................................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. VII.C.9. [p. 140]
FACom. VII.C-13 [p. 151]; Reg. VII.F.2. [p. 153]
Volleying ball before it passes net.........................................Reg. VII.C.17. [p. 141]
Changing Ends........................................USCom. 5.7 [p. 7]; USCom. 10.1 & 10.2 [p. 9]
R 10 [p. 9]; R 27b. [p. 19]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]; R 29a. [p. 23]
Changeover ........................................................................................................R 29a. [p. 23]
Changing Shape of Racket .............................................................Appendix II.c. [p. 29]
Cheating
Benefit of doubt ................USCom. 12.1 [p. 9]; C Preface [p. 45]; C 6 & C 8 [p. 46]
Foot faults .................................................................................................C 24 [p. 48]
Returning serve without fault call...........................................................C 28 [p. 48]
INDEX 283

Checking-In..........................................................................................Reg. IV.A. [p. 117]
Chief Umpire .........................................Reg. VII.B. [p. 139]; FACom. VII.B-1 [p. 139]
Assigns officials ...........................................................................Reg. VII.B. [p. 139]
Certification .....................................Reg. VII.N.3.h. [p. 160]; Reg. VII.N.5. [p. 162]
Replaces officials..........................................................................Reg. VII.B. [p. 134]
Circuit ...............................................................................................................G. [p. 270]
Choice of Ends, service .......................................................................................R 9 [p. 8]
Clear Mistakes ..............................................................................................See Mistakes
Closed tournament .......................................................................FACom. I.H-4 [p. 70]
Clothing
Adjustment ............................................................................................R 29b. [p. 23]
Ball hitting.......................................................R 24i. [p. 15]; USCom. 24.1-2 [p. 16]
Change of Attire ...................................................See Toilet/Change of Attire Break
Dress Code ......................................................................................Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]
Coaching...............................R 30 [p. 25]; USCom. 30.1-3 [p. 25]; Reg. IV.C.9. [p. 118]
During Bleeding Timeout......................USCom. 30.2 [p. 25]; Reg. III.E.7. [p. 111]
Reg IV.C.9. [p. 118]
During Medical Timeout .......................USCom. 30.2 [p. 25]; Reg. III.E.7. [p. 111]
Reg IV.C.9. [p. 118]
During rest periods...............................................R 30 [p. 25]; USCom. 30.2 [p. 25]
During suspensions of play...................USCom. 30.2 [p. 25]; Reg. III.E.7. [p. 111]
Reg. IV.C.9. [p. 118]
During Toilet Visits....................................USCom. 30.2 [p. 25]; Reg. III.F. [p. 115]
Reg. IV.C.9. [p. 118]
During warm-ups...................................................................... Reg. IV.C.9. [p. 118]
Electronic devices ..................................................................….USCom. 30.1 [p. 25]
Team matches........................................................R 30 [p. 25]; USCom. 30.3 [p. 25]
Reg. IX.A.11.c. [p. 181]
USTA League (Adult/Senior) ....................................................USCom. 30.3 [p. 25]
Written notes ..............................................................................USCom. 30.1 [p. 25]
Code, The ............................................................................C [p. 45]; Reg. IV.B. [p. 117]
Code Violations
Appeals .......................................................................................Reg. IV.D.8. [p. 121]
Ball abuse .................Reg. IV.C.17.d. [p. 120]; Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 15 [p. 126]
Coaching.............................................................Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 15 [p. 126]
Delay ...................................................Reg. IV.D.11. [p. 122]; Reg. IV.D.20. [p. 122]
Table 10 [p. 109]; Table 12 [p. 123]
Described.........................................................Reg. IV.D. [p. 121]; Table 12 [p. 123]
Doubles ...................................................Reg. IV.D.9. [p. 122]; Reg. IV.E.6. [p. 131]
Flagrant violations .......................................Reg. IV.D.7. [p. 121]; Table 12 [p. 123]
Instructions of official, failure to follow .........................................Table 12 [p. 123]
Medical condition, delay after............................................FACom. III.E-5. [p. 111]
FACom. III.E-13. [p. 112]; Table 11 [p. 113]; Reg. IV.D.12. [p. 122]
Table 12 [p. 123]; FACom. IV.D-6 [p. 128]
Obscenity ..................Reg. IV.C.17.b. [p. 120]; Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 15 [p. 126]
Official abuse .....................................................Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 15 [p. 126]
Player abuse .......................................................Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 15 [p. 126]
Profanity ....................Reg. IV.C.17.b. [p. 120]; Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 15 [p. 126]
Physical abuse........................................................................Reg. IV.C.17.e. [p. 120]
Racket abuse ...................Reg. IV.C.17.c. [p. 120]; Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 15 [p. 126]
Retaliatory Calls...............................................................................Table 12 [p. 123]
Time violations............................Reg. IV.D.4. [p. 121]; Tables 13-14 [pp. 124-125]
Collegiate Tournaments.........................................................................Reg. XII. [p. 201]
Coman Tiebreak Procedure ......................USCom. 10.2 [p. 9]; USCom. 27.12 [p. 22]
Appendix IV. [p. 31]; Reg. I.E.1.c. [p. 58]
284 INDEX

Combined Ranking ........................................................................Reg. IX.C.7. [p. 186]
Compass Draw............................................................................…See Draws, Compass
Complaining About Type of Opponent’s Shots ..............................................C 1 [p. 45]
Completion of Tournament
Code Violations, reporting..........................................................Reg. V.A.3. [p. 132]
Draw sheets, submitting .............................................................Reg. V.A.1. [p. 132]
Reports on withheld prize money ..............................................Reg. V.A.2. [p. 132]
Condition, loss of physical............................................................See Medical condition
Conduct of Players ...............................................................................Reg. IV.C. [p. 117]
Abuse of players, officials........................................................Reg. IV.C.10. [p. 119]
Anti-Doping ......................................Reg. IV.C.2. [p. 117]; FACom. IV.C-1 [p. 118]
Coaching .....................................................................................Reg. IV.C.9. [p. 118]
Gambling ..................................................................................Reg. IV.C.18. [p. 121]
Inspection of ball marks ............................................................Reg. IV.C.8. [p. 118]
Leaving playing area ............................................C 40 [p. 50]; Reg. IV.C.5. [p. 118]
Request removal of official ........................................................Reg. IV.C.7. [p. 118]
Shoes ...........................................................................................Reg. IV.C.3. [p. 118]
Unsportsmanlike conduct ........................................................Reg. IV.C.17. [p. 120]
Warm-up .................................................................C 3 [p. 46]; Reg. IV.C.4. [p. 118]
Withdrawing from tournament................................C 38 [p. 50]; Reg. I.H.8. [p. 70]
Table 8 [p. 104]; Reg. IV.C.12. [p. 111]; Reg. IV.C.16. [p. 120]
Withholding prize money ..........................................................Reg. IV.C.1. [p. 117]
Consolation Draw..............................................................................Reg. II.B.5. [p. 79]
Contact Lens..........................................................R 29b. [p. 23]; USCom. 29.6-7 [p. 24]
Continuous Play ........................................................................R 29 [p. 23]; C 39 [p. 50]
Conversation Between Partners .....................................................................C 33 [p. 49]
Correction of Calls
By official...................................Appendix V [p. 32]; FACom. VII.C-10-11 [p. 150]
From out to good...........................................C 12 [p. 47]; FACom. VII.C-7 [p. 150]
FACom. VII.C-10-11 [p. 150]
Second service fault to good.............................................. FACom. VII.C-7 [p. 150]
FACom. VII.C-11 [p. 150]
By players ............................................................................................C 12-14 [p. 47]
Court............................................................................................R 1 [p. 3]; Fig. 1 [p. 41]
Court Layout.......................................................Fig. 1-2 [p. 41-42]; USCom. L.1 [p. 44]
Court Measurements............................................R 1 [p. 3]; Fig. 1 [p. 41]; Fig. 2 [p. 42]
Court Monitor............................................................................FACom. VII.G-2 [p. 156]
Courtesy, court etiquette...................................................................................C 1 [p. 45]
Cramps ........................................FACom. IV.D-4 [p. 128]; FACom. IV.D.10-12 [p. 129]
FACom. III.E-11-13 [p. 112]; Table 11C. [p. 114]; See also Medical condition
Curtis Consolation................................................FACom. II.B-4 [p. 83]; Fig. 6 [p. 85]
Damping device................................................................See Vibration damping device
Default............................................…………….FACom. II.B-9 [p. 89]; Table 8 [p. 104]
Adult Discipline...............................................................................Table 8 [p. 104]
Announcing....................................................................FACom. VII.C-2.23 [p. 143]
Appeal to Referee ...................................Reg. IV.D.8. [p. 121]; Reg. IV.E.4. [p. 130]
Appeal to Tournament Appeals Committee........................Reg. IV.D.20.b. [p. 122]
Reg. IV.E.3. [p. 130]
Consolation play .....................................Reg. II.B.5.c. [p. 84]; Reg. IV.E.6. [p. 131]
Definition............................................................................................Table 8 [p. 104]
Diversity................................................................................................Part 5 [p. 235]
Effect on ranking....................................Reg. VIII.C. [p. 164]; Reg. IX.C.8. [p. 186]
Ineligible player .........................................................................See Disqualification
Lateness.................................................Reg. IV.D.19-20. [p. 122]; Table 14 [p. 124]
INDEX 285

Officials authorized to default ...............Reg. IV.D.6. [p. 121]; Reg. IV.E.1. [p. 130]
Reversal of default for lateness .........................................Reg. IV.D.20.a-b. [p. 122]
Delays Between Serves.........R 23, Case 1 [p. 14]; USCom. 23.2-3 [p. 15]; C 30 [p. 49]
Deputy Referee............Reg. I.C.4. [p. 54]; Reg. II.B.2. [p. 73]; FACom. II.B-1 [p. 73]
Reg. III.B.12. [p. 103]
Deuce.................................................................................................................R 5a. [p. 6]
Deuce Court..................................................................................................... G [p. 271]
Director of Junior Competition.................Reg. IX.A.7. [p. 168]; Reg. IX.A.9.h.ii [p. 176]
Table 17 [p. 178]
Director, tournament.................................................Reg. I.B. [p. 53]; Reg. I.C.3. [p. 54]
Discrimination ........................................................Reg. I.H.5. [p. 69]; Part 5 II. [p. 238]
Disputes, scoring...........USCom. 5.4-6 [p. 7]; C 32 [p. 49]; FACom. VII.A-1.2 [p. 138]
FACom. VII.D-1.4 [p. 151]
Disqualification ...........….Reg. III.B.3. [p. 101]; Table 8 [p. 104]; Reg IV.E.2. [p. 130]
Distracting Server............................................................................................C 34 [p. 49]
District Associations.....................................................................FACom. I.A-3 [p. 53]
Division................................................................ Reg. I.G.2. [p. 60]; Reg. X.B. [p. 192]
Dizziness ........................................................................................See Medical condition
Domicile.....................................................................................FACom. IX.A-6 [p. 176]
Double Bounce..........................................................R 24b. [p. 15]; C 20-21 [pp. 47-48]
Double Fault.................................................................................................R 24a. [p. 15]
Doubles
Double Hit........................R 24f. [p. 15]; USCom. 24.5 [p. 17]; R 26, Case 1 [p. 18]
C 20 [p. 47]
Ball struck alternately by teams ..........................R 15 [p. 10]; USCom. 15.1 [p. 11]
Court..............................................................................................................R 1 [p. 3]
Fault ..........................................................................................................R 19 [p. 13]
Playing without partner ..............................................................R 15, Case 1 [p. 10]
Position of receiver’s partner.......................................................R 26, Case 5 [p. 18]
Position of server ..................................................R 18 [p. 11]; USCom. 18.1 [p. 12]
Receiving order.....................................................R 15 [p. 10]; USCom. 15.2 [p. 11]
Receiving out of order .......................................R 27e. [p. 20]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Service order .........................................................R 14 [p. 10]; USCom. 14.1 [p. 10]
Service out of turn ..................................R 27c-d. [pp. 19-20]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Tiebreak .....................................................................................................R 5b. [p. 6]
Doubt, benefit of .....................USCom. 12.1 [p. 9]; C Preface [p. 45] & C 6, C 8 [p. 46]
Draw
Adjoining Matches ..................................................................FACom. II.C-5 [p. 94]
Balancing the seeds ....................................................................Reg. II.B.4.a. [p. 74]
Byes...................................................................................Reg. II.B.4.c-e. [pp. 75-78]
Changes in ........................................................................................Reg. II.C. [p. 90]
Collegiate, scholastic ..................................Reg. II.B.8. [p. 90]; Reg. XII.A. [p. 201]
Compass........................................................................................Reg. II.B.7. [p. 89]
Computer (TDM).................................................................................Reg. II.B.1. [p. 73]
Consolation ..................................................................................Reg. II.B.5. [p. 79]
Feed-In Championship ...........................................................Reg. II.B.5.b. [p. 81]
First Match Losers Consolation......... FACom. II.B-2 [p. 77]; Reg. II.B.5. [p. 79]
First Round Losers Consolation .............................................................G [p. 272]
Group seeding..............................................Reg. II.A.3. [p. 71]; Reg. II.A.8. [p. 72]
Late entries ....................................................................................Reg. II.C.3. [p. 95]
Layered Consolation.....................................................................……… G [p. 273]
Main Draw.............................................................................................… G [p. 273]
Making..............................................................................................Reg. II.B. [p. 73]
Non-elimination tournaments ..........................................................… G [p. 274]
286 INDEX

Omitted players.............................................................................Reg. II.C.2. [p. 94]
Public .............................................................................................Reg. II.B.1. [p. 73]
Referee makes .........................................Reg. II.B.2. [p. 73]; FACom. II.B-1 [p. 73]
Round Robin................................................................................Reg. II.B.6. [p. 86]
Seeds..........................................................Reg. II.A. [p. 71]; Reg. II.B.4.a-b. [p. 74]
Separating players ...............................Reg. II.B.4.g. [p. 78]; FACom. II.B-3 [p. 79]
Reg. IX.A.9.l. [p. 177]
Single elimination format .........................................................Reg. II.B.3. [p. 74]
Substitutions................................FACom. II.C-1-3 [pp. 91-92]; Reg. II.C.3. [p. 95]
Terminology........................................................................................Table 8 [p. 104]
Withdrawal of players...................................................................Reg. II.C.1. [p. 90]
Draw Sheet Terminology..........................................................................Table 8 [p. 104]
Dress Code.............................................................................................Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]
Drug Education and Testing Program ....Reg. IV.C.2. [p. 117]; FACom. IV.C-1 [p. 118]
Electronic devices...............................................................................USCom.30.1 [p. 25]
Electronic Review Procedure ............................................................Appendix V. [p. 34]
Eligibility ..................................................................Reg. I.G. [p. 60]; Reg. IV.E.2. [130]
Endorsement ............................................................................................ G [p. 272]
USTA National Championships (Juniors) ............................Reg. IX.A.9.g. [p. 175]
Wheelchair....................Reg. I.G.2.c. [p. 61]; Table 5 [p. 64]; FACom. I.G-2 [p. 66]
Emergency Care Guidelines...............................See USTA Emergency Care Guidelines
Ends
Change of ....................................................................................................R 10 [p. 9]
Choice of .......................................................................................................R 9 [p. 8]
Mistakes.............................................................R 27b. [p. 19]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Entries.......................................................................................................Reg. I.H. [p. 67]
Late.................................................................................................Reg. II.C.3. [p. 95]
USTA Junior National Championships .................................Reg. IX.A.9.a. [p. 172]
USTA National Opens......................................................….Reg. IX.A.10.a. [p. 179]
Entry Fee Refund..............................................Reg. I.H.8. [p. 70]; Reg, IX.A.8. [p. 170]
Entry Form.....................................................................Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]; Fig. 3 [p. 68]
Errors
Ball change.........................................................R 27i. [p. 20]; Reg. III.H.1. [p. 116]
Calls...................................................................Appendix V [p. 32]; C 12-13 [p. 47]
No-Ad........................................................................................USCom. 27.10 [p. 22]
Receiving order..................................................R 27e. [p. 20]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Short Sets..................................................................................USCom. 27.11 [p. 22]
Service order...................................................R 27c-d. [p. 19]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Tiebreak ...............R 27 [p. 19]; USCom. 27.2-9 [pp. 21-22]; USCom. 27.12 [p. 23]
Equipment Adjustment .........................................................R 29b. [p. 23]; C 44 [p. 51]
Event..................................................................................................................G [p. 272]
Fact, question of .............................................Appendix V [p. 32]; USCom. V.1 [p. 33]
FACom. VII.C-1 [p. 140]
Family Divisions...........................Reg. I.G.2.b.iv-vi. [p. 61]; Reg. X.A.1.a.iii. [p. 189]
Family National Rankings..................................Reg. X.B.5. [p. 192]; Reg. X.F. [p. 195]
Father-Son National Championship ..........................................Reg. X.A.1.a.iii [p. 189]
Fatigue............................................................................................See Medical condition
Faults..........................................................................................R 18 [p. 11]; R 19 [p. 13]
Ball hitting server’s partner ..................................................................R 19d. [p. 13]
Erroneous ..........................................................................FACom. VII.C-11 [p. 150]
Foot fault......................................R 18 [p. 11]; USCom. 18.1-6 [p. 12]; C 24 [p. 48]
Obvious.....................................................................................................C 28 [p. 48]
INDEX 287

Prompt calls ............................................................USCom. 11.2 [p. 9]; C 18 [p. 47]
Returning without calling..................................................C 15 [p. 47]; C 28 [p. 48]
Serve hitting permanent fixture............................................................R 19c. [p. 13]
Serve hitting singles stick .........................................R 19c. [p. 13] & Case 2 [p. 13]
Server calling ......................................................................C 13 [p. 47]; C 26 [p. 48]
Service after.........................................................................R 20 [p. 13]; C 30 [p. 49]
Swinging, missing toss.........................................................................R 19b. [p. 13]
Feed-In Championship..................................................................Reg. II.B.5.b. [p. 82]
USTA Junior National Championships..................................Reg. IX.A.9.j. [p. 177]
USTA National Opens ....................................................…..Reg. IX.A.10.h. [p. 180]
Feinting............................................................................................................C 34 [p. 49]
Fixture, permanent ........................................................................See Permanent fixture
Following Through Over Net .......................R 24, Case 4 [p. 16]; R 25b. & 25e. [p. 17]
Foot Fault .................................................................R 18 [p. 11]; USCom. 18.1-4 [p. 12]
Baseline ..................................R 18b. [p. 11]; USCom. 18.1 [p. 12] & 18.3-4 [p. 12]
Center line .................................R 18d. [p. 11]; USCom. 18.1 [p. 12] & 18.3 [p. 12]
Premature call of..................................................................FACom. VII.F-4 [p. 156]
Receiver calling.....................................................USCom. 18.6 [p. 13]; C 24 [p. 48]
Sideline.......................................R 18c. [p. 11]; USCom. 18.1 [p. 12] & 18.3 [p. 12]
Walking, running.......R 18a. [p. 11]; USCom. 18.2 [p. 12]; Reg. VII.C.15. [p. 141]
Foreign language outbursts......................................................FACom. IV.D-16 [p. 130]
Gambling ...................................................Reg. IV.C.18. [p. 121]; Reg. VII.G.5. [p. 156]
Game Scoring. .....................................................................................................R 5 [p. 6]
Garman Scheduling System......................Reg. II.D.3.b. [p. 97]; FACom. II.D-1 [p. 99]
Gastrointestinal Problems ................................................................USCom. 29.3 [p. 24]
Glasses ...............................................................................................USCom. 29.7 [p. 24]
Good Return ...........................................R 25 & Cases 1-2 [p. 17]; USCom. 25.3 [p. 18]
Grandfather-Grandson National Championship......................Reg. X.A.1.a.iii. [p. 189]
Grievance...........................................................................................….Reg. V.B. [p. 132]
Group Seeding ..............................................................................................See Seeding
Grunting...............................................................C 36 [p. 49]; FACom. IV.D-15 [p. 130]
Handshake .......................................................................................................C 2 [p. 45]
Hat
Ball hitting..................................................................................USCom. 24.2 [p. 16]
Falling on Court..............................USCom. 24.3 [p. 16]; FACom. VII.C-9 [p. 150]
Touching net ...............................................................................USCom. 24.1 [p. 16]
Health concerns................................................Reg. III.G. [p. 115]; Reg. IX.A.7 [p. 168]
Hindrance.......................................................................................................R 26 [p. 18]
Ball rolling onto court .............................R 23, Case 1 [p. 14]; USCom. 25.1 [p. 18]
FACom. VII.C-8 [p. 150]
By official..............................Appendix V, Case 7 [p. 33]; FACom. VII.C-7 [p. 150]
FACom. VII.C-10-11 [p. 150]; FACom. VII.F-4 [p. 156]
By player........................................................... R 26 [p. 18]; USCom. 26.2-4 [p. 19]
By spectator.............................................USCom. 23.2 [p. 15]; USCom. 26.5 [p. 19]
Cellular phone........................................USCom. 23.2 [p. 15]; USCom. 26.3 [p. 19]
FACom. VII.D-2 [p. 152]
Deliberate..............................................................R 26 [p. 18]; USCom. 26.1 [p. 18]
Discarded second ball ................................................................USCom. 26.4 [p. 19]
Grunting..........................................USCom. 23.2 [p. 15]; FACom. IV.D-15 [p. 130]
Receiver hindered by rebounding ball .....................................USCom. 20.1 [p. 13]
Talking during point ................................................................................C 33 [p. 49]
Illness .............................................................................................See Medical condition
288 INDEX

Inclement Weather..........................................Reg. III.G. [p. 115]; Reg. IX.A.7. [p. 168]
Ineligible Player............................................Reg. III.B.3. [p. 102]; Reg. IV.E.2. [p. 130]
Incomplete Match ....................................................................FACom. III.B-3 [p. 103]
Injections ..............................................Reg. III.E.4.c. [p. 110]; FACom. III.E-2 [p. 110]
Injuries ...........................................................................................See Medical condition
Injury Caused by a Player...............................................................................C 37 [p. 49]
Instantaneous Calls .................................................................................See Prompt calls
Intravenous infusions ..........................Reg. III.E.4.c. [p. 110]; FACom. III.E-2 [p. 110]
Intercollegiate Tennis Association (ITA) Regulations ..............................Part 7 [p. 242]
Interference .................................................................................................See Hindrance
Interruption of Play .................................................R 23 [p. 14]; USCom. 23.1-3 [p. 15]
FACom. VII.C-8 [p. 150]
Intersectionals.........................................................................Reg. IX.A.1.a.iii. [p. 166]
Invasion of Opponent’s Court ...................R 24g. [p. 15] & Case 5 [p. 16]; C 20 [p. 47]
Invitational tournament..............................................................FACom. I.H-3 [p. 70]
ITF circuit ..............................................................................................Reg. I.A.3. [p. 52]
ITF Junior Tournaments ................................................................Reg. IX.A.13. [p. 181]
ITF Rules of Tennis .......................................................................................Part 1 [p. 2]
ITF Tournaments on National Junior Tournament Schedule....Reg. IX.A.1.d. [p. 167]
ITF Wheelchair Tournaments ...............................................................Reg. XIII.A.1.c. [p. 203]
Jumping the net .........................................................................…….R 24, Case 5 [p. 16]
Junior Division.................................................................................Reg. I.G.2.a. [p. 60]
Junior National Tournament Regulations..........................................Reg. IX.A. [p. 166]
Junior National Tournaments and Rankings .....................................Reg. IX.C. [p. 185]
Junior Team Tennis .................................................................See USTA Jr. Team Tennis
Late Call....................................................USCom. 11.2 [p. 9]; Appendix V, Case 3 [p. 33]
C 18 [p. 47]; C 27 [p. 48]
Lateness
Default.........................................................Reg. IV.D.19-20. [p. 122]; Table 14 [p. 124]
Rest period, after................................Table 14.C. [p. 125]; FACom. IV.D-3 [p. 128]
Start of match ............................FACom. IV.D-1 [p. 125]; Reg. IV.D.19-20. [p. 122]
Table 14 [p. 124]
Law, questions of .......Appendix V [p. 32] & Cases 1 & 2 [p. 33]; USCom. V.1 [p. 33]
Reg. III.B.11. [p. 103]; Reg. IV.D.8. [p. 121]
Layered Consolation ......................................................................................G. [p. 273]
Leagues (Adult and Senior)..................................................................See USTA League
Leaving Playing Area
Bleeding Timeout.......................................................................Reg. III.E.6. [p. 111]
During suspended match ..........................................................Reg. III.D.2. [p. 110]
Medical Timeout ........................................................................Reg. III.E.6. [p. 111]
Penalty ..............................................................................................Table 12 [p. 123]
To get official ...................C 40 [p. 50]; Reg. III.E.6. [p. 111]; Reg. IV.C.5. [p. 118]
To get racket...........................................................USCom. 4.2 [p. 6]; R 29b. [p. 23]
To get water...........................................................................FACom. IV.C-2 [p. 118]
Toilet/Change of Attire Break.........................Reg. III.F. [p. 115]; Table 11 [p. 113]
Lets .............................................................................................R 22 [p. 14]; R 23 [p. 14]
After serve put in play..............................................................R 23 & Case 1 [p. 14]
Ball coming on court................................R 23, Case 1 [p. 14]; USCom. 23.3 [p. 15]
C 19 [p. 47]; C 30 [p. 49]; FACom. VII.C-8 [p. 150]
Ball hitting bird in air .................................................................R 26, Case 3 [p. 18]
Broken ball....................................................................R 3 [p. 4]; USCom. 3.1 [p. 5]
Broken string in receiver’s racket ..............................................USCom. 23.2 [p. 15]
INDEX 289

Correcting call from fault to good.............Appendix V, Case 7 [p. 33]; C 12 [p. 47]
FACom. VII.C-7 [p. 150]
Delay between first & second serves..........................................R 23, Case 1 [p. 14]
USCom. 23.1-3 [p. 15]; C 30 [p. 49]
Hindrance, outside ................................................................R 26 & Case 3-4 [p. 18]
Hindrance by official .................................R 26 [p. 18]; Appendix V, Case 7 [p. 33]
Hindrance by player..................................R 26 [p. 18]; USCom. 26.1-4 [pp. 18-19]
Prompt call ...............USCom. 11.2 [p. 9]; Appendix V, Case 3 [p. 33]; C 18 [p. 47]
Receiver hindered by rebounded ball.......................................USCom. 20.1 [p. 13]
USCom. 25.2 [p. 18]
Receiver not ready..............................R 21 [p. 13]; USCom. 21.2-3 [p. 13] & 21.7 [p. 14]
Second service ..........................................................................................R 20 [p. 13]
Service .................................................................................R 22 [p. 14]; C 27 [p. 48]
Soft ball ............................................................R 3, Case 1 [p. 5]; USCom. 3.1 [p. 5]
Spectator interference.............................USCom. 23.2 [p. 15]; USCom. 26.5 [p. 19]
C 17 [p. 47]
Two chance option..............................................................C 18 [p. 47]; C 27 [p. 48]
Who may call .......................................................C 27 [p. 48]; USCom. 23.4. [p. 15]
Lightning .........................................................See Emergency Care Guidelines [p. 230]
Line Umpires...................................................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. VII.F. [p. 153]
FACom. VII.F-1 [pp. 153-155]
Assignment.............................................Reg. VII.B. [p. 139]; Reg. VII.C.3. [p. 140]
Calls line ....................................................................................Reg. VII.F.1. [p. 153]
Certification...................................Reg. VII.N.3.e. [p. 160]; Reg. VII.N.4.a. [p. 160]
Reg. VII.N.4.e. [p. 161]
Code violation ...........................................................................Reg. VII.F.5. [p. 153]
Corrections.................................................................................Reg. VII.F.3. [p. 153]
Foot faults ..................................................................................Reg. VII.F.4. [p. 153]
Procedures and techniques..............................................FACom. VII.F-1-2 [p. 153]
Reassignment .........................................Reg. VII.B. [p. 139]; Reg. VII.C.5. [p. 140]
Removal .................................................Reg. III.B.10. [p. 103]; Reg. VII.B. [p. 139]
Reg. VII.C.5. [p. 140]
Unsighted signal........................................................................Reg. VII.F.2. [p. 153]
Lines Dimensions. ....................................................R 1 [p. 3]; Fig. 1 [p. 41] & 2 [p. 42]
Local Tournaments...........................................................................Reg. X.F.4. [p. 195]
Loss of Physical Condition............................................................See Medical condition
Lucky Loser..................................................................................Reg. II.C.1.a.iv. [p. 91]
Match Format...............................................................Reg. I.E. [p. 57]; Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]
Match Tiebreak............................................ Appendix IV [p. 31]; Reg. I.E.1.b. [p. 58]
Reg. III.G.2. [p. 115]
Medals and prizes .................................................................................Reg. XIV. [p. 210]
Medical Condition .........R 29c. [p. 23]; Reg. III.E.3. [p. 110]; FACom. III.E-3 [p. 111]
Medical Condition—Non-Treatable ......Reg. III.E.4. [p. 110]; FACom. III.E-2 [p. 110]
Medical Timeout......................................Reg. III.E. [p. 110]; FACom. III.E-2 [p. 110]
FACom. III.E-3-16 [pp. 111-112]; Table 11 [p. 113]
Mistakes, clear ...................................................Appendix V [p. 32] & Cases 3-5 [p. 33]
Mistakes, correcting ....................................................R 27 [p. 19]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Appendix V [p. 32] & Cases 3-6 [p. 33]
Mixed Doubles National Championships...............................Reg. X.A.1.b.i-ii. [p. 189]
Monitors .............................................................................................See Court Monitors
Mother-Daughter National Championships .............................Reg. X.A.1.a.iii. [p. 189]
Muscle Pulls, sprains ....................................................................See Medical condition
290 INDEX

National Championship Regulations
Adults .............................................................................................Reg. X.A. [p. 189]
Juniors...........................................................................................Reg. IX.A. [p. 166]
Medals and prizes...........................................................................Reg. XIV. [p. 210]
Sanctioning ...............................................................................Reg. XVII.D. [p. 216]
Seniors ............................................................................................Reg. X.A. [p. 189]
Wheelchair..................................................................................Reg. XIII.A. [p. 203]
National Adult, Senior, and Family Tournament Schedule...........Reg. X.A.1. [p. 189]
Reg. X.A.1.d. [p. 190]
National Championship Selection List...................................Reg. IX.A.9.d. [p. 172]
National Junior Tournament Schedule ...............................Reg. IX.A.1.a-c. [p. 166]
Reg. IX.A.12. [p. 181]
National Ranking Matches ....................Reg X.F.5. [p. 195]; Reg. XIII.B.4.b. [p. 207]
National Ranking Tournaments................Reg. IX.C.3. [p. 185]; Reg. X.F.2. [p. 195]
Reg. X.F.5. [p. 195]; Reg. XIII.B.4.a. [p. 206]
National Standings List.................................................................Reg. IX.A.3. [p. 168]
National Tennis Rating Program (NTRP).....................................Reg. XV.B. [p. 211]
Current NTRP rating (computer rating).....................................................G [p. 271]
Self-rating ....................................................................................................G [p. 276]
National Wheelchair Tournament Schedule..........................Reg. XIII.A.1. [p. 203]
Net
Advertising ...........................................................R 1 [p. 4]; Appendix III.1. [p. 29]
Dimensions ...................................................................................................R 1 [p. 3]
Hitting ball through .................................................................................C 21 [p. 48]
Jumping over...............................................................................R 24, Case 5 [p. 16]
Reaching over ...................................R 24h. [p. 15] & Case 4 [p. 16]; R 25b. [p. 17]
Tautness ..........................................................................................USCom. 1.1 [p. 4]
Touched by racket, player, clothing .............R 24g. [p. 15] & Cases 1-3 [pp. 15-16]
USCom. 24.1 [p. 16]; C 20 [p. 47]
Net Posts .....................................................................................R 1 [p. 3]; Fig. 1 [p. 41]
Area between singles sticks, post...........USCom. 13.1 [p. 10]; R 19, Case 2 [p. 13]
Ball hit around, below top ....................................................................R 25c. [p. 17]
Ball hit between singles sticks, doubles post......................................R 25d. [p. 17]
USCom. 25.3 [p. 18]
Ball other than serve touching ..........................USCom. 13.3 [p. 10]; R 25c. [p. 17]
Serve touching..................................................R 19c. [p. 13] & R 19, Case 2 [p. 13]
Net Strap .............................................................................................................R1 [p. 3]
Net Umpire .......................................................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. VII.E. [p. 152]
Net Umpire Duties ..................................…Reg. VII.C.17. [p. 141]; Reg. VII.E. [p. 152]
FACom. VII.E-1 [p. 152]
Ball change................................................................................Reg. VII.E.3. [p. 152]
Deliberate double-hits.........................................................Reg. VII.C.17.e. [p. 141]
Invasion of opponent’s court ..............................................Reg. VII.C.17.b. [p. 141]
Lets ............................................................................................Reg. VII.E.1. [p. 152]
Net height..................................................................................Reg. VII.E.4. [p. 152]
Not-ups ................................................................................Reg. VII.C.17.d. [p. 141]
Scorecard ...................................................................................Reg. VII.E.5. [p. 152]
Throughs...............................................................................Reg. VII.C.17.f. [p. 141]
Touches.................................................................................Reg. VII.C.17.a. [p. 141]
Volleying ball before passes net..........................................Reg. VII.C.17.c. [p. 141]
No-Ad Scoring.......USCom. 27.10 [p. 22]; Appendix IV [p. 30]; USCom. IV.2. [p. 30]
Reg. I.E.2. [p. 58]; Reg III.G.1. [p. 115]
USTA Junior National Championships, prohibited................Reg. III.G.1. [p. 115]
Reg. IX.A.6. [p. 168]
INDEX 291

USTA Regional Championships, prohibited ...........................Reg. III.G.1. [p. 115]
Reg. IX.A.6. [p. 168]
No Let Rule......................................................................................Appendix IV [p. 31]
Noise Making ................................................USCom. 26.1 [p. 18]; USCom. 26.5 [p. 19]
C 33 [p. 49]; C 36 [p. 49]
Nose Bleeds ....................................................................................See Bleeding Timeout
Not-Up Double Bounce..........................................................R 24b. [p. 15]; C 20 [p. 47]
NTRP..................................................................................................................G [p. 274]
Numeric scoring ..............................................USCom. 5.1 [p. 7]; USCom.IV.2. [p. 30]
Officials Training Evaluation...........Reg. VII.I. [p. 157]; Reg. VII.K.4-7. [pp. 157-158]
FACom. VII.K-1. [p. 158]
Official Certification ...........................................................................Reg. VII.L. [p. 158]
On-Site Alternate.......................................................................................See Alternate
One-Armed Server ..........................................................................................R 16 [p. 11]
Order of Receiving.............................................................................See Receiving order
Order of Serving.....................................................................................See Service order
Out Calls
Advice to partner ..................................................USCom. 26.1 [p. 18]; C 33 [p. 49]
Audible or visible.....................................................................................C 15 [p. 47]
Erroneous ...........................Appendix V [p. 32] & Cases 3 & 5 [p. 33]; C 12 [p. 47]
First serve, calls by server or his partner ................................................C 26 [p. 48]
Overrule..........................................................Appendix V [p. 32] & Cases 3 & 5 [p. 33]
Excessive.............................................................................FACom. IV.D-14 [p. 129]
Prompt ...............................................Appendix V, Cases 3 & 6 [p. 33]; C 18 [p. 47]
Oxygen, supplemental...................................................................Reg. III.E.4.c. [p. 110]
Permanent Fixtures ..............................…..R 2 [p. 4]; USCom.11.1. [p. 9]; R 13 [p. 9]
USCom.13.1-2 [p. 10]; R 24d. [p. 15];
Area between singles sticks, doubles posts............................................... R 2 [p. 4]
Back stops .....................................................................................................R 2 [p. 4]
Ball persons in proper place ........................................................................R 2 [p. 4]
Ball touching ..............................R 13 [p. 9]; USCom. 13.1-3 [p. 10]; R 24d. [p. 15]
Chairs around court .......................................R 2 [p. 4]; FACom. VII.C-12 [p. 150]
Defined..........................................................................................................R 2 [p. 4]
Doubles posts............................................................R 2 [p. 4]; USCom. 13.3 [p. 10]
Net .................................................................................................................R 2 [p. 4]
Net posts........................................................................................................R 2 [p. 4]
Officials in proper place .................................R 2 [p. 4]; FACom. VII.C-12 [p. 150]
Pipe support for net................................USCom. 24.7 [p. 17]; USCom. 25.4 [p. 18]
Side stops......................................................................................................R 2 [p. 4]
Singles sticks .....................................R 2 [p. 4]; USCom.13.1 [p. 10]; R 19c. [p. 13]
Spectator stands............................................................................................R 2 [p. 4]
Phones................................................................................................See Cellular phones
Physical Condition, loss of............................................................See Medical condition
Pipe Support for Net
Ball touching...............................................................................USCom. 25.4 [p. 18]
Player touching..................................................R 24g. [p. 15]; USCom. 24.7 [p. 17]
Placing..................................................................................................Reg. II.A.9. [p. 73]
Player Meeting ......................................................................................Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]
Playing Area ....................C 40 [p. 50]; Reg. III.B.4. [p. 102]; FACom. III.B-1 [p. 103]
Reg. III.E.6. [p. 111]; Reg. IV.C.5. [p. 118]; FACom. IV.C-2 [p. 118]
Table 12 [p. 123]
292 INDEX

Points
Played in good faith ...................................................................................C 2 [p. 45]
Player loses point .....................................................................................R 24 [p. 15]
Replay (See also Let)................................................................................R 23 [p. 14]
Scoring.......................................R 5 [p. 6]; USCom. 5.1 [p. 7]; Appendix IV [p. 30]
USCom. IV.2 [p. 31]
Point Penalty System.......Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. IV.D. [p. 121]; Table 12 [p. 123]
See also Code violations
Appeal to Referee .............................Reg. IV.D.8. [p. 121]; FACom. IV.D-7 [p. 128]
Code violations .................Reg. IV.D. [p. 121]; Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 15 [p. 126]
Default.........................................................................................Reg. IV.D.7. [p. 121]
Default for failure to arrive on time ........................................Reg. IV.D.20. [p. 122]
Delay ...................................................Reg. IV.D.11. [p. 122]; Reg. IV.D.20. [p. 122]
Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 13 [p. 124]
Doubles team ....................................Reg. IV.D.9. [p. 122]; FACom. IV.D-5 [p. 128]
Foreign language outbursts ...............................................FACom. IV.D-16 [p. 130]
Flagrant violations .....................................................................Reg. IV.D.7. [p. 121]
Guidelines for assessing penalties ..................................................Table 15 [p. 126]
Lateness penalties .....................Table 14 [p. 124]; FACom. IV.D-8-9 [pp. 128-129]
Leaving the court ....................................Table 12 [p. 123]; FACom. IV.C-2 [p. 118]
Mandatory in sanctioned events ...............................................Reg. IV.D.1. [p. 121]
Medical Condition .................................Table 11 [p. 113]; FACom. IV.D-4 [p. 128]
FACom. IV.D-6 [p. 128]; FACom. IV.D-10-12 [p. 129]
Officials authorized to penalize .............Reg. IV.D.6. [p. 121]; Reg. IV.E.4. [p. 130]
Other disciplinary action .........................................................Reg. IV.D.17. [p. 122]
Purposes......................................................................................Reg. IV.D.2. [p. 121]
Overrules, excessive...........................................................FACom. IV.D-14 [p. 129]
Treated as if points were played..............................................Reg. IV.D.10. [p. 122]
Time violations.............................................Reg. IV.D.4. [p. 121], Table 13 [p. 124]
Points Per Round ...........................................................................See Ranking System
Post, net ..........................................................................................................See Net post
Postponement of Match by Referee ..............Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. III.B.8. [p. 103]
Reg. III.D.1. [p. 107]
Practice during 10-minute intermission ..........................................Reg. IV.C.6. [p. 118]
Prize Money
Tournaments............................Reg. XVII.C.3. [p. 215]; Reg. XVII.D.4.a-b. [p. 217]
Withholding .............................................Reg. IV.C.1. [p. 117]; Reg. V.A.2. [p. 132]
Pro Set ...................................................................................................Reg. I.E.4. [p. 59]
Professional Circuit.............................................................See Tournament Regulations
Professional Tournaments ............................Reg. I.A.2. [p. 52]; Reg. XVII.A.2. [p. 213]
Reg. XVII.A.12. [p. 214]
Professionals .............Reg. I.G.4. [p. 66]; Reg. IX.A.9.b. [p. 172]; Reg. XVIII. [p. 220]
Prompt Calls...........USCom. 11.2 [p. 9]; Appendix V, Cases 3 & 6 [p. 33]; C 18 [p. 47]
Pulled Muscles..............................................................................See Medical Condition
Qualified Medical Personnel................FACom. III.E-4 [p. 111]; Table 11 B. [p. 113]
Qualifying Tournament or Qualifying Draw..............................................G [p. 275]
Question of fact .........................................................................….See Fact, question of
Question of law .........................................................................….See Law, question of
Questioning Calls ...........................................................................................C 16 [p. 47]
Quick Serving..............................................................USCom. 21.3 [p. 13]; C 29 [p. 48]
QuickStart Tennis Format ...................................Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]; Reg. VI. [p. 134]
Quotas, USTA National Championships (Juniors) ..............Reg. IX.A.9.e.iii. [p. 174]
Reg. IX.A.9.f. [p. 175]
INDEX 293

Racket................................................................................R 4 [p. 5]; Appendix II [p. 29]
Abuse .........................Reg. IV.C.17.c. [p. 120]; Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 15 [p. 126]
Broken ..............................................USCom. 4.2 [p. 6]; R 29b. [p. 23]; C 44 [p. 51]
Broken string.....................................................R4, Case 4 [p. 5]; USCom. 4.2 [p. 6]
USCom. 23.2 [p. 15]; R 29b. [p. 23]
Changing shape during point..........................R 24k. [p. 15]; Appendix II.c. [p. 29]
Clashing in doubles ...............................USCom. 15.1 [p. 11]; USCom. 24.6 [p. 17]
Energy source...........................................................................Appendix II.c. [p. 29]
Flying out of hand ......................................USCom. 22.1 [p. 14]; R 24g. & j. [p. 15]
R 24, Case 1, 2, & 6 [pp. 15-16]
Held in hands ........................................................................................R 24g. [p. 15]
Hitting ground in opponent’s court ...................R 24g. [p. 15]; R 24, Case 6 [p. 16]
Illegal..........................................R 4 [p. 5]; USCom. 4.1 [p. 6]; Appendix II [p. 29]
Leaving playing area to get .............USCom. 4.2 [p. 6]; R 29b. [p. 23]; C 44 [p. 51]
One allowed during point ..............................................................R 4, Case 5 [p. 6]
Passing over the net ................................................................See Reaching over net
Server’s racket hitting net .....................R 24g [p. 15]; R 24, Case 1 & 2 [pp. 15-16]
Spare ..................................................................... USCom. 4.2 [p. 6]; R 29b. [p. 23]
Spin.................................................................................................................See Toss
String pattern .................................R 4 & Cases 1 & 2 [p. 5]; Appendix II.a. [p. 29]
Size ...........................................................................................Appendix II.b. [p. 29]
Throwing at ball .........................................................R 24j. [p. 15] & Case 6 [p. 16]
Touching net............................R 24g. [p. 15] & Cases 1-2 [pp. 15-16]; C 20 [p. 47]
Using more than one during point .................................................R 4, Case 5 [p. 6]
Vibration dampening device .......USCom. 24.4 [p. 17]; Appendix II.a. & c. [p. 29]
Rain Delay......................................................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. III.D.1. [p. 107]
Rankings
Adult, Senior, and Family Rankings..................Reg. X.B. [p.192]; Reg. X.C. [p. 192]
Reg. X.F.-J. [pp. 195-199]; Table 21 [p. 196]; Table 22 [p. 198]
Appeals ........................................................................................Reg. X.H.4. [p. 199]
Calculating Rankings (Adult and Senior)....Reg. X.F.7. [p. 197]; Table 22 [p. 198]
Calculating Rankings (Family).....................Reg. X.F.8. [p. 197]; Table 22 [p. 198]
Committees.....................................................................................Reg. X.H. [p. 198]
Corrections...................................................................................Reg. X.H.4. [p. 199]
Divisions Ranked....................................................................Reg. X.B.2.-4. [p. 192]
Eligibility........................................................................................Reg. X.C. [p. 192]
Minimum Participation Requirements...........................................Table 22 [p. 198]
National Ranking Tournaments ..................Reg. X.F.2. [p.195]; Reg. X.F.6. [p.195]
Points Per Round..........................................Reg. X.F.6. [p.195]; Table 21 [p. 196]
Publishing Rankings.................................Reg. X.H.3. [p. 199]; Reg. X.I.4. [p. 199]
Ranking Period ..........................................................................Reg. VIII.A. [p. 164]
Ranking Review Board ...................................................................Reg. X.I. [p. 199]
Relative Ranking Weights..........................Reg. X.F.6.b. [p. 196]; Table 21 [p. 196]
Treatment of Byes, Withdrawals, Walkover, Disqualifications,
Defaults, and Retirements...................................................Reg. IX.C.6.c. [p. 196]
Adult National Open Rankings .....................Reg. X.B.1. [p. 192]; Reg. X.C. [p. 192]
Reg. X.D. [p. 193]; Table 20 [p. 194]
Categories Ranked.......................................................................Reg. X.B.1. [p. 192]
Corrections...................................................................................Reg. X.D.2. [p. 193]
Eligibility........................................................................................Reg. X.C. [p. 192]
Minimum Participation Requirements...........................................Table 20 [p. 194]
Points Per Round......................................................................Reg. X.D.1. [p. 193]
Ranking Period ...........................................................................Reg. X.D.1. [p. 193]
294 INDEX

Collegiate Rankings.........................................................Reg. XII.C.-D. [pp. 201-202]
District Association Rankings ...................................................Reg. XIII.C.3. [p. 164]
Family National Rankings .....See Ranking Regulations - Adult, Senior, and Family
General Ranking Regulations.................................................Reg. VIII. [pp. 164-165]
Head-to-Head Ranking System.............................................Reg. VIII.C.1. [p. 164]
Junior National Rankings..................................................Reg. IX.C.-F. [pp. 185-188]
Bonus Points .....................................Reg. IX.C.5.ii. [p. 185]; Reg. IX.C.6. [p. 185]
Combined Ranking .................................................................Reg. IX.C.7. [p. 185]
Committees ...................................................................................Reg. IX.D. [p. 187]
Corrections .................................................................................Reg. IX.D.4. [p. 187]
Divisions Ranked.......................................................................Reg. IX.C.1. [p. 185]
Eligibility ....................................................................................Reg. IX.C.2. [p.185]
National Ranking Tournaments .................................................Reg. IX.C.3. [p.185]
Points Per Round..................................Reg. IX.C.5.i. [p.185]; Reg. IX.C.6. [p. 185]
Publishing Rankings.............................Reg. IX.D.3. [p. 187]; Reg. IX.E.4. [p. 188]
Ranking Period ..........................................................................Reg. VIII.A. [p. 164]
Ranking Review Board..................................................................Reg. IX.E. [p.188]
Treatment of Byes, Withdrawals, Walkover, Disqualifications,
Defaults, and Retirements......................................................Reg. IX.C.8. [p. 186]
Points Per Round Ranking System ..................................... Reg. VIII.C.2. [p. 164]
Professional Rankings.........................................................................Reg. XI. [p. 200]
Professional/Adult National Open Rankings...............................Reg. X.B.1. [p. 192]
Reg. X.C. [p. 192]; Reg. X.E. [p. 193]; Table 20 [p. 194]
Categories Ranked.......................................................................Reg. X.B.2. [p. 192]
Corrections...................................................................................Reg. X.E.2. [p. 195]
Eligibility........................................................................................Reg. X.C. [p. 192]
Ranking Period............................................................................Reg. X.E.1. [p. 193]
Sectional Association Rankings................................................Reg. XIII.C.3. [p. 164]
Senior National Rankings ......................................See Ranking Regulations - Adult,
Senior, and Family
Wheelchair National Rankings .........Reg. XII.B.-C. [pp. 206-209]; Table 23 [p. 207]
Table 24 [p. 208]
Committees.................................................................................Reg. XIII.C. [p. 209]
Corrections.............................................................................Reg. XIII.B.10. [p. 209]
Divisions Ranked ....................................................................Reg. XIII.B.1. [p. 206]
Eligibility.................................................................................Reg. XIII.B.2. [p. 206]
Minimum Participation Requirements ....Reg. XIII.b.6. [p. 208]; Table 23 [p. 207]
National Ranking Matches........................Reg. IX.C.4.b. [p.207]; Table 24 [p. 208]
National Ranking Tournaments ................Reg. IX.C.4.a. [p.206]; Table 24 [p. 208]
Publishing Rankings.............................................................Reg. XIII.B.10. [p. 209]
Ranking Period........................................................................Reg. XIII.B.3. [p. 206]
Treatment of Defaults, Withdrawals,
Walkover, and Retirements ...................................................Reg. IX.C.9. [p. 209]
Re-Warm-Up......................................................................................USCom. 29.9 [p. 24]
Reaching Over Net
Before ball passes over net..............................................R 24h. [p. 15]; C 20 [p. 47]
Follow through ...................................................R 24, Case 4 [p. 16]; R 25e. [p. 17]
To hit ball with backspin......................................................................R 25b. [p. 17]
Ready, receiver ......................R 21 [p. 13]; USCom. 21.1-3 [p. 13]; USCom.21.7 [p. 14]
R 22b. [p. 14]; C 29 [p. 48]
Reasonable Pace ...............................................................................See Continuous play
Receiver
Becomes server .........................................................................................R 14 [p. 10]
Calling foot faults .................................................USCom. 18.6 [p. 13]; C 24 [p. 48]
INDEX 295

Calling faults ...........................................................................................C 5-6 [p. 46]
Catches serve that hits net.....................................................................R 22a. [p. 14]
Defined..........................................................................................................R 8 [p. 8]
Hit by serve ........................................R 22a. [p. 14]; R 24i. [p. 15] & Case 7 [p. 16]
Hit by serve that hits net .......................................................................R 22a. [p. 14]
Position ............................................................................................R 8, Case 1 [p. 8]
Play to reasonable pace of server.........................R 21 [p. 13]; USCom. 21.7 [p. 14]
C 29 [p. 48]
Ready .......R 21 [p. 13]; USCom. 21.1-3 [p. 13]; USCom. 21.7 [p. 14]; C 29 [p. 48]
Volleying serve .....................................................R 17 [p. 11]; USCom. 17.1 [p. 11]
Wins point..............................................................................................R 24a. [p. 15]
Receiver’s Partner
Calling faults ............................................................................................C 25 [p. 48]
Catches serve that hits net.................................................................... R 22a. [p. 14]
Hit by serve ........................................ R 22a. [p. 14]; R24i. [p. 15] & Case 7 [p. 16]
Position ....................................................................................... R 26, Case 5 [p. 18]
Receiving Order
Doubles .....................................................................................................R 15 [p. 10]
Error in doubles.................................................R 27e. [p. 20]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Referee .........................................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. I.C.4. [p. 54]; Table 3 [p. 55]
Reg. III.B. [p. 102]; Reg. VII.A. [p. 138]
Appeal to..............Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. III.B.6. [p. 103]; Reg. IV.D.8. [p. 121]
Reg. IV.E.4. [p. 130]
Appoints Deputy Referee...............................................................Reg. I.C.4. [p. 54]
Reg. III.B.12. [p. 103]; FACom. VII.A-2-3 [p. 138]
Assigns, replaces umpires .......................................................Reg. III.B.10. [p. 103]
Authorizes use of special grass court shoes............................Reg. III.B.13. [p. 103]
Ball change pattern .....................................Reg. I.F.3. [p. 60]; Reg. III.B.9. [p. 103]
Bleeding Time-Out ......................................Reg. III.E.2. [p. 110]; Table 11 [p. 113]
Certification ......................................Reg. I.C.4.c-d [p. 57]; Reg. VII.N.1.b. [p. 159]
Reg. VII.N.3.c. [p. 160]; Reg. VII.N.3.g. [p. 160]; Reg. VII.N.4.c. [p. 161]
Reg. VII.N.4.g. [p. 161]; Reg. VII.N.7. [p. 162]; Reg. VII.O. [p. 162]
Changes in the draw ........................................................................Reg. II.C. [p. 90]
Defaults.................................................Reg. III.B.5. [p. 103]; Reg. IV.D.20. [p. 122]
Table 12 [p. 123]; Table 14 [p. 124]
Reg. IV.E.1. & Reg. IV.E.3. [p. 130]
Defaults for lateness.............................Reg. III.B.5. [p. 103]; Reg. IV.D.20. [p. 122]
Table 14 [p. 124]
Deputy ............................................................Reg. I.C.4. [p. 54]; Reg. II.B.2. [p. 73]
FACom. II.B-1 [p. 73]; Reg. III.B.12. [p. 103]; FACom. VII.A-2-3 [p. 138]
Determines who enters playing area ........................................Reg. III.B.4. [p. 102]
Discretion.................................................Reg. I.C.4.b. [p. 57]; Reg. III.B.1. [p. 102]
Disqualifications.....................................Reg. III.B.3. [p. 102]; Reg. IV.E.2. [p. 130]
Draw...............................................................................................Reg. II.B.2. [p. 73]
Field Referee .......................................................................FACom. VII.A-3 [p. 138]
General supervision of all aspects of play ................................Reg. III.B.1. [p. 102]
Infractions in non-umpired matches ........................................Reg. III.B.7. [p. 103]
Medical conditions .........................................Reg. III.E. [p. 110]; Table 11 [p. 113]
Medical Time-Out........................................Reg. III.E.5. [p. 110]; Table 11 [p. 113]
Overrule of on-court officials......................................................Appendix V [p. 32]
Plays in tournament ............................FACom. I.C-2 [p. 57]; FACom. I.G-1 [p. 63]
Reg. III.B.12. [p. 103]
Postpones matches...................................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. III.B.8. [p. 103]
Reg. III.D.1. [p. 107]
296 INDEX

Presence Required..................................Reg. I.C.4.a. [p. 57]; Reg III.B.12. [p. 103]
Procedures...........................................................................FACom. VII.A-1 [p. 138]
Questions of law......................................Appendix V [p. 32] & Cases 1 & 2 [p. 33]
USCom. V.1 [p. 33]; Reg. III.B.11. [p. 103]; Reg. IV.D.8. [p. 121]
Reports violations of tournament regulations ...........................Reg. V.A.3. [p. 132]
Reg. V.B. [p. 132]
Responsibilities ....................................................Reg. I.C.4. [p. 54]; Table 3 [p. 55]
Schedules matches .....................................Reg. II.D. [p. 97]; Reg. III.B.2. [p. 102]
Seeding ..........................................................................................Reg. II.A.1. [p. 71]
Shortens tournament ......................Reg. III.G. [p. 115]; FACom. III.G-1-2 [p. 116]
Substitutions in draw ......................................................................Reg. II.C. [p. 90]
Suspends play.....Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. III.B.8. [p. 103]; Reg. III.D.1. [p. 107]
Tournament Committee member...................................................Reg. I.C.4. [p. 54]
Regional Tournaments.................................................See USTA Regional Tournaments
Replaying of Point ..................................................................................................See Let
Requesting Official .....................................................C 40 [p. 50]; Reg. IV.C.5. [p. 118]
Residence.......................................................................................................See Domicile
Rest period........................................................................................................G [p. 276]
Between matches..........................Reg. III.C.1. [p. 107]; FACom. III.C-1-5 [p. 107]
Table 9 [p. 108]
Between sets .......................R 29d. [p. 24]; Reg. III.C.2. [p. 107]; Table 10 [p. 109]
Lateness after..............................................Reg. IV.D.19. [p. 122]; Table 14 [p. 125]
Minimum and optimum ........….FACom. II.D-3 [p. 101]; FACom. III.C-1 [p. 107]
Table 9 [p. 108]
No-Ad matches.....................................................................FACom. III.C-3 [p. 107]
Practice during.............................................Table 10 [p. 109]; Reg. III.H.5. [p. 116]
Suspended match .......................................................................USCom. 29.9 [p. 24]
Retirement
Definition............................................................................................Table 8 [p. 104]
Effect on ranking...........................Reg. VIII.C.1.c. [p. 164]; Reg. IX.C.8.h. [p. 187]
Reg. X.D.1. [p. 193]; Reg. X.F.6.c.vi [p. 196]; Reg. XIII.B.9. [p. 209]
Injury caused by a player.........................................................................C 37 [p. 49]
Round Robins.............................................................................Reg. II.B.6.d. [p. 87]
Rotation, service.....................................................................................See Service order
Round Robins ...................................Reg. II.B.6. [p. 86]; FACom. II.B-5-9 [pp. 87-89]
Roving Umpire .....................................Reg. VII.D. [p. 151]; FACom. VII.D-1 [p. 151]
Certification...........................................................................Reg. VII.N.3.d. [p. 160]
Safety Concerns..............................................FACom. I.C-1 [p. 54]; Reg. III.G. [p. 115]
Reg. IX.A.6-7 [p. 168]; Reg. X.A.2.h. [p. 191]; Reg. XIII.A.3.h. [p. 205]
See also Emergency Care Guidelines
Sanctioning Tournaments.......................................Reg. I.B. [p. 53]; Reg. XVII. [p. 213]
Scheduling Matches ...............................................................................Reg. II.D. [p. 97]
Adult Divisions ....................................................................................Table 7 [p. 99]
Adult, Senior, and Family National Championships.........................Table 7 [p. 99]
Reg. II.D.12. [p. 100]; Reg. X.A.2.g. [p. 191]
Canceling matches ..........................Reg. III.G.5. [p. 115]; FACom. III.G-1 [p. 116]
Reg. IX.A.12. [p. 181]
Category I Wheelchair National Championships...............................Table 7 [p. 99]
Reg. II.D.12. [p. 100]; Reg. XIII.A.3.g. [p.205]
Changing the schedule ...............................................................Reg. II.D.7. [p. 100]
Conditions affecting the draw......................................................Reg. II.D.2. [p. 97]
District guidelines .................................................................Reg. II.D.12.b. [p. 101]
Estimating match length...............................................................Reg. II.D.3. [p. 97]
INDEX 297

Factors ..........................................................Reg. II.D.1. [p. 97]; Reg. II.D.5. [p. 99]
Family Divisions ..................................................................................Table 7 [p. 99]
Garman System........................................................................Reg. II.D.3.b. [p. 97]
Guidelines...............................................Reg. II.D.3. [p. 97]; Reg. II.D.12. [p. 100]
Table 6 [p. 98]; Table 7 [p. 99]; FACom. II.D-4 [p. 101]
FACom. III.G-2 [p. 116]
Junior Divisions ...Reg. II.D.12.a. [p. 101]; FACom. II.D-4 [p. 101]; Table 6 [p. 98]
Reg. IX.A.12. [p. 181]
Posting the schedule ...................................................................Reg. II.D.7. [p. 100]
Request for special scheduling.....................Reg. I.H.9. [p. 70]; Reg. II.D.4. [p. 99]
Responsibility for obtaining match times ...................................Reg. II.D.6. [p. 99]
Reg. IV.A.3. [p. 117]
Responsibility for scheduling ...............................Table 3 [p. 55]; Reg. II.D. [p. 97]
Reg. III.B.2. [p. 102]
Sectional guidelines ...............................................................Reg. II.D.12.c. [p. 101]
Senior Divisions...................................................................................Table 7 [p. 99]
Shortening tournaments.................Reg. III.G. [p. 115]; FACom. III.G-1-2 [p. 116]
Reg. IX.A.7. [p. 168]; Reg. X.A.2.h. [p. 191]; Reg. XIII.A.3.h. [p. 205]
Suspended matches..............................................................................Table 7 [p. 99]
Time between matches .......................Reg. II.D.10. [p. 100]; FACom. II.D-3 [p. 101]
FACom. III.C-1-5 [p. 107]; Table 9 [p. 108]
Tournaments on National Junior Tournament Schedule...................Table 6 [p. 98]
FACom. II.D-4 [p. 101]; Reg. IX.A.12. [p. 181]
Wheelchair Divisions...........................................................................Table 7 [p. 99]
Scholastic Tournaments.........................................................................Reg. XII. [p. 201]
Score, scoring
10-and-under competitions .......................................................Appendix VI [p. 35]
Advantage Set ............................................................................................R 6a. [p. 8]
Calling ...........................USCom. 5.3 [p. 7]; C 31 [p. 49]; FACom. IV.D-13 [p. 129]
Reg. VII.C.6. [p. 140]
Collegiate & scholastic tournaments ..........................................Reg. XII.B. [p. 201]
Disputes .................................................................USCom. 5.4-6 [p. 7]; C 32 [p. 49]
FACom. VII.A-1.2 [p. 138]; FACom. VII.D-1.4 [p. 151]
Handshake ..................................................................................................C 2 [p. 45]
Game .............................................................................................................R 5 [p. 6]
Match.............................................................................................................R 7 [p. 8]
Match Tiebreak………… ............................................................Appendix IV [p. 31]
No-Ad .....................Appendix IV [p. 30]; Reg. I.E.2. [p. 58]; Reg. III.G.1. [p. 115]
Reg. IX.A.6. [p. 168]
Numeric......................................................USCom. 5.1 [p. 7]; USCom. IV.2 [p. 30]
Recording Tiebreak .....................................................................Reg. I.E.1.d. [p. 58]
Set..................................................................................................................R 6 [p. 8]
Standard game ..............................................................................................R 5 [p. 6]
Tiebreak game .........................................................R 6b. [p. 8]; Reg. I.E.1.a. [p. 57]
Scorecard Marking .........................................Reg. VII.C.8. [p. 140]; Fig. 11-13 [p. 146]
FACom. VII.C-5 [p. 145]
Sectional Association..........................................................See Tournament Regulations
Sectional Endorser....................................................................Reg. IX.A.9.g.i. [p. 175]
Sectional Officials ...........................................................................Reg. VII.N.3. [p. 160]
Sectional Officials Committee............................................................Reg. VII.J. [p. 157]
Sectional Ranking Tournaments
Juniors....................................................Reg. VIII.D. [p. 164]; Reg. IX.C.4. [p. 185]
Wheelchair...............................................................................Reg. XIII.B.5. [p. 208]
298 INDEX

Seed....................................................................................................................G [p. 276]
Withdrawal of.............................................................................Reg. II.C.1.a. [p. 90]
Omitted from draw ....................................................................Reg. II.C.2.b. [p. 95]
USTA Boys’ & Girls’ 18 Interscholastics (East/West) ....................Table 16 [p. 169]
USTA Nationals Championships (juniors) .....................................Table 16 [p. 169]
USTA National Opens (juniors) ......................................................Table 16 [p. 169]
USTA Regional Tournaments ..........................................................Table 16 [p. 169]
Seeding .......................................................................Reg. I.C. [p. 53]; Reg. II.A. [p. 71]
All Factors Method ...........................Reg. II.A.4.a. [p. 71]; FACom. II.A-3 [p. 71]
FACom. II.A-6 [p. 72]
Balancing and positioning.......................Reg. II.B.4. [p. 74]; FAC Example [p. 79]
Reg. II.C. [p. 90]
Block Seeding............................................................................Reg. II.A.10. [p. 73]
Computerized List Method ............Reg. II.A.4.b. [p. 72]; FACom. II.A-6 [p. 72]
Criteria for USTA National Championships (Juniors),
USTA National Opens, USTA Regional Tournaments and
USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastics (East/West) .......Reg. IX.A.4. [p. 168]
Table 16 [p. 169]
Director of Junior Competition .......................................................Table 16 [p. 169]
Errors.......................................................FACom. II.A-4 [p. 72]; Reg. II.C.4. [p. 96]
FACom. II.C-6 [p. 96]; FACom. II.C-7 [p. 97]
Group Seeding .......................................... Reg. II.A.3. [p. 71]; Reg. II.A.8. [p. 72]
Number of seeds.....................................Reg. II.A.2. [p. 71]; FACom. II.A-1 [p. 71]
Placing ...........................................................................................Reg. II.A.9. [p. 73]
Tournament Committee determines ..................Table 2 [p. 54]; Reg. II.A.1. [p. 71]
Self-Rating ........................................................................................................G [p. 276]
Senior Divisions .................................Reg. I.G.2.b.iii. [p. 61]; Reg. X.A.1.a.ii. [p. 189]
Reg. X.B.4. [p. 192]
Senior National Championships ................................................Reg. X.A.1.a.ii. [p. 189]
Senior National Rankings..................................................................Reg. X.B.4. [p. 192]
Serve .................................................................................................................See Service
Server
Becoming receiver ....................................................................................R 14 [p. 10]
Calling score .............................................................USCom. 5.3 [p. 7]; C 31 [p. 49]
Continuous play ..................R 20 [p. 13]; USCom. 21.1-7 [pp. 13-14]; R 29 [p. 23]
Defined..........................................................................................................R 8 [p. 8]
One-armed ................................................................................................R 16 [p. 11]
Out of turn .......................................................................................See Service order
Position in doubles .........................................R 17-18 [p. 11]; USCom. 18.1 [p. 12]
Position in singles .......................... R 17-18 & Case 1 [p. 11]; USCom. 18.1 [p. 12]
Request for third ball ...............................................................................C 23 [p. 48]
Waiting until receiver is ready.............................R 21 [p. 13]; USCom. 21.3 [p. 13]
Warm-up.........................................R 29e. [p. 24]; USCom. 29.9 [p. 24]; C 4 [p. 46]
Server’s Partner, position of...............................................................R 26, Case 5 [p. 18]
Service
After fault..................................................................................................R 20 [p. 13]
Bouncing ball before serving...................................................................C 39 [p. 50]
Catching toss............................................USCom. 18.4 [p. 12]; R 19, Case 1 [p. 13]
Delay between serves ............................................R 20 [p. 13]; R 23, Case 1 [p. 14]
USCom. 23.1-3 [p. 15]; C 30 [p. 49]
Delivery of...........................................................................R 16 [p. 11]; R 17 [p. 11]
Fault ..........................................................................................................R 19 [p. 13]
Foot fault.....R 18 & Cases 1-2 [pp. 11-12]; USCom. 18.1-6 [pp. 12-13]; C 24 [p. 48]
Good..........................................................................................................R 17 [p. 11]
INDEX 299

Hitting net post ......................................................................................R 19c. [p. 13]
Hitting net, strap, or band let................................................................R 22a. [p. 14]
Hitting permanent fixture .....................................................................R 19c. [p. 13]
Hitting receiver or his partner.....................................................R 24, Case 7 [p. 16]
Hitting receiver after hitting net ...........................................................R 22a. [p. 14]
Hitting server’s partner .........................................................................R 19d. [p. 13]
Hitting singles sticks..............................................................R 19c. & Case 2 [p. 13]
Lets ..................................................................................................................See Lets
Missing tossed ball ...............................................................................R 19b. [p. 13]
Out of turn .......................................................................................See Service order
Warm-up .................................................................................................... C 4 [p. 46]
Wheelchair tennis...................................................................................R WC [p. 26]
Wrong court, from..............................................R 27a. [p. 19]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Underhand ..................................................................................USCom. 16.1 [p. 11]
Volleying.....................................................................................USCom. 17.1 [p. 11]
Service Courts....................................................................................................R 1 [p. 3]
Service Let..................................................................................R 22 [p. 14]; C 27 [p. 48]
Service Lines.......................................................R 1 [p. 3]; Fig. 1 [p. 41], Fig. 2 [p. 42]
Service Line Calls ..................................................................C 5 [p. 46]; C 25-26 [p. 48]
Service Order
After set................................................................R 14 [p. 10]; FACom. I.E-1 [p. 59]
After Tiebreak............................................................................................R 5b. [p. 6]
Doubles .............................................R 5b. [p. 6]; R 14 [p. 10]; USCom.14.1 [p. 10]
Error in doubles ........................................R 27c-d. [p. 19-20]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Error in singles......................................... R 27c-d. [p. 19-20]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Error in Tiebreak ...............................................R 27d. [p. 20]; USCom. 27.1 [p. 20]
Singles..................................................................................R 5b. [p. 6]; R 14 [p. 10]
Tiebreak .....................................................................................................R 5b. [p. 6]
Set
Maximum number ...........................................................R 7 [p. 8]; Reg. I.E. [p. 57]
Score ..............................................................................................................R 6 [p. 8]
Set Break .....................................................................................................R 29a. [p. 23]
Shoes ...................................R 29b [p. 23]; Reg. III.B.13. [p. 103]; Reg. IV.C.3. [p. 118]
Short Courts ...............................................Appendix VI [p. 35]; Reg. VI.B.1.a. [p. 134]
FACom. VI.B-2.1 [p. 134]; FACom. XVI.C-1 [p. 212]
Short Sets....................USCom. 27.11 [p. 22]; Appendix IV [p. 31]; Reg. I.E.3. [p. 59]
Shortening Tournaments.......................Reg. III.G. [p. 115]; FACom. III.G-1-2 [p. 115]
Reg. IX.A.7. [p. 168]; Reg. X.A.2.h. [p. 191]
Reg. XIII.A.3.h. [p. 205]
Sidelines
Doubles ..........................................................R 1 [p. 3]; Fig. 1 [p. 41]; Fig. 2 [p. 42]
Singles............................................................R 1 [p. 3]; Fig. 1 [p. 41]; Fig. 2 [p. 42]
Singles Sticks….............................................................R 1 [p. 3]; Reg. III.A.2. [p. 102]
Ball hit around, below...........................................................................R 25c. [p. 17]
Ball hit in area between stick, net post ............USCom. 13.1 [p. 10]; R 25c. [p. 17]
Ball other than service hitting.....................................................R 25, Case 1 [p. 17]
Coming out during point...............................................................USCom. 1.2 [p. 4]
Permanent fixtures .......................................................................................R 2 [p. 4]
Service hitting......................................R 19c. & Case 2 [p. 13]; R 25, Case 1 [p. 17]
Specifications................................................................................................R 1 [p. 3]
Solo Chair Umpire...................................................................FACom. VII.C-4 [p. 145]
Spectator Interference .............USCom. 23.2 [p. 15]; R 26 [p. 18]; USCom. 26.5 [p. 19]
C 17 [p. 47]
Sprains ...........................................................................................See Medical condition
300 INDEX

Stalling .................................................................R 29 [p. 23]; C 39 [p. 50]; C 40 [p. 50]
Standard Game...............................................................................................R 5a. [p. 6]
Standards of Conduct...........................................................................Reg. IV.C. [p. 117]
Standing ............................................................................................................G [p. 277]
String, broken.........................................................R 4, Case 4 [p. 5]; USCom. 4.2 [p. 6]
USCom. 23.2 [p. 15]; R 29b. [p. 23]
Stringing Pattern ..................................R 4 & Cases 1 & 2 [p. 5]; Appendix II.a. [p. 29]
Super Category II USTA National Tournaments ....................Reg. X.A.1.d. [p. 190]
Surface.........................................Appendix I [p. 28]; Table 2 [p. 53]; Reg. III.A.4. [p. 102]
Reg. III.B.2. [p. 102]
Suspension by Sectional Association...................................................Reg. V.C. [p. 132]
Suspension of Play .............................USCom. 29.3-4 [p. 24]; & USCom. 29.6-7 [p. 24]
Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. III.B.8. [p. 103]; Reg. III.D.1. [p. 107]
Reg. VII.C.10. [p. 140]
Suspension Point System (Juniors).......Reg. IX.B. [p. 182]; FACom. IX.B-1 [p. 182]
Table 19 [p. 183]
Take Two............................................................................................................C 8 [p. 46]
Talking .............................................................................................................C 33 [p. 49]
Telephones .........................................................................................See Cellular phones
Temper, losing ...................................................................................................C 1 [p. 45]
Third ball, giving to server .............................................................................C 23 [p. 48]
Through...............................................R 25a. [p. 17]; USCom. 25.3 [p. 18]; C 21 [p. 48]
Reg. VII.C.17. [p. 141]
Throwing Racket to Hit Ball.............................................R 24j. [p. 15] & Case 6 [p. 16]
Tiebreak ...........................................................................R 5b. [p. 6]; Reg. I.E.1. [p. 57]
7-point..................................R 5b [p. 6]; USCom. IV.3 [p. 31]; Reg. I.E.1.a. [p. 57]
10-point...................................................Appendix IV [p. 31]; Reg. I.E.1.b. [p. 58]
Ball change ..............................................................R 3b. [p. 4]; Reg. I.E.1.e. [p. 58]
Changing ends ..........................USCom. 5.7 [p. 7]; R 10 [p. 9]; USCom. 10.1 [p. 9]
FACom. I.E-3 [p. 59]
Coman Tiebreak Procedure........................USCom. 10.2 [p. 9]; Reg. I.E.1.c. [p. 58]
Described....................................................................R 5b. [p. 6]; Reg. I.E.1. [p. 57]
Errors..........................................................R 27 [p. 19]; USCom. 27.1-9 [pp. 20-22]
In lieu of third set.........Appendix IV [p. 31]; Reg. I.E. [p. 57]; Reg. III.G.2. [p. 115]
Mandatory ....................................................................................Reg. I.E.1.a. [p. 57]
Match Tiebreak .......................................USCom. 5.2 [p. 7]; Appendix IV [p. 31]
USCom.IV.3 [p. 31]; USCom. IV.5 [p. 32]; Reg. III.G.2 [p. 115]
Reg. I.E.1.b. [p. 58]; FACom. I.E-1-4 [p. 59]
Recording score............................................................................Reg. I.E.1.d. [p. 58]
Rotation after .............................................................................................R 5b. [p. 6]
Score ........................................................................R 5b. [p. 6]; Reg. I.E.1.d. [p. 58]
Time allotted to change ends ................................USCom. 5.7 [p. 7]; R 29a. [p. 23]
Tiebreak Game ..............................................................................See Tiebreak, 7-point
Tiebreak Set....................................................................................................R 6b. [p. 8]
Time
Between points ..................................................USCom. 21.4 [p. 14]; R 29a. [p. 23]
Between games on odd game changeover other than
after first game of set..........................................................................R 29a. [p. 23]
Between matches................................................................................Table 9 [p. 108]
Between serves .................R 20 [p. 13]; USCom. 20.1 [p. 13]; USCom. 21.5 [p. 14]
Between sets ................................R 29a. [p. 23] & R 29d. [p. 24]; Table 10 [p. 109]
Medical Timeouts ................R 29c. [p. 23]; Reg. III.E.1. [p. 110]; Table 11 [p. 113]
To get clothing or shoes...............R 29b. [p. 23]; USCom. 29.2 [p. 23]; C 44 [p. 51]
INDEX 301

Violations .........................Table 9 [p. 108]; Reg. IV.D.4. [p. 121]; Table 13 [p. 124]
Warm-up.........................R 29e. [p. 24]; USCom. 29.5 [p. 24]; USCom. 29.9 [p. 24]
C 3 [p. 46]; C 4 [p. 46]
Toilet/Change of Attire Break..............................R 29c. [p. 23]; USCom. 29.3 [p. 24]
Reg. III.F. [p. 115]; FACom. III.F-1 & 2 [p. 115]; Table 11 [p. 113]
Toss
Choice of ends, serve ....................................................................R 9 & Case 1 [p. 8]
Match suspended during warm-up.............................................R 9 & Case 1 [p. 8]
When........................................................................................……USCom. 9.1 [p. 9]
Toss, ball.........................................................................................................See Ball toss
Touches
Ball hitting ceiling ............................R 2 [p. 4]; R 13 [p. 9]; Reg. VII.C.16. [p. 141]
Ball hitting permanent fixture ...................................................................R 13 [p. 9]
Ball hitting player ...........R 19d. [p. 13]; R 22a. [p. 14]; R 24i. [p. 15]; C 20 [p. 47]
Reg. VII.C.17.a. [p. 141]
Opponent ..................................................................................................C 20 [p. 47]
Player touching net...............R 24g. [p. 15]; C 20 [p. 47]; Reg. VII.C.17.b. [p. 141]
Player touching pipe support ...........................R 24g. [p. 15]; USCom. 24.7 [p. 17]
Racket touching net ................R 24g. [p. 15] & Cases 1-2 [pp. 15-16]; C 20 [p. 47]
Serve hitting receiver or receiver’s partner ..........................................R 22a. [p. 14]
R 24g. [p. 15] & Case 7 [p. 16]
Serve hitting server’s partner................................................................R 19d. [p. 13]
Tournament Appeals Committee.......................................................Reg. I.D. [p. 57]
Reg. IV.D.20.b-c [pp. 122, 125]; Reg. IV.E.3. [p. 130]
Tournament Area ......................................................................Reg. IV.C.10.b. [p. 119]
Tournament Committee ...........Reg. I.C. [p. 53]; Table 2 [p. 53]; Reg. III.A. [p. 102]
Administrative details.....................................................................Reg. I.C.1 [p. 53]
Appeals............................................................See Tournament Appeals Committee
Chairperson...........................................................................…… Reg. I.C.2. [p. 54]
Determine seeding..............................................Table 2 [p. 54]; Reg. II.A.1. [p. 71]
Determine type of ball ..........................................Reg. I.F.1. [p. 59]; Table 2 [p. 53]
Discretionary power.............................................Reg. I.C.1. [p. 53]; Table 2 [p. 53]
Draw sheet submission.....................................Table 2 [p. 54]; Reg. V.A.1. [p. 132]
Duties....................................................................................................Table 2 [p. 53]
Keep order .......................................................Table 2 [p. 54]; Reg. III.A.1. [p. 102]
Playing In Tournament.............................................................FACom. I.G-1 [p. 63]
Reports on withheld prize money....................Table 2 [p. 54]; Reg. V.A.2. [p. 132]
Sanction ................................................................................................Table 2 [p. 53]
Type of surface ..................................................Table 2 [p. 53]; Reg. III.A.4 [p. 102]
Tournament Data Entry (TDM) ......................................................FACom. I.H-1 [p. 69]
Tournament Director .........................................................................Reg. I.C.3. [p. 54]
Tournament Regulations
Adult, Senior, and Family
National Tournament Regulations ................................................Reg. X.A. [p. 189]
Amateur Circuit..............................................................................Reg. I.A.5. [p. 52]
ATP.............................................................Reg. I.A.3. [p. 52]; FACom. I.A-1 [p. 52]
District Association...................................Reg. I.A.5. [p. 52]; FACom. I.A-2 [p. 52]
ITF.......................FACom. I.A-1 [p. 52]; Reg. I.A.3. [p. 52]; FACom. II.C-3 [p. 92]
Reg. IX.A.1.c. [p. 166]; Reg. IX.A.1.d. [p. 167]; Reg. IX.A.5-7. [p. 168]
Junior National Tournament Regulations ...................................Reg. IX.A. [p. 166]
Professional Circuit ........................................................................Reg. I.A.4. [p. 52]
Sectional Association................................Reg. I.A.5. [p. 52]; FACom. I.A-2 [p. 52]
Wheelchair National Tournament Regulations ........................Reg. XIII.A. [p. 203]
WTA Tour........................................................................................Reg. I.A.3. [p. 52]
302 INDEX

Tournament
Amateur........................Reg. I.G.2.d. [p. 61]; Reg. I.G.4. [p. 66]; Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]
FACom. I.H-2 [p. 70]; Reg. XVII.A.2. [p. 213]
Classification..........................................Reg. I.A.2. [p. 52]; Reg. XVII.A.2. [p. 213]
Closed ...................................................................................….FACom. I.H-4 [p. 70]
Collegiate.........................................................................................Reg. XII. [p. 201]
Definition.....................................................................................................G [p. 278]
Invitational ...........................................................................….FACom. I.H-3 [p. 70]
Open..................Reg. I.A.2. [p. 52]; FACom. I.H-4 [p. 70]; Reg. XVII.A.2. [p. 213]
Professional ............................................Reg. I.A.2. [p. 52]; Reg. XVII.A.2. [p. 213]
Scholastic .........................................................................................Reg. XII. [p. 201]
TennisLink............................................................................….FACom. I.H-1 [p. 69]
Title.......................................................Reg. I.H.2. [p. 67]; Reg. XVII.A.12. [p. 214]
Towels, keeping off net...................................................................................C 45 [p. 51]
Two-Chance Option........................................................................................C 18 [p. 47]
Underhand Serve ..............................................................................USCom. 16.1 [p. 11]
Unmistakable Ace.......................Appendix V, Case 7 [p. 33]; FACom. VII.C-7 [p. 150]
Unplayed Match...............................................................................................G [p. 278]
Unsighted
Call by Chair Umpire.............................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. VII.C.9. [p. 140]
Signal.......................................................Appendix V [p. 32]; Reg. VII.F.2. [p. 153]
Non-officiated matches...............................................................................C 8 [p. 46]
USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 16, 14, and 12 Zone
Team Championships.............................................See USTA Team Championships
USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 16 Intersectional
Team Championships.............................................See USTA Team Championships
USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic Championships (East/West)
...........................................See entry under USTA Junior National Championships
USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 National
Team Championships.............................................See USTA Team Championships
USTA Emergency Care Guidelines.......FACom. I.C-1 [p. 54]; FACom. III.E-1 [p. 110]
Part 4 [p. 230]
USTA international competition (Juniors)
Eligibility..........................................Reg. IX.A.2.a. [p. 167]; Reg. IX.A.13. [p. 181]
Puerto Ricans ...........................................................................Reg. IX.A.13. [p. 181]
U.S. Virgin Islanders................................................................Reg. IX.A.13. [p. 181]
USTA International Tournaments (Juniors) ..........................Reg. IX.A.1.c. [p. 166]
Table 18 [p. 179]; Reg. IX.A.11.b. [p. 181]
USTA Junior National Championships ...................................Reg. IX.A.1.a. [p. 166]
Aliens ...................................................................................Reg. IX.A.2.a.ii. [p. 167]
British Columbians .............................................................Reg. IX.A.2.a.ii. [p. 167]
Eligibility ...................................................................................Reg. IX.A.2. [p. 167]
Entry Fee Refunds ....................................................................Reg. IX.A.8. [p. 170]
Guam .......................................................................................Reg. IX.A.2.b. [p. 167]
Match Formats..................................................................................Table 17 [p. 178]
No-Ad Scoring prohibited.........................................................Reg. IX.A.6. [p. 168]
Puerto Ricans ..........................................................................Reg. IX.A.2.b. [p. 167]
Samoans ..................................................................................Reg. IX.A.2.b. [p. 167]
Scheduling ...............................................................................Reg. IX.A.12. [p. 181]
Seeding.........................................................Reg. IX.A.4. [p. 168]; Table 16 [p. 169]
Shortening..................................................................................Reg. IX.A.7. [p. 168]
USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 18 Interscholastic
Championships (East/West) ...........................................Reg. IX.A.1.a.iv. [p. 166]
Reg. IX.A.11.a. [p. 181]
INDEX 303

USTA National Championships ......Reg. IX.A.1.a.i. [p. 167]; Reg. IX.A.9. [p. 172]
USTA National Opens...................Reg. IX.A.1.a.ii. [p. 167]; Reg. IX.A.10. [p. 179]
USTA Team Championships..............................................Reg. IX.A.1.a.iii. [p. 166]
Reg. IX.A.11.a. & c. [p. 181]
U.S. Virgin Islanders ..............................................................Reg. IX.A.2.b. [p. 167]
USTA Jr. Team Tennis........................................................................Reg. XVI. [p. 212]
USTA League.........................................................................................Reg. XV. [p. 211]
Description ...................................................................................Reg. XV.A. [p. 211]
Eligibility......................................................................................Reg. XV.C. [p. 211]
Rating system ...............................................................................Reg. XV.B. [p. 211]
Regulations, authority to adopt...................................................Reg. XV.D. [p. 211]
USTA Membership ...........................................Reg. I.G.1. [p. 60]; Reg. IV.A.1. [p. 117]
USTA National Championships (Adult, Senior, and Family)............Reg. X.A. [p. 189]
Awards..................................................Reg. XIV.A.2. [p. 210]; Reg. XIV.D. [p. 210]
Category I USTA National Championships ...............Reg. X.A.1.a. & b. [p. 189]
Reg. X.A.2. [p. 190]
Category II USTA National Tournaments..........................Reg. X.A.1.c. [p. 190]
Super Category II USTA National Tournaments..............Reg. X.A.1.d. [p. 190]
USTA National Championships (Juniors) ................................ Reg. IX.A.1.a.i. [p. 166]
Reg. IX.A.9. [p. 172]
Alternates...........................................................................Reg. IX.A.9.e.vii. [p. 174]
Awards..................................................Reg. XIV.A.1. [p. 210]; Reg. XIV.D. [p. 210]
Compass Draw.......................................................................Reg. IX.A.9.j.i. [p. 177]
Doubles .........................................Reg. IX.A.9.g.iii. [p. 176]; Reg. IX.A.9.i [p. 176]
Draw formats.......................................................................Reg. IX.A.9.j.-k. [p. 177]
Eligibility ...................................................................................Reg. IX.A.2. [p. 167]
Endorsement............................Reg. IX.A.9.e.iii. [p. 174]; Reg. IX.A.9.f.-g. [p. 175]
Entry.............................................................Reg. IX.A.9.a. [p. 172]; Fig. 14 [p. 171]
Feed-In Championship........................................................Reg. IX.A.9.j.ii. [p. 177]
Match Formats ..........................................Reg. IX.A.9.o. [p. 177]; Table 17 [p. 178]
National Championship tournaments held. .........................Reg. IX.A.1.a.i. [p. 166]
National Championship Selection List .................................Reg. IX.A.9.d. [p. 172]
Reg. IX.A.9.e.i. [p. 173]
National Standings List .............................................................Reg. IX.A.3. [p. 168]
Quotas ..........................................Reg. IX.A.9.e.iii. [p. 174]; Reg. IX.A.9.f. [p. 175]
Professionals ...............................................................……….Reg. IX.A.9.b. [p. 172]
Scheduling ...............................................................................Reg. IX.A.12. [p. 181]
Seeding.........................................................Reg. IX.A.4. [p. 168]; Table 16 [p. 169]
Selection process (singles) .....................................................Reg. IX.A.9.e. [p. 173]
Selection process (doubles) ....................................................Reg. IX.A.9.i. [p. 176]
Shortening..................................................................................Reg. IX.A.7. [p. 168]
Size...........................................................................................Reg. IX.A.9.c. [p. 172]
USTA National Open qualifiers (doubles)..........................Reg. IX.A.9.e.i. [p. 176]
USTA National Open qualifiers (singles) ..........................Reg. IX.A.9.e.ii. [p. 173]
Wild cards .....................................Reg. IX.A.9.e.v. [p. 174]; Reg. IX.A.9.h. [p. 176]
Withdrawals ......................................................Reg. IX.A.9.e.viii.-ix. [pp. 174-175]
USTA National Championships (Wheelchair) ...........................….Reg. XIII.A. [p. 203]
Awards..................................................Reg. XIV.A.3. [p. 210]; Reg. XIV.D. [p. 210]
Category I USTA Wheelchair National Championships
.......................................................Reg. XIII.A.1.a. [p. 203]; Reg. XIII.A.3. [p. 204]
Category II USTA Wheelchair National Championships ......Reg. XIII.A.1.b. [p. 203]
National Seeding List ................Reg. XIII.A.2. [p. 203]; FACom. XIII.A-1 [p. 203]
USTA National Intersectional Team Events (Adult & Senior)......Reg. X.A.1.c. [p. 190]
Reg. X.C. [p. 192]
304 INDEX

USTA National Opens (Juniors) .........................................…Reg. IX.A.1.a.ii. [p. 166]
Reg. IX.A.10. [p. 179]
Alternates ..............................................................................Reg. IX.A.10.e. [p. 180]
Draw formats............................................................Reg. IX.A.10.h-i. [pp. 180-181]
Eligibility ...................................................................................Reg. IX.A.2. [p. 167]
Entry .............................................Reg. IX.A.10.a. [p. 179]; Reg. IX.A.10.f. [p. 180]
Feed-In Championship ........................................................Reg. IX.A.10.h. [p. 180]
Match Formats .............................................Reg. IX.A.5. [p. 168]; Table 17 [p. 178]
National Standings List ...................Reg. IX.A.3. [p. 168]; Reg. IX.A.10.d. [p. 179]
No-Ad Scoring prohibited.........................................................Reg. IX.A.6. [p. 168]
Scheduling ...............................................................................Reg. IX.A.12. [p. 181]
Selection Process ..................................................................Reg. IX.A.10.d. [p. 179]
Seeding.........................................................Reg. IX.A.4. [p. 168]; Table 16 [p. 169]
Shortening..................................................................................Reg. IX.A.7. [p. 168]
Size.........................................................................................Reg. IX.A.10.c. [p. 179]
USTA Regional Tournaments (Juniors)..................................Reg. IX.A.1.b. [p. 166]
Reg. IX.A.11.a. [p. 181]
Entry Fee Refunds .....................................................................Reg. IX.A.8. [p. 170]
Match Formats .............................................Reg. IX.A.5. [p. 168]; Table 17 [p. 178]
No-Ad Scoring prohibited.........................................................Reg. IX.A.6. [p. 168]
Seeding.........................................................Reg. IX.A.4. [p. 168]; Table 16 [p. 169]
Scheduling ...............................................................................Reg. IX.A.12. [p. 181]
Shortening..................................................................................Reg. IX.A.7. [p. 168]
USTA Team Championships (Juniors)................................Reg. IX.A.1.a.iii. [p. 166]
Reg. IX.A.11.a. [p. 181]
Coaching.................................................................................Reg. IX.A.11.c. [p.181]
Eligibility ..................................................................................Reg. IX.A.2. [p. 167]
Entry Fee Refunds .....................................................................Reg. IX.A.8. [p. 170]
Match Formats .............................................Reg. IX.A.5. [p. 168]; Table 17 [p. 178]
No-Ad Scoring prohibited.........................................................Reg. IX.A.6. [p. 168]
Scheduling ...............................................................................Reg. IX.A.12. [p. 181]
Shortening..................................................................................Reg. IX.A.7. [p. 168]
USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 16, 14, and 12 Zone Team Championships
.........................................................................................Reg. IX.A.1.a.iii. [p. 166]
USTA Boys’ and Girls’ 16 Intersectional Team Championships
.........................................................................................Reg. IX.A.1.a.iii. [p. 166]
USTA Boys’ 18 National Team Championships ...............Reg. IX.A.1.a.iii. [p. 166]
USTA Girls’ 18 National Team Championships ...............Reg. IX.A.1.a.iii. [p. 166]
USTA Zone Team Championships ...........................See USTA Team Championships
Vibration Damping Device ....................................................................R 4, Case 3 [p. 5]
USCom. 24.4 [p. 17]; Appendix II.c. [p. 29]
Volley
Before ball crosses net.....................................................R 24h. [p. 15]; C 20 [p. 47]
Serve.......................................................................................................R 24e. [p. 15]
Standing outside court ................................................................R 24, Case 8 [p. 16]
Vomiting ....................................................................................FACom. III.E-16 [p. 112]
Waiver .................................................................................................Reg. XIX.I. [p. 228]
ITF Rules of Tennis.............................................................FACom. XIX.I-1 [p. 229]
USTA Regulations .......................................................................Reg. XIX.I. [p. 228]
Walkover ..................................................................................................Table 8 [p. 104]
Warm-Up
Coaching prohibited ..................................................................Reg. IV.C.9. [p. 118]
INDEX 305

Code violations during ..............................................................Reg. IV.D.1. [p. 121]
How to.........................................................................................................C 3 [p. 46]
Medical Timeout during ..................................................................Table 11 [p. 113]
Not practice .................................................................................................C 3 [p. 46]
Re-warm-up...........................................USCom. 29.9 [p. 24]; Reg. III.H.4. [p. 116]
Serves ......................................................................................................... C 4 [p. 46]
Time ................................................R 29e. [p. 24]; USCom. 29.5 [p. 24]; C 3 [p. 46]
Water, leaving playing area to get ..............................................FACom. IV.C-2 [p. 118]
Weather..........................................................................................See Inclement weather
Wheelchair Divisions.............................Reg. I.G.2.c. [p. 61]; Reg. XIII.A.1.a. [p. 203]
Wheelchair National Championships................................................See USTA National
Championships (Wheelchair)
Wheelchair National Rankings ........................................................Reg. XIII.B. [p. 206]
Wheelchair National Tournament Regulations...............................Reg. XIII.A. [p. 203]
Wheelchair Rules of Tennis..........................................................................R WC [p. 26]
Wild Cards, USTA National Championships (Juniors)...........Reg. IX.A.9.e.v. [p. 174]
Reg. IX.A.9.h. [p. 176]
Withdrawal from Tournament ..........C 38 [p. 50]; Reg. I.H.8. [p. 70]; Table 8 [p. 104]
Reg. IV.C.12 [p. 119]; Reg. IV.C.15. [p. 119]; FACom. IV.C-3 [p. 120]
Wrong ball played..............................................................................R 25, Case 2 [p. 18]
WTA Tour...............................................................................................Reg. I.A.3. [p. 52]
Zonals............................................................................See USTA Team Championships
306 INDEX

The Official’s Code of Conduct
A USTA official is expected to maintain high professional standards. Violations
of this code may result in decertification or suspension of USTA, directed assignments.
An official shall:
1. Wear the official USTA uniform at USTA sanctioned events, or as otherwise
designated by the USTA.
2. Be prompt for all assignments.
3. Not socialize with or become intimate with the players. (Officials are not
prohibited from staying in the tournament hotel or from attending social
functions where players may be present.)
4. Not accept assignments for any match that may cast doubt upon the official’s
impartiality. Not only is a bona fide conflict of interest prohibited, but the
appearance of a conflict makes the assignment unacceptable.
5. Not solicit specific assignments in tournaments.
6. Not accept an assignment and then withdraw from that assignment in favor
of another unless released.
7. Not be interviewed by the media without permission of the Referee or
the Referee’s designee.
8. Not publicly criticize other officials.
9. Not participate in, including aiding and abetting whether directly or indirectly,
any form of gambling or betting on tennis.
10. Not converse with spectators while on the court.
11. Not request favors or special considerations from a tournament sponsor.
12. Not use title or position to abuse the rules or influence others to do so.
13. Not consume alcoholic beverages or take drugs or medication that will inhibit
performance during an assignment or while in uniform.
14. Cooperate with the efforts of officials committees appointed by the
National Chairperson.
15. While in uniform not take photographs of players nor at any time request
player autographs.
16. Conduct himself or herself in a professional, ethical manner.

FRIEND AT COURT 2010
THE USTA HANDBOOK for TENNIS OFFICIALS,
TOURNAMENT ADMINISTRATORS, and PLAYERS
Addressing just about every possible situation that can arise on
a tennis court, FRIEND at COURT includes:
• THE OFFICIAL 2010 ITF RULES of TENNIS
• THE CODE: THE PLAYERS’ GUIDE for UNOFFICIATED
MATCHES
• USTA TOURNAMENT REGULATIONS
• USTA OFFICIATING REGULATIONS
• THE INTERCOLLEGIATE TENNIS ASSOCIATION RULES,
REGULATIONS, and TOURNAMENT PROCEDURES
70 West Red Oak Lane
White Plains, NY 10604-3602
USTA.com